all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Users Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 3.51 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.33 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual Part 3 | Users Manual | 4.19 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual Part 4 | Users Manual | 3.29 MiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual Part 5 | Users Manual | 3.56 MiB | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report |
1 2 | Users Manual Part 1 | Users Manual | 3.51 MiB |
USG Series USG20-VPN / USG20W-VPN VPN Firewalls Version 4.16 Edition 1, 12/2015 Quick Start Guide Users Guide Default Login Details LAN Port IP Address User Name Password www.zyxel.com https://192.168.1.1 admin 1234 Copyright 2015 ZyXEL Communications Corporation Part I: Users Guide ......................................................................................... 16 Chapter 1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................................18 1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................18 1.1.1 Applications .............................................................................................................................18 1.2 Management Overview .....................................................................................................................20 1.3 Web Configurator ..............................................................................................................................22 1.3.1 Web Configurator Access ........................................................................................................22 1.3.2 Web Configurator Screens Overview ......................................................................................24 1.3.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................28 1.3.4 Tables and Lists .......................................................................................................................33 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard ...................................................................................................................36 2.1 Installation Setup Wizard Screens ...................................................................................................36 2.1.1 Internet Access Setup - WAN Interface ..................................................................................36 2.1.2 Internet Access: Ethernet .......................................................................................................37 2.1.3 Internet Access: PPPoE ..........................................................................................................38 2.1.4 Internet Access: PPTP ...........................................................................................................40 2.1.5 Internet Access Setup - Second WAN Interface ......................................................................41 2.1.6 Internet Access Succeed ........................................................................................................42 2.1.7 Wireless Settings: SSID & Security ........................................................................................42 2.1.8 Internet Access - Device Registration ....................................................................................43 Chapter 3 Hardware, Interfaces and Zones .......................................................................................................44 3.1 Hardware Overview ...........................................................................................................................44 3.1.1 Front Panels ............................................................................................................................44 3.1.2 Rear Panels .............................................................................................................................45 3.1.3 Wall-mounting ..........................................................................................................................46 3.2 Default Zones, Interfaces, and Ports .................................................................................................47 3.3 Stopping the USG ............................................................................................................................48 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards ..........................................................................................................................49 4.1 Quick Setup Overview .......................................................................................................................49 4.2 WAN Interface Quick Setup ..............................................................................................................50 4.2.1 Choose an Ethernet Interface ..................................................................................................50 4.2.2 Select WAN Type .....................................................................................................................51 4.2.3 Configure WAN IP Settings .....................................................................................................51 4.2.4 ISP and WAN and ISP Connection Settings ............................................................................52 4.2.5 Quick Setup Interface Wizard: Summary ................................................................................54 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 2 4.3 VPN Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................................55 4.3.1 Welcome ..................................................................................................................................56 4.3.2 VPN Setup Wizard: Wizard Type .............................................................................................57 4.3.3 VPN Express Wizard - Scenario .............................................................................................57 4.3.4 VPN Express Wizard - Configuration .....................................................................................59 4.3.5 VPN Express Wizard - Summary ...........................................................................................59 4.3.6 VPN Express Wizard - Finish .................................................................................................60 4.3.7 VPN Advanced Wizard - Scenario .........................................................................................61 4.3.8 VPN Advanced Wizard - Phase 1 Settings .............................................................................62 4.3.9 VPN Advanced Wizard - Phase 2 ...........................................................................................64 4.3.10 VPN Advanced Wizard - Summary ......................................................................................65 4.3.11 VPN Advanced Wizard - Finish .............................................................................................65 4.4 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Wizard: Wizard Type ..................................................66 4.4.1 Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard - VPN Settings ...................................................67 4.4.2 Configuration Provisioning VPN Express Wizard - Configuration ..........................................68 4.4.3 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard - Summary .............................69 4.4.4 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard - Finish ...................................70 4.4.5 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard - Scenario ...........................71 4.4.6 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard - Phase 1 Settings ..............72 4.4.7 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard - Phase 2 ............................74 4.4.8 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard - Summary ..........................74 4.4.9 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard- Finish .................................76 4.5 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings Wizard ...................................................................................77 4.5.1 L2TP VPN Settings ..................................................................................................................78 4.5.2 L2TP VPN Settings ..................................................................................................................79 4.5.3 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Setting Wizard - Summary ........................................................80 4.5.4 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Setting Wizard Completed ........................................................81 Chapter 5 Dashboard ...........................................................................................................................................82 5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................82 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................82 5.2 Main Dashboard Screen ...................................................................................................................82 5.2.1 Device Information Screen ......................................................................................................84 5.2.2 System Status Screen .............................................................................................................85 5.2.3 VPN Status Screen ..................................................................................................................86 5.2.4 DHCP Table Screen ................................................................................................................87 5.2.5 Number of Login Users Screen ...............................................................................................88 5.2.6 System Resources Screen ......................................................................................................89 5.2.7 CPU Usage Screen .................................................................................................................90 5.2.8 Memory Usage Screen ............................................................................................................91 5.2.9 Active Session Screen .............................................................................................................92 5.2.10 Extension Slot Screen ...........................................................................................................93 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 3 5.2.11 Interface Status Summary Screen .........................................................................................93 5.2.12 Secured Service Status Screen .............................................................................................94 5.2.13 Content Filter Statistics Screen .............................................................................................95 5.2.14 Top 5 IPv4/IPv6 Security Policy Rules that Blocked Traffic Screen .......................................96 5.2.15 The Latest Alert Logs Screen ................................................................................................96 Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 98 Chapter 6 Monitor...............................................................................................................................................100 6.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................100 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................100 6.2 The Port Statistics Screen ..............................................................................................................101 6.2.1 The Port Statistics Graph Screen .........................................................................................102 6.3 Interface Status Screen ...................................................................................................................103 6.4 The Traffic Statistics Screen ............................................................................................................105 6.5 The Session Monitor Screen ..........................................................................................................108 6.6 IGMP Statistics ................................................................................................................................109 6.7 The DDNS Status Screen ............................................................................................................... 110 6.8 IP/MAC Binding ............................................................................................................................... 111 6.9 The Login Users Screen ................................................................................................................ 111 6.10 Cellular Status Screen ................................................................................................................... 112 6.11 The UPnP Port Status Screen ...................................................................................................... 114 6.12 USB Storage Screen ..................................................................................................................... 115 6.13 Ethernet Neighbor Screen ............................................................................................................ 116 6.14 Wireless ....................................................................................................................................... 117 6.14.1 Wireless AP Information: Radio List .................................................................................... 117 6.14.2 Radio List More Information ................................................................................................ 119 6.14.3 Wireless Station Info ............................................................................................................120 6.14.4 Detected Device .................................................................................................................121 6.15 The IPSec Monitor Screen ............................................................................................................122 6.15.1 Regular Expressions in Searching IPSec SAs ....................................................................123 6.16 The SSL Screen ............................................................................................................................123 6.17 The L2TP over IPSec Session Monitor Screen .............................................................................124 6.18 The Content Filter Screen .............................................................................................................125 6.19 The Anti-Spam Screens ................................................................................................................127 6.19.1 Anti-Spam Report ................................................................................................................127 6.19.2 The Anti-Spam Status Screen .............................................................................................129 6.20 Log Screens ..................................................................................................................................130 6.20.1 View Log ..............................................................................................................................130 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 4 Chapter 7 Licensing ...........................................................................................................................................133 7.1 Registration Overview .....................................................................................................................133 7.1.1 What you Need to Know ........................................................................................................133 7.1.2 Registration Screen ...............................................................................................................134 7.1.3 Service Screen ......................................................................................................................134 Chapter 8 Wireless .............................................................................................................................................136 8.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................136 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................136 8.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................136 8.2 AP Management Screen ................................................................................................................137 8.3 DCS Screen ...................................................................................................................................138 8.4 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................138 8.4.1 Dynamic Channel Selection ..................................................................................................138 Chapter 9 Interfaces...........................................................................................................................................140 9.1 Interface Overview ..........................................................................................................................140 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................140 9.1.2 What You Need to Know ........................................................................................................141 9.1.3 What You Need to Do First ....................................................................................................145 9.2 Port Role Screen .............................................................................................................................145 9.3 Ethernet Summary Screen ..............................................................................................................146 9.3.1 Ethernet Edit .........................................................................................................................148 9.3.2 Object References .................................................................................................................163 9.3.3 Add/Edit DHCPv6 Request/Release Options ........................................................................164 9.3.4 Add/Edit DHCP Extended Options ........................................................................................165 9.4 PPP Interfaces ................................................................................................................................166 9.4.1 PPP Interface Summary ........................................................................................................167 9.4.2 PPP Interface Add or Edit .....................................................................................................168 9.5 Cellular Configuration Screen .........................................................................................................173 9.5.1 Cellular Choose Slot .............................................................................................................176 9.5.2 Add / Edit Cellular Configuration ...........................................................................................176 9.6 Tunnel Interfaces ............................................................................................................................182 9.6.1 Configuring a Tunnel .............................................................................................................184 9.6.2 Tunnel Add or Edit Screen .....................................................................................................185 9.7 VLAN Interfaces .............................................................................................................................188 9.7.1 VLAN Summary Screen ........................................................................................................190 9.7.2 VLAN Add/Edit ......................................................................................................................192 9.8 Bridge Interfaces ............................................................................................................................201 9.8.1 Bridge Summary ....................................................................................................................203 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 5 9.8.2 Bridge Add/Edit .....................................................................................................................204 9.9 Virtual Interfaces ............................................................................................................................213 9.9.1 Virtual Interfaces Add/Edit .....................................................................................................213 9.10 Interface Technical Reference .......................................................................................................215 9.11 Trunk Overview ............................................................................................................................218 9.11.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................218 9.12 The Trunk Summary Screen .........................................................................................................221 9.12.1 Configuring a User-Defined Trunk .......................................................................................222 9.12.2 Configuring the System Default Trunk ................................................................................224 Chapter 10 Routing ..............................................................................................................................................226 10.1 Policy and Static Routes Overview ...............................................................................................226 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................226 10.1.2 What You Need to Know .....................................................................................................227 10.2 Policy Route Screen ......................................................................................................................228 10.2.1 Policy Route Edit Screen .....................................................................................................230 10.3 IP Static Route Screen ..................................................................................................................235 10.3.1 Static Route Add/Edit Screen ..............................................................................................235 10.4 Policy Routing Technical Reference ..............................................................................................237 10.5 Routing Protocols Overview .........................................................................................................238 10.5.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................238 10.6 The RIP Screen .............................................................................................................................238 10.7 The OSPF Screen .........................................................................................................................240 10.7.1 Configuring the OSPF Screen .............................................................................................243 10.7.2 OSPF Area Add/Edit Screen ..............................................................................................244 10.7.3 Virtual Link Add/Edit Screen ...............................................................................................246 10.8 Routing Protocol Technical Reference ..........................................................................................247 Chapter 11 DDNS................................................................................................................................................249 11.1 DDNS Overview ............................................................................................................................249 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................249 11.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................249 11.2 The DDNS Screen .........................................................................................................................250 11.2.1 The Dynamic DNS Add/Edit Screen ....................................................................................251 Chapter 12 NAT.....................................................................................................................................................255 12.1 NAT Overview ...............................................................................................................................255 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................255 12.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................255 12.2 The NAT Screen ............................................................................................................................255 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 6 12.2.1 The NAT Add/Edit Screen ....................................................................................................257 12.3 NAT Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................260 Chapter 13 HTTP Redirect ...................................................................................................................................262 13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................262 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................262 13.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................262 13.2 The HTTP Redirect Screen ...........................................................................................................263 13.2.1 The HTTP Redirect Edit Screen ..........................................................................................264 Chapter 14 ALG ....................................................................................................................................................266 14.1 ALG Overview ...............................................................................................................................266 14.1.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................266 14.1.2 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................269 14.2 The ALG Screen ...........................................................................................................................269 14.3 ALG Technical Reference .............................................................................................................271 Chapter 15 UPnP ..................................................................................................................................................273 15.1 UPnP and NAT-PMP Overview .....................................................................................................273 15.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................273 15.2.1 NAT Traversal ......................................................................................................................273 15.2.2 Cautions with UPnP and NAT-PMP .....................................................................................274 15.3 UPnP Screen ................................................................................................................................274 15.4 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................275 15.4.1 Turning on UPnP in Windows 7 Example ............................................................................275 15.4.2 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example .................................................................................277 15.4.3 Web Configurator Easy Access ...........................................................................................279 Chapter 16 IP/MAC Binding.................................................................................................................................282 16.1 IP/MAC Binding Overview .............................................................................................................282 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................282 16.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................282 16.2 IP/MAC Binding Summary ............................................................................................................283 16.2.1 IP/MAC Binding Edit ............................................................................................................283 16.2.2 Static DHCP Edit .................................................................................................................284 16.3 IP/MAC Binding Exempt List .........................................................................................................285 Chapter 17 Layer 2 Isolation ...............................................................................................................................287 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 7 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................287 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................287 17.2 Layer-2 Isolation General Screen ................................................................................................288 17.3 White List Screen ..........................................................................................................................288 17.3.1 Add/Edit White List Rule .....................................................................................................289 Chapter 18 Inbound Load Balancing..................................................................................................................291 18.1 Inbound Load Balancing Overview ...............................................................................................291 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................291 18.2 The Inbound LB Screen ................................................................................................................292 18.2.1 The Inbound LB Add/Edit Screen ........................................................................................293 18.2.2 The Inbound LB Member Add/Edit Screen ..........................................................................295 Chapter 19 Web Authentication .........................................................................................................................297 19.1 Web Auth Overview ......................................................................................................................297 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................297 19.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................298 19.2 Web Authentication Screen ...........................................................................................................298 19.2.1 Creating Exceptional Services .............................................................................................301 19.2.2 Creating/Editing an Authentication Policy ............................................................................301 19.3 SSO Overview ...............................................................................................................................302 19.4 SSO - USG Configuration .............................................................................................................304 19.4.1 Configuration Overview .......................................................................................................304 19.4.2 Configure the USG to Communicate with SSO ...................................................................304 19.4.3 Enable Web Authentication .................................................................................................305 19.4.4 Create a Security Policy ......................................................................................................306 19.4.5 Configure User Information .................................................................................................307 19.4.6 Configure an Authentication Method ...................................................................................308 19.4.7 Configure Active Directory ...................................................................................................309 19.5 SSO Agent Configuration ..............................................................................................................310 Chapter 20 Security Policy ..................................................................................................................................314 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................314 20.2 One Security .................................................................................................................................314 20.3 What You Can Do in this Chapter .................................................................................................318 20.3.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................318 20.4 The Security Policy Screen ...........................................................................................................320 20.4.1 Configuring the Security Policy Control Screen ...................................................................321 20.4.2 The Security Policy Control Add/Edit Screen ......................................................................324 20.5 The Session Control Screen .........................................................................................................326 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 8 20.5.1 The Session Control Add/Edit Screen .................................................................................328 20.6 Security Policy Example Applications ...........................................................................................329 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN..........................................................................................................................................332 21.1 Virtual Private Networks (VPN) Overview .....................................................................................332 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................334 21.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................335 21.1.3 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................336 21.2 The VPN Connection Screen ........................................................................................................337 21.2.1 The VPN Connection Add/Edit (IKE) Screen .......................................................................338 21.3 The VPN Gateway Screen ............................................................................................................344 21.3.1 The VPN Gateway Add/Edit Screen ....................................................................................346 21.4 VPN Concentrator ........................................................................................................................353 21.4.1 VPN Concentrator Requirements and Suggestions ............................................................353 21.4.2 VPN Concentrator Screen ...................................................................................................354 21.4.3 The VPN Concentrator Add/Edit Screen .............................................................................354 21.5 USG IPSec VPN Client Configuration Provisioning ......................................................................355 21.6 IPSec VPN Background Information .............................................................................................357 Chapter 22 SSL VPN ............................................................................................................................................367 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................367 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................367 22.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................367 22.2 The SSL Access Privilege Screen ................................................................................................368 22.2.1 The SSL Access Privilege Policy Add/Edit Screen .............................................................369 22.3 The SSL Global Setting Screen ....................................................................................................372 22.3.1 How to Upload a Custom Logo ............................................................................................373 22.4 USG SecuExtender .......................................................................................................................374 22.4.1 Example: Configure USG for SecuExtender .......................................................................375 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens.............................................................................................................................378 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................378 23.1.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................378 23.2 Remote SSL User Login ...............................................................................................................379 23.3 The SSL VPN User Screens .........................................................................................................382 23.4 Bookmarking the USG ..................................................................................................................383 23.5 Logging Out of the SSL VPN User Screens ..................................................................................384 23.6 SSL User Application Screen ........................................................................................................384 23.7 SSL User File Sharing ...................................................................................................................385 23.7.1 The Main File Sharing Screen .............................................................................................385 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 9 23.7.2 Opening a File or Folder ......................................................................................................386 23.7.3 Downloading a File ..............................................................................................................387 23.7.4 Saving a File ........................................................................................................................387 23.7.5 Creating a New Folder .........................................................................................................388 23.7.6 Renaming a File or Folder ...................................................................................................388 23.7.7 Deleting a File or Folder ......................................................................................................389 23.7.8 Uploading a File ...................................................................................................................389 Chapter 24 USG SecuExtender (Windows)........................................................................................................391 24.1 The USG SecuExtender Icon ........................................................................................................391 24.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................391 24.3 View Log .......................................................................................................................................392 24.4 Suspend and Resume the Connection .........................................................................................393 24.5 Stop the Connection ......................................................................................................................393 24.6 Uninstalling the USG SecuExtender .............................................................................................393 Chapter 25 L2TP VPN...........................................................................................................................................395 25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................395 25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................395 25.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................395 25.2 L2TP VPN Screen .........................................................................................................................396 25.2.1 Example: L2TP and USG Behind a NAT Router .................................................................398 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) ...................................................................................................400 26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................400 26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................400 26.1.2 What You Need to Know .....................................................................................................400 26.2 The Bandwidth Management Screen ............................................................................................404 26.2.1 The Bandwidth Management Add/Edit Screen ....................................................................406 Chapter 27 Content Filtering ...............................................................................................................................415 27.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................415 27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................415 27.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................415 27.1.3 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................416 27.2 Content Filter Profile Screen .........................................................................................................417 27.3 Content Filter Profile Add or Edit Screen ......................................................................................419 27.3.1 Content Filter Add Profile Category Service ........................................................................420 27.3.2 Content Filter Add Filter Profile Custom Service ................................................................427 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 10 27.4 Content Filter Trusted Web Sites Screen .....................................................................................430 27.5 Content Filter Forbidden Web Sites Screen .................................................................................431 27.6 Content Filter Technical Reference ...............................................................................................432 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam..........................................................................................................................................434 28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................434 28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................434 28.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................434 28.2 Before You Begin ..........................................................................................................................435 28.3 The Anti-Spam Profile Screen .......................................................................................................436 28.3.1 The Anti-Spam Profile Add or Edit Screen ..........................................................................437 28.4 The Mail Scan Screen ...................................................................................................................439 28.5 The Anti-Spam Black List Screen ..................................................................................................441 28.5.1 The Anti-Spam Black or White List Add/Edit Screen ...........................................................443 28.5.2 Regular Expressions in Black or White List Entries .............................................................444 28.6 The Anti-Spam White List Screen .................................................................................................444 28.7 The DNSBL Screen .......................................................................................................................446 28.8 Anti-Spam Technical Reference ....................................................................................................448 Chapter 29 Object.................................................................................................................................................452 29.1 Zones Overview ............................................................................................................................452 29.1.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................452 29.1.2 The Zone Screen .................................................................................................................453 29.2 User/Group Overview ....................................................................................................................454 29.2.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................455 29.2.2 User/Group User Summary Screen .....................................................................................457 29.2.3 User/Group Group Summary Screen ..................................................................................460 29.2.4 User/Group Setting Screen ................................................................................................461 29.2.5 User/Group MAC Address Summary Screen .....................................................................466 29.2.6 User /Group Technical Reference .......................................................................................467 29.3 AP Profile Overview ......................................................................................................................468 29.3.1 Radio Screen .......................................................................................................................469 29.3.2 SSID Screen .......................................................................................................................475 29.4 MON Profile ..................................................................................................................................484 29.4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................484 29.4.2 MON Profile .........................................................................................................................484 29.5 Address Overview .........................................................................................................................487 29.5.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................487 29.5.2 Address Summary Screen ...................................................................................................487 29.6 Service Overview ..........................................................................................................................491 29.6.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................492 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 11 29.6.2 The Service Summary Screen .............................................................................................492 29.6.3 The Service Group Summary Screen .................................................................................494 29.7 Schedule Overview ......................................................................................................................496 29.7.1 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................496 29.7.2 The Schedule Summary Screen ..........................................................................................497 29.7.3 The Schedule Group Screen ...............................................................................................500 29.8 AAA Server Overview .................................................................................................................501 29.8.1 Directory Service (AD/LDAP) ..............................................................................................502 29.8.2 RADIUS Server ...................................................................................................................502 29.8.3 ASAS ...................................................................................................................................502 29.8.4 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................503 29.8.5 Active Directory or LDAP Server Summary .........................................................................504 29.8.6 RADIUS Server Summary ...................................................................................................508 29.9 Auth. Method Overview ...............................................................................................................510 29.9.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................510 29.9.2 Example: Selecting a VPN Authentication Method ..............................................................510 29.9.3 Authentication Method Objects ............................................................................................ 511 29.10 Certificate Overview ...................................................................................................................513 29.10.1 What You Need to Know ....................................................................................................513 29.10.2 Verifying a Certificate .........................................................................................................515 29.10.3 The My Certificates Screen ...............................................................................................516 29.10.4 The Trusted Certificates Screen .......................................................................................523 29.10.5 Certificates Technical Reference .......................................................................................528 29.11 ISP Account Overview ................................................................................................................528 29.11.1 ISP Account Summary .......................................................................................................528 29.12 SSL Application Overview ..........................................................................................................531 29.12.1 What You Need to Know ....................................................................................................531 29.12.2 The SSL Application Screen ..............................................................................................533 Chapter 30 System ...............................................................................................................................................537 30.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................537 30.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................537 30.2 Host Name ....................................................................................................................................538 30.3 USB Storage .................................................................................................................................538 30.4 Date and Time ...............................................................................................................................539 30.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List .....................................................................................542 30.4.2 Time Server Synchronization ...............................................................................................542 30.5 Console Port Speed ......................................................................................................................543 30.6 DNS Overview ...............................................................................................................................544 30.6.1 DNS Server Address Assignment .......................................................................................544 30.6.2 Configuring the DNS Screen ...............................................................................................544 30.6.3 Address Record ..................................................................................................................547 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 12 30.6.4 PTR Record .........................................................................................................................548 30.6.5 Adding an Address/PTR Record .........................................................................................548 30.6.6 CNAME Record ...................................................................................................................548 30.6.7 Adding a CNAME Record ....................................................................................................549 30.6.8 Domain Zone Forwarder .....................................................................................................549 30.6.9 Adding a Domain Zone Forwarder ......................................................................................549 30.6.10 MX Record ........................................................................................................................550 30.6.11 Adding a MX Record ..........................................................................................................551 30.6.12 Security Option Control .....................................................................................................551 30.6.13 Editing a Security Option Control ......................................................................................551 30.6.14 Adding a DNS Service Control Rule ..................................................................................552 30.7 WWW Overview ............................................................................................................................553 30.7.1 Service Access Limitations ..................................................................................................553 30.7.2 System Timeout ...................................................................................................................554 30.7.3 HTTPS .................................................................................................................................554 30.7.4 Configuring WWW Service Control .....................................................................................555 30.7.5 Service Control Rules ..........................................................................................................558 30.7.6 Customizing the WWW Login Page ....................................................................................559 30.7.7 HTTPS Example ..................................................................................................................562 30.8 SSH ............................................................................................................................................569 30.8.1 How SSH Works ..................................................................................................................570 30.8.2 SSH Implementation on the USG ........................................................................................571 30.8.3 Requirements for Using SSH ...............................................................................................571 30.8.4 Configuring SSH ..................................................................................................................571 30.8.5 Secure Telnet Using SSH Examples ...................................................................................572 30.9 Telnet ............................................................................................................................................573 30.9.1 Configuring Telnet ................................................................................................................573 30.10 FTP ............................................................................................................................................575 30.10.1 Configuring FTP ................................................................................................................575 30.11 SNMP .........................................................................................................................................576 30.11.1 SNMPv3 and Security ........................................................................................................577 30.11.2 Supported MIBs .................................................................................................................577 30.11.3 SNMP Traps ......................................................................................................................577 30.11.4 Configuring SNMP .............................................................................................................578 30.12 Authentication Server ..................................................................................................................580 30.12.1 Add/Edit Trusted RADIUS Client ......................................................................................581 30.13 CloudCNM Screen ......................................................................................................................582 30.14 Language Screen ........................................................................................................................585 30.15 IPv6 Screen .................................................................................................................................585 30.16 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Utility ..............................................................................................586 30.16.1 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) System Screen .....................................................................587 Chapter 31 Log and Report .................................................................................................................................589 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 13 31.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................589 31.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter ........................................................................................589 31.2 Email Daily Report ........................................................................................................................589 31.3 Log Setting Screens .....................................................................................................................591 31.3.1 Log Settings .........................................................................................................................592 31.3.2 Edit System Log Settings ...................................................................................................593 31.3.3 Edit Log on USB Storage Setting .......................................................................................596 31.3.4 Edit Remote Server Log Settings .......................................................................................598 31.3.5 Log Category Settings Screen .............................................................................................600 Chapter 32 File Manager......................................................................................................................................604 32.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................604 32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................604 32.1.2 What you Need to Know ......................................................................................................604 32.2 The Configuration File Screen ......................................................................................................606 32.3 The Firmware Package Screen ....................................................................................................610 32.4 The Shell Script Screen ...............................................................................................................612 Chapter 33 Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................................615 33.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................615 33.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................615 33.2 The Diagnostic Screen ..................................................................................................................615 33.2.1 The Diagnostics Files Screen ..............................................................................................616 33.3 The Packet Capture Screen ..........................................................................................................617 33.3.1 The Packet Capture Files Screen ........................................................................................620 33.4 The Core Dump Screen ................................................................................................................620 33.4.1 The Core Dump Files Screen .............................................................................................621 33.5 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................622 33.6 The Network Tool Screen ..............................................................................................................622 33.7 The Wireless Frame Capture Screen ...........................................................................................623 33.7.1 The Wireless Frame Capture Files Screen ........................................................................625 Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore ........................................................................................................................627 34.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................627 34.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................627 34.2 The Routing Status Screen ...........................................................................................................627 34.3 The SNAT Status Screen ..............................................................................................................632 Chapter 35 Shutdown...........................................................................................................................................635 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 14 35.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................635 35.1.1 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................635 35.2 The Shutdown Screen ...................................................................................................................635 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................636 36.1 Resetting the USG ........................................................................................................................644 36.2 Getting More Troubleshooting Help ..............................................................................................645 Appendix A Customer Support ........................................................................................................646 Appendix B Legal Information..........................................................................................................652 Appendix C Product Features..........................................................................................................661 Index ..................................................................................................................................................665 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 15 PART I Users Guide 16 17 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview USG in this Users Guide refers to all USG models in the series. Table 1 USG Models USG20-VPN USG20W-VPN USG20W-VPN has built-in Wi-Fi functionality See Table 12 on page 47 for default port / interface name mapping. See Table 13 on page 48 for default interface / zone mapping. See the products datasheet for detailed information on a specific model. 1.1.1 Applications These are some USG application scenarios. Security Router Security includes a Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) firewall, Content Filtering (CF) and Anti-Spam
(AS). Figure 1 Applications: Security RouterApplications: Security Router USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 18 Chapter 1 Introduction IPv6 Routing The USG supports IPv6 Ethernet, PPP, VLAN, and bridge routing. You may also create IPv6 policy routes and IPv6 objects. The USG can also route IPv6 packets through IPv4 networks using different tunneling methods. Figure 2 Applications: IPv6 Routing VPN Connectivity Set up VPN tunnels with other companies, branch offices, telecommuters, and business travelers to provide secure access to your network. You can also purchase the USG OTPv2 One-Time Password System for strong two-factor authentication for Web Configurator, Web access, SSL VPN, and ZyXEL IPSec VPN client user logins. Figure 3 Applications: VPN Connectivity
*****
OTP PIN SafeWord 2008 Authentication Server File Server Email Server Web-based Application SSL VPN Network Access SSL VPN lets remote users use their web browsers for a very easy-to-use VPN solution. A user just browses to the USGs web address and enters his user name and password to securely connect to the USGs network. Here full tunnel mode creates a virtual connection for a remote user and gives him a private IP address in the same subnet as the local network so he can access network resources in the same way as if he were part of the internal network. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 19 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 4 SSL VPN With Full Tunnel Mode LAN (192.168.1.X) https://
Web Mail File Share Non-Web Web-based Application Application Server User-Aware Access Control Set up security policies to restrict access to sensitive information and shared resources based on the user who is trying to access it. In the following figure user A can access both the Internet and an internal file server. User B has a lower level of access and can only access the Internet. User C is not even logged in, so and cannot access either the Internet or the file server. Figure 5 Applications: User-Aware Access Control A B C Load Balancing Set up multiple connections to the Internet on the same port, or different ports, including cellular interfaces. In either case, you can balance the traffic loads between them. Figure 6 Applications: Multiple WAN Interfaces 1.2 Management Overview You can manage the USG in the following ways. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 20 Chapter 1 Introduction Web Configurator The Web Configurator allows easy USG setup and management using an Internet browser. This Users Guide provides information about the Web Configurator. Figure 7 Managing the USG: Web Configurator Command-Line Interface (CLI) The CLI allows you to use text-based commands to configure the USG. Access it using remote management (for example, SSH or Telnet) or via the physical or Web Configurator console port. See the Command Reference Guide for CLI details. The default settings for the console port are:
Table 2 Console Port Default Settings SETTING Speed Data Bits Parity Stop Bit Flow Control VALUE 115200 bps 8 None 1 Off FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. SNMP The device can be monitored and/or managed by an SNMP manager. See Section 30.11 on page 576. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 21 Chapter 1 Introduction Cloud CNM Use the CloudCNM screen (see Section 30.13 on page 582) to enable and configure management of the USG by a Central Network Management system. 1.3 Web Configurator In order to use the Web Configurator, you must:
Use one of the following web browser versions or later: Internet Explorer 7, Firefox 3.5, Chrome 9.0 Allow pop-up windows (blocked by default in Windows XP Service Pack 2) Enable JavaScripts, Java permissions, and cookies The recommended screen resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels. 1.3.1 Web Configurator Access 1 Make sure your USG hardware is properly connected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 In your browser go to http://192.168.1.1. By default, the USG automatically routes this request to its HTTPS server, and it is recommended to keep this setting. The Login screen appears. 3 4 Type the user name (default: admin) and password (default: 1234). If you have a OTP (One-Time Password) token generate a number and enter it in the One-Time Password field. The number is only good for one login. You must use the token to generate a new number the next time you log in. Click Login. If you logged in using the default user name and password, the Update Admin Info screen appears. Otherwise, the dashboard appears. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 22 Chapter 1 Introduction 5 The Network Risk Warning screen displays any unregistered or disabled security services. Select how often to display the screen and click OK. If you select Never and you later want to bring this screen back, use these commands (note the space before the underscore). Router> enable Router#
Router# configure terminal Router(config)#
Router(config)# service-register _setremind after-10-days after-180-days after-30-days every-time never Router(config)# service-register _setremind every-time Router(config)#
See the Command Line Interface (CLI) Reference Guide (RG) for details on all supported commands. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 23 Chapter 1 Introduction 6 Follow the directions in the Update Admin Info screen. If you change the default password, the Login screen appears after you click Apply. If you click Ignore, the Installation Setup Wizard opens if the USG is using its default configuration; otherwise the dashboard appears. B A C 1.3.2 Web Configurator Screens Overview The Web Configurator screen is divided into these parts (as illustrated on page 24):
A - title bar B - navigation panel C - main window Title Bar Figure 8 Title Bar USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 24 Chapter 1 Introduction The title bar icons in the upper right corner provide the following functions. Table 3 Title Bar: Web Configurator Icons LABEL Logout Help About Site Map Object Reference Click this to check which configuration items reference an object. Console DESCRIPTION Click this to log out of the Web Configurator. Click this to open the help page for the current screen. Click this to display basic information about the USG. Click this to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. CLI Click this to open a Java-based console window from which you can run command line interface (CLI) commands. You will be prompted to enter your user name and password. See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands. Click this to open a popup window that displays the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator to the USG. About Click About to display basic information about the USG. Figure 9 About Table 4 About LABEL Current Version Released Date OK Site Map DESCRIPTION This shows the firmware version of the USG. This shows the date (yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh:mm:ss) when the firmware is released. Click this to close the screen. Click Site MAP to see an overview of links to the Web Configurator screens. Click a screens link to go to that screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 25 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 10 Site Map Object Reference Click Object Reference to open the Object Reference screen. Select the type of object and the individual object and click Refresh to show which configuration settings reference the object. Figure 11 Object Reference The fields vary with the type of object. This table describes labels that can appear in this screen. Table 5 Object References LABEL DESCRIPTION Object Name This identifies the object for which the configuration settings that use it are displayed. Click the
#
Service objects name to display the objects configuration screen in the main window. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the type of setting that references the selected object. Click a services name to display the services configuration screen in the main window. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 26 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 5 Object References (continued) LABEL Priority DESCRIPTION If it is applicable, this field lists the referencing configuration items position in its list, otherwise N/A displays. This field identifies the configuration item that references the object. If the referencing configuration item has a description configured, it displays here. Click this to update the information in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen. Name Description Refresh Cancel Console Click Console to open a Java-based console window from which you can run CLI commands. You will be prompted to enter your user name and password. See the Command Reference Guide for information about the commands. Figure 12 Console Window CLI Messages Click CLI to look at the CLI commands sent by the Web Configurator. Open the pop-up window and then click some menus in the web configurator to display the corresponding commands. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 27 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 13 CLI Messages 1.3.3 Navigation Panel Use the navigation panel menu items to open status and configuration screens. Click the arrow in the middle of the right edge of the navigation panel to hide the panel or drag to resize it. The following sections introduce the USGs navigation panel menus and their screens. Figure 14 Navigation Panel Dashboard The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, licensed service status, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. See the Web Help for details on the dashboard. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 28 Chapter 1 Introduction Monitor Menu The monitor menu screens display status and statistics information. Table 6 Monitor Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK TAB FUNCTION System Status Displays packet statistics for each physical port. Displays general interface information and packet statistics. Collect and display traffic statistics. Displays the status of all current sessions. Collect and display IGMP statistics. Displays the status of the USGs DDNS domain names. Lists the devices that have received an IP address from USG interfaces using IP/MAC binding. Lists the users currently logged into the USG. Displays details about the USGs mobile broadband connection status. Displays details about UPnP connections going through the USG. Displays details about USB device connected to the USG. View and manage the USGs neighboring devices via Smart Connect
(Layer Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP)). Use the ZyXEL One Network
(ZON) utility to view and manage the USGs neighboring devices via the ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP). Edit wireless AP information, remove APs, and reboot them. Configure dynamic wireless channel selection. Displays and manages the active IPSec SAs. Lists users currently logged into the VPN SSL client portal. You can also log out individual users and delete related session information. Displays details about current L2TP sessions. Port Statistics Interface Status Traffic Statistics Session Monitor IGMP Statistics DDNS Status Port Statistics Interface Summary Traffic Statistics Session Monitor IGMP Statistics DDNS Status Login Users Cellular Status IP/MAC Binding IP/MAC Binding Login Users Cellular Status Port Statistics Storage Information Ethernet Neighbor UPnP Port Status Ethernet Neighbor USB Storage Wireless AP Information WLAN Setting DCS VPN Monitor IPSec SSL L2TP over IPSec UTM Statistics Content Filter Anti-Spam Log IPSec SSL Session Monitor Report Report Status Collect and display content filter statistics Collect and display spam statistics. Displays how many mail sessions the USG is currently checking and DNSBL (Domain Name Service-based spam Black List) statistics. Lists log entries. View Log View AP Log Lists AP log entries. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 29 Chapter 1 Introduction Configuration Menu Use the configuration menu screens to configure the USGs features. Table 7 Configuration Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK TAB Quick Setup Licensing FUNCTION Quickly configure WAN interfaces or VPN connections. Registration Registration Service Register the device and activate trial services. View the licensed service status and upgrade licensed services. Wireless AP Management DCS Network WLAN Setting Configuration the USGs general wireless settings. Configure dynamic wireless channel selection. Interface Port Role Ethernet PPP Cellular Tunnel VLAN Bridge Trunk Policy Route Static Route RIP OSPF DDNS NAT HTTP Redirect ALG UPnP Summary Exempt List Use this screen to set the USGs flexible ports such as LAN, OPT, WLAN, or DMZ. Manage Ethernet interfaces and virtual Ethernet interfaces. Create and manage PPPoE and PPTP interfaces. Configure a cellular Internet connection for an installed mobile broadband card. Configure tunneling between IPv4 and IPv6 networks. Create and manage VLAN interfaces and virtual VLAN interfaces. Create and manage bridges and virtual bridge interfaces. Create and manage trunks (groups of interfaces) for load balancing. Create and manage routing policies. Create and manage IP static routing information. Configure device-level RIP settings. Configure device-level OSPF settings, including areas and virtual links. Define and manage the USGs DDNS domain names. Set up and manage port forwarding rules. Set up and manage HTTP redirection rules. Configure SIP, H.323, and FTP pass-through settings. Configure interfaces that allow UPnP and NAT-PMP connections. Configure IP to MAC address bindings for devices connected to each supported interface. Configure ranges of IP addresses to which the USG does not apply IP/MAC binding. Enable layer-2 isolation on the USG and the internal interface(s). Enable and configure the white list. Configure DNS Load Balancing. General White List DNS Load Balancing Web Authentication Define a web portal and exempt services from authentication. SSO Configure the USG to work with a Single Sign On agent. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 30 Routing DDNS NAT HTTP Redirect ALG UPnP IP/MAC Binding Layer 2 Isolation DNS Inbound LB Web Authentication Security Policy Chapter 1 Introduction Table 7 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued) FOLDER OR LINK TAB Policy Session Control FUNCTION Create and manage level-3 traffic rules and apply UTM profiles. Limit the number of concurrent client NAT/security policy sessions. Policy Control Session Control VPN IPSec VPN SSL VPN L2TP VPN BWM UTM Profile VPN Connection VPN Gateway Concentrator Configuration Provisioning Access Privilege Global Setting SecuExtender L2TP VPN BWM Configure IPSec tunnels. Configure IKE tunnels. Combine IPSec VPN connections into a single secure network Set who can retrieve VPN rule settings from the USG using the USG IPSec VPN Client. Configure SSL VPN access rights for users and groups. Configure the USGs SSL VPN settings that apply to all connections. Check for the latest version of the SecuExtender VPN client. Configure L2TP over IPSec tunnels. Enable and configure bandwidth management rules. Content Filter Profile Anti-Spam Object Zone User/Group Trusted Web Sites Forbidden Web Sites Profile Mail Scan Black/White List DNSBL Zone User Group Setting MAC Address AP Profile Radio SSID MON Profile MON Profile Address Address Address Group Create and manage the detailed filtering rules for content filtering profiles and then apply to a traffic flow using a security policy. Create a list of allowed web sites that bypass content filtering policies. Create a list of web sites to block regardless of content filtering policies. Turn anti-spam on or off and manage anti-spam policies. Create anti-spam template(s) of settings to apply to a traffic flow using a security policy. Configure e-mail scanning details. Set up a black list to identify spam and a white list to identify legitimate e-mail. Have the USG check e-mail against DNS Black Lists. Configure zone template(s) used to define various policies. Create and manage users. Create and manage groups of users. Manage default settings for all users, general settings for user sessions, and rules to force user authentication. Configure the MAC addresses or OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) of wireless clients for MAC authentication using the local user database. Create template(s) of radio settings to apply to policies as an object. Create template(s) of wireless settings to apply to radio profiles or policies as an object. Create and manage rogue AP monitoring files that can be associated with different APs. Create and manage host, range, and network (subnet) addresses. Create and manage groups of addresseto apply to policies as a single objects. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 31 Chapter 1 Introduction Table 7 Configuration Menu Screens Summary (continued) FOLDER OR LINK TAB Service Schedule AAA Server Auth. Method Certificate ISP Account Service Service Group Schedule Schedule Group Active Directory LDAP RADIUS Authentication Method My Certificates Trusted Certificates ISP Account SSL Application SSL Application DHCPv6 System Request Lease Host Name Settings Date/Time Host Name USB Storage Date/Time Console Speed Console Speed DNS WWW DNS Service Control Login Page SSH TELNET FTP SNMP Auth. Server CloudCNM Language IPv6 ZON SSH TELNET FTP SNMP Auth. Server CloudCNM Language IPv6 ZON FUNCTION Create and manage TCP and UDP services. Create and manage groups of services to apply to policies as a single object. Create one-time and recurring schedules. Create and manage groups of schedules to apply to policies as a single object. Configure the Active Directory settings. Configure the LDAP settings. Configure the RADIUS settings. Create and manage ways of authenticating users. Create and manage the USGs certificates. Import and manage certificates from trusted sources. Create and manage ISP account information for PPPoE/PPTP interfaces. Create SSL web application or file sharing objects to apply to policies. Configure IPv6 DHCP request type and interface information. Configure IPv6 DHCP lease type and interface information. Configure the system and domain name for the USG. Configure the settings for the connected USB devices. Configure the current date, time, and time zone in the USG. Set the console speed. Configure the DNS server and address records for the USG. Configure HTTP, HTTPS, and general authentication. Configure how the login and access user screens look. Configure SSH server and SSH service settings. Configure telnet server settings for the USG. Configure FTP server settings. Configure SNMP communities and services. Configure the USG to act as a RADIUS server. Enable and configure management of the USG by a Central Network Management system. Select the Web Configurator language. Enable IPv6 globally on the USG here. Use the ZyXEL One Network (ZON) utility to view and manage the USGs neighboring devices via the ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP). Log & Report Email Daily Report Email Daily Report Log Settings Log Settings Configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to send. Configure the system log, e-mail logs, and remote syslog servers. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 32 Chapter 1 Introduction Maintenance Menu Use the maintenance menu screens to manage configuration and firmware files, run diagnostics, and reboot or shut down the USG. Table 8 Maintenance Menu Screens Summary FOLDER OR LINK File Manager FUNCTION TAB Configuration File Manage and upload configuration files for the USG. Firmware Package View the current firmware version and upload firmware. Reboot with your Shell Script Diagnostics Diagnostic Packet Capture Core Dump System Log Network Tool Wireless Frame Capture Routing Status SNAT Status Packet Flow Explore Shutdown Shutdown 1.3.4 Tables and Lists choice of firmware. Manage and run shell script files for the USG. Collect diagnostic information. Capture packets for analysis. Connect a USB device to the USG and save the USG operating system kernel to it here. Connect a USB device to the USG and archive the USG system logs to it here. Identify problems with the connections. You can use Ping or TraceRoute to help you identify problems. Capture wireless frames from APs for analysis. Check how the USG determines where to route a packet. View a clear picture on how the USG converts a packets source IP address and check the related settings. Turn off the USG. Web Configurator tables and lists are flexible with several options for how to display their entries. Click a column heading to sort the tables entries according to that columns criteria. Figure 15 Sorting Table Entries by a Columns Criteria Click the down arrow next to a column heading for more options about how to display the entries. The options available vary depending on the type of fields in the column. Here are some examples of what you can do:
Sort in ascending or descending (reverse) alphabetical order Select which columns to display Group entries by field Show entries in groups Filter by mathematical operators (<, >, or =) or searching for text USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 33 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 16 Common Table Column Options Select a column heading cells right border and drag to re-size the column. Figure 17 Resizing a Table Column Select a column heading and drag and drop it to change the column order. A green check mark displays next to the columns title when you drag the column to a valid new location. Figure 18 Moving Columns Use the icons and fields at the bottom of the table to navigate to different pages of entries and control how many entries display at a time. Figure 19 Navigating Pages of Table Entries The tables have icons for working with table entries. You can often use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries to remove, activate, or deactivate. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 34 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 20 Common Table Icons Here are descriptions for the most common table icons. Table 9 Common Table Icons LABEL Add Edit Remove DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. For features where the entrys position in the numbered list is important (features where the USG applies the tables entries in order like the security policy for example), you can select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To connect an entry, select it and click Connect. Activate Inactivate Connect Disconnect To disconnect an entry, select it and click Disconnect. Object References Move Select an entry and click Object References to check which settings use the entry. To change an entrys position in a numbered list, select it and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that entry and press [ENTER] to move the entry to the number that you typed. For example, if you type 6, the entry you are moving becomes number 6 and the previous entry 6 (if there is one) gets pushed up (or down) one. Working with Lists When a list of available entries displays next to a list of selected entries, you can often just double-
click an entry to move it from one list to the other. In some lists you can also use the [Shift] or
[Ctrl] key to select multiple entries, and then use the arrow button to move them to the other list. Figure 21 Working with Lists USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 35 CHAPTER 2 Installation Setup Wizard 2.1 Installation Setup Wizard Screens When you log into the Web Configurator for the first time or when you reset the USG to its default configuration, the Installation Setup Wizard screen displays. This wizard helps you configure Internet connection settings and activate subscription services. This chapter provides information on configuring the Web Configurator's installation setup wizard. See the feature-specific chapters in this Users Guide for background information. Figure 22 Installation Setup Wizard Click the double arrow in the upper right corner to display or hide the help. Click Go to Dashboard to skip the installation setup wizard or click Next to start configuring for Internet access. 2.1.1 Internet Access Setup - WAN Interface Use this screen to set how many WAN interfaces to configure and the first WAN interfaces type of encapsulation and method of IP address assignment. The screens vary depending on the encapsulation type. Refer to information provided by your ISP to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you dont have that information. Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as your ISP gave it to you. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 36 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard Figure 23 Internet Access: Step 1 I have two ISPs: Select this option to configure two Internet connections. Leave it cleared to configure just one. This option appears when you are configuring the first WAN interface. Encapsulation: Choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Otherwise, choose PPPoE or PPTP for a dial-up connection according to the information from your ISP. WAN Interface: This is the interface you are configuring for Internet access. Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection belong. IP Address Assignment: Select Auto if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select Static if the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. 2.1.2 Internet Access: Ethernet This screen is read-only if you set the previous screens IP Address Assignment field to Auto. If you set the previous screens IP Address Assignment field to Static, use this screen to configure your IP address settings. Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as given to you by your ISP or network administrator. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 37 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard Figure 24 Internet Access: Ethernet Encapsulation Encapsulation: This displays the type of Internet connection you are configuring. First WAN Interface: This is the number of the interface that will connect with your ISP. Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection will belong. IP Address: Enter your (static) public IP address. Auto displays if you selected Auto as the IP Address Assignment in the previous screen. The following fields display if you selected static IP address assignment. IP Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask for this WAN connection's IP address. Gateway IP Address: Enter the IP address of the router through which this WAN connection will send traffic (the default gateway). First / Second DNS Server: These fields display if you selected static IP address assignment. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. Enter a DNS server's IP address(es). The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The USG uses these (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for VPN, DDNS and the time server. Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. 2.1.3 Internet Access: PPPoE Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as given to you by your ISP. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 38 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard Figure 25 Internet Access: PPPoE Encapsulation 2.1.3.1 ISP Parameters Type the PPPoE Service Name from your service provider. PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server. You can use alphanumeric and -_@$./ characters, and it can be up to 64 characters long. Authentication Type - Select an authentication protocol for outgoing connection requests. Options are:
CHAP/PAP - Your USG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by the remote node. CHAP - Your USG accepts CHAP only. PAP - Your USG accepts PAP only. MSCHAP - Your USG accepts MSCHAP only. MSCHAP-V2 - Your USG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only. Type the User Name given to you by your ISP. You can use alphanumeric and -_@$./ characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long. Type the Password associated with the user name. Use up to 64 ASCII characters except the []
and ?. This field can be blank. Select Nailed-Up if you do not want the connection to time out. Otherwise, type the Idle Timeout in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. 2.1.3.2 WAN IP Address Assignments WAN Interface: This is the name of the interface that will connect with your ISP. Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection will belong. IP Address: Enter your (static) public IP address. Auto displays if you selected Auto as the IP Address Assignment in the previous screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 39 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard First / Second DNS Server: These fields display if you selected static IP address assignment. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. Enter a DNS server's IP address(es). The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The USG uses these (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for VPN, DDNS and the time server. Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it. 2.1.4 Internet Access: PPTP Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as given to you by your ISP. Figure 26 Internet Access: PPTP Encapsulation 2.1.4.1 ISP Parameters Authentication Type - Select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:
CHAP/PAP - Your USG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by the remote node. CHAP - Your USG accepts CHAP only. PAP - Your USG accepts PAP only. MSCHAP - Your USG accepts MSCHAP only. MSCHAP-V2 - Your USG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only. Type the User Name given to you by your ISP. You can use alphanumeric and -_@$./ characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long. Type the Password associated with the user name. Use up to 64 ASCII characters except the []
and ?. This field can be blank. Re-type your password in the next field to confirm it. Select Nailed-Up if you do not want the connection to time out. Otherwise, type the Idle Timeout in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPTP server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 40 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard 2.1.4.2 PPTP Configuration Base Interface: This identifies the Ethernet interface you configure to connect with a modem or router. Type a Base IP Address (static) assigned to you by your ISP. Type the IP Subnet Mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Server IP: Type the IP address of the PPTP server. Type a Connection ID or connection name. It must follow the c:id and n:name format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP. This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your broadband modem or router. You can use alphanumeric and -_: characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long. 2.1.4.3 WAN IP Address Assignments First WAN Interface: This is the connection type on the interface you are configuring to connect with your ISP. Zone This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection will belong. IP Address: Enter your (static) public IP address. Auto displays if you selected Auto as the IP Address Assignment in the previous screen. First / Second DNS Server: These fields display if you selected static IP address assignment. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. Enter a DNS server's IP address(es). The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The USG uses these (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for VPN, DDNS and the time server. Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. 2.1.5 Internet Access Setup - Second WAN Interface If you selected I have two ISPs, after you configure the First WAN Interface, you can configure the Second WAN Interface. The screens for configuring the second WAN interface are similar to the first (see Section 2.1.1 on page 36). Figure 27 Internet Access: Step 3: Second WAN Interface USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 41 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard 2.1.6 Internet Access Succeed This screen shows your Internet access settings that have been applied successfully. Figure 28 Internet Access Succeed 2.1.7 Wireless Settings: SSID & Security Configure SSID and wireless security in this screen. Figure 29 Wireless Settings: SSID & Security USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 42 Chapter 2 Installation Setup Wizard SSID Setting SSID - Enter a descriptive name of up to 32 printable characters for the wireless LAN. Security Mode - Select Pre-Shared Key to add security on this wireless network. Otherwise, select None to allow any wireless client to associate this network without authentication. Pre-Shared Key - Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters
(including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters. Hidden SSID - Select this option if you want to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame. A wireless client then cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Enable Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking - Select this option if you want to prevent crossover traffic from within the same SSID. Wireless clients can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. For Built-in Wireless AP Only Bridged to: USGs with W in the model name have a built-in AP. Select an interface to bridge with the built-in AP wireless network. Devices connected to this interface will then be in the same broadcast domain as devices in the AP wireless network. 2.1.8 Internet Access - Device Registration Click the link in this screen to register your device at portal.myzyxel.com. Note: The USG must be connected to the Internet in order to register. Figure 30 Internet Access: Device Registration You will need the USGs serial number and LAN MAC address to register it if you have not already done so. Use the Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service screen to update your service subscription status. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 43 CHAPTER 3 Hardware, Interfaces and Zones 3.1 Hardware Overview USG20-VPN and USG20W-VPN have different housings. 3.1.1 Front Panels The LED indicators are located on the front panel. Figure 31 USG20-VPN Front Panel Figure 32 USG20W-VPN Front Panel The following table describes the LEDs. Table 10 LED Descriptions LED PWR COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green Red SYS Green Red Off On On Off On Blinking On The USG is turned off. The USG is turned on. There is a hardware component failure. Shut down the device, wait for a few minutes and then restart the device (see Section 3.1.3 on page 46). If the LED turns red again, then please contact your vendor. The USG is not ready or has failed. The USG is ready and running. The USG is booting. The USG had an error or has failed. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 44 Chapter 3 Hardware, Interfaces and Zones Table 10 LED Descriptions (continued) LED WLAN COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green P1, P2... Green Off On Blinking Off On Blinking The built-in wireless LAN card is not ready or has failed. The built-in wireless LAN card is ready. The built-in wireless LAN card is sending or receiving packets. There is no traffic on this port. This port has a successful 10/100 Mbps connection. The USG is sending or receiving packets on this port with a 10/100 Mbps connection. There is no connection on this port. This port has a successful 1000 Mbps connection. The device is sending or receiving packets on this port with a 1000 Mbps connection. Yellow Off On Blinking 3.1.2 Rear Panels The connection ports are located on the rear panel. Figure 33 USG20-VPN Rear Panel Figure 34 USG20W-VPN Rear Panel The following table describes the items on the rear panel Table 11 Rear Panel Items LABEL Power DESCRIPTION Use the included power cord to connect the power socket to a power outlet. Turn the power switch on if your USG has a power switch. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 45 Chapter 3 Hardware, Interfaces and Zones Table 11 Rear Panel Items (continued) LABEL WAN/LAN/DMZ/
DESCRIPTION P1- You have to install an SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) transceiver and connect fiber optic cables to it for using a 1Gbps/100Mbps WAN connection.
(Gigabit SFP/
Ethernet Port) Console P2~P6 - Connect an Ethernet cable to the port for using a 1Gbps WAN/LAN/DMZ connection. You can use the console port to manage the USG using CLI commands. You will be prompted to enter your user name and password. See the Command Reference Guide for more information about the CLI. When configuring using the console port, you need a computer equipped with communications software configured to the following parameters:
Speed 115200 bps Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control Off Note: Use an 8-wire Ethernet cable to run your Gigabit Ethernet connection at 1000 Mbps. Using a 4-wire Ethernet cable limits your connection to 100 Mbps. Note that the connection speed also depends on what the Ethernet device at the other end can support. 3.1.3 Wall-mounting Both USG20-VPN and USG20W-VPN can be mounted on a wall. 1 Drill two holes 3 mm ~ 4 mm (0.12" ~ 0.16") wide, 20 mm ~ 30 mm (0.79 ~ 1.18) deep and 150 mm apart, into a wall. Place two screw anchors in the holes. 2 Screw two screws with 6 mm ~ 8 mm (0.24" ~ 0.31") wide heads into the screw anchors. Do not screw the screws all the way in to the wall; leave a small gap between the head of the screw and the wall. The gap must be big enough for the screw heads to slide into the screw slots and the connection cables to run down the back of the USG. Note: Make sure the screws are securely fixed to the wall and strong enough to hold the weight of the USG with the connection cables. 3 Use the holes on the bottom of the USG to hang the USG on the screws. Wall-mount the USG horizontally. The USG's side panels with ventilation slots should not be facing up or down as this position is less safe. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 46 Chapter 3 Hardware, Interfaces and Zones Figure 35 Wall Mounting Screw Specifications 3.2 Default Zones, Interfaces, and Ports The default configurations for zones, interfaces, and ports are as follows. References to interfaces may be generic rather than the specific name used in your model. For example, this guide may use the WAN interface rather than wan1 or wan2. The following table shows the default physical port and interface mapping for each model at the time of writing. Table 12 Default Physical Port - Interface Mapping PORT / INTERFACE USG20-VPN USG20W-VPN sfp sfp P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 wan wan lan1 lan1 lan1 lan1 lan1 lan1 lan1 lan1 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 47 Chapter 3 Hardware, Interfaces and Zones The following table shows the default interface and zone mapping for each model at the time of writing. Table 13 Default Zone - Interface Mapping LAN1 WAN ZONE / INTERFACE USG20-VPN LAN2 DMZ LAN1 LAN2 DMZ LAN1 LAN2 DMZ WAN WAN_PPP SFP SFP_PPP WAN WAN_PPP SFP SFP_PPP USG20W-VPN 3.3 Stopping the USG Always use Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown or the shutdown command before you turn off the USG or remove the power. Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 48 CHAPTER 4 Quick Setup Wizards 4.1 Quick Setup Overview The Web Configurator's quick setup wizards help you configure Internet and VPN connection settings. This chapter provides information on configuring the quick setup screens in the Web Configurator. See the feature-specific chapters in this Users Guide for background information. In the Web Configurator, click Configuration > Quick Setup to open the first Quick Setup screen. Figure 36 Quick Setup WAN Interface Click this link to open a wizard to set up a WAN (Internet) connection. This wizard creates matching ISP account settings in the USG if you use PPPoE or PPTP. See Section 4.2 on page 50. VPN SETUP Use VPN Setup to configure a VPN (Virtual Private Network) rule for a secure connection to another computer or network. Use VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning to set up a VPN rule that can be retrieved with the USG IPSec VPN Client. You only need to enter a user name, password and the IP address of the USG in the IPSec VPN Client to get all VPN settings automatically from the USG. See Section 4.3 on page 55.Use VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings to configure the L2TP VPN for clients. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 49 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Wizard Help If the help does not automatically display when you run the wizard, click teh arrow to display it. 4.2 WAN Interface Quick Setup Click WAN Interface in the main Quick Setup screen to open the WAN Interface Quick Setup Wizard Welcome screen. Use these screens to configure an interface to connect to the Internet. Click Next. Figure 37 WAN Interface Quick Setup Wizard 4.2.1 Choose an Ethernet Interface Select the Ethernet interface (names vary by model) that you want to configure for a WAN connection and click Next. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 50 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 38 Choose an Ethernet Interface 4.2.2 Select WAN Type WAN Type Selection: Select the type of encapsulation this connection is to use. Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet. Otherwise, choose PPPoE or PPTP for a dial-up connection according to the information from your ISP. Figure 39 WAN Interface Setup: Step 2 The screens vary depending on what encapsulation type you use. Refer to information provided by your ISP to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you dont have that information. Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as your ISP gave it to you. 4.2.3 Configure WAN IP Settings Use this screen to select whether the interface should use a fixed or dynamic IP address. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 51 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 40 WAN Interface Setup: Step 2 Dynamic IP Figure 41 WAN Interface Setup: Step 2 Fixed IP WAN Interface: This is the interface you are configuring for Internet access. Zone: This is the security zone to which this interface and Internet connection belong. IP Address Assignment: Select Auto If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. Select Static if you have a fixed IP address and enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP address (optional) and DNS server IP address(es). 4.2.4 ISP and WAN and ISP Connection Settings Use this screen to configure the ISP and WAN interface settings. This screen is read-only if you select Ethernet and set t the IP Address Assignment to AutoStatic. If you set the IP Address Assignment to static and/or select PPTP or PPPoE, enter the Internet access information exactly as your ISP gave it to you. Note: Enter the Internet access information exactly as your ISP gave it to you. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 52 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 42 WAN and ISP Connection Settings: (PPTP Shown) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 WAN and ISP Connection Settings LABEL ISP Parameter Encapsulation DESCRIPTION This section appears if the interface uses a PPPoE or PPTP Internet connection. This displays the type of Internet connection you are configuring. Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:
Authentication Type CHAP/PAP - Your USG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. CHAP - Your USG accepts CHAP only. PAP - Your USG accepts PAP only. MSCHAP - Your USG accepts MSCHAP only. User Name Password Retype to Confirm Nailed-Up MSCHAP-V2 - Your USG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. You can use alphanumeric and -_@$./
characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long. Type the password associated with the user name above. Use up to 64 ASCII characters except the [] and ?. This field can be blank. Type your password again for confirmation. Select Nailed-Up if you do not want the connection to time out. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 53 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Table 14 WAN and ISP Connection Settings (continued) LABEL Idle Timeout PPTP Configuration Base Interface DESCRIPTION Type the time in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. 0 means no timeout. This section only appears if the interface uses a PPPoE or PPTP Internet connection. This displays the identity of the Ethernet interface you configure to connect with a modem or router. Base IP Address Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP. IP Subnet Mask Server IP Connection ID Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given). Type the IP address of the PPTP server. Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow the "c:id" and
"n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP. This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your DSL modem. You can use alphanumeric and -_: characters, and it can be up to 31 characters long. WAN Interface Setup WAN Interface Zone IP Address First DNS Server Second DNS Server Back Next This displays the identity of the interface you configure to connect with your ISP. This field displays to which security zone this interface and Internet connection will belong. This field is read-only when the WAN interface uses a dynamic IP address. If your WAN interface uses a static IP address, enter it in this field. These fields only display for an interface with a static IP address. Enter the DNS server IP address(es) in the field(s) to the right. Leave the field as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it. DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The USG uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for VPN, DDNS and the time server. Click Back to return to the previous screen. Click Next to continue. 4.2.5 Quick Setup Interface Wizard: Summary This screen displays the WAN interfaces settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 54 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 43 Interface Wizard: Summary WAN (PPTP Shown) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 15 Interface Wizard: Summary WAN LABEL Encapsulation Service Name DESCRIPTION This displays what encapsulation this interface uses to connect to the Internet. This field only appears for a PPPoE interface. It displays the PPPoE service name specified in the ISP account. This field only appears for a PPTP interface. It displays the IP address of the PPTP server. This is the user name given to you by your ISP. If No displays the connection will not time out. Yes means the USG uses the idle timeout. This is how many seconds the connection can be idle before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server. 0 means no timeout. If you specified a connection ID, it displays here. This identifies the interface you configure to connect with your ISP. This field displays to which security zone this interface and Internet connection will belong. This field displays whether the WAN IP address is static or dynamic (Auto). If the IP Address Assignment is Static, these fields display the DNS server IP address(es). Click Close to exit the wizard. Server IP User Name Nailed-Up Idle Timeout Connection ID WAN Interface Zone IP Address Assignment First DNS Server Second DNS Server Close 4.3 VPN Setup Wizard Click VPN Setup in the main Quick Setup screen to open the VPN Setup Wizard Welcome screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 55 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 44 VPN Setup Wizard 4.3.1 Welcome Use wizards to create Virtual Private Network (VPN) rules. After you complete the wizard, the Phase 1 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway screen and the Phase 2 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection screen. VPN Settings configures a VPN tunnel for a secure connection to another computer or network. VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning sets up a VPN rule the USG IPSec VPN Client can retrieve. Just enter a user name, password and the IP address of the USG in the IPSec VPN Client to get the VPN settings automatically from the USG. VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings sets up a L2TP VPN rule that the USG IPSec L2TP VPN client can retrieve. Figure 45 VPN Setup Wizard Welcome USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 56 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards 4.3.2 VPN Setup Wizard: Wizard Type Choose Express to create a VPN rule with the default phase 1 and phase 2 settings to connect to another ZLD-based USG using a pre-shared key. Choose Advanced to change the default settings and/or use certificates instead of a pre-shared key to create a VPN rule to connect to another IPSec device. Figure 46 VPN Setup Wizard: Wizard Type 4.3.3 VPN Express Wizard - Scenario Click the Express radio button as shown in Figure 46 on page 57 to display the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 57 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 47 VPN Express Wizard: Scenario Rule Name: Type the name used to identify this VPN connection (and VPN gateway). You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select the scenario that best describes your intended VPN connection. The figure on the left of the screen changes to match the scenario you select. Site-to-site - The remote IPSec device has a static IP address or a domain name. This USG can initiate the VPN tunnel. Site-to-site with Dynamic Peer - The remote IPSec device has a dynamic IP address. Only the remote IPSec device can initiate the VPN tunnel. Remote Access (Server Role) - Allow incoming connections from IPSec VPN clients. The clients have dynamic IP addresses and are also known as dial-in users. Only the clients can initiate the VPN tunnel. Remote Access (Client Role) - Connect to an IPSec server. This USG is the client (dial-in user) and can initiate the VPN tunnel. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 58 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards 4.3.4 VPN Express Wizard - Configuration Figure 48 VPN Express Wizard: Configuration Secure Gateway: Any displays in this field if it is not configurable for the chosen scenario. Otherwise, enter the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec device (secure gateway) to identify the remote IPSec router by its IP address or a domain name. Use 0.0.0.0 if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic WAN IP address. Pre-Shared Key: Type the password. Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same password. Use 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or 8 to 31 pairs of hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters. Proceed a hexadecimal key with 0x. You will receive a PYLD_MALFORMED (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends. Local Policy (IP/Mask): Type the IP address of a computer on your network that can use the tunnel. You can also specify a subnet. This must match the remote IP address configured on the remote IPSec device. Remote Policy (IP/Mask): Any displays in this field if it is not configurable for the chosen scenario. Otherwise, type the IP address of a computer behind the remote IPSec device. You can also specify a subnet. This must match the local IP address configured on the remote IPSec device. 4.3.5 VPN Express Wizard - Summary This screen provides a read-only summary of the VPN tunnels configuration and commands that you can copy and paste into another ZLD-based USGs command line interface to configure it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 49 VPN Express Wizard: Summary Rule Name: Identifies the VPN gateway policy. Secure Gateway: IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec device. If this field displays Any, only the remote IPSec device can initiate the VPN connection. Pre-Shared Key: VPN tunnel password. It identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. Local Policy: IP address and subnet mask of the computers on the network behind your USG that can use the tunnel. Remote Policy: IP address and subnet mask of the computers on the network behind the remote IPSec device that can use the tunnel. If this field displays Any, only the remote IPSec device can initiate the VPN connection. Copy and paste the Configuration for Secure Gateway commands into another ZLD-based USGs command line interface to configure it to serve as the other end of this VPN tunnel. You can also use a text editor to save these commands as a shell script file with a .zysh filename extension. Use the file manager to run the script in order to configure the VPN connection. See the commands reference guide for details on the commands displayed in this list. 4.3.6 VPN Express Wizard - Finish Now the rule is configured on the USG. The Phase 1 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN
> VPN Gateway screen and the Phase 2 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 60 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 50 VPN Express Wizard: Finish Click Close to exit the wizard. 4.3.7 VPN Advanced Wizard - Scenario Click the Advanced radio button as shown in Figure 46 on page 57 to display the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 61 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 51 VPN Advanced Wizard: Scenario Rule Name: Type the name used to identify this VPN connection (and VPN gateway). You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select the scenario that best describes your intended VPN connection. The figure on the left of the screen changes to match the scenario you select. Site-to-site - The remote IPSec device has a static IP address or a domain name. This USG can initiate the VPN tunnel. Site-to-site with Dynamic Peer - The remote IPSec device has a dynamic IP address. Only the remote IPSec device can initiate the VPN tunnel. Remote Access (Server Role) - Allow incoming connections from IPSec VPN clients. The clients have dynamic IP addresses and are also known as dial-in users. Only the clients can initiate the VPN tunnel. Remote Access (Client Role) - Connect to an IPSec server. This USG is the client (dial-in user) and can initiate the VPN tunnel. 4.3.8 VPN Advanced Wizard - Phase 1 Settings There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation phase 1 (Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA (Security Association). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 62 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 52 VPN Advanced Wizard: Phase 1 Settings Secure Gateway: Any displays in this field if it is not configurable for the chosen scenario. Otherwise, enter the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec device (secure gateway) to identify the remote IPSec device by its IP address or a domain name. Use 0.0.0.0 if the remote IPSec device has a dynamic WAN IP address. My Address (interface): Select an interface from the drop-down list box to use on your USG. Negotiation Mode: This displays Main or Aggressive:
Main encrypts the USGs and remote IPSec routers identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA Aggressive is faster but does not encrypt the identities. The USG and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode. Encryption Algorithm: 3DES and AES use encryption. The longer the key, the higher the security (this may affect throughput). Both sender and receiver must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key. Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. AES128 uses a 128-bit key and is faster than 3DES. AES192 uses a 192-bit key, and AES256 uses a 256-bit key. Authentication Algorithm: MD5 gives minimal security and SHA512 gives the highest security. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The stronger the algorithm the slower it is. Key Group: DH5 is more secure than DH1 or DH2 (although it may affect throughput). DH1
(default) refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number. DH5 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 5 a 1536 bit random number. SA Life Time: Set how often the USG renegotiates the IKE SA. A short SA life time increases security, but renegotiation temporarily disconnects the VPN tunnel. NAT Traversal: Select this if the VPN tunnel must pass through NAT (there is a NAT router between the IPSec devices). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 63 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Note: The remote IPSec device must also have NAT traversal enabled. See the help in the main IPSec VPN screens for more information. Dead Peer Detection (DPD) has the USG make sure the remote IPSec device is there before transmitting data through the IKE SA. If there has been no traffic for at least 15 seconds, the USG sends a message to the remote IPSec device. If it responds, the USG transmits the data. If it does not respond, the USG shuts down the IKE SA. Authentication Method: Select Pre-Shared Key to use a password or Certificate to use one of the USGs certificates. 4.3.9 VPN Advanced Wizard - Phase 2 Phase 2 in an IKE uses the SA that was established in phase 1 to negotiate SAs for IPSec. Figure 53 VPN Advanced Wizard: Phase 2 Settings Active Protocol: ESP is compatible with NAT, AH is not. Encapsulation: Tunnel is compatible with NAT, Transport is not. Encryption Algorithm: 3DES and AES use encryption. The longer the AES key, the higher the security (this may affect throughput). Null uses no encryption. Authentication Algorithm: MD5 gives minimal security and SHA512 gives the highest security. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The stronger the algorithm the slower it is. SA Life Time: Set how often the USG renegotiates the IKE SA. A short SA life time increases security, but renegotiation temporarily disconnects the VPN tunnel. Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS): Disabling PFS allows faster IPSec setup, but is less secure. Select DH1, DH2 or DH5 to enable PFS. DH5 is more secure than DH1 or DH2 (although it may affect throughput). DH1 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number. DH5 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 5 a 1536 bit random number (more secure, yet slower). Local Policy (IP/Mask): Type the IP address of a computer on your network. You can also specify a subnet. This must match the remote IP address configured on the remote IPSec device. Remote Policy (IP/Mask): Type the IP address of a computer behind the remote IPSec device. You can also specify a subnet. This must match the local IP address configured on the remote IPSec device. Nailed-Up: This displays for the site-to-site and remote access client role scenarios. Select this to have the USG automatically renegotiate the IPSec SA when the SA life time expires. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 64 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards 4.3.10 VPN Advanced Wizard - Summary This is a read-only summary of the VPN tunnel settings. Figure 54 VPN Advanced Wizard: Summary Rule Name: Identifies the VPN connection (and the VPN gateway). Secure Gateway: IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec device. Pre-Shared Key: VPN tunnel password. Certificate: The certificate the USG uses to identify itself when setting up the VPN tunnel. Local Policy: IP address and subnet mask of the computers on the network behind your USG that can use the tunnel. Remote Policy: IP address and subnet mask of the computers on the network behind the remote IPSec device that can use the tunnel. Copy and paste the Configuration for Remote Gateway commands into another ZLD-based USGs command line interface. Click Save to save the VPN rule. 4.3.11 VPN Advanced Wizard - Finish Now the rule is configured on the USG. The Phase 1 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN
> VPN Gateway screen and the Phase 2 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 65 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 55 VPN Wizard: Finish Click Close to exit the wizard. 4.4 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Wizard:
Wizard Type Use VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning to set up a VPN rule that can be retrieved with the USG IPSec VPN Client. VPN rules for the USG IPSec VPN Client have certain restrictions. They must not contain the following settings:
AH active protocol NULL encryption SHA512 authentication A subnet or range remote policy USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 66 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Choose Express to create a VPN rule with the default phase 1 and phase 2 settings and to use a pre-shared key. Choose Advanced to change the default settings and/or use certificates instead of a pre-shared key in the VPN rule. Figure 56 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard: Wizard Type 4.4.1 Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard - VPN Settings Click the Express radio button as shown in the previous screen to display the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 67 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 57 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard: Settings Scenario Rule Name: Type the name used to identify this VPN connection (and VPN gateway). You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Application Scenario: Only the Remote Access (Server Role) is allowed in this wizard. It allows incoming connections from the USG IPSec VPN Client. 4.4.2 Configuration Provisioning VPN Express Wizard - Configuration Click Next to continue the wizard. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 68 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 58 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard: Configuration Secure Gateway: Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. It allows incoming connections from the USG IPSec VPN Client. Pre-Shared Key: Type the password. Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same password. Use 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or 8 to 31 pairs of hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters. Proceed a hexadecimal key with 0x. You will receive a PYLD_MALFORMED (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends. Local Policy (IP/Mask): Type the IP address of a computer on your network. You can also specify a subnet. This must match the remote IP address configured on the remote IPSec device. Remote Policy (IP/Mask): Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. 4.4.3 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard -
Summary This screen has a read-only summary of the VPN tunnels configuration and commands you can copy and paste into another ZLD-based USGs command line interface to configure it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 69 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 59 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard: Summary Rule Name: Identifies the VPN gateway policy. Secure Gateway: Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. It allows incoming connections from the USG IPSec VPN Client. Pre-Shared Key: VPN tunnel password. It identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. Local Policy: (Static) IP address and subnet mask of the computers on the network behind your USG that can be accessed using the tunnel. Remote Policy: Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. The Configuration for Secure Gateway displays the configuration that the USG IPSec VPN Client will get from the USG. Click Save to save the VPN rule. 4.4.4 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard - Finish Now the rule is configured on the USG. The Phase 1 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN
> VPN Gateway screen and the Phase 2 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection screen. Enter the IP address of the USG in the USG IPSec VPN Client to get all these VPN settings automatically from the USG. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 70 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 60 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Express Wizard: Finish Click Close to exit the wizard. 4.4.5 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard -
Scenario Click the Advanced radio button as shown in the screen shown in Figure 56 on page 67 to display the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 71 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 61 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard: Scenario Settings Rule Name: Type the name used to identify this VPN connection (and VPN gateway). You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Application Scenario: Only the Remote Access (Server Role) is allowed in this wizard. It allows incoming connections from the USG IPSec VPN Client. Click Next to continue the wizard. 4.4.6 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard - Phase 1 Settings There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation phase 1 (Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA (Security Association). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 72 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 62 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard: Phase 1 Settings Secure Gateway: Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. It allows incoming connections from the USG IPSec VPN Client. My Address (interface): Select an interface from the drop-down list box to use on your USG. Negotiation Mode:This displays Main or Aggressive:
Main encrypts the USGs and remote IPSec routers identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA Aggressive is faster but does not encrypt the identities. The USG and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode. Encryption Algorithm: 3DES and AES use encryption. The longer the key, the higher the security (this may affect throughput). Both sender and receiver must know the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key. Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. AES128 uses a 128-bit key and is faster than 3DES. AES192 uses a 192-bit key and AES256 uses a 256-bit key. Authentication Algorithm: MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. MD5 gives minimal security. SHA1 gives higher security and SHA256 gives the highest security. The stronger the algorithm, the slower it is. Key Group: DH5 is more secure than DH1 or DH2 (although it may affect throughput). DH1
(default) refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number. DH5 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 5 a 1536 bit random number. SA Life Time: Set how often the USG renegotiates the IKE SA. A short SA life time increases security, but renegotiation temporarily disconnects the VPN tunnel. Authentication Method: Select Pre-Shared Key to use a password or Certificate to use one of the USGs certificates. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 73 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards 4.4.7 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard - Phase 2 Phase 2 in an IKE uses the SA that was established in phase 1 to negotiate SAs for IPSec. Figure 63 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard: Phase 2 Settings Active Protocol: ESP is compatible with NAT. AH is not available in this wizard. Encapsulation: Tunnel is compatible with NAT, Transport is not. Encryption Algorithm: 3DES and AES use encryption. The longer the AES key, the higher the security (this may affect throughput). Null uses no encryption. Authentication Algorithm: MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. MD5 gives minimal security. SHA1 gives higher security and SHA256 gives the highest security. The stronger the algorithm, the slower it is. SA Life Time: Set how often the USG renegotiates the IKE SA. A short SA life time increases security, but renegotiation temporarily disconnects the VPN tunnel. Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS): Disabling PFS allows faster IPSec setup, but is less secure. Select DH1, DH2 or DH5 to enable PFS. DH5 is more secure than DH1 or DH2 (although it may affect throughput). DH1 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. DH2 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number. DH5 refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 5 a 1536 bit random number (more secure, yet slower). Local Policy (IP/Mask): Type the IP address of a computer on your network. You can also specify a subnet. This must match the remote IP address configured on the remote IPSec device. Remote Policy (IP/Mask): Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. Nailed-Up: This displays for the site-to-site and remote access client role scenarios. Select this to have the USG automatically renegotiate the IPSec SA when the SA life time expires. 4.4.8 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard -
Summary This is a read-only summary of the VPN tunnel settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 74 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 64 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard: Summary Summary Rule Name: Identifies the VPN connection (and the VPN gateway). Secure Gateway: Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. It allows incoming connections from the USG IPSec VPN Client. Pre-Shared Key: VPN tunnel password. Local Policy: IP address and subnet mask of the computers on the network behind your USG that can use the tunnel. Remote Policy: Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. Phase 1 Negotiation Mode: This displays Main or Aggressive:
Main encrypts the USGs and remote IPSec routers identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA Aggressive is faster but does not encrypt the identities. The USG and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 75 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Encryption Algorithm: This displays the encryption method used. The longer the key, the higher the security, the lower the throughput (possibly). DES uses a 56-bit key. 3DES uses a 168-bit key. AES128 uses a 128-bit key AES192 uses a 192-bit key AES256 uses a 256-bit key. Authentication Algorithm: This displays the authentication algorithm used. The stronger the algorithm, the slower it is. MD5 gives minimal security. SHA1 gives higher security SHA256 gives the highest security. Key Group: This displays the Diffie-Hellman (DH) key group used. DH5 is more secure than DH1 or DH2 (although it may affect throughput). DH1 uses a 768 bit random number. DH2 uses a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number. DH5 uses a 1536 bit random number. Phase 2 Active Protocol: This displays ESP (compatible with NAT) or AH. Encapsulation: This displays Tunnel (compatible with NAT) or Transport. Encryption Algorithm: This displays the encryption method used. The longer the key, the higher the security, the lower the throughput (possibly). DES uses a 56-bit key. 3DES uses a 168-bit key. AES128 uses a 128-bit key AES192 uses a 192-bit key AES256 uses a 256-bit key. Null uses no encryption. Authentication Algorithm: This displays the authentication algorithm used. The stronger the algorithm, the slower it is. MD5 gives minimal security. SHA1 gives higher security SHA256 gives the highest security.. The Configuration for Secure Gateway displays the configuration that the USG IPSec VPN Client will get from the USG. Click Save to save the VPN rule. 4.4.9 VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard- Finish Now the rule is configured on the USG. The Phase 1 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN
> VPN Gateway screen and the Phase 2 rule settings appear in the VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 76 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Connection screen. Enter the IP address of the USG in the USG IPSec VPN Client to get all these VPN settings automatically from the USG. Figure 65 VPN for Configuration Provisioning Advanced Wizard: Finish Click Close to exit the wizard. 4.5 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings Wizard Use VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings to set up an L2TP VPN rule. Click Configuration >
Quick Setup > VPN Settings and select VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings to see the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 77 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Figure 66 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings Wizard: L2TP VPN Settings Click Next to continue the wizard. 4.5.1 L2TP VPN Settings Figure 67 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings Wizard: L2TP VPN Settings Rule Name: Type the name used to identify this L2TP VPN connection (and L2TP VPN gateway). You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 78 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards My Address (interface): Select one of the interfaces from the pull down menu to apply the L2TP VPN rule. Pre-Shared Key: Type the password. Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same password. Use 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or 8 to 31 pairs of hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters. Proceed a hexadecimal key with 0x. You will receive a PYLD_MALFORMED (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends. Click Next to continue the wizard. 4.5.2 L2TP VPN Settings Figure 68 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings Wizard: L2TP VPN Settings IP Address Pool: Select Range or Subnet from the pull down menu. This IP address pool is used to assign to the L2TP VPN clients. Starting IP Address: Enter the starting IP address in the field. End IP Address: Enter the ending IP address in the field. First DNS Server (Optional): Enter the first DNS server IP address in the field. Leave the filed as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it. Second DNS Server (Optional):Enter the second DNS server IP address in the field. Leave the filed as 0.0.0.0 if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server you must know the IP address of a machine in order to access it. Allow L2TP traffic Through WAN: Select this check box to allow traffic from L2TP clients to go to the Internet. Click Next to continue the wizard. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 79 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards Note: DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The USG uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for VPN, DDNS and the time server. 4.5.3 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Setting Wizard - Summary This is a read-only summary of the L2TP VPN settings. Figure 69 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings Advanced Settings Wizard: Summary Summary Rule Name: Identifies the L2TP VPN connection (and the L2TP VPN gateway). Secure Gateway: Any displays in this field because it is not configurable in this wizard. It allows incoming connections from the L2TP VPN Client. Pre-Shared Key: L2TP VPN tunnel password. My Address (Interface): This displays the interface to use on your USG for the L2TP tunnel. IP Address Pool: This displays the IP address pool used to assign to the L2TP VPN clients. Click Save to complete the L2TP VPN Setting and the following screen will show. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 80 Chapter 4 Quick Setup Wizards 4.5.4 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Setting Wizard Completed Figure 70 VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings Wizard: Finish Now the rule is configured on the USG. The L2TP VPN rule settings appear in the VPN > L2TP VPN screen and also in the VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection and VPN Gateway screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 81 CHAPTER 5 Dashboard 5.1 Overview Use the Dashboard screens to check status information about the USG. 5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the main Dashboard screen to see the USGs general device information, system status, system resource usage, licensed service status, and interface status. You can also display other status screens for more information. Use the Dashboard screens to view the following. Device Information Screen on page 84 System Status Screen on page 85 VPN Status Screen on page 86 DHCP Table Screen on page 87 Number of Login Users Screen on page 88 System Resources Screen on page 89 CPU Usage Screen on page 90 Memory Usage Screen on page 91 Active Session Screen on page 92 Extension Slot Screen on page 93 Interface Status Summary Screen on page 93 Secured Service Status Screen on page 94 Content Filter Statistics Screen on page 95 Top 5 IPv4/IPv6 Security Policy Rules that Blocked Traffic Screen on page 96 Top 5 IPv4/IPv6 Security Policy Rules that Blocked Traffic Screen on page 96 Top 5 IPv4/IPv6 Security Policy Rules that Blocked Traffic Screen on page 96 The Latest Alert Logs Screen on page 96 5.2 Main Dashboard Screen The Dashboard screen displays when you log into the USG or click Dashboard in the navigation panel. The dashboard displays general device information, system status, system resource usage, licensed service status, and interface status in widgets that you can re-arrange to suit your needs. You can also collapse, refresh, and close individual widgets. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 82 Chapter 5 Dashboard Click on the icon to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting, and other information. Figure 71 Dashboard A B C D E The following table describes the labels in this screen. Click this to collapse a widget. It then becomes a down arrow. Click it again to enlarge the widget again. DESCRIPTION Use this link to open or close widgets by selecting/clearing the associated checkbox. Table 16 Dashboard LABEL Widget Settings
(A) expand /
collapse widget
(B) Refresh time setting (C) Refresh Now (D) Click this to update the widgets information immediately. Close widget (E) Click this to close the widget. Use Widget Setting to re-open it. Virtual Device Rear Panel Set the interval for refreshing the information displayed in the widget. Click this to view details about the USGs rear panel. Hover your cursor over a connected interface or slot to display status details. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 83 Chapter 5 Dashboard Front Panel Table 16 Dashboard (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to view details about the status of the USGs front panel LEDs and connections. See Section 3.1.1 on page 44 for LED descriptions. An unconnected interface or slot appears grayed out. The following front and rear panel labels display when you hover your cursor over a connected interface or slot. This field displays the name of each interface. This field displays the current status of each interface or device installed in a slot. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is. Name Status Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled. Down - The Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it or the Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected. Speed / Duplex - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half). The status for a WLAN card is none. For cellular (mobile broadband) interfaces, see Section 9.5 on page 173 for the status that can appear. For the auxiliary interface:
Inactive - The auxiliary interface is disabled. Connected - The auxiliary interface is enabled and connected. Zone IP Address/
Mask Disconnected - The auxiliary interface is not connected. This field displays the zone to which the interface is currently assigned. This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the interface is a member of an active virtual router, this field displays the IP address it is currently using. This is either the static IP address of the interface (if it is the master) or the management IP address (if it is a backup). 5.2.1 Device Information Screen The Device Information screen displays USGs system and model name, serial number, MAC address and firmware version shown in the below screen. Figure 72 Dashboard > Device Information (Example) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 84 Chapter 5 Dashboard This tabel describes the fields in the above screen. Table 17 Dashboard > Device Information DESCRIPTION LABEL This identifies a device installed in one of the USGs extension slots, the Security Device Information Extension Module slot, or USB ports. For an installed SEM (Security Extension Module) card, this field displays what kind of SEM card is installed. System Name Model Name Serial Number MAC Address Range Firmware Version SEM-VPN - The VPN accelerator. The SEM-VPN provides 500 Mbps VPN throughput, 2,000 IPSec VPN tunnels, and 750 SSL VPN users. SEM-DUAL - accelerator for both VPN and UTM. The SEM-DUAL provides the benefits of the SEM-VPN. This field displays the name used to identify the USG on any network. Click the link and open the Host Name screen where you can edit and make changes to the system and domain name. This field displays the model name of this USG. This field displays the serial number of this USG. The serial number is used for device tracking and control. This field displays the MAC addresses used by the USG. Each physical port has one MAC address. The first MAC address is assigned to physical port 1, the second MAC address is assigned to physical port 2, and so on. This field displays the version number and date of the firmware the USG is currently running. Click the link to open the Firmware Package screen where you can upload firmware. 5.2.2 System Status Screen Figure 73 Dashboard > System Status (Example) This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 18 Dashboard > System Status LABEL System Uptime Current Date/Time VPN Status SSL VPN Status DESCRIPTION This field displays how long the USG has been running since it last restarted or was turned on. This field displays the current date and time in the USG. The format is yyyy-mm-
dd hh:mm:ss. Click on the link to see the Date/Time screen where you can make edits and changes to the date, time and time zone information. Click on the link to look at the VPN tunnels that are currently established. See Section 5.2.3 on page 86. Click on the VPN icon to go to the ZyXEL VPN Client product page at the ZyXEL website. The first number is the actual number of VPN tunnels up and the second number is the maximum number of SSL VPN tunnels allowed. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 85 Chapter 5 Dashboard Table 18 Dashboard > System Status LABEL DHCP Table Current Login User Number of Login Users Boot Status DESCRIPTION Click this to look at the IP addresses currently assigned to the USGs DHCP clients and the IP addresses reserved for specific MAC addresses. See Section 5.2.4 on page 87. This field displays the user name used to log in to the current session, the amount of reauthentication time remaining, and the amount of lease time remaining. This field displays the number of users currently logged in to the USG. Click the icon to pop-open a list of the users who are currently logged in to the USG. This field displays details about the USGs startup state. OK - The USG started up successfully. Firmware update OK - A firmware update was successful. Problematic configuration after firmware update - The application of the configuration failed after a firmware upgrade. System default configuration - The USG successfully applied the system default configuration. This occurs when the USG starts for the first time or you intentionally reset the USG to the system default settings. Fallback to lastgood configuration - The USG was unable to apply the startup-config.conf configuration file and fell back to the lastgood.conf configuration file. Fallback to system default configuration - The USG was unable to apply the lastgood.conf configuration file and fell back to the system default configuration file (system-default.conf). Booting in progress - The USG is still applying the system configuration. 5.2.3 VPN Status Screen Click on VPN Status link to look at the VPN tunnels that are currently established. The following screen will show. Figure 74 Dashboard > System Status > VPN Status This table describes the fields in the above screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 86 Chapter 5 Dashboard Table 19 Dashboard > System Status > VPN Status LABLE
#
Name Encapsulation Algorithm Refresh Interval Refresh DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific SA. This field displays the name of the IPSec SA. This field displays how the IPSec SA is encapsulated. This field displays the encryption and authentication algorithms used in the SA. Select how often you want this window to be updated automatically. Click this to update the information in the window right away. ZyXEL VPN Client Product Page 5.2.4 DHCP Table Screen Click on the DHCP Table link to look at the IP addresses currently assigned to DHCP clients and the IP addresses reserved for specific MAC addresses. The following screen will show. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 87 Chapter 5 Dashboard Figure 75 Dashboard > System Status > DHCP Table This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 20 Dashboard > System Status > DHCP Table LABEL
#
Interface IP Address DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. This field identifies the interface that assigned an IP address to a DHCP client. This field displays the IP address currently assigned to a DHCP client or reserved for a specific MAC address. Click the columns heading cell to sort the table entries by IP address. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. This field displays the name used to identify this device on the network (the computer name). The USG learns these from the DHCP client requests. None shows here for a static DHCP entry. This field displays the MAC address to which the IP address is currently assigned or for which the IP address is reserved. Click the columns heading cell to sort the table entries by MAC address. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. For a static DHCP entry, the host name or the description you configured shows here. This field is blank for dynamic DHCP entries. If this field is selected, this entry is a static DHCP entry. The IP address is reserved for the MAC address. Host Name MAC Address Description Reserve If this field is clear, this entry is a dynamic DHCP entry. The IP address is assigned to a DHCP client. To create a static DHCP entry using an existing dynamic DHCP entry, select this field, and then click Apply. To remove a static DHCP entry, clear this field, and then click Apply. 5.2.5 Number of Login Users Screen Click the Number of Login Users link to see the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 88 Chapter 5 Dashboard Figure 76 Dashboard > System Status > Number of Login Users This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 21 Dashboard > System Status > Number of Login Users LABEL
#
User ID DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value and is not associated with any entry. This field displays the user name of each user who is currently logged in to the USG. This field displays the amount of reauthentication time remaining and the amount of lease time remaining for each user. This field displays the way the user logged in to the USG. This field displays the IP address of the computer used to log in to the USG. This field displays the types of user accounts the USG uses. If the user type is ext-user (external user), this field will show its external-group information when you move your mouse over it. If the external user matches two external-group objects, both external-group object names will be shown. Click this icon to end a users session. Reauth Lease T. Type IP address User Info Force Logout 5.2.6 System Resources Screen Hover your mouse over an item and click the arrow on the right to see more details on that resource. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 89 Chapter 5 Dashboard Figure 77 Dashboard > System Resources This table describes the fields in the above screen. CPU Usage Memory Usage Table 22 .Dashboard > System Resources DESCRIPTION LABEL This field displays what percentage of the USGs processing capability is currently being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show CPU Usage icon that takes you to a chart of the USGs recent CPU usage. This field displays what percentage of the USGs RAM is currently being used. Hover your cursor over this field to display the Show Memory Usage icon that takes you to a chart of the USGs recent memory usage. This field displays what percentage of the USGs onboard flash memory is currently being used. This field shows how much storage in the USB device connected to the USG is in use. This field shows how many sessions, established and non-established, that pass through/from/to/within the USG. Hover your cursor over this field to display icons. Click the Detail icon to go to the Session Monitor screen to see details about the active sessions. Click the Show Active Sessions icon to display a chart of USGs recent session usage. USB Storage Usage Active Sessions Flash Usage 5.2.7 CPU Usage Screen Use the below screen to look at a chart of the USGs recent CPU usage. To access this screen, click CPU Usage in the dashboard. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 90 Chapter 5 Dashboard Figure 78 Dashboard > CPU Usage screen This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 23 Dashboard > CPU Usage LABEL DESCRIPTION The y-axis represents the percentage of CPU usage. The x-axis shows the time period over which the CPU usage occurred Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated. Click this to update the information in the window right away. Refresh Interval Refresh Now 5.2.8 Memory Usage Screen Use the below screen to look at a chart of the USGs recent memory (RAM) usage. To access this screen, click Memory Usage in the dashboard. Figure 79 Dashboard > Memory Usage screen USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 91 Chapter 5 Dashboard This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 24 Dashboard > Memory Usage screen. LABEL DESCRIPTION The y-axis represents the percentage of RAM usage. The x-axis shows the time period over which the RAM usage occurred Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated. Click this to update the information in the window right away. Refresh Interval Refresh Now 5.2.9 Active Session Screen To see the details of Active Sessions, move the cursor to the far right of the Active Sessions box and the Detail and the Show Active Session icons appear. Click the Show Active Session icon. Figure 80 Dashboard > Active Sessions > Show Active Session This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 25 Dashboard > Active Sessions > Show Active Session Sessions Refresh Interval Refresh Now The y-axis represents the number of session. The x-axis shows the time period over which the session usage occurred Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated. Click this to update the information in the window right away. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 92 Chapter 5 Dashboard 5.2.10 Extension Slot Screen Figure 81 Dashboard > Extension Slot This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 26 Dashboard > Extension Slot LABEL DESCRIPTION
#
Extension Slot Device Status This field displays the name of each extension slot. This field displays the name of the device connected to the extension slot (or none if no device is detected). For an installed SEM (Security Extension Module) card, this field displays what kind of SEM card is installed. SEM-VPN - The VPN accelerator. The SEM-VPN provides 500 Mbps VPN throughput, 2,000 IPSec VPN tunnels, and 750 SSL VPN users. SEM-DUAL - accelerator for both VPN and UTM. The SEM-DUAL provides the benefits of the SEM-VPN. USB Flash Drive - Indicates a connected USB storage device and the drives storage capacity. The status for an installed WLAN card is none. For cellular (mobile broadband) interfaces, see Section 6.10 on page 112 for the status that can appear. For an installed SEM (Security Extension Module) card, this field displays one of the following:
Active - The SEM card is working properly. Ready to activate - The SEM was inserted while the USG was operating. Restart the USG to use the SEM. Driver load failed - An error occurred during the USGs attempt to activate the SEM card. Make sure the SEM is installed properly and the thumbscrews are tightened. If this status still displays, contact your vendor. Ready - A USB storage device connected to the USG is ready for the USG to use. Unused - The USG is unable to mount a USB storage device connected to the USG. 5.2.11 Interface Status Summary Screen Interfaces per USG model vary. Figure 82 Dashboard > Interface Status Summary USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 93 Chapter 5 Dashboard This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 27 Dashboard > Interface Status Summary LABEL Name Status DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of each interface. This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is. For Ethernet interfaces:
Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled. Down - The Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it or the Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected. Speed / Duplex - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half). For cellular (mobile broadband) interfaces, see Section 6.10 on page 112 for the status that can appear. For the auxiliary interface:
Inactive - The auxiliary interface is disabled. Connected - The auxiliary interface is enabled and connected. Disconnected - The auxiliary interface is not connected. For PPP interfaces:
Connected - The PPP interface is connected. Disconnected - The PPP interface is not connected. If the PPP interface is disabled, it does not appear in the list. For WLAN interfaces:
Up - The WLAN interface is enabled. Down - The WLAN interface is disabled. This field displays the zone to which the interface is currently assigned. Zone IP Addr/Netmask This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and subnet mask via DHCP. IP Assignment Action If this interface is a member of an active virtual router, this field displays the IP address it is currently using. This is either the static IP address of the interface (if it is the master) or the management IP address (if it is a backup). This field displays the interfaces IP assignment. It will show DHCP or Static. Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server. Click the Connect icon to have the USG try to connect a PPPoE/PPTP interface. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get or to update its IP address, this field displays n/a. Click the Disconnect icon to stop a PPPoE/PPTP connection. 5.2.12 Secured Service Status Screen This part shows what security services are available and enabled. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 94 Chapter 5 Dashboard Figure 83 Dashboard > Secured Service Status This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 28 Dashboard > Secured Service Status LABEL
#
Status Name Version Expiration DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific status. This field displays the status of the USGs security services. It will show these types of status: Licensed, Unlicensed, Disabled or Enabled. This field displays the name of security services supported by this model. Status will show Licensed for Premium Service after you register the device at myZyXEL.com. You can then activate security service licenses such as Anti-
Spam, Content Filter and so on. This field displays the version number of the services. This field displays the number of days remaining before the license expires. 5.2.13 Content Filter Statistics Screen Configure Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter and then view results here. Figure 84 Dashboard > Content Filter Statistics This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 29 Dashboard > Content Filter Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION Web Request Statistics Total Web Pages Inspected This is the number of web pages the USG has checked to see whether they belong to the categories you selected in the content filter screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 95 Chapter 5 Dashboard Table 29 Dashboard > Content Filter Statistics LABEL Blocked Warned Passed Category Hit Summary Security Threat
(unsafe) Managed Web pages DESCRIPTION This is the number of web pages that the USG blocked access. This is the number of web pages for which the USG has displayed a warning message to the access requesters. This is the number of web pages that the USG allowed access. This is the number of requested web pages that belong to the unsafe categories you have selected in the content filter screen. This is the number of requested web pages that belong to the managed categories you have selected in the content filter screen. 5.2.14 Top 5 IPv4/IPv6 Security Policy Rules that Blocked Traffic Screen Figure 85 Dashboard > Top 5 IPv4/IPv6 Security Policy Rules that Blocked Traffic This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 30 Dashboard > Top 5 IPv4/IPv6 Security Policy Rules that Blocked Traffic LABEL
#
DESCRIPTION This is the entrys rank in the list of the most commonly triggered security policies. This shows the zone packets came from that the triggered security policy. This shows the zone packets went to that the triggered security policy. This field displays the descriptive name (if any) of the triggered security policy. This field displays how many times the security policy was triggered. From To Description Hits 5.2.15 The Latest Alert Logs Screen Figure 86 Dashboard > The Latest Alert Logs USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 96 Chapter 5 Dashboard This table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 31 Dashboard > The Latest Alert Logs LABEL
#
Time Priority Category Message Source Destination DESCRIPTION This is the entrys rank in the list of alert logs. This field displays the date and time the log was created. This field displays the severity of the log. This field displays the type of log generated. This field displays the actual log message. This field displays the source address (if any) in the packet that generated the log. This field displays the destination address (if any) in the packet that generated the log. This field displays the incoming interface of the packet that generated the log. Source Interface USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 97 PART II Technical Reference 98 99 CHAPTER 6 Monitor 6.1 Overview Use the Monitor screens to check status and statistics information. 6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Monitor screens for the following. Use the System Status > Port Statistics screen (see Section 6.2 on page 101) to look at packet statistics for each physical port. Use the System Status > Port Statistics > Graph View screen (see Section 6.2 on page 101) to look at a line graph of packet statistics for each physical port. Use the System Status > Interface Status screen (Section 6.3 on page 103) to see all of the USGs interfaces and their packet statistics. Use the System Status > Traffic Statistics screen (see Section 6.4 on page 105) to start or stop data collection and view statistics. Use the System Status > Session Monitor screen (see Section 6.5 on page 108) to view sessions by user or service. Use the System Status > IGMP Statistics screen (see Section 6.6 on page 109) to view multicasting details. Use the System Status > DDNS Status screen (see Section 6.7 on page 110) to view the status of the USGs DDNS domain names. Use the System Status > IP/MAC Binding screen (Section 6.8 on page 111) to view a list of devices that have received an IP address from USG interfaces with IP/MAC binding enabled. Use the System Status > Login Users screen (Section 6.9 on page 111) to look at a list of the users currently logged into the USG. Use the System Status > Cellular Status screen (Section 6.10 on page 112) to check your mobile broadband connection status. Use the System Status > UPnP Port Status screen (see Section 6.11 on page 114) to look at a list of the NAT port mapping rules that UPnP creates on the USG. Use the System Status > USB Storage screen (Section 6.12 on page 115) to view information about a connected USB storage device. Use the System Status > Ethernet Neighbor screen (Section 6.13 on page 116) to view and manage the USGs neighboring devices via Layer Link Discovery Protocol (LLDP). Use the Wireless > AP Information screen (Section 6.14.1 on page 117) to view information on connected APs. Use the Wireless > Station Info screen (Section 6.14.3 on page 120) to view information on connected wireless stations. Use the Wireless > Detected Device screen (Section 6.14.3 on page 120) to view information about suspected rogue APs. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 100 Chapter 6 Monitor Use the VPN Monitor > IPSec screen (Section 6.15 on page 122) to display and manage active IPSec SAs. Use the VPN Monitor > SSL screen (see Section 6.16 on page 123) to list the users currently logged into the VPN SSL client portal. You can also log out individual users and delete related session information. Use the VPN Monitor > L2TP over IPSec screen (see Section 6.17 on page 124) to display and manage the USGs connected L2TP VPN sessions. Use the UTM Statistics > Content Filter screen (Section 6.18 on page 125) to start or stop data collection and view content filter statistics. Use the UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam screen (Section 6.19 on page 127) to start or stop data collection and view spam statistics. Use the UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam > Status screen (Section 6.19.2 on page 129) to see how many mail sessions the USG is currently checking and DNSBL statistics. Use the Log screens (Section 6.20 on page 130) to view the USGs current log messages. You can change the way the log is displayed, you can e-mail the log, and you can also clear the log in this screen. 6.2 The Port Statistics Screen Use this screen to look at packet statistics for each Gigabit Ethernet port. To access this screen, click Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics. Figure 87 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 32 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics LABEL Poll Interval DESCRIPTION Enter how often you want this window to be updated automatically, and click Set Interval. Click this to set the Poll Interval the screen uses. Click this to stop the window from updating automatically. You can start it again by setting the Poll Interval and clicking Set Interval. Click this to display the port statistics as a line graph. Set Interval Stop Switch to Graphic View USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 101 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 32 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics (continued) LABEL
#
Port Status DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific port. This field displays the physical port number. This field displays the current status of the physical port. Down - The physical port is not connected. TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time System Up Time Speed / Duplex - The physical port is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half). This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the USG on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the number of packets received by the USG on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the number of collisions on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-second interval before the screen updated. This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the physical port in the one-second interval before the screen updated. This field displays how long the physical port has been connected. This field displays how long the USG has been running since it last restarted or was turned on. 6.2.1 The Port Statistics Graph Screen Use this screen to look at a line graph of packet statistics for each physical port. To access this screen, click Port Statistics in the Status screen and then the Switch to Graphic View Button. Figure 88 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics > Switch to Graphic View USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 102 Chapter 6 Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Enter how often you want this window to be automatically updated. Click this to update the information in the window right away. Select the number of the physical port for which you want to display graphics. Click this to display the port statistics as a table. Table 33 Monitor > System Status > Port Statistics > Switch to Graphic View LABEL Refresh Interval Refresh Now Port Selection Switch to Grid View bps time TX The y-axis represents the speed of transmission or reception. The x-axis shows the time period over which the transmission or reception occurred This line represents traffic transmitted from the USG on the physical port since it was last connected. This line represents the traffic received by the USG on the physical port since it was last connected. This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated. This field displays how long the USG has been running since it last restarted or was turned on. RX Last Update System Up Time 6.3 Interface Status Screen This screen lists all of the USGs interfaces and gives packet statistics for them. Click Monitor >
System Status > Interface Status to access this screen. Figure 89 Monitor > System Status > Interface Status USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 103 Chapter 6 Monitor Each field is described in the following table. Table 34 Monitor > System Status > Interface Status LABEL Interface Status DESCRIPTION If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it, its entry is displayed in light gray text. This field displays the name of each interface. If there is an Expand icon (plus-sign) next to the name, click this to look at the status of virtual interfaces on top of this interface. This field displays the physical port number. This field displays the current status of each interface. The possible values depend on what type of interface it is. Name Port Status For Ethernet interfaces:
Inactive - The Ethernet interface is disabled. Down - The Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports associated with it or the Ethernet interface is enabled but not connected. Speed / Duplex - The Ethernet interface is enabled and connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half). For cellular (mobile broadband) interfaces, see Section 6.12 on page 115 the Web Help for the status that can appear. For the auxiliary interface:
Inactive - The auxiliary interface is disabled. Connected - The auxiliary interface is enabled and connected. Disconnected - The auxiliary interface is not connected. For virtual interfaces, this field always displays Up. If the virtual interface is disabled, it does not appear in the list. For VLAN and bridge interfaces, this field always displays Up. If the VLAN or bridge interface is disabled, it does not appear in the list. For PPP interfaces:
Connected - The PPP interface is connected. Disconnected - The PPP interface is not connected. If the PPP interface is disabled, it does not appear in the list. For WLAN interfaces:
Up - The WLAN interface is enabled. Down - The WLAN interface is disabled. This field displays the zone to which the interface is assigned. Zone IP Addr/Netmask This field displays the current IP address and subnet mask assigned to the interface. If the IP address and subnet mask are 0.0.0.0, the interface is disabled or did not receive an IP address and subnet mask via DHCP. IP Assignment Services If this interface is a member of an active virtual router, this field displays the IP address it is currently using. This is either the static IP address of the interface (if it is the master) or the management IP address (if it is a backup). This field displays how the interface gets its IP address. Static - This interface has a static IP address. DHCP Client - This interface gets its IP address from a DHCP server. This field lists which services the interface provides to the network. Examples include DHCP relay, DHCP server, DDNS, RIP, and OSPF. This field displays n/a if the interface does not provide any services to the network. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 104 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 34 Monitor > System Status > Interface Status (continued) LABEL Action DESCRIPTION Use this field to get or to update the IP address for the interface. Click Renew to send a new DHCP request to a DHCP server. Click Connect to try to connect a PPPoE/PPTP interface. If the interface cannot use one of these ways to get or to update its IP address, this field displays n/a. This displays the details of the USGs configured tunnel interfaces. Tunnel Interface Status Name Status Zone IP Address My Address Remote Gateway Address Mode Interface Statistics Refresh Name Status TxPkts RxPkts Tx B/s Rx B/s This field displays the name of the interface. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the zone to which the interface is assigned. This is the IP address of the interface. If the interface is active (and connected), the USG tunnels local traffic sent to this IP address to the Remote Gateway Address. This is the interface or IP address uses to identify itself to the remote gateway. The USG uses this as the source for the packets it tunnels to the remote gateway. This is the IP address or domain name of the remote gateway to which this interface tunnels traffic. This field displays the tunnel mode that you are using. This table provides packet statistics for each interface. Click this button to update the information in the screen. This field displays the name of each interface. If there is a Expand icon (plus-sign) next to the name, click this to look at the statistics for virtual interfaces on top of this interface. This field displays the current status of the interface. Down - The interface is not connected. Speed / Duplex - The interface is connected. This field displays the port speed and duplex setting (Full or Half). This field displays Connected and the accumulated connection time (hh:mm:ss) when the PPP interface is connected. This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the USG on the interface since it was last connected. This field displays the number of packets received by the USG on the interface since it was last connected. This field displays the transmission speed, in bytes per second, on the interface in the one-
second interval before the screen updated. This field displays the reception speed, in bytes per second, on the interface in the one-
second interval before the screen updated. 6.4 The Traffic Statistics Screen Click Monitor > System Status > Traffic Statistics to display the Traffic Statistics screen. This screen provides basic information about the following for example:
Most-visited Web sites and the number of times each one was visited. This count may not be accurate in some cases because the USG counts HTTP GET packets. Please see Table 35 on page 106 for more information. Most-used protocols or service ports and the amount of traffic on each one USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 105 Chapter 6 Monitor LAN IP with heaviest traffic and how much traffic has been sent to and from each one You use the Traffic Statistics screen to tell the USG when to start and when to stop collecting information for these reports. You cannot schedule data collection; you have to start and stop it manually in the Traffic Statistics screen. Figure 90 Monitor > System Status > Traffic Statistics There is a limit on the number of records shown in the report. Please see Table 36 on page 107 for more information. The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Monitor > System Status > Traffic Statistics LABEL Data Collection Collect Statistics Select this to have the USG collect data for the report. If the USG has already been DESCRIPTION collecting data, the collection period displays to the right. The progress is not tracked here real-time, but you can click the Refresh button to update it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Apply Reset Statistics Interface Sort By Refresh Flush Data
#
Select the interface from which to collect information. You can collect information from Ethernet, VLAN, bridge and PPPoE/PPTP interfaces. Select the type of report to display. Choices are:
Host IP Address/User - displays the IP addresses or users with the most traffic and how much traffic has been sent to and from each one. Service/Port - displays the most-used protocols or service ports and the amount of traffic for each one. Web Site Hits - displays the most-visited Web sites and how many times each one has been visited. Each type of report has different information in the report (below). Click this button to update the report display. Click this button to discard all of the screens statistics and update the report display. These fields are available when the Traffic Type is Host IP Address/User. This field is the rank of each record. The IP addresses and users are sorted by the amount of traffic. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 106 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 35 Monitor > System Status > Traffic Statistics (continued) LABEL Direction DESCRIPTION This field indicates whether the IP address or user is sending or receiving traffic. IP Address/User Amount
#
Service/Port Protocol Direction Amount
#
Web Site Hits Ingress- traffic is coming from the IP address or user to the USG. Egress - traffic is going from the USG to the IP address or user. This field displays the IP address or user in this record. The maximum number of IP addresses or users in this report is indicated in Table 36 on page 107. This field displays how much traffic was sent or received from the indicated IP address or user. If the Direction is Ingress, a red bar is displayed; if the Direction is Egress, a blue bar is displayed. The unit of measure is bytes, Kbytes, Mbytes or Gbytes, depending on the amount of traffic for the particular IP address or user. The count starts over at zero if the number of bytes passes the byte count limit. See Table 36 on page 107. These fields are available when the Traffic Type is Service/Port. This field is the rank of each record. The protocols and service ports are sorted by the amount of traffic. This field displays the service and port in this record. The maximum number of services and service ports in this report is indicated in Table 36 on page 107. This field indicates what protocol the service was using. This field indicates whether the indicated protocol or service port is sending or receiving traffic. Ingress - traffic is coming into the router through the interface Egress - traffic is going out from the router through the interface This field displays how much traffic was sent or received from the indicated service / port. If the Direction is Ingress, a red bar is displayed; if the Direction is Egress, a blue bar is displayed. The unit of measure is bytes, Kbytes, Mbytes, Gbytes, or Tbytes, depending on the amount of traffic for the particular protocol or service port. The count starts over at zero if the number of bytes passes the byte count limit. See Table 36 on page 107. These fields are available when the Traffic Type is Web Site Hits. This field is the rank of each record. The domain names are sorted by the number of hits. This field displays the domain names most often visited. The USG counts each page viewed on a Web site as another hit. The maximum number of domain names in this report is indicated in Table 36 on page 107. This field displays how many hits the Web site received. The USG counts hits by counting HTTP GET packets. Many Web sites have HTTP GET references to other Web sites, and the USG counts these as hits too. The count starts over at zero if the number of hits passes the hit count limit. See Table 36 on page 107. The following table displays the maximum number of records shown in the report, the byte count limit, and the hit count limit. Table 36 Maximum Values for Reports LABEL Maximum Number of Records Byte Count Limit Hit Count Limit DESCRIPTION 20 264 bytes; this is just less than 17 million terabytes. 264 hits; this is over 1.8 x 1019 hits. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 107 Chapter 6 Monitor 6.5 The Session Monitor Screen The Session Monitor screen displays all established sessions that pass through the USG for debugging or statistical analysis. It is not possible to manage sessions in this screen. The following information is displayed. User who started the session Protocol or service port used Source address Destination address Number of bytes received (so far) Number of bytes transmitted (so far) Duration (so far) You can look at all established sessions that passed through the USG by user, service, source IP address, or destination IP address. You can also filter the information by user, protocol / service or service group, source address, and/or destination address and view it by user. Click Monitor > System Status > Session Monitor to display the following screen. Figure 91 Monitor > System Status > Session Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Monitor > System Status > Session Monitor LABEL View DESCRIPTION Select how you want the established sessions that passed through the USG to be displayed. Choices are:
sessions by users - display all active sessions grouped by user sessions by services - display all active sessions grouped by service or protocol sessions by source IP - display all active sessions grouped by source IP address sessions by destination IP - display all active sessions grouped by destination IP address all sessions - filter the active sessions by the User, Service, Source Address, and Destination Address, and display each session individually (sorted by user). Click this button to update the information on the screen. The screen also refreshes automatically when you open and close the screen. The User, Service, Source Address, and Destination Address fields display if you view all sessions. Select your desired filter criteria and click the Refresh button to filter the list of sessions. This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Type the user whose sessions you want to view. It is not possible to type part of the user name or use wildcards in this field;
you must enter the whole user name. Refresh User USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 108 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 37 Monitor > System Status > Session Monitor (continued) LABEL Service Source Destination Rx Tx Duration Active Sessions Show
#
User Service Source Destination Rx Tx Duration DESCRIPTION This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Select the service or service group whose sessions you want to view. The USG identifies the service by comparing the protocol and destination port of each packet to the protocol and port of each services that is defined. This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Type the source IP address whose sessions you want to view. You cannot include the source port. This field displays when View is set to all sessions. Type the destination IP address whose sessions you want to view. You cannot include the destination port. This field displays the amount of information received by the source in the active session. This field displays the amount of information transmitted by the source in the active session. This field displays the length of the active session in seconds. This is the total number of established sessions that passed through the USG which matched the search criteria. Select the number of active sessions displayed on each page. You can use the arrow keys on the right to change pages. This field is the rank of each record. The names are sorted by the name of user in active session. You can use the pull down menu on the right to choose sorting method. This field displays the user in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by users (or all sessions) report, click + or - to display or hide details about a users sessions. This field displays the protocol used in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by services report, click + or - to display or hide details about a protocols sessions. This field displays the source IP address and port in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by source IP report, click + or - to display or hide details about a source IP addresss sessions. This field displays the destination IP address and port in each active session. If you are looking at the sessions by destination IP report, click + or - to display or hide details about a destination IP addresss sessions. This field displays the amount of information received by the source in the active session. This field displays the amount of information transmitted by the source in the active session. This field displays the length of the active session in seconds. 6.6 IGMP Statistics The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Statistics is used by USG IP hosts to inform adjacent router about multicast group memberships. It can also be used for one-to-many networking applications such as online streaming video and gaming, distribution of company newsletters, updating address book of mobile computer users in the field allowing more efficient use of resources when supporting these types of applications. Click Monitor > System Status >
IGMP Statistics to open the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 109 Chapter 6 Monitor Figure 92 Monitor > System Status > IGMP Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Monitor > System Status > IGMP Statistics LABEL
#
DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific I GMP Statistics. This field displays the group of devices in the IGMP. This field displays the host source IP information of the IGMP. This field displays the incoming interface thats connected on the IGMP. This field displays the packet size of the data being transferred. This field displays the size of the data being transferred in Byes. This field displays the outgoing interface thats connected on the IGMP. Group Source IP Incoming Interface Packet Count Bytes Outgoing Interface 6.7 The DDNS Status Screen The DDNS Status screen shows the status of the USGs DDNS domain names. Click Monitor >
System Status > DDNS Status to open the following screen. Figure 93 Monitor > System Status > DDNS Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Monitor > System Status > DDNS Status LABEL Update DESCRIPTION Click this to have the USG update the profile to the DDNS server. The USG attempts to resolve the IP address for the domain name. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific DDNS server. This field displays the descriptive profile name for this entry. This field displays each domain name the USG can route. This is the (resolved) IP address of the domain name.
#
Profile Name Domain Name Effective IP USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 110 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 39 Monitor > System Status > DDNS Status (continued) LABEL Last Update Status DESCRIPTION This shows whether the last attempt to resolve the IP address for the domain name was successful or not. Updating means the USG is currently attempting to resolve the IP address for the domain name. This shows when the last attempt to resolve the IP address for the domain name occurred (in year-month-day hour:minute:second format). Last Update Time 6.8 IP/MAC Binding Click Monitor > System Status > IP/MAC Binding to open the IP/MAC Binding screen. This screen lists the devices that have received an IP address from USG interfaces with IP/MAC binding enabled and have ever established a session with the USG. Devices that have never established a session with the USG do not display in the list. Figure 94 Monitor > System Status > IP/MAC Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Monitor > System Status > IP/MAC Binding LABEL Interface DESCRIPTION Select a USG interface that has IP/MAC binding enabled to show to which devices it has assigned an IP address. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific IP/MAC binding entry. This is the IP address that the USG assigned to a device. This field displays the name used to identify this device on the network (the computer name). The USG learns these from the DHCP client requests. This field displays the MAC address to which the IP address is currently assigned. This is when the device last established a session with the USG through this interface. This field displays the description of the IP/MAC binding.
#
IP Address Host Name MAC Address Last Access Description 6.9 The Login Users Screen Use this screen to look at a list of the users currently logged into the USG. To access this screen, click Monitor > System Status > Login Users. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 111 Chapter 6 Monitor Figure 95 Monitor > System Status > Login Users The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Monitor > System Status > Login Users LABEL Force Logout
#
User ID Reauth Lease T. DESCRIPTION Select a user ID and click this icon to end a users session. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with any entry. This field displays the user name of each user who is currently logged in to the USG. This field displays the amount of reauthentication time remaining and the amount of lease time remaining for each user. This field displays the way the user logged in to the USG. This field displays the IP address of the computer used to log in to the USG. This field displays the MAC address of the computer used to log in to the USG. This field displays the types of user accounts the USG uses. If the user type is ext-
user (external user), this field will show its external-group information when you move your mouse over it. If the external user matches two external-group objects, both external-group object names will be shown. Click this button to update the information in the screen. Type IP Address MAC User Info Refresh 6.10 Cellular Status Screen This screen displays your mobile broadband connection status. Click Monitor > System Status >
Cellular Status to display this screen. Figure 96 Monitor > System Status > Cellular Status USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 112 Chapter 6 Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Monitor > System Status > Cellular Status LABEL Refresh More Information
#
Extension Slot Connected Device Status DESCRIPTION Click this button to update the information in the screen. Click this to display more information on your mobile broadband, such as the signal strength, IMEA/ESN and IMSI. This is only available when the mobile broadband device attached and activated on your USG. Refer to Section 6.11 on page 114. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. This field displays where the entrys cellular card is located. This field displays the model name of the cellular card. No device - no mobile broadband device is connected to the USG. No Service - no mobile broadband network is available in the area; you cannot connect to the Internet. Limited Service - returned by the service provider in cases where the SIM card is expired, the user failed to pay for the service and so on; you cannot connect to the Internet. Device detected - displays when you connect a mobile broadband device. Device error - a mobile broadband device is connected but there is an error. Probe device fail - the USGs test of the mobile broadband device failed. Probe device ok - the USGs test of the mobile broadband device succeeded. Check lock fail - the USGs check of whether or not the mobile broadband device is Init device fail - the USG was not able to initialize the mobile broadband device. Init device ok - the USG initialized the mobile broadband card. locked failed. Device locked - the mobile broadband device is locked. SIM error - there is a SIM card error on the mobile broadband device. SIM locked-PUK - the PUK is locked on the mobile broadband devices SIM card. SIM locked-PIN - the PIN is locked on the mobile broadband devices SIM card. Unlock PUK fail - Your attempt to unlock a WCDMA mobile broadband devices PUK failed because you entered an incorrect PUK. Unlock PIN fail - Your attempt to unlock a WCDMA mobile broadband devices PIN failed because you entered an incorrect PIN. Unlock device fail - Your attempt to unlock a CDMA2000 mobile broadband device failed because you entered an incorrect device code. Device unlocked - You entered the correct device code and unlocked a CDMA2000 mobile broadband device. Get dev-info fail - The USG cannot get cellular device information. Get dev-info ok - The USG succeeded in retrieving mobile broadband device information. Searching network - The mobile broadband device is searching for a network. Get signal fail - The mobile broadband device cannot get a signal from a network. Network found - The mobile broadband device found a network. Apply config - The USG is applying your configuration to the mobile broadband device. Inactive - The mobile broadband interface is disabled. Active - The mobile broadband interface is enabled. Incorrect device - The connected mobile broadband device is not compatible with the USG. Correct device - The USG detected a compatible mobile broadband device. Set band fail - Applying your band selection was not successful. Set band ok - The USG successfully applied your band selection. Set profile fail - Applying your ISP settings was not successful. Set profile ok - The USG successfully applied your ISP settings. PPP fail - The USG failed to create a PPP connection for the cellular interface. Need auth-password - You need to enter the password for the mobile broadband card in the cellular edit screen. Device ready - The USG successfully applied all of your configuration and you can use the mobile broadband connection. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 113 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 42 Monitor > System Status > Cellular Status (continued) LABEL Service Provider DESCRIPTION This displays the name of your network service provider. This shows Limited Service if the service provider has stopped service to the mobile broadband card. For example if the bill has not been paid or the account has expired. This field displays what type of cellular network the mobile broadband connection is using. The network type varies depending on the mobile broadband card you inserted and could be UMTS, UMTS/HSDPA, GPRS or EDGE when you insert a GSM mobile broadband card, or 1xRTT, EVDO Rev.0 or EVDO Rev.A when you insert a CDMA mobile broadband card. This displays the strength of the signal. The signal strength mainly depends on the antenna output power and the distance between your USG and the service providers base station. Cellular System Signal Quality 6.11 The UPnP Port Status Screen Use this screen to look at the NAT port mapping rules that UPnP creates on the USG. To access this screen, click Monitor > System Status > UPnP Port Status. Figure 97 Monitor > System Status > UPnP Port Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Monitor > System Status > UPnP Port Status LABEL Remove
#
Remote Host DESCRIPTION Select an entry and click this button to remove it from the list. This is the index number of the UPnP-created NAT mapping rule entry. This field displays the source IP address (on the WAN) of inbound IP packets. Since this is often a wildcard, the field may be blank. When the field is blank, the USG forwards all traffic sent to the External Port on the WAN interface to the Internal Client on the Internal Port. When this field displays an external IP address, the NAT rule has the USG forward inbound packets to the Internal Client from that IP address only. This field displays the port number that the USG listens on (on the WAN port) for connection requests destined for the NAT rules Internal Port and Internal Client. The USG forwards incoming packets (from the WAN) with this port number to the Internal Client on the Internal Port (on the LAN). If the field displays 0, the USG ignores the Internal Port value and forwards requests on all external port numbers (that are otherwise unmapped) to the Internal Client. This field displays the protocol of the NAT mapping rule (TCP or UDP). External Port Protocol USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 114 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 43 Monitor > System Status > UPnP Port Status (continued) LABEL Internal Port DESCRIPTION This field displays the port number on the Internal Client to which the USG should forward incoming connection requests. This field displays the DNS host name or IP address of a client on the LAN. Multiple NAT clients can use a single port simultaneously if the internal client field is set to 255.255.255.255 for UDP mappings. This field displays the type of the client application on the LAN. This field displays a text explanation of the NAT mapping rule. Click this to remove all mapping rules from the NAT table. Click this button to update the information in the screen. Internal Client Internal Client Type Description Delete All Refresh 6.12 USB Storage Screen This screen displays information about a connected USB storage device. Click Monitor > System Status > USB Storage to display this screen. Figure 98 Monitor > System Status > USB Storage The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Monitor > System Status > USB Storage LABEL Device description Usage DESCRIPTION This is a basic description of the type of USB device. This field displays how much of the USB storage devices capacity is currently being used out of its total capacity and what percentage that makes. This field displays what file system the USB storage device is formatted with. This field displays Unknown if the file system of the USB storage device is not supported by the USG, such as NTFS. This field displays the connection speed the USB storage device supports. Filesystem Speed USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 115 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 44 Monitor > System Status > USB Storage (continued) LABEL Status DESCRIPTION Ready - you can have the USG use the USB storage device. Detail Click Remove Now to stop the USG from using the USB storage device so you can remove it. Unused - the connected USB storage device was manually unmounted by using the Remove Now button or for some reason the USG cannot mount it. Click Use It to have the USG mount a connected USB storage device. This button is grayed out if the file system is not supported (unknown) by the USG. none - no USB storage device is connected. This field displays any other information the USG retrieves from the USB storage device. Deactivated - the use of a USB storage device is disabled (turned off) on the USG. OutofSpace - the available disk space is less than the disk space full threshold. Mounting - the USG is mounting the USB storage device. Removing - the USG is unmounting the USB storage device. none - the USB device is operating normally or not connected. 6.13 Ethernet Neighbor Screen The Ethernet Neighbor screen allows you to view the USGs neighboring devices in one place. It uses Smart Connect, that is Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) for discovering and configuring LLDP-aware devices in the same broadcast domain as the USG that youre logged into using the web configurator. LLDP is a layer-2 protocol that allows a network device to advertise its identity and capabilities on the local network. It also allows the device to maintain and store information from adjacent devices which are directly connected to the network device. This helps you discover network changes and perform necessary network reconfiguration and management. Note: Enable Smart Connect in the System > ZON screen. See also System > ZON for more information on the ZyXEL One Network (ZON) utility that uses the ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP) for discovering and configuring ZDP-aware ZyXEL devices in the same network as the computer on which the ZON utility is installed. Click Monitor > System Status > Ethernet Neighbor to see the following screen Figure 99 Monitor > System Status > Ethernet Neighbor USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 116 Chapter 6 Monitor The following table describes the fields in the previous screen. Table 45 Monitor > System Status > Ethernet Neighbor LABEL Local Port (Description) DESCRIPTION This field displays the port of the USG, on which the neighboring device is discovered. Model Name System Name Firmware Version Port (Description) IP Address MAC Address Refresh For USGs that support Port Role, if ports 3 to 5 are grouped together and there is a connection to P5 only, the USG will display P3 as the interface port number
(even though there is no connection to that port). This field displays the model name of the discovered device. This field displays the system name of the discovered device. This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device. This field displays the first internal port on the discovered device. Internal is an interface type displayed in the Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit screen. For example, if P1 and P2 are WAN, P3 to P5 are LAN, and P6 is DMZ, then USG will display P3 as the first internal interface port number. For USGs that support Port Role, if ports 3 to 5 are grouped together and there is a connection to P5 only, the USG will display P3 as the first internal interface port number (even though there is no connection to that port). This field displays the IP address of the discovered device. This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device. Click this button to update the information in the screen. 6.14 Wireless Wireless contains AP information and Station Info menus. 6.14.1 Wireless AP Information: Radio List Click Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List to display the Radio List screen. Figure 100 Monitor > Wireless > Radio List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Monitor > Wireless > Radio List LABEL More Information DESCRIPTION Click this icon to see the traffic statistics, station count, SSID, Security Mode and VLAN ID information on the AP. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific radio. This field displays the description of the AP.
#
AP Description USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 117 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 46 Monitor > Wireless > Radio List LABEL Model MAC Address Radio OP Mode Profile Frequency Band Channel ID Tx Power Station Rx PKT Tx PKT Rx FCS Error Count Tx Retry Count DESCRIPTION This field displays the APs hardware model information. It displays N/A (not applicable) only when the AP disconnects from the USG and the information is unavailable as a result. This field displays the MAC address of the AP. This field displays the Radio number. For example 1. This field displays the operating mode of the AP. It displays n/a for the profile for a radio not using an AP profile. AP Mode means the AP can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data traffic through to the USG to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an upstream gateway for managing). MON Mode means the AP monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes their information on to the USG. If an AP is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from wireless clients. This field displays the AP Profile for the Radio. It displays n/A for the radio profile not using an AP profile. It displays default if using a default profile. This field displays the WLAN frequency band using the IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac standard of 2.4 or 5 GHz. This field displays the WLAN channels using the IEEE 802.11 protocols. This field displays the transmission power the USG is using. This field displays the station count information. This field displays the data packets of incoming traffic on the AP. This field displays the data packet of outgoing traffic on the AP. This field displays the erroneous data packet count received and detected by Frame Check Sequence (FCS) This field displays the data packet count that were transmitted for retry. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 118 Chapter 6 Monitor 6.14.2 Radio List More Information This screen allows you to view detailed information about a selected radios SSID(s), wireless traffic and wireless clients for the preceding 24 hours. To access this window, select an entry and click the More Information button in the Radio List screen. Figure 101 Monitor > Wireless > AP Information > Radio List > More Information USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 119 Chapter 6 Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Monitor > Wireless > AP Info > Radio List > More Information LABEL MBSSID Detail DESCRIPTION This list shows information about the SSID(s) that is associated with the radio. This is the items sequential number in the list. It has no bearing on the actual data in this list. This displays an SSID associated with this radio. There can be up to eight maximum. This displays the MAC address associated with the SSID. This displays the security mode in which the SSID is operating. This displays the VLAN ID associated with the SSID. This graph displays the overall traffic information about the radio over the preceding 24 hours. This axis represents the amount of data moved across this radio per second. This axis represents the amount of time over which the data moved across this radio. This graph displays information about all the wireless clients that have connected to the radio over the preceding 24 hours. The y-axis represents the number of connected wireless clients. The x-axis shows the time over which a wireless client was connected. This field displays the date and time the information in the window was last updated. Click this to close this window. Click this to close this window.
#
SSID Name BSSID Security Mode VLAN Traffic Statistics y-axis x-axis Station Count y-axis x-axis Last Update OK Cancel 6.14.3 Wireless Station Info This screen displays information about connected wireless stations. Click Monitor > Wireless >
Station Information to display this screen. Figure 102 Monitor > Wireless > Station List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Monitor > Wireless > Station List LABEL
#
MAC Address Associated AP SSID Name DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific station. This field displays the MAC address of the station. This field displays the AP that is associated with the station. This indicates the name of the wireless network to which the station is connected. A single AP can have multiple SSIDs or networks. This field displays the security mode the station is using. Security Mode USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 120 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 48 Monitor > Wireless > Station List LABEL Signal Strength DESCRIPTION Channel Band IP Address Tx Rate Rx Rate Tx Rx Association Time Refresh This field displays the signal strength of the station. The signal strength mainly depends on the antenna output power and the distance between the station and the AP. This indicates the number the channel used by the station to connect to the network. This indicates the frequency band which is currently being used by the station. This field displays the IP address of the station. An 169.x.x.x IP address is a private IP address that means the station didn't get the IP address from a DHCP server. This field displays the transmit data rate of the station. This field displays the receive data rate of the station. This field displays the number of packets transmitted from the station. This field displays the number of packets received by the station. This field displays the time duration the station was online and offline. Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page. 6.14.4 Detected Device Use this screen to view information about wireless devices detected by the AP. Click Monitor >
Wireless > Detected Device to access this screen. Note: At least one radio of the APs connected to the USG must be set to monitor mode (in the Configuration > Wireless > AP Management screen) in order to detect other wireless devices in its vicinity. Figure 103 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device LABEL
#
Status Device MAC Address SSID Name Channel ID 802.11 Mode DESCRIPTION This is the stations index number in this list. This indicates the detected devices status. This indicates the detected devices network type (such as infrastructure or ad-hoc). This indicates the detected devices MAC address. This indicates the detected devices SSID. This indicates the detected devices channel ID. This indicates the 802.11 mode (a/b/g/n/ac) transmitted by the detected device. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 121 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 49 Monitor > Wireless > Detected Device (continued) LABEL Security Description DESCRIPTION This indicates the encryption method (if any) used by the detected device. This displays the detected devices description. For more on managing friendly and rogue APs, see the Configuration > Wireless > MON Mode screen. This indicates the last time the device was detected by the USG. Click this to refresh the items displayed on this page. Last Seen Refresh 6.15 The IPSec Monitor Screen You can use the IPSec Monitor screen to display and to manage active IPSec To access this screen, click Monitor > VPN Monitor > IPSec. The following screen appears. SAs. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. Figure 104 Monitor > VPN Monitor > IPSec Each field is described in the following table. Table 50 Monitor > VPN Monitor > IPSec LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Type the name of a IPSec SA here and click Search to find it (if it is associated). You can use a keyword or regular expression. Use up to 30 alphanumeric and _+-
.()!$*^:?|{}[]<>/ characters. See Section 6.15.1 on page 123 for more details. Type the IP address(es) or names of the local and remote policies for an IPSec SA and click Search to find it. You can use a keyword or regular expression. Use up to 30 alphanumeric and _+-.()!$*^:?|{}[]<>/ characters. See Section 6.15.1 on page 123 for more details. Click this button to search for an IPSec SA that matches the information you specified above. Select an IPSec SA and click this button to disconnect it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific SA. This field displays the name of the IPSec SA. This field displays the content of the local and remote policies for this IPSec SA. The IP addresses, not the address objects, are displayed. This field displays the Internet Key Exchange (IKE) name. This field displays the cookies information that initiates the IKE. This field displays the IP address of local computer. Policy Search Disconnect
#
Name Policy IKE Name Cookies My Address USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 122 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 50 Monitor > VPN Monitor > IPSec (continued) LABEL Secure Gateway Up Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the secure gateway information. This field displays how many seconds the IPSec SA has been active. This field displays N/A if the IPSec SA uses manual keys. This field displays how many seconds remain in the SA life time, before the USG automatically disconnects the IPSec SA. This field displays N/A if the IPSec SA uses manual keys. This field displays the amount of traffic that has gone through the IPSec SA from the remote IPSec router to the USG since the IPSec SA was established. This field displays the amount of traffic that has gone through the IPSec SA from the USG to the remote IPSec router since the IPSec SA was established. Timeout Inbound (Bytes) Outbound
(Bytes) 6.15.1 Regular Expressions in Searching IPSec SAs A question mark (?) lets a single character in the VPN connection or policy name vary. For example, use a?c (without the quotation marks) to specify abc, acc and so on. Wildcards (*) let multiple VPN connection or policy names match the pattern. For example, use
*abc (without the quotation marks) to specify any VPN connection or policy name that ends with abc. A VPN connection named testabc would match. There could be any number (of any type) of characters in front of the abc at the end and the VPN connection or policy name would still match. A VPN connection or policy name named testacc for example would not match. A * in the middle of a VPN connection or policy name has the USG check the beginning and end and ignore the middle. For example, with abc*123, any VPN connection or policy name starting with abc and ending in 123 matches, no matter how many characters are in between. The whole VPN connection or policy name has to match if you do not use a question mark or asterisk. 6.16 The SSL Screen The USG keeps track of the users who are currently logged into the VPN SSL client. Click Monitor
> VPN Monitor > SSL to display the user list. Use this screen to do the following:
View a list of active SSL VPN connections. Log out individual users and delete related session information. Once a user logs out, the corresponding entry is removed from the screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 123 Chapter 6 Monitor Figure 105 Monitor > VPN Monitor > SSL The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Monitor > VPN Monitor > SSL LABEL Disconnect DESCRIPTION Select a connection and click this button to terminate the users connection and delete corresponding session information from the USG. Click Refresh to update this screen. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific SSL. This field displays the account user name used to establish this SSL VPN connection. This field displays the name of the SSL VPN application the user is accessing. This field displays the IP address the user used to establish this SSL VPN connection. This field displays the time this connection was established. This field displays the number of bytes received by the USG on this connection. This field displays the number of bytes transmitted by the USG on this connection. Refresh
#
User Access Login Address Connected Time Inbound (Bytes) Outbound (Bytes) 6.17 The L2TP over IPSec Session Monitor Screen Click Monitor > VPN Monitor > L2TP over IPSec to open the following screen. Use this screen to display and manage the USGs connected L2TP VPN sessions. Figure 106 Monitor > VPN Monitor > L2TP over IPSec The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 52 Monitor > VPN Monitor > L2TP over IPSec LABEL Disconnect Refresh
#
User Name DESCRIPTION Select a connection and click this button to disconnect it. Click Refresh to update this screen. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific L2TP VPN session. This field displays the remote users user name. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 124 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 52 Monitor > VPN Monitor > L2TP over IPSec (continued) LABEL Hostname Assigned IP DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of the computer that has this L2TP VPN connection with the USG. This field displays the IP address that the USG assigned for the remote users computer to use within the L2TP VPN tunnel. This field displays the public IP address that the remote user is using to connect to the Internet. Public IP 6.18 The Content Filter Screen Click Monitor > UTM Statistics > Content Filter to display the following screen. This screen displays content filter statistics. Figure 107 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Content Filter USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 125 Chapter 6 Monitor The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Content Filter LABEL General Settings Collect Statistics DESCRIPTION Select this check box to have the USG collect content filtering statistics. The collection starting time displays after you click Apply. All of the statistics in this screen are for the time period starting at the time displayed here. The format is year, month, day and hour, minute, second. All of the statistics are erased if you restart the USG or click Flush Data. Collecting starts over and a new collection start time displays. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Click this button to update the report display. Click this button to discard all of the screens statistics and update the report display. This field displays the number of web pages that the USGs content filter feature has checked. This is the number of web pages that the USG blocked access. This is the number of web pages for which the USG displayed a warning message to the access requesters. This is the number of web pages to which the USG allowed access. This is the number of requested web pages that the USGs content filtering service identified as posing a threat to users. This is the number of requested web pages that the USGs content filtering service identified as belonging to a category that was selected to be managed. This is the number of web pages that matched an external database content filtering category selected in the USG and for which the USG displayed a warning before allowing users access. This is the number of web pages to which the USG did not allow access due to the content filtering custom service configuration. This is the number of web pages to which the USG limited access or removed cookies due to the content filtering custom service's restricted web features configuration. Apply Reset Refresh Flush Data Web Request Statistics Total Web Pages Inspected Blocked Warned Passed Category Hit Summary Security Threat
(unsafe) Managed Web Pages Block Hit Summary Web Pages Warned by Category Service Web Pages Blocked by Custom Service Restricted Web Features Forbidden Web Sites This is the number of web pages to which the USG did not allow access because URL Keywords Web Pages Blocked Without Policy Report Server they matched the content filtering custom services forbidden web sites list. This is the number of web pages to which the USG did not allow access because they contained one of the content filtering custom services list of forbidden keywords. This is the number of web pages to which the USG did not allow access because they were not rated by the external database content filtering service. Click this link to go to http://www.myZyXEL.com where you can view content filtering reports after you have activated the category-based content filtering subscription service. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 126 Chapter 6 Monitor 6.19 The Anti-Spam Screens The Anti-Spam menu contains the Report and Status screens. 6.19.1 Anti-Spam Report Click Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam to display the following screen. This screen displays spam statistics. Figure 108 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam LABEL Collect Statistics DESCRIPTION Select this check box to have the USG collect anti-spam statistics. The collection starting time displays after you click Apply. All of the statistics in this screen are for the time period starting at the time displayed here. The format is year, month, day and hour, minute, second. All of the statistics are erased if you restart the USG or click Flush Data. Collecting starts over and a new collection start time displays. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Click this button to update the report display. Apply Reset Refresh USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 127 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 54 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam (continued) LABEL Flush Data Total Mails Scanned Clear Mails Clear Mails Detected by Whitelist Spam Mails Spam Mails Detected by Black List Spam Mails Detected by IP Reputation Spam Mails Detected by Mail Content Spam Mails Detected by DNSBL Spam Mails with Virus Detected by Mail Content Virus Mails Query Timeout Mail Sessions Forwarded Mail Sessions Dropped Top Sender By
#
Sender IP DESCRIPTION Click this button to discard all of the screens statistics and update the report display. This field displays the number of e-mails that the USGs anti-spam feature has checked. This is the number of e-mails that the USG has determined to not be spam. This is the number of e-mails that matched an entry in the USGs anti-spam white list. This is the number of e-mails that the USG has determined to be spam. This is the number of e-mails that matched an entry in the USGs anti-spam black list. This is the number of e-mails that the USG has determined to be spam by IP Reputation. Spam or Unwanted Bulk Email is determined by the senders IP address. This is the number of e-mails that the USG has determined to have malicious contents. The USG can check the sender and relay IP addresses in an e-mails header against DNS (Domain Name Service)-based spam Black Lists (DNSBLs). This is the number of e-mails that had a sender or relay IP address in the header which matched one of the DNSBLs that the USG uses. This is the number of e-mails that the USG has determined to have malicious contents and attached with virus. This is the number of e-mails that the USG has determined to be attached with virus. This is how many queries that were sent to the USGs configured list of DNSBL domains or Mail Scan services and did not receive a response in time. This is how many e-mail sessions the USG allowed because they exceeded the maximum number of e-mail sessions that the anti-spam feature can check at a time. You can see the USGs threshold of concurrent e-mail sessions in the Anti-Spam >
Status screen. Use the Anti-Spam > General screen to set whether the USG forwards or drops sessions that exceed this threshold. This is how many e-mail sessions the USG dropped because they exceeded the maximum number of e-mail sessions that the anti-spam feature can check at a time. You can see the USGs threshold of concurrent e-mail sessions in the Anti-Spam >
Status screen. Use the Anti-Spam > General screen to set whether the USG forwards or drops sessions that exceed this threshold. Use this field to list the top e-mail or IP addresses from which the USG has detected the most spam. Select Sender IP to list the source IP addresses from which the USG has detected the most spam. Select Sender Email Address to list the top e-mail addresses from which the USG has detected the most spam. This field displays the entrys rank in the list of the top entries. This column displays when you display the entries by Sender IP. It shows the source IP address of spam e-mails that the USG has detected. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 128 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 54 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam (continued) LABEL Sender Email Address DESCRIPTION This column displays when you display the entries by Sender Email Address. This column displays the e-mail addresses from which the USG has detected the most spam. This field displays how many spam e-mails the USG detected from the sender. Occurrence 6.19.2 The Anti-Spam Status Screen Click Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam > Status to display the Anti-Spam Status screen. Use the Anti-Spam Status screen to see how many e-mail sessions the anti-spam feature is scanning and statistics for the DNSBLs. Figure 109 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam > Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam > Status LABEL Refresh Flush DESCRIPTION Click this button to update the information displayed on this screen. Click this button to clear the DNSBL statistics. This also clears the concurrent mail session scanning bars historical high. The darker shaded part of the bar shows how much of the USGs total spam checking capability is currently being used. Concurrent Mail Session Scanning Mail Scan Statistics
#
Service Total Queries The lighter shaded part of the bar and the pop-up show the historical high. The first number to the right of the bar is how many e-mail sessions the USG is presently checking for spam. The second number is the maximum number of e-
mail sessions that the USG can check at once. An e-mail session is when an e-
mail client and e-mail server (or two e-mail servers) connect through the USG. These are the statistics for the service the USG uses. These statistics are for when the USG actually queries the service servers. This is the entrys index number in the list. This displays the name of the service. This is the total number of queries the USG has sent to this service. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 129 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 55 Monitor > UTM Statistics > Anti-Spam > Status (continued) LABEL Avg. Response Time (sec) This is the average for how long it takes to receive a reply from this service. No Response DNSBL Statistics DESCRIPTION This is how many queries the USG sent to this service without receiving a reply. These are the statistics for the DNSBL the USG uses. These statistics are for when the USG actually queries the DNSBL servers. Matches for DNSBL responses stored in the cache do not affect these statistics. This is the entrys index number in the list. These are the DNSBLs the USG uses to check sender and relay IP addresses in e-
mails. This is the total number of DNS queries the USG has sent to this DNSBL. Total Queries Avg. Response Time (sec) This is the average for how long it takes to receive a reply from this DNSBL. No Response This is how many DNS queries the USG sent to this DNSBL without receiving a reply.
#
DNSBL Domain 6.20 Log Screens Log messages are stored in two separate logs, one for regular log messages and one for debugging messages. In the regular log, you can look at all the log messages by selecting All Logs, or you can select a specific category of log messages (for example, security policy or user). You can also look at the debugging log by selecting Debug Log. All debugging messages have the same priority. 6.20.1 View Log To access this screen, click Monitor > Log. The log is displayed in the following screen. Note: When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first. The maximum possible number of log messages in the USG varies by model. Events that generate an alert (as well as a log message) display in red. Regular logs display in black. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. The Web Configurator saves the filter settings if you leave the View Log screen and return to it later. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 130 Chapter 6 Monitor Figure 110 Monitor > Log > View Log The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Monitor > Log > View Log LABEL Show Filter DESCRIPTION Click this button to show or hide the filter settings. Display Email Log Now Refresh Clear Log
#
Time Priority Category Message Source Destination Protocol Search If the filter settings are hidden, the Display, Email Log Now, Refresh, and Clear Log fields are available. If the filter settings are shown, the Display, Priority, Source Address, Destination Address, Service, Keyword, and Search fields are available. Select the category of log message(s) you want to view. You can also view All Logs at one time, or you can view the Debug Log. Click this button to send log message(s) to the Active e-mail address(es) specified in the Send Log To field on the Log Settings page. Click this button to update the information in the screen. Click this button to clear the whole log, regardless of what is currently displayed on the screen. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log message. This field displays the time the log message was recorded. This displays when you show the filter. Select the priority of log messages to display. The log displays the log messages with this priority or higher. Choices are:
any, emerg, alert, crit, error, warn, notice, and info, from highest priority to lowest priority. This field is read-only if the Category is Debug Log. This field displays the log that generated the log message. It is the same value used in the Display and (other) Category fields. This field displays the reason the log message was generated. The text [count=x], where x is a number, appears at the end of the Message field if log consolidation is turned on and multiple entries were aggregated to generate into this one. This displays when you show the filter. Type the source IP address of the incoming packet that generated the log message. Do not include the port in this filter. This displays when you show the filter. Type the IP address of the destination of the incoming packet when the log message was generated. Do not include the port in this filter. This displays when you show the filter. Select a service protocol whose log messages you would like to see. This displays when you show the filter. Click this button to update the log using the current filter settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 131 Chapter 6 Monitor Table 56 Monitor > Log > View Log (continued) LABEL Priority DESCRIPTION This field displays the priority of the log message. It has the same range of values as the Priority field above. This field displays the source IP address and the port number in the event that generated the log message. This field displays the destination IP address and the port number of the event that generated the log message. This field displays any additional information about the log message. Source Destination Note USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 132 CHAPTER 7 Licensing 7.1 Registration Overview Use the Configuration > Licensing > Registration screens to register your USG and manage its service subscriptions. Use the Registration screen (see Section 7.1.2 on page 134) to go to portal.myzyxel.com to register your USG and activate a service, such as content filtering. Use the Service screen (see Section 7.1.3 on page 134) to display the status of your service registrations and upgrade licenses. Note: The USG models need a license for UTM (Unified Threat management) functionality. 7.1.1 What you Need to Know This section introduces the topics covered in this chapter. myZyXEL.com myZyXEL.com is ZyXELs online services center where you can register your USG and manage subscription services available for the USG. To update signature files or use a subscription service, you have to register the USG and activate the corresponding service at myZyXEL.com (through the USG). Note: You need to create a myZyXEL.com account before you can register your device and activate the services at myZyXEL.com. You need your USGs serial number and LAN MAC address to register it. Refer to the web sites on-
line help for details. Subscription Services Available The USG can use anti-spam, SSL VPN, and content filtering subscription services. The USG models need a license for UTM (Unified Threat Management) functionality - see Section 1.1 on page 18 for details. You can purchase an iCard and enter the license key from it, at www.myzyxel.com to have the USG use UTM services or have the USG use more SSL VPN tunnels. See below the respective chapters in this guide for more information about UTM features. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 133 Chapter 7 Licensing 7.1.2 Registration Screen Click the link in this screen to register your USG at myZyXEL.com. The USG should already have Internet access before you can access it. Click Configuration > Licensing > Registration in the navigation panel to open the screen as shown next. Click on the icon to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthrough and other information. Figure 111 Configuration > Licensing > Registration > portal.myzyxel.com 7.1.3 Service Screen Use this screen to display the status of your service registrations and upgrade licenses. To activate or extend a standard service subscription, purchase an iCard and enter the iCards PIN number
(license key) in this screen. Click Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service to open the screen as shown next. Figure 112 Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 57 Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service LABEL License Status
#
Service Status Registration Type This is the entrys position in the list. This lists the services that available on the USG. This field displays whether a service is activated (Licensed) or not (Not Licensed) or expired (Expired). This field displays whether you applied for a trial application (Trial) or registered a service with your iCards PIN number (Standard). This field is blank when a service is not activated. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 134 Chapter 7 Licensing Table 57 Configuration > Licensing > Registration > Service (continued) LABEL Expiration Date Count DESCRIPTION This field displays the date your service expires. This field displays how many VPN tunnels you can use with your current license. This field does not apply to the other services. Click this button to renew service license information (such as the registration status and expiration day). Service License Refresh USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 135 CHAPTER 8 Wireless 8.1 Overview Use the Wireless screens to configure how the USG manages the Access Points (APs) that are connected to it. 8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The AP Management screen (Section 8.2 on page 137) manages all of the APs connected to the USG. The DCS screen (Section 8.2 on page 137) configures dynamic radio channel selection. 8.1.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Station / Wireless Client A station or wireless client is any wireless-capable device that can connect to an AP using a wireless signal. Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) Dynamic Channel Selection (DCS) is a feature that allows an AP to automatically select the radio channel upon which it broadcasts by scanning the area around it and determining what channels are currently being used by other devices. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 136 Chapter 8 Wireless 8.2 AP Management Screen Use this screen to manage the USGs general wireless settings. Click Configuration > Wireless >
AP Management to access this screen. Figure 113 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management Each field is described in the following table. Table 58 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management LABEL Radio Setting Radio OP Mode Select the operating mode. DESCRIPTION AP Mode means the radio can receive connections from wireless clients and pass their data traffic through to the USG to be managed (or subsequently passed on to an upstream gateway for managing). MON Mode means the radio monitors the broadcast area for other APs, then passes their information on to the USG where it can be determined if those APs are friendly or rogue. If a radio is set to this mode it cannot receive connections from wireless clients. Select the radio profile the radio uses. Enter the output power (between 0 to 30 dBm) of the USG in this field. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power of the USG to reduce interference with other APs. Note: Reducing the output power also reduces the USGs effective broadcast radius. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. In some tables you can just click a table entry and edit it directly in the table. For those types of tables small red triangles display for table entries with changes that you have not yet applied. This field shows the index number of the SSID This field displays the SSID profile that is associated with the radio profile. Radio Profile Max Output Power MBSSID Settings Edit
#
SSID Profile USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 137 Chapter 8 Wireless Table 58 Configuration > Wireless > AP Management (continued) LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to close the window with changes unsaved. 8.3 DCS Screen Use this screen to configure dynamic radio channel selection. Click Configuration > Wireless >
DCS to access this screen. Figure 114 Configuration > Wireless > DCS Each field is described in the following table. Table 59 Configuration > Wireless > DCS LABEL Select Now DESCRIPTION Click this to have the USG scan for and select an available channel immediately. 8.4 Technical Reference The following section contains additional technical information about the features described in this chapter. 8.4.1 Dynamic Channel Selection When numerous APs broadcast within a given area, they introduce the possibility of heightened radio interference, especially if some or all of them are broadcasting on the same radio channel. If the interference becomes too great, then the network administrator must open his AP configuration options and manually change the channel to one that no other AP is using (or at least a channel that has a lower level of interference) in order to give the connected stations a minimum degree of interference. Dynamic channel selection frees the network administrator from this task by letting the AP do it automatically. The AP can scan the area around it looking for the channel with the least amount of interference. In the 2.4 GHz spectrum, each channel from 1 to 13 is broken up into discrete 22 MHz segments that are spaced 5 MHz apart. Channel 1 is centered on 2.412 GHz while channel 13 is centered on 2.472 GHz. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 138 Chapter 8 Wireless Figure 115 An Example Three-Channel Deployment Three channels are situated in such a way as to create almost no interference with one another if used exclusively: 1, 6 and 11. When an AP broadcasts on any of these three channels, it should not interfere with neighboring APs as long as they are also limited to same trio. Figure 116 An Example Four-Channel Deployment However, some regions require the use of other channels and often use a safety scheme with the following four channels: 1, 4, 7 and 11. While they are situated sufficiently close to both each other and the three so-called safe channels (1,6 and 11) that interference becomes inevitable, the severity of it is dependent upon other factors: proximity to the affected AP, signal strength, activity, and so on. Finally, there is an alternative four channel scheme for ETSI, consisting of channels 1, 5, 9, 13. This offers significantly less overlap that the other one. Figure 117 An Alternative Four-Channel Deployment USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 139
1 2 | Users Manual Part 2 | Users Manual | 2.33 MiB |
CHAPTER 9 Interfaces 9.1 Interface Overview Use the Interface screens to configure the USGs interfaces. You can also create interfaces on top of other interfaces. Ports are the physical ports to which you connect cables. Interfaces are used within the system operationally. You use them in configuring various features. An interface also describes a network that is directly connected to the USG. For example, You connect the LAN network to the LAN interface. Zones are groups of interfaces used to ease security policy configuration. 9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Port Role screen (Section 9.2 on page 145) to create port groups and to assign physical ports and port groups to Ethernet interfaces. Use the Ethernet screens (Section 9.3 on page 146) to configure the Ethernet interfaces. Ethernet interfaces are the foundation for defining other interfaces and network policies. RIP and OSPF are also configured in these interfaces. Use the PPP screens (Section 9.4 on page 166) for PPPoE or PPTP Internet connections. Use the Cellular screens (Section 9.5 on page 173) to configure settings for interfaces for Internet connections through an installed mobile broadband card. Use the Tunnel screens (Section 9.6 on page 182) to configure tunnel interfaces to be used in Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE), IPv6 in IPv4, and 6to4 tunnels. Use the VLAN screens (Section 9.7 on page 188) to divide the physical network into multiple logical networks. VLAN interfaces receive and send tagged frames. The USG automatically adds or removes the tags as needed. Each VLAN can only be associated with one Ethernet interface. Use the Bridge screens (Section 9.8 on page 201) to combine two or more network segments into a single network. Use the Auxiliary screens (Section 9.9 on page 213) to configure the USGs auxiliary interface to use an external modem. Use the Virtual Interface screen (Section 9.9.1 on page 213) to create virtual interfaces on top of Ethernet interfaces to tell the USG where to route packets. You can create virtual Ethernet interfaces, virtual VLAN interfaces, and virtual bridge interfaces. Use the Trunk screens (Section 9.11 on page 218) to configure load balancing. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 140 Chapter 9 Interfaces 9.1.2 What You Need to Know Interface Characteristics Interfaces generally have the following characteristics (although not all characteristics apply to each type of interface). An interface is a logical entity through which (layer-3) packets pass. An interface is bound to a physical port or another interface. Many interfaces can share the same physical port. An interface belongs to at most one zone. Many interfaces can belong to the same zone. Layer-3 virtualization (IP alias, for example) is a kind of interface. Types of Interfaces You can create several types of interfaces in the USG. Setting interfaces to the same port role forms a port group. Port groups creates a hardware connection between physical ports at the layer-2 (data link, MAC address) level. Port groups are created when you uUse the Interface > Port Roles or Interface > Port Groups screen to set multiple physical ports to be part of the same interface. Ethernet interfaces are the foundation for defining other interfaces and network policies. RIP and OSPF are also configured in these interfaces. Tunnel interfaces send IPv4 or IPv6 packets from one network to a specific network through the Internet or a public network. VLAN interfaces receive and send tagged frames. The USG automatically adds or removes the tags as needed. Each VLAN can only be associated with one Ethernet interface. Bridge interfaces create a software connection between Ethernet or VLAN interfaces at the layer-2 (data link, MAC address) level. Unlike port groups, bridge interfaces can take advantage of some security features in the USG. You can also assign an IP address and subnet mask to the bridge. PPP interfaces support Point-to-Point Protocols (PPP). ISP accounts are required for PPPoE/PPTP interfaces. Cellular interfaces are for mobile broadband WAN connections via a connected mobile broadband device. Virtual interfaces provide additional routing information in the USG. There are three types:
virtual Ethernet interfaces, virtual VLAN interfaces, and virtual bridge interfaces. Trunk interfaces manage load balancing between interfaces. Port groups and trunks have a lot of characteristics that are specific to each type of interface. The other types of interfaces--Ethernet, PPP, cellular, VLAN, bridge, and virtual--have a lot of similar USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 141 Chapter 9 Interfaces characteristics. These characteristics are listed in the following table and discussed in more detail below. Table 60 Ethernet, PPP, Cellular, VLAN, Bridge, and Virtual Interface Characteristics CHARACTERISTICS Name*
ETHERNET wan1, wan2 CELLULAR cellularx VLAN vlanx PPP pppx BRIDGE brx Configurable Zone IP Address Assignment Static IP address DHCP client Routing metric Interface Parameters Bandwidth restrictions Packet size (MTU) DHCP DHCP server DHCP relay Connectivity Check No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes ETHERNET lan1, lan2, dmz No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes VIRTUAL
**
No Yes No Yes Yes No No No No Note: - * The format of interface names other than the Ethernet and ppp interface names is strict. Each name consists of 2-4 letters (interface type), followed by a number (x). For most interfaces, x is limited by the maximum number of the type of interface. For VLAN interfaces, x is defined by the number you enter in the VLAN name field. For example, Ethernet interface names are wan1, wan2, lan1, lan2, dmz; VLAN interfaces are vlan0, vlan1, vlan2, ...; and so on.
** - The names of virtual interfaces are derived from the interfaces on which they are created. For example, virtual interfaces created on Ethernet interface wan1 are called wan1:1, wan1:2, and so on. Virtual interfaces created on VLAN interface vlan2 are called vlan2:1, vlan2:2, and so on. You cannot specify the number after the colon(:) in the Web Configurator; it is a sequential number. You can specify the number after the colon if you use the CLI to set up a virtual interface. Relationships Between Interfaces In the USG, interfaces are usually created on top of other interfaces. Only Ethernet interfaces are created directly on top of the physical ports or port groups. The relationships between interfaces are explained in the following table. Table 61 Relationships Between Different Types of Interfaces INTERFACE Ethernet interface VLAN interface bridge interface REQUIRED PORT / INTERFACE physical port Ethernet interface Ethernet interface*
VLAN interface*
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 142 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 61 Relationships Between Different Types of Interfaces (continued) INTERFACE REQUIRED PORT / INTERFACE Ethernet interface*
PPP interface virtual interface
(virtual Ethernet interface)
(virtual VLAN interface)
(virtual bridge interface) trunk VLAN interface*
bridge interface WAN1, WAN2, OPT*
Ethernet interface*
VLAN interface*
bridge interface Ethernet interface Cellular interface VLAN interface bridge interface PPP interface Note: * You cannot set up a PPP interface, virtual Ethernet interface or virtual VLAN interface if the underlying interface is a member of a bridge. You also cannot add an Ethernet interface or VLAN interface to a bridge if the member interface has a virtual interface or PPP interface on top of it. IPv6 Overview IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. IPv6 Addressing An 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 143 Chapter 9 Interfaces compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) from the left is the network prefix. Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 62 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 Interface ID 64 bits 10 bits 0 54 bits Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated. Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses dont need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC address) to form a complete IPv6 address. When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address
(beginning with fe80). When the USGs WAN interface is connected to an ISP with a router and the USG is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates another address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. (In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses.) This is a routable global IP address. Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router (the USG) to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The USG uses the received IPv6 prefix (for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by multicast, the router passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 144 Chapter 9 Interfaces IPv6 Router Advertisement An IPv6 router sends router advertisement messages periodically to advertise its presence and other parameters to the hosts in the same network. DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP. Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device. 9.1.3 What You Need to Do First For IPv6 settings, go to the Configuration > System > IPv6 screen to enable IPv6 support on the USG first. 9.2 Port Role Screen To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > Port Role. Use the Port Role screen to set the USGs flexible ports as part of the lan1, lan2, or dmz interfaces. This creates a hardware connection between the physical ports at the layer-2 (data link, MAC address) level. This provides wire-speed throughput but no security. Note the following if you are configuring from a computer connected to a lan1, lan2, or dmz port and change the port's role:
A port's IP address varies as its role changes, make sure your computer's IP address is in the same subnet as the USG's lan1, lan2, or dmz IP address. Use the appropriate lan1, lan2, or dmz IP address to access the USG. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 145 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 118 Configuration > Network > Interface > Port Role Physical Ports Default interface (ZONE) The physical Ethernet ports are shown at the top and the Ethernet interfaces and zones are shown at the bottom of the screen. Use the radio buttons to select for which interface (network) you want to use each physical port. For example, select a ports LAN radio button to use the port as part of the LAN interface. The port will use the USGs LAN IP address and MAC address. When you assign more than one physical port to a network, you create a port group. Port groups have the following characteristics:
There is a layer-2 Ethernet switch between physical ports in the port group. This provides wire-
speed throughput but no security. It can increase the bandwidth between the port group and other interfaces. The port group uses a single MAC address. Click Apply to save your changes and apply them to the USG. Click Reset to change the port groups to their current configuration (last-saved values). 9.3 Ethernet Summary Screen This screen lists every Ethernet interface and virtual interface created on top of Ethernet interfaces. If you enabled IPv6 in the Configuration > System > IPv6 screen, you can also configure Ethernet interfaces used for your IPv6 networks on this screen. To access this screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet. Unlike other types of interfaces, you cannot create new Ethernet interfaces nor can you delete any of them. If an Ethernet interface does not have any physical ports assigned to it, the Ethernet interface is effectively removed from the USG, but you can still configure it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 146 Chapter 9 Interfaces Ethernet interfaces are similar to other types of interfaces in many ways. They have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions. They restrict the amount of bandwidth and packet size. They can provide DHCP services, and they can verify the gateway is available. Use Ethernet interfaces to control which physical ports exchange routing information with other routers and how much information is exchanged through each one. The more routing information is exchanged, the more efficient the routers should be. However, the routers also generate more network traffic, and some routing protocols require a significant amount of configuration and management. The USG supports two routing protocols, RIP and OSPF. See Chapter 10 on page 238 for background information about these routing protocols. Figure 119 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet Each field is described in the following table. Table 63 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet LABEL Configuration / IPv6 Configuration DESCRIPTION Use the Configuration section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Configuration section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your USG to an IPv6 network. Both sections have similar fields as described below. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove a virtual interface, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an interface, select it and click Activate. To turn off an interface, select it and click Inactivate. To open the screen where you can create a virtual Ethernet interface, select an Ethernet interface and click Create Virtual Interface. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the name of the interface. Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Create Virtual Interface Object References
#
Status Name USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 147 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 63 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet (continued) LABEL IP Address DESCRIPTION This field displays the current IP address of the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0 (in the IPv4 network) or :: (in the IPv6 network), the interface does not have an IP address yet. In the IPv4 network, this screen also shows whether the IP address is a static IP address (STATIC) or dynamically assigned (DHCP). IP addresses are always static in virtual interfaces. In the IPv6 network, this screen also shows whether the IP address is a static IP address (STATIC), link-local IP address (LINK LOCAL), dynamically assigned
(DHCP), or an IPv6 StateLess Address AutoConfiguration IP address (SLAAC). See Section 9.1.2 on page 141 for more information about IPv6. This field displays the interfaces subnet mask in dot decimal notation. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Mask Apply Reset 9.3.1 Ethernet Edit The Ethernet Edit screen lets you configure IP address assignment, interface parameters, RIP settings, OSPF settings, DHCP settings, connectivity check, and MAC address settings. To access this screen, click an Edit icon in the Ethernet Summary screen. (See Section 9.3 on page 146.) The OPT interfaces Edit > Configuration screen is shown here as an example. The screens for other interfaces are similar and contain a subset to the OPT interface screens fields. Note: If you create IP address objects based on an interfaces IP address, subnet, or gateway, the USG automatically updates every rule or setting that uses the object whenever the interfaces IP address settings change. For example, if you change the LANs IP address, the USG automatically updates the corresponding interface-
based, LAN subnet address object. With RIP, you can use Ethernet interfaces to do the following things. Enable and disable RIP in the underlying physical port or port group. Select which direction(s) routing information is exchanged - The USG can receive routing information, send routing information, or do both. Select which version of RIP to support in each direction - The USG supports RIP-1, RIP-2, and both versions. Select the broadcasting method used by RIP-2 packets - The USG can use subnet broadcasting or multicasting. With OSPF, you can use Ethernet interfaces to do the following things. Enable and disable OSPF in the underlying physical port or port group. Select the area to which the interface belongs. Override the default link cost and authentication method for the selected area. Select in which direction(s) routing information is exchanged - The USG can receive routing information, send routing information, or do both. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 148 Chapter 9 Interfaces Set the priority used to identify the DR or BDR if one does not exist. IGMP Proxy Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) proxy is used for multicast routing. IGMP proxy enables the USG to issue IGMP host messages on behalf of hosts that the USG discovered on its IGMP-enabled interfaces. The USG acts as a proxy for its hosts. Refer to the following figure. DS: Downstream traffic US: Upstream traffic R: Router MS: Multicast Server Enable IGMP Upstream (US) on the USG interface that connects to a router (R) running IGMP that is closer to the multicast server (MS). Enable IGMP Downstream on the USG interface which connects to the multicast hosts. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 149 Chapter 9 Interfaces Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (External Type) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 150 Chapter 9 Interfaces Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (External Type USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 151 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 120 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (Internal Type) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 152 Chapter 9 Interfaces Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (Internal Type) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 153 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 121 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (OPT) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 154 Chapter 9 Interfaces Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (OPT) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 155 Chapter 9 Interfaces This screens fields are described in the table below. DESCRIPTION Use this button to display both IPv4 and IPv6, IPv4-only, or IPv6-only configuration fields. Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit LABEL IPv4/IPv6 View /
IPv4 View / IPv6 View Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create New Object Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Click this button to create a DHCPv6 lease or DHCPv6 request object that you may use for the DHCPv6 settings in this screen. General Settings Enable Interface Select this to enable this interface. Clear this to disable this interface. General IPv6 Setting Enable IPv6 Select this to enable IPv6 on this interface. Otherwise, clear this to disable it. Interface Properties Interface Type Interface Name Port Zone MAC Address Description IP Address Assignment Get Automatically Use Fixed IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask This field is configurable for the OPT interface only. Select to which type of network you will connect this interface. When you select internal or external the rest of the screens options automatically adjust to correspond. The USG automatically adds default route and SNAT settings for traffic it routes from internal interfaces to external interfaces; for example LAN to WAN traffic. internal is for connecting to a local network. Other corresponding configuration options: DHCP server and DHCP relay. The USG automatically adds default SNAT settings for traffic flowing from this interface to an external interface. external is for connecting to an external network (like the Internet). The USG automatically adds this interface to the default WAN trunk. For general, the rest of the screens options do not automatically adjust and you must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for the interface. Specify a name for the interface. It can use alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and underscores, and it can be up to 11 characters long. This is the name of the Ethernet interfaces physical port. Select the zone to which this interface is to belong. You use zones to apply security settings such as security policy, and remote management. This field is read-only. This is the MAC address that the Ethernet interface uses. Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. These IP address fields configure an IPv4 IP address on the interface itself. If you change this IP address on the interface, you may also need to change a related address object for the network connected to the interface. For example, if you use this screen to change the IP address of your LAN interface, you should also change the corresponding LAN subnet address object. This option appears when Interface Type is external or general. Select this to make the interface a DHCP client and automatically get the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address from a DHCP server. This option appears when Interface Type is external or general. Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually. Enter the IP address for this interface. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 156 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (continued) LABEL Gateway Metric Enable IGMP Support DESCRIPTION This option appears when Interface Type is external or general. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The USG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface. This option appears when Interface Type is external or general. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Select this to allow the USG to act as an IGMP proxy for hosts connected on the IGMP downstream interface. IGMP Upstream Enable IGMP Upstream on the interface which connects to a router running IGMP that is closer to the multicast server. Enable IGMP Downstream on the interface which connects to the multicast hosts. IGMP Downstream IPv6 Address Assignment Enable Stateless Address Auto-
configuration
(SLAAC) Link-Local address IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Gateway Metric Address from DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation These IP address fields configure an IPv6 IP address on the interface itself. Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on this interface. The interface will generate an IPv6 IP address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the network. This displays the IPv6 link-local address and the network prefix that the USG generates itself for the interface. Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for this interface if you want to use a static IP address. This field is optional. The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using colon (:) hexadecimal notation. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Use this table to have the USG obtain an IPv6 prefix from the ISP or a connected uplink router for an internal network, such as the LAN or DMZ. You have to also enter a suffix address which is appended to the delegated prefix to form an address for this interface. See Prefix Delegation on page 144 for more information. To use prefix delegation, you must:
Create at least one DHCPv6 request object before configuring this table. The external interface must be a DHCPv6 client. You must configure the DHCPv6 request options using a DHCPv6 request object with the type of prefix-delegation. Assign the prefix delegation to an internal interface and enable router advertisement on that interface. Add Edit Remove
#
Delegated Prefix Click this to create an entry. Select an entry and click this to change the settings. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Select the DHCPv6 request object to use from the drop-down list. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 157 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the ending part of the IPv6 address, a slash (/), and the prefix length. The USG will append it to the delegated prefix. Suffix Address Address DHCPv6 Setting DUID DUID as MAC Customized DUID Enable Rapid Commit For example, you got a delegated prefix of 2003:1234:5678/48. You want to configure an IP address of 2003:1234:5678:1111::1/128 for this interface, then enter
::1111:0:0:0:1/128 in this field. This field displays the combined IPv6 IP address for this interface. Note: This field displays the combined address after you click OK and reopen this screen. This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the interface, which is unique and used for identification purposes when the interface is exchanging DHCPv6 messages with others. See DHCPv6 on page 145 for more information. Select this if you want the DUID is generated from the interfaces default MAC address. If you want to use a customized DUID, enter it here for the interface. Select this to shorten the DHCPv6 message exchange process from four to two steps. This function helps reduce heavy network traffic load. Note: Make sure you also enable this option in the DHCPv6 clients to make rapid commit work. Information Refresh Time Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing information retrieved from DHCPv6. Add Remove Object Reference DHCPv6 Request Options /
DHCPv6 Lease Options Request Address This field is available if you set this interface to DHCPv6 Client. Select this to get an IPv6 IP address for this interface from the DHCP server. Clear this to not get any IP address information through DHCPv6. If this interface is a DHCPv6 client, use this section to configure DHCPv6 request settings that determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6 server. If the interface is a DHCPv6 server, use this section to configure DHCPv6 lease settings that determine what additional information to offer to the DHCPv6 clients. Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 9.3.3 on page 164 for more information. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This field displays the name of the DHCPv6 request or lease object. This field displays the type of the object. This field displays the IPv6 prefix that the USG obtained from an uplink router (Server is selected) or will advertise to its clients (Client is selected). When Relay is selected, select this check box and an interface from the drop-down list if you want to use it as the relay server. When Relay is selected, select this check box and enter the IP address of a DHCPv6 server as the relay server.
#
Name Type Value Relay Server Interface IPv6 Router Advertisement Setting Enable Router Advertisement Select this to enable this interface to send router advertisement messages periodically. See IPv6 Router Advertisement on page 145 for more information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 158 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG indicate to hosts to obtain network settings (such as prefix and DNS settings) through DHCPv6. Advertised Hosts Get Network Configuration From DHCPv6 Advertised Hosts Get Other Configuration From DHCPv6 Router Preference MTU Hop Limit Advertised Prefix Table Add Edit Remove
#
IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Advertised Prefix from DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Add Edit Remove
#
Delegated Prefix Suffix Address Clear this to have the USG indicate to hosts that DHCPv6 is not available and they should use the prefix in the router advertisement message. Select this to have the USG indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the USG indicate to hosts that DNS information is not available in this network. Select the router preference (Low, Medium or High) for the interface. The interface sends this preference in the router advertisements to tell hosts what preference they should use for the USG. This helps hosts to choose their default router especially when there are multiple IPv6 router in the network. Note: Make sure the hosts also support router preference to make this function work. The Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each IPv6 data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG discards the packet and sends an error message to the sender to inform this. Enter the maximum number of network segments that a packet can cross before reaching the destination. When forwarding an IPv6 packet, IPv6 routers are required to decrease the Hop Limit by 1 and to discard the IPv6 packet when the Hop Limit is 0. Configure this table only if you want the USG to advertise a fixed prefix to the network. Click this to create an IPv6 prefix address. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Enter the IPv6 network prefix address and the prefix length. The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. This table is available when the Interface Type is internal. Use this table to configure the network prefix if you want to use a delegated prefix as the beginning part of the network prefix. Click this to create an entry in this table. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Select the DHCPv6 request object to use for generating the network prefix for the network. Enter the ending part of the IPv6 network address plus a slash (/) and the prefix length. The USG will append it to the selected delegated prefix. The combined address is the network prefix for the network. For example, you got a delegated prefix of 2003:1234:5678/48. You want to divide it into 2003:1234:5678:1111/64 for this interface and 2003:1234:5678:2222/64 for another interface. You can use ::1111/64 and ::2222/64 for the suffix address respectively. But if you do not want to divide the delegated prefix into subnetworks, enter ::0/48 here, which keeps the same prefix length (/48) as the delegated prefix. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 159 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the final network prefix combined by the delegated prefix and the suffix. Address Interface Parameters Egress Bandwidth Ingress Bandwidth MTU Connectivity Check Enable Connectivity Check Check Method Check Period Check Timeout Check Fail Tolerance Check Default Gateway Check this address Check Port DHCP Setting DHCP Note: This field displays the combined address after you click OK and reopen this screen. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1500. Usually, this value is 1500. These fields appear when Interface Properties is External or General. The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the USG stops routing to the gateway. The USG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check. Select this to turn on the connection check. Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts. Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure. Enter the number of consecutive failures before the USG stops routing through the gateway. Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check. Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check. This section appears when Interface Type is internal or general. Select what type of DHCP service the USG provides to the network. Choices are:
None - the USG does not provide any DHCP services. There is already a DHCP server on the network. DHCP Relay - the USG routes DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers you specify. The DHCP server(s) may be on another network. DHCP Server - the USG assigns IP addresses and provides subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the network. The USG is the DHCP server for the network. These fields appear if the USG is a DHCP Relay. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 160 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (continued) LABEL Relay Server 1 Relay Server 2 IP Pool Start Address Pool Size First DNS Server, Second DNS Server, Third DNS Server First WINS Server, Second WINS Server Default Router Lease time Extended Options Add Edit Remove
#
Name Code Type DESCRIPTION Enter the IP address of a DHCP server for the network. This field is optional. Enter the IP address of another DHCP server for the network. These fields appear if the USG is a DHCP Server. Enter the IP address from which the USG begins allocating IP addresses. If you want to assign a static IP address to a specific computer, use the Static DHCP Table. If this field is blank, the Pool Size must also be blank. In this case, the USG can assign every IP address allowed by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interfaces IP address. Enter the number of IP addresses to allocate. This number must be at least one and is limited by the interfaces Subnet Mask. For example, if the Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 and IP Pool Start Address is 10.10.10.10, the USG can allocate 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.254, or 245 IP addresses. If this field is blank, the IP Pool Start Address must also be blank. In this case, the USG can assign every IP address allowed by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interfaces IP address. Specify the IP addresses up to three DNS servers for the DHCP clients to use. Use one of the following ways to specify these IP addresses. Custom Defined - enter a static IP address. From ISP - select the DNS server that another interface received from its DHCP server. USG - the DHCP clients use the IP address of this interface and the USG works as a DNS relay. Type the IP address of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server that you want to send to the DHCP clients. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using. If you set this interface to DHCP Server, you can select to use either the interfaces IP address or another IP address as the default router. This default router will become the DHCP clients default gateway. To use another IP address as the default router, select Custom Defined and enter the IP address. Specify how long each computer can use the information (especially the IP address) before it has to request the information again. Choices are:
infinite - select this if IP addresses never expire. days, hours, and minutes - select this to enter how long IP addresses are valid. This table is available if you selected DHCP server. Configure this table if you want to send more information to DHCP clients through DHCP packets. Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 9.3.4 on page 165. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the name of the DHCP option. This is the code number of the DHCP option. This is the type of the set value for the DHCP option. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 161 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (continued) LABEL Value Enable IP/MAC Binding Enable Logs for IP/MAC Binding Violation Static DHCP Table Add Edit Remove
#
IP Address MAC Description RIP Setting Enable RIP Direction DESCRIPTION This is the value set for the DHCP option. Select this option to have this interface enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses. Select this option to have the USG generate a log if a device connected to this interface attempts to use an IP address that is bound to another devices MAC address. Configure a list of static IP addresses the USG assigns to computers connected to the interface. Otherwise, the USG assigns an IP address dynamically using the interfaces IP Pool Start Address and Pool Size. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. Enter the IP address to assign to a device with this entrys MAC address. Enter the MAC address to which to assign this entrys IP address. Enter a description to help identify this static DHCP entry. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. See Section 10.6 on page 238 for more information about RIP. Select this to enable RIP in this interface. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select the RIP direction from the drop-down list box. BiDir - This interface sends and receives routing information. In-Only - This interface receives routing information. Send Version Receive Version V2-Broadcast OSPF Setting Area Priority Link Cost Passive Interface Out-Only - This interface sends routing information. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select the RIP version(s) used for sending RIP packets. Choices are 1, 2, and 1 and 2. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select the RIP version(s) used for receiving RIP packets. Choices are 1, 2, and 1 and 2. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select this to send RIP-2 packets using subnet broadcasting; otherwise, the USG uses multicasting. See Section 10.7 on page 240 for more information about OSPF. Select the area in which this interface belongs. Select None to disable OSPF in this interface. Enter the priority (between 0 and 255) of this interface when the area is looking for a Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). The highest-priority interface identifies the DR, and the second-highest-priority interface identifies the BDR. Set the priority to zero if the interface can not be the DR or BDR. Enter the cost (between 1 and 65,535) to route packets through this interface. Select this to stop forwarding OSPF routing information from the selected interface. As a result, this interface only receives routing information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 162 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 64 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select an authentication method, or disable authentication. To exchange OSPF routing information with peer border routers, you must use the same authentication method that they use. Choices are:
Authentication Text Authentication Key MD5 Authentication ID MD5 Authentication Key MAC Address Setting Use Default MAC Address Overwrite Default MAC Address Related Setting Configure PPPoE/PPTP Configure VLAN Configure WAN TRUNK Configure Policy Route OK Cancel Same-as-Area - use the default authentication method in the area None - disable authentication Text - authenticate OSPF routing information using a plain-text password MD5 - authenticate OSPF routing information using MD5 encryption This field is available if the Authentication is Text. Type the password for text authentication. The key can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the ID for MD5 authentication. The ID can be between 1 and 255. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the password for MD5 authentication. The password can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. This section appears when Interface Properties is External or General. Have the interface use either the factory assigned default MAC address, a manually specified MAC address, or clone the MAC address of another device or computer. Select this option to have the interface use the factory assigned default MAC address. By default, the USG uses the factory assigned MAC address to identify itself. Select this option to have the interface use a different MAC address. Either enter the MAC address in the fields or click Clone by host and enter the IP address of the device or computer whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the configuration file. It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different configuration file. Click PPPoE/PPTP if this interfaces Internet connection uses PPPoE or PPTP. Click VLAN if you want to configure a VLAN interface for this Ethernet interface. Click WAN TRUNK to go to a screen where you can set this interface to be part of a WAN trunk for load balancing. Click Policy Route to go to the policy route summary screen where you can manually associate traffic with this interface. You must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for an interface with the Interface Type set to general. You can also configure a policy route to override the default routing and SNAT behavior for an interface with an Interface Type of internal or external. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.3.2 Object References When a configuration screen includes an Object Reference icon, select a configuration object and click Object Reference to open the Object References screen. This screen displays which configuration settings reference the selected object. The fields shown vary with the type of object. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 163 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 122 Object References The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen. Table 65 Object References LABEL Object Name DESCRIPTION This identifies the object for which the configuration settings that use it are displayed. Click the objects name to display the objects configuration screen in the main window. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the type of setting that references the selected object. Click a services name to display the services configuration screen in the main window. If it is applicable, this field lists the referencing configuration items position in its list, otherwise N/A displays. This field identifies the configuration item that references the object. If the referencing configuration item has a description configured, it displays here. Click this to update the information in this screen. Click Cancel to close the screen.
#
Service Priority Name Description Refresh Cancel 9.3.3 Add/Edit DHCPv6 Request/Release Options When you configure an interface as a DHCPv6 server or client, you can additionally add DHCPv6 request or lease options which have the USG to add more information in the DHCPv6 packets. To open the screen, click Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit, select DHCPv6 Server or DHCPv6 Client in the DHCPv6 Setting section, and then click Add in the DHCPv6 Request Options or DHCPv6 Lease Options table. Figure 123 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit > Add DHCPv6 Request/Lease Options USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 164 Chapter 9 Interfaces Select a DHCPv6 request or lease object in the Select one object field and click OK to save it. Click Cancel to exit without saving the setting. 9.3.4 Add/Edit DHCP Extended Options When you configure an interface as a DHCPv4 server, you can additionally add DHCP extended options which have the USG to add more information in the DHCP packets. The available fields vary depending on the DHCP option you select in this screen. To open the screen, click Configuration >
Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit, select DHCP Server in the DHCP Setting section, and then click Add or Edit in the Extended Options table. Figure 124 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit > Add/Edit Extended Options The following table describes labels that can appear in this screen. Table 66 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit > Add/Edit Extended Options LABEL Option DESCRIPTION Select which DHCP option that you want to add in the DHCP packets sent through the interface. See the next table for more information. This field displays the name of the selected DHCP option. If you selected User Defined in the Option field, enter a descriptive name to identify the DHCP option. You can enter up to 16 characters (a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -, and _) with no spaces allowed. The first character must be alphabetical (a-z, A-Z). This field displays the code number of the selected DHCP option. If you selected User Defined in the Option field, enter a number for the option. This field is mandatory. This is the type of the selected DHCP option. If you selected User Defined in the Option field, select an appropriate type for the value that you will enter in the next field. Only advanced users should configure User Defined. Misconfiguration could result in interface lockout. Enter the value for the selected DHCP option. For example, if you selected TFTP Server Name (66) and the type is TEXT, enter the DNS domain name of a TFTP server here. This field is mandatory. If you selected Time Server (4), NTP Server (41), SIP Server (120), CAPWAP AC
(138), or TFTP Server (150), you have to enter at least one IP address of the corresponding servers in these fields. The servers should be listed in order of your preference. If you selected VIVC (124) or VIVS (125), you have to enter at least one vendors 32-
bit enterprise number in these fields. An enterprise number is a unique number that identifies a company. If you selected VIVC (124), enter the details of the hardware configuration of the host on which the client is running, or of industry consortium compliance. Name Code Type Value First IP Address, Second IP Address, Third IP Address First Enterprise ID, Second Enterprise ID First Class, Second Class USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 165 Chapter 9 Interfaces DESCRIPTION If you selected VIVS (125), enter additional information for the corresponding enterprise number in these fields. Table 66 Configuration > Network > Interface > Ethernet > Edit > Add/Edit Extended Options LABEL First Information, Second Information OK Cancel Click this to close this screen and update the settings to the previous Edit screen. Click Cancel to close the screen. The following table lists the available DHCP extended options (defined in RFCs) on the USG. See RFCs for more information. Table 67 DHCP Extended Options OPTION NAME Time Offset CODE 2 Time Server NTP Server 4 42 TFTP Server Name 66 Bootfile SIP Server VIVC VIVS 67 120 124 125 CAPWAP AC 138 TFTP Server 150 DESCRIPTION This option specifies the offset of the client's subnet in seconds from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). This option specifies a list of Time servers available to the client. This option specifies a list of the NTP servers available to the client by IP address. This option is used to identify a TFTP server when the sname field in the DHCP header has been used for DHCP options. The minimum length of the value is 1. This option is used to identify a bootfile when the file field in the DHCP header has been used for DHCP options. The minimum length of the value is 1. This option carries either an IPv4 address or a DNS domain name to be used by the SIP client to locate a SIP server. Vendor-Identifying Vendor Class option A DHCP client may use this option to unambiguously identify the vendor that manufactured the hardware on which the client is running, the software in use, or an industry consortium to which the vendor belongs. Vendor-Identifying Vendor-Specific option DHCP clients and servers may use this option to exchange vendor-specific information. CAPWAP Access Controller addresses option The Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Points Protocol allows a Wireless Termination Point (WTP) to use DHCP to discover the Access Controllers to which it is to connect. This option carries a list of IPv4 addresses indicating one or more CAPWAP ACs available to the WTP. The option contains one or more IPv4 addresses that the client may use. The current use of this option is for downloading configuration from a VoIP server via TFTP; however, the option may be used for purposes other than contacting a VoIP configuration server. 9.4 PPP Interfaces Use PPPoE/PPTP interfaces to connect to your ISP. This way, you do not have to install or manage PPPoE/PPTP software on each computer in the network. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 166 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 125 Example: PPPoE/PPTP Interfaces PPPoE/PPTP interfaces are similar to other interfaces in some ways. They have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions; they restrict bandwidth and packet size; and they can verify the gateway is available. There are two main differences between PPPoE/
PPTP interfaces and other interfaces. You must also configure an ISP account object for the PPPoE/PPTP interface to use. Each ISP account specifies the protocol (PPPoE or PPTP), as well as your ISP account information. If you change ISPs later, you only have to create a new ISP account, not a new PPPoE/PPTP interface. You should not have to change any network policies. You do not set up the subnet mask or gateway. PPPoE/PPTP interfaces are interfaces between the USG and only one computer. Therefore, the subnet mask is always 255.255.255.255. In addition, the USG always treats the ISP as a gateway. 9.4.1 PPP Interface Summary This screen lists every PPPoE/PPTP interface. To access this screen, click Configuration >
Network > Interface > PPP. Figure 126 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 167 Chapter 9 Interfaces Each field is described in the table below. Table 68 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP LABEL User Configuration /
System Default DESCRIPTION The USG comes with the (non-removable) System Default PPP interfaces pre-
configured. You can create (and delete) User Configuration PPP interfaces. System Default PPP interfaces vary by model. Click this to create a new user-configured PPP interface. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove a user-configured PPP interface, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To connect an interface, select it and click Connect. You might use this in testing the interface or to manually establish the connection for a Dial-on-Demand PPPoE/PPTP interface. To disconnect an interface, select it and click Disconnect. You might use this in testing the interface. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. The connect icon is lit when the interface is connected and dimmed when it is disconnected. This field displays the name of the interface. This field displays the interface on the top of which the PPPoE/PPTP interface is. This field displays the ISP account used by this PPPoE/PPTP interface. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Connect Disconnect Object References
#
Status Name Base Interface Account Profile Apply Reset 9.4.2 PPP Interface Add or Edit Note: You have to set up an ISP account before you create a PPPoE/PPTP interface. This screen lets you configure a PPPoE or PPTP interface. If you enabled IPv6 in the Configuration
> System > IPv6 screen, you can also configure PPP interfaces used for your IPv6 networks on this screen. To access this screen, click the Add icon or an Edit icon in the PPP Interface screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 168 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 127 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP > Add USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 169 Chapter 9 Interfaces Each field is explained in the following table. Table 69 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP > Add LABEL IPv4/IPv6 View /
IPv4 View / IPv6 View Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create New Object DESCRIPTION Use this button to display both IPv4 and IPv6, IPv4-only, or IPv6-only configuration fields. Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Click this button to create an ISP Account or a DHCPv6 request object that you may use for the ISP or DHCPv6 settings in this screen. General Settings Enable Interface Select this to enable this interface. Clear this to disable this interface. General IPv6 Setting Enable IPv6 Select this to enable IPv6 on this interface. Otherwise, clear this to disable it. Interface Properties Interface Name Base Interface Zone Description Connectivity Nailed-Up Specify a name for the interface. It can use alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and underscores, and it can be up to 11 characters long. Select the interface upon which this PPP interface is built. Note: Multiple PPP interfaces can use the same base interface. Select the zone to which this PPP interface belongs. The zone determines the security settings the USG uses for the interface. Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. Select this if the PPPoE/PPTP connection should always be up. Clear this to have the USG establish the PPPoE/PPTP connection only when there is traffic. You might use this option if a lot of traffic needs to go through the interface or it does not cost extra to keep the connection up all the time. Dial-on-Demand Select this to have the USG establish the PPPoE/PPTP connection only when there is traffic. You might use this option if there is little traffic through the interface or if it costs money to keep the connection available. ISP Setting Account Profile Protocol User Name Service Name IP Address Assignment Get Automatically Use Fixed IP Address Select the ISP account that this PPPoE/PPTP interface uses. The drop-down box lists ISP accounts by name. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new ISP account (see Chapter 29 on page 528 for details). This field is read-only. It displays the protocol specified in the ISP account. This field is read-only. It displays the user name for the ISP account. This field is read-only. It displays the PPPoE service name specified in the ISP account. This field is blank if the ISP account uses PPTP. Click Show Advanced Settings to display more settings. Click Hide Advanced Settings to display fewer settings. Select this if this interface is a DHCP client. In this case, the DHCP server configures the IP address automatically. The subnet mask and gateway are always defined automatically in PPPoE/PPTP interfaces. Select this if you want to specify the IP address manually. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 170 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 69 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP > Add (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. IP Address Metric IPv6 Address Assignment Enable Stateless Address Auto-
configuration
(SLAAC) Metric Address from DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Add Edit Remove
#
Delegated Prefix Suffix Address Address DHCPv6 Setting DHCPv6 DUID DUID as MAC Customized DUID Enter the IP address for this interface. Enter the priority of the gateway (the ISP) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. These IP address fields configure an IPv6 IP address on the interface itself. Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on this interface. The interface will generate an IPv6 IP address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the network. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Use this table to have the USG obtain an IPv6 prefix from the ISP or a connected uplink router for an internal network, such as the LAN or DMZ. You have to also enter a suffix address which is appended to the delegated prefix to form an address for this interface. See Prefix Delegation on page 144 for more information. To use prefix delegation, you must:
Create at least one DHCPv6 request object before configuring this table. The external interface must be a DHCPv6 client. You must configure the DHCPv6 request options using a DHCPv6 request object with the type of prefix-delegation. Assign the prefix delegation to an internal interface and enable router advertisement on that interface. Click this to create an entry. Select an entry and click this to change the settings. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Select the DHCPv6 request object to use from the drop-down list. Enter the ending part of the IPv6 address, a slash (/), and the prefix length. The USG will append it to the delegated prefix. For example, you got a delegated prefix of 2003:1234:5678/48. You want to configure an IP address of 2003:1234:5678:1111::1/128 for this interface, then enter
::1111:0:0:0:1/128 in this field. This field displays the combined IPv6 IP address for this interface. Note: This field displays the combined address after you click OK and reopen this screen. Select Client to obtain an IP address and DNS information from the service provider for the interface. Otherwise, select N/A to diable the function. This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the interface, which is unique and used for identification purposes when the interface is exchanging DHCPv6 messages with others. See DHCPv6 on page 145 for more information. Select this if you want the DUID is generated from the interfaces default MAC address. If you want to use a customized DUID, enter it here for the interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 171 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 69 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP > Add (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to shorten the DHCPv6 message exchange process from four to two steps. This function helps reduce heavy network traffic load. Enable Rapid Commit Note: Make sure you also enable this option in the DHCPv6 clients to make rapid commit work. Request Address Select this to get an IPv6 IP address for this interface from the DHCP server. Clear this DHCPv6 Request Options Add Remove Object Reference
#
Name Type Value Interface Parameters Egress Bandwidth Ingress Bandwidth MTU Connectivity Check Enable Connectivity Check Check Method Check Period Check Timeout Check Fail Tolerance Check Default Gateway Check this address to not get any IP address information through DHCPv6. Use this section to configure DHCPv6 request settings that determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6 server. Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 9.3.4 on page 165 for more information. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This field displays the name of the DHCPv6 request object. This field displays the type of the object. This field displays the IPv6 prefix that the USG will advertise to its clients. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1492. Usually, this value is 1492. The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the USG stops routing to the gateway. The USG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check. Select this to turn on the connection check. Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts. Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure. Enter the number of consecutive failures before the USG stops routing through the gateway. Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check. Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 172 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 69 Configuration > Network > Interface > PPP > Add (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check. Check Port Related Setting Configure WAN TRUNK Policy Route OK Cancel Click WAN TRUNK to go to a screen where you can configure the interface as part of a WAN trunk for load balancing. Click Policy Route to go to the screen where you can manually configure a policy route to associate traffic with this interface. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.5 Cellular Configuration Screen Mobile broadband is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices. Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending on the mobile broadband device you use, the signal strength to the service providers base station, and so on. You can configure how the USGs mobile broadband device connects to a network (refer to Section 9.5.1 on page 176):
You can set the mobile broadband device to connect only to the home network, which is the network to which you are originally subscribed. You can set the mobile broadband device to connect to other networks if the signal strength of the home network is too low or it is unavailable. 3G 3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet access to mobile devices. 4G 4G is the fourth generation of the mobile telecommunications technology and a successor of 3G. Both the WiMAX and Long Term Evolution (LTE) standards are the 4G candidate systems. 4G only supports all-IP-based packet-switched telephony services and is required to offer gigabit speed access. Note: Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending on your mobile environment. The environmental factors may include the number of mobile devices which are currently connected to the mobile network, the signal strength to the mobile network, and so on. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 173 DATA SPEED Slow Chapter 9 Interfaces See the following table for a comparison between 2G, 2.5G, 2.75G, 3G and 4G wireless technologies. Table 70 2G, 2.5G, 2.75G, 3G, 3.5G and 4G Wireless Technologies CDMA-BASED Interim Standard 95 (IS-95), the first CDMA-
based digital cellular standard pioneered by Qualcomm. The brand name for IS-95 is cdmaOne. IS-95 is also known as TIA-EIA-95. CDMA2000 is a hybrid 2.5G / 3G protocol of mobile telecommunications standards that use CDMA, a multiple access scheme for digital radio. CDMA2000 1xRTT (1 times Radio Transmission Technology) is the core CDMA2000 wireless air interface standard. It is also known as 1x, 1xRTT, or IS-2000 and considered to be a 2.5G or 2.75G technology. CDMA2000 EV-DO (Evolution-Data Optimized, originally 1x Evolution-Data Only), also referred to as EV-DO, EVDO, or just EV, is an evolution of CDMA2000 1xRTT and enables high-speed wireless connectivity. It is also denoted as IS-856 or High Data Rate (HDR). NAME TYPE 2G Circuit-
switched MOBILE PHONE AND DATA STANDARDS GSM-BASED GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications), Personal Handy-
phone System (PHS), etc. 2.5G 2.75G Packet-
switched Packet-
switched GPRS (General Packet Radio Services), High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data
(HSCSD), etc. Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution
(EDGE), Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS), etc. 3G Packet-
switched 3.5G Packet-
switched UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System), a third-
generation (3G) wireless standard defined in ITU specification, is sometimes marketed as 3GSM. The UMTS uses GSM infrastructures and W-
CDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) as the air interface. The International Telecommunication Union (ITU) is an international organization within which governments and the private sector coordinate global telecom networks and services. HSDPA (High-Speed Downlink Packet Access) is a mobile telephony protocol, used for UMTS-based 3G networks and allows for higher data transfer speeds. 4G/LTE Packet-
switched The LTE (Long Term Evolution) standard is based on the GSM and UMTS network technologies. Fast To change your mobile broadband WAN settings, click Configuration > Network > Interface >
Cellular. Note: Install (or connect) a compatible mobile broadband USB device to use a cellular connection. Note: The WAN IP addresses of a USG with multiple WAN interfaces must be on different subnets. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 174 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 128 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular LABEL Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Connect Disconnect Object References
#
Status Name Extension Slot Connected Device ISP Settings Mobile Broadband Dongle Support Latest Version DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new cellular interface. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To connect an interface, select it and click Connect. You might use this in testing the interface or to manually establish the connection. To disconnect an interface, select it and click Disconnect. You might use this in testing the interface. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. The connect icon is lit when the interface is connected and dimmed when it is disconnected. This field displays the name of the interface. This field displays where the entrys cellular card is located. This field displays the name of the cellular card. This field displays the profile of ISP settings that this cellular interface is set to use. You should have registered your USG at myzyxel.com. Myzyxel.com hosts a list of supported mobile broadband dongle devices. You should have an Internet connection to access this website. This displays the latest supported mobile broadband dongle list version number. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 175 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 71 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular (continued) LABEL Current Version Update Now Apply Reset DESCRIPTION This displays the currently supported (by the USG) mobile broadband dongle list version number. If the latest version number is greater than the current version number, then click this button to download the latest list of supported mobile broadband dongle devices to the USG. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 9.5.1 Cellular Choose Slot To change your mobile broadband settings, click Configuration > Network > Interface >
Cellular > Add (or Edit). In the pop-up window that displays, select the slot that contains the mobile broadband device, then the Add Cellular configuration screen displays. 9.5.2 Add / Edit Cellular Configuration This screen displays after you select the slot that contains the mobile broadband device in the previous pop-up window. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 176 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 129 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular > Add / Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 177 Chapter 9 Interfaces The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular > Add / Edit LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings General Settings DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Enable Interface Select this option to turn on this interface. Interface Properties Interface Name Zone Extension Slot Connected Device Description Connectivity Nailed-Up Idle timeout ISP Settings Profile Selection APN Select a name for the interface. Select the zone to which you want the cellular interface to belong. The zone determines the security settings the USG uses for the interface. This is the USB slot that you are configuring for use with a mobile broadband card. This displays the manufacturer and model name of your mobile broadband card if you inserted one in the USG. Otherwise, it displays none. Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. Select this if the connection should always be up. Clear this to have the USG to establish the connection only when there is traffic. You might not nail up the connection if there is little traffic through the interface or if it costs money to keep the connection available. This value specifies the time in seconds (0~360) that elapses before the USG automatically disconnects from the ISPs server. Zero disables the idle timeout. Select Device to use one of the mobile broadband devices profiles of device settings. Then select the profile (use Profile 1 unless your ISP instructed you to do otherwise). Select Custom to configure your device settings yourself. This field is read-only if you selected Device in the profile selection. Select Custom in the profile selection to be able to manually input the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. This field applies with a GSM or HSDPA mobile broadband card. Enter the APN from your service provider. Connections with different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media Messaging Service)) and charge method. Dial String You can enter up to 63 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Enter the dial string if your ISP provides a string, which would include the APN, to initialize the mobile broadband card. You can enter up to 63 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Authentication Type This field is available only when you insert a GSM mobile broadband card. The USG supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). CHAP is more secure than PAP; however, PAP is readily available on more platforms. Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:
None: No authentication for outgoing calls. CHAP - Your USG accepts CHAP requests only. PAP - Your USG accepts PAP requests only. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 178 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 72 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL User Name Password Retype to Confirm SIM Card Setting PIN Code Retype to Confirm Interface Parameters Egress Bandwidth Ingress Bandwidth MTU Connectivity Check Enable Connectivity Check Check Method DESCRIPTION This field displays when you select an authentication type other than None. This field is read-only if you selected Device in the profile selection. If this field is configurable, enter the user name for this mobile broadband card exactly as the service provider gave it to you. You can use 1 ~ 64 alphanumeric and #:%-_@$./ characters. The first character must be alphanumeric or -_@$./. Spaces are not allowed. This field displays when you select an authentication type other than None. This field is read-only if you selected Device in the profile selection and the password is included in the mobile broadband cards profile. If this field is configurable, enter the password for this SIM card exactly as the service provider gave it to you. You can use 0 ~ 63 alphanumeric and `~!@#$%^&*()_-+={}|;:'<,>./ characters. Spaces are not allowed. This field displays when you select an authentication type other than None. This field is read-only if you selected Device in the profile selection and the password is included in the mobile broadband cards profile. If this field is configurable, re-enter the password for this SIM card exactly as the service provider gave it to you. This field displays with a GSM or HSDPA mobile broadband card. A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a mobile broadband card. Without the PIN code, you cannot use the mobile broadband card. Enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example) provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the mobile broadband card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet. If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, enter an arbitrary number. Type the PIN code again to confirm it. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. This setting is used in WAN load balancing and bandwidth management. This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1492. Usually, this value is 1492. The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the USG stops routing to the gateway. The USG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check. Select this to turn on the connection check. Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 179 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 72 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts. Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure. Enter the number of consecutive failures before the USG stops routing through the gateway. Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check. Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check. Check Period Check Timeout Check Fail Tolerance Check Default Gateway Check this address Check Port Related Setting Configure WAN TRUNK Configure Policy Route Click WAN TRUNK to go to a screen where you can configure the interface as part of a WAN trunk for load balancing. Click Policy Route to go to the policy route summary screen where you can configure a policy route to override the default routing and SNAT behavior for the interface. IP Address Assignment Get Automatically Use Fixed IP Address IP Address Assignment Metric Device Settings Band Selection Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address. Enter the cellular interfaces WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. This field appears if you selected a mobile broadband device that allows you to select the type of network to use. Select the type of mobile broadband service for your mobile broadband connection. If you are unsure what to select, check with your mobile broadband service provider to find the mobile broadband service available to you in your region. Select auto to have the card connect to an available network. Choose this option if you do not know what networks are available. You may want to manually specify the type of network to use if you are charged differently for different types of network or you only have one type of network available to you. Select GPRS / EDGE (GSM) only to have this interface only use a 2.5G or 2.75G network (respectively). If you only have a GSM network available to you, you may want to select this so the USG does not spend time looking for a WCDMA network. Select UMTS / HSDPA (WCDMA) only to have this interface only use a 3G or 3.5G network (respectively). You may want to do this if you want to make sure the interface does not use the GSM network. Select LTE only to have this interface only use a 4G LTE network. This option only appears when a USB dongle for 4G technology is inserted. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 180 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 72 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Home network is the network to which you are originally subscribed. Network Selection Budget Setup Enable Budget Control Time Budget Data Budget Reset time and data budget counters on Reset time and data budget counters Actions when over budget Log New connection Current connection Select Home to have the mobile broadband device connect only to the home network. If the home network is down, the USGs mobile broadband Internet connection is also unavailable. Select Auto (Default) to allow the mobile broadband device to connect to a network to which you are not subscribed when necessary, for example when the home network is down or another mobile broadband base station's signal is stronger. This is recommended if you need continuous Internet connectivity. If you select this, you may be charged using the rate of a different network. Select this to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed mobile broadband card. You can set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The USG takes the actions you specified when a limit is exceeded during the month. Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the mobile broadband connection can be used within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the USG resets the statistics. Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be transmitted via the mobile broadband connection within one month. Select Download to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the USG). Select Upload to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the USG to the ISP). Select Download/Upload to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the USG resets the statistics. Select the date on which the USG resets the budget every month. If the date you selected is not available in a month, such as 30th or 31st, the USG resets the budget on the last day of the month. This button is available only when you enable budget control in this screen. Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with the mobile broadband connections full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data budget counters will still reset on the second. Specify the actions the USG takes when the time or data limit is exceeded. Select None to not create a log, Log to create a log, or Log-alert to create an alert log. If you select Log or Log-alert you can also select recurring every to have the USG send a log or alert for this event periodically. Specify how often (from 1 to 65535 minutes) to send the log or alert. Select Allow to permit new mobile broadband connections or Disallow to drop/block new mobile broadband connections. Select Keep to maintain an existing mobile broadband connection or Drop to disconnect it. You cannot set New connection to Allow and Current connection to Drop at the same time. If you set New connection to Disallow and Current connection to Keep, the USG allows you to transmit data using the current connection, but you cannot build a new connection if the existing connection is disconnected. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 181 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 72 Configuration > Network > Interface > Cellular > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL Actions when over
% of time budget or
% of data budget DESCRIPTION Specify the actions the USG takes when the specified percentage of time budget or data limit is exceeded. Enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the USG resets the statistics. Select None to not create a log when the USG takes this action, Log to create a log, or Log-alert to create an alert log. If you select Log or Log-alert you can also select recurring every to have the USG send a log or alert for this event periodically. Specify how often (from 1 to 65535 minutes) to send the log or alert. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Log OK Cancel 9.6 Tunnel Interfaces The USG uses tunnel interfaces in Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE), IPv6 in IPv4, and 6to4 tunnels. GRE Tunneling GRE tunnels encapsulate a wide variety of network layer protocol packet types inside IP tunnels. A GRE tunnel serves as a virtual point-to-point link between the USG and another router over an IPv4 network. At the time of writing, the USG only supports GRE tunneling in IPv4 networks. Figure 130 GRE Tunnel Example IPv4 Internet IPv6 Over IPv4 Tunnels To route traffic between two IPv6 networks over an IPv4 network, an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel has to be used. Figure 131 IPv6 over IPv4 Network IPv6 IPv4 IPv6 On the USG, you can either set up a manual IPv6-in-IPv4 tunnel or an automatic 6to4 tunnel. The following describes each method:
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 182 Chapter 9 Interfaces IPv6-in-IPv4 Tunneling Use this mode on the WAN of the USG if your USG has a public IPv4 IP address given from your ISP, and you want to transmit your IPv6 packets to one and only one remote site whose LAN network is also an IPv6 network. With this mode, the USG encapsulates IPv6 packets within IPv4 packets across the Internet. You must know the WAN IP address of the remote gateway device. This mode is normally used for a site-to-site application such as two branch offices. Figure 132 IPv6-in-IPv4 Tunnel IPv6 IPv4 IPv6 Internet In the USG, you must also manually configure a policy route for an IPv6-in-IPv4 tunnel to make the tunnel work. 6to4 Tunneling This mode also enables IPv6 packets to cross IPv4 networks. Unlike IPv6-in-IPv4 tunneling, you do not need to configure a policy route for a 6to4 tunnel. Through your properly pre-configuring the destination routers IP address in the IP address assignments to hosts, the USG can automatically forward 6to4 packets to the destination they want to go. A 6to4 relay router is required to route 6to4 packets to a native IPv6 network if the packets destination do not match your specified criteria. In this mode, the USG should get a public IPv4 address for the WAN. The USG adds an IPv4 IP header to an IPv6 packet when transmitting the packet to the Internet. In reverse, the USG removes the IPv4 header from an IPv6 packet when receiving it from the Internet. An IPv6 address using the 6to4 mode consists of an IPv4 address, the format is as the following:
2002:[a public IPv4 address in hexadecimal]::/48 For example, a public IPv4 address is 202.156.30.41. The converted hexadecimal IP string is ca.9c.1Ee.29. The IPv6 address prefix becomes 2002:ca9c:1e29::/48. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 183 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 133 6to4 Tunnel IPv6 IPv4 IPv6 Internet IPv6 9.6.1 Configuring a Tunnel This screen lists the USGs configured tunnel interfaces. To access this screen, click Network >
Interface > Tunnel. Figure 134 Network > Interface > Tunnel Each field is explained in the following table. Table 73 Network > Interface > Tunnel LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new GRE tunnel interface. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. Remove Activate Inactivate Object References
#
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 184 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 73 Network > Interface > Tunnel (continued) LABEL Status DESCRIPTION The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the name of the interface. This is the IP address of the interface. If the interface is active (and connected), the USG tunnels local traffic sent to this IP address to the Remote Gateway Address. This is the tunnel mode of the interface (GRE, IPv6-in-IPv4 or 6to4). This field also displays the interfaces IPv4 IP address and subnet mask if it is a GRE tunnel. Otherwise, it displays the interfaces IPv6 IP address and prefix length. This is the interface or IP address uses to identify itself to the remote gateway. The USG uses this as the source for the packets it tunnels to the remote gateway. This is the IP address or domain name of the remote gateway to which this interface tunnels traffic. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh. Name IP Address Tunnel Mode My Address Remote Gateway Address Apply Reset 9.6.2 Tunnel Add or Edit Screen This screen lets you configure a tunnel interface. Click Configuration > Network > Interface >
Tunnel > Add (or Edit) to open the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 185 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 135 Network > Interface > Tunnel > Add/Edit Each field is explained in the following table. Table 74 Network > Interface > Tunnel > Add/Edit LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings General Settings DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Enable Select this to enable this interface. Clear this to disable this interface. Interface Properties Interface Name Zone This field is read-only if you are editing an existing tunnel interface. Enter the name of the tunnel interface. The format is tunnelx, where x is 0 - 3. For example, tunnel0. Use this field to select the zone to which this interface belongs. This controls what security settings the USG applies to this interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 186 Tunnel Mode IP Address Assignment IP Address Subnet Mask Metric IPv6 Address Assignment Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 74 Network > Interface > Tunnel > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select the tunneling protocol of the interface (GRE, IPv6-in-IPv4 or 6to4). See Section 9.6 on page 182 for more information. This section is available if you are configuring a GRE tunnel. Enter the IP address for this interface. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. This section is available if you are configuring an IPv6-in-IPv4 or a 6to4 tunnel. IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for this interface if you want to use a static IP address. This field is optional. Metric 6to4 Tunnel Parameter 6to4 Prefix Relay Router Remote Gateway Prefix Gateway Settings My Address Remote Gateway Address The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. This section is available if you are configuring a 6to4 tunnel which encapsulates IPv6 to IPv4 packets. Enter the IPv6 prefix of a destination network. The USG forwards IPv6 packets to the hosts in the matched network. If you enter a prefix starting with 2002, the USG will forward the matched packets to the IPv4 IP address converted from the packets destination address. The IPv4 IP address can be converted from the next 32 bits after the prefix you specified in this field. See 6to4 Tunneling on page 183 for an example. The USG forwards the unmatched packets to the specified Relay Router. Enter the IPv4 address of a 6to4 relay router which helps forward packets between 6to4 networks and native IPv6 networks. Enter the IPv4 network address and network bits of a remote 6to4 gateway, for example, 14.15.0.0/16. This field works if you enter a 6to4 Prefix not starting with 2002 (2003 for example). The USG forwards the matched packets to a remote gateway with the network address you specify here, and the bits converted after the 6to4 Prefix in the packets. For example, you configure the 6to4 prefix to 2003:A0B::/32 and the remote gateway prefix to 14.15.0.0/16. If a packets destination is 2003:A0B:1011:5::8, the USG forwards the packet to 14.15.16.17, where the network address is 14.15.0.0 and the host address is the remain bits converted from 1011 after the packets 6to4 prefix
(2003:A0B). Specify the interface or IP address to use as the source address for the packets this interface tunnels to the remote gateway. The remote gateway sends traffic to this interface or IP address. Enter the IP address or domain name of the remote gateway to which this interface tunnels traffic. Automatic displays in this field if you are configuring a 6to4 tunnel. It means the 6to4 tunnel will help forward packets to the corresponding remote gateway automatically by looking at the packets destination address. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 187 Chapter 9 Interfaces DESCRIPTION Table 74 Network > Interface > Tunnel > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Interface Parameters Egress Bandwidth Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. This setting is used in WAN load balancing and bandwidth management. This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1500. Usually, this value is 1500. This section is available if you are configuring a GRE tunnel. The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the USG stops routing to the gateway. The USG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check. Select this to turn on the connection check. Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts. Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure. Enter the number of consecutive failures before the USG stops routing through the gateway. Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check. Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. This field displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check. Click this link to go to a screen where you can configure WAN trunk load balancing. Click this link to go to the screen where you can manually configure a policy route to associate traffic with this interface. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Ingress Bandwidth MTU Connectivity Check Enable Connectivity Check Check Method Check Period Check Timeout Check Fail Tolerance Check Default Gateway Check this address Check Port Related Setting WAN TRUNK Policy Route OK Cancel 9.7 VLAN Interfaces A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) divides a physical network into multiple logical networks. The standard is defined in IEEE 802.1q. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 188 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 136 Example: Before VLAN A B C In this example, there are two physical networks and three departments A, B, and C. The physical networks are connected to hubs, and the hubs are connected to the router. Alternatively, you can divide the physical networks into three VLANs. Figure 137 Example: After VLAN A B Each VLAN is a separate network with separate IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateways. Each VLAN also has a unique identification number (ID). The ID is a 12-bit value that is stored in the MAC header. The VLANs are connected to switches, and the switches are connected to the router.
(If one switch has enough connections for the entire network, the network does not need switches A and B.) Traffic inside each VLAN is layer-2 communication (data link layer, MAC addresses). It is handled by the switches. As a result, the new switch is required to handle traffic inside VLAN 2. Traffic is only broadcast inside each VLAN, not each physical network. Traffic between VLANs (or between a VLAN and another type of network) is layer-3 communication (network layer, IP addresses). It is handled by the router. This approach provides a few advantages. Increased performance - In VLAN 2, the extra switch should route traffic inside the sales department faster than the router does. In addition, broadcasts are limited to smaller, more logical groups of users. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 189 Chapter 9 Interfaces Higher security - If each computer has a separate physical connection to the switch, then broadcast traffic in each VLAN is never sent to computers in another VLAN. Better manageability - You can align network policies more appropriately for users. For example, you can create different content filtering rules for each VLAN (each department in the example above), and you can set different bandwidth limits for each VLAN. These rules are also independent of the physical network, so you can change the physical network without changing policies. In this example, the new switch handles the following types of traffic:
Inside VLAN 2. Between the router and VLAN 1. Between the router and VLAN 2. Between the router and VLAN 3. VLAN Interfaces Overview In the USG, each VLAN is called a VLAN interface. As a router, the USG routes traffic between VLAN interfaces, but it does not route traffic within a VLAN interface. All traffic for each VLAN interface can go through only one Ethernet interface, though each Ethernet interface can have one or more VLAN interfaces. Note: Each VLAN interface is created on top of only one Ethernet interface. Otherwise, VLAN interfaces are similar to other interfaces in many ways. They have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions. They restrict bandwidth and packet size. They can provide DHCP services, and they can verify the gateway is available. 9.7.1 VLAN Summary Screen This screen lists every VLAN interface and virtual interface created on top of VLAN interfaces. If you enabled IPv6 in the Configuration > System > IPv6 screen, you can also configure VLAN interfaces used for your IPv6 networks on this screen. To access this screen, click Configuration >
Network > Interface > VLAN. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 190 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 138 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN Each field is explained in the following table. Table 75 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN LABEL Configuration
/ IPv6 Configuration Edit DESCRIPTION Use the Configuration section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Configuration section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your USG to an IPv6 network. Both sections have similar fields as described below. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To open the screen where you can create a virtual interface, select an interface and click Create Virtual Interface. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the name of the interface. For VLAN interfaces, this field displays the Ethernet interface on which the VLAN interface is created the VLAN ID For virtual interfaces, this field is blank. This field displays the current IP address of the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, the interface does not have an IP address yet. This screen also shows whether the IP address is a static IP address (STATIC) or dynamically assigned (DHCP). IP addresses are always static in virtual interfaces. This field displays the interfaces subnet mask in dot decimal notation. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 191 Remove Activate Inactivate Create Virtual Interface Object References
#
Status Name Port/VID IP Address Mask Apply Reset Chapter 9 Interfaces 9.7.2 VLAN Add/Edit Select an existing entry in the previous scrren and click Edit or click Add to create a new entry. The following screen appears. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 192 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 139 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add /Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 193 Chapter 9 Interfaces Each field is explained in the following table. DESCRIPTION Use this button to display both IPv4 and IPv6, IPv4-only, or IPv6-only configuration fields. Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit LABEL IPv4/IPv6 View /
IPv4 View / IPv6 View Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create New Object Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Click this button to create a DHCPv6 lease or DHCPv6 request object that you may use for the DHCPv6 settings in this screen. General Settings Enable Interface Select this to turn this interface on. Clear this to disable this interface. General IPv6 Setting Enable IPv6 Select this to enable IPv6 on this interface. Otherwise, clear this to disable it. Interface Properties Interface Type Interface Name Zone Base Port VLAN ID Priority Code Description IP Address Assignment Select one of the following option depending on the type of network to which the USG is connected or if you want to additionally manually configure some related settings. internal is for connecting to a local network. Other corresponding configuration options: DHCP server and DHCP relay. The USG automatically adds default SNAT settings for traffic flowing from this interface to an external interface. external is for connecting to an external network (like the Internet). The USG automatically adds this interface to the default WAN trunk. For general, the rest of the screens options do not automatically adjust and you must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for the interface. This field is read-only if you are editing an existing VLAN interface. Enter the number of the VLAN interface. You can use a number from 0~4094. For example, use vlan0, vlan8, and so on. The total number of VLANs you can configure on the USG depends on the model. Select the zone to which the VLAN interface belongs. Select the Ethernet interface on which the VLAN interface runs. Enter the VLAN ID. This 12-bit number uniquely identifies each VLAN. Allowed values are 1 - 4094. (0 and 4095 are reserved.) This is a 3-bit field within a 802.1Q VLAN tag thats used to prioritize associated outgoing VLAN traffic. "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. See Table 158 on page 407. The setting configured in Configuration > BWM overwrites the priority setting here. Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. Get Automatically Select this if this interface is a DHCP client. In this case, the DHCP server configures the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway automatically. Use Fixed IP Address IP Address You should not select this if the interface is assigned to a VRRP group. Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually. This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address for this interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 194 Subnet Mask Gateway Metric Enable IGMP Support IGMP Downstream IPv6 Address Assignment Enable Stateless Address Auto-
configuration
(SLAAC) Link-Local address IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Gateway Metric Address from DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The USG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Select this to allow the USG to act as an IGMP proxy for hosts connected on the IGMP downstream interface. IGMP Upstream Enable IGMP Upstream on the interface which connects to a router running IGMP that is closer to the multicast server. Enable IGMP Downstream on the interface which connects to the multicast hosts. These IP address fields configure an IPv6 IP address on the interface itself. Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on this interface. The interface will generate an IPv6 IP address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the network. This displays the IPv6 link-local address and the network prefix that the USG generates itself for the interface. Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for this interface if you want to configure a static IP address for this interface. This field is optional. The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using colon (:) hexadecimal notation. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Use this table to have the USG obtain an IPv6 prefix from the ISP or a connected uplink router for an internal network, such as the LAN or DMZ. You have to also enter a suffix address which is appended to the delegated prefix to form an address for this interface. See Prefix Delegation on page 144 for more information. To use prefix delegation, you must:
Create at least one DHCPv6 request object before configuring this table. The external interface must be a DHCPv6 client. You must configure the DHCPv6 request options using a DHCPv6 request object with the type of prefix-delegation. Assign the prefix delegation to an internal interface and enable router advertisement on that interface. Add Edit Remove
#
Click this to create an entry. Select an entry and click this to change the settings. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 195 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select the DHCPv6 request object to use from the drop-down list. Delegated Prefix Suffix Address Address DHCPv6 Setting DUID DUID as MAC Customized DUID Enable Rapid Commit Add Remove Object Reference
#
Name Type Value Interface Relay Server IPv6 Router Advertisement Setting Enter the ending part of the IPv6 address, a slash (/), and the prefix length. The USG will append it to the delegated prefix. For example, you got a delegated prefix of 2003:1234:5678/48. You want to configure an IP address of 2003:1234:5678:1111::1/128 for this interface, then enter
::1111:0:0:0:1/128 in this field. This field displays the combined IPv6 IP address for this interface. Note: This field displays the combined address after you click OK and reopen this screen. This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the interface, which is unique and used for identification purposes when the interface is exchanging DHCPv6 messages with others. See DHCPv6 on page 145 for more information. Select this to have the DUID generated from the interfaces default MAC address. If you want to use a customized DUID, enter it here for the interface. Select this to shorten the DHCPv6 message exchange process from four to two steps. This function helps reduce heavy network traffic load. Note: Make sure you also enable this option in the DHCPv6 clients to make rapid commit work. Information Refresh Time Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing information retrieved from DHCPv6. Request Address This field is available if you set this interface to DHCPv6 Client. Select this to get an IPv6 IP address for this interface from the DHCP server. Clear this to not get any IP address information through DHCPv6. If this interface is a DHCPv6 client, use this section to configure DHCPv6 request settings that determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6 Request Options /
DHCPv6 Lease Options If this interface is a DHCPv6 server, use this section to configure DHCPv6 lease settings that determine what to offer to the DHCPv6 clients. Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 9.3.3 on page 164 for more information. Select an entry and click this to change the settings. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This field displays the name of the DHCPv6 request or lease object. This field displays the type of the object. This field displays the IPv6 prefix that the USG obtained from an uplink router (Server is selected) or will advertise to its clients (Client is selected). When Relay is selected, select this check box and an interface from the drop-down list if you want to use it as the relay server. When Relay is selected, select this check box and enter the IP address of a DHCPv6 server as the relay server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 196 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL Enable Router Advertisement Advertised Hosts Get Network Configuration From DHCPv6 Advertised Hosts Get Other Configuration From DHCPv6 Router Preference MTU Hop Limit Advertised Prefix Table Add Edit Remove
#
IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Advertised Prefix from DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Add Edit Remove
#
Delegated Prefix Suffix Address DESCRIPTION Select this to enable this interface to send router advertisement messages periodically. See IPv6 Router Advertisement on page 145 for more information. Select this to have the USG indicate to hosts to obtain network settings (such as prefix and DNS settings) through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the USG indicate to hosts that DHCPv6 is not available and they should use the prefix in the router advertisement message. Select this to have the USG indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the USG indicate to hosts that DNS information is not available in this network. Select the router preference (Low, Medium or High) for the interface. The interface sends this preference in the router advertisements to tell hosts what preference they should use for the USG. This helps hosts to choose their default router especially when there are multiple IPv6 router in the network. Note: Make sure the hosts also support router preference to make this function work. The Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each IPv6 data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Enter the maximum number of network segments that a packet can cross before reaching the destination. When forwarding an IPv6 packet, IPv6 routers are required to decrease the Hop Limit by 1 and to discard the IPv6 packet when the Hop Limit is 0. Configure this table only if you want the USG to advertise a fixed prefix to the network. Click this to create an IPv6 prefix address. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Enter the IPv6 network prefix address and the prefix length. The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. Use this table to configure the network prefix if you want to use a delegated prefix as the beginning part of the network prefix. Click this to create an entry in this table. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Select the DHCPv6 request object to use for generating the network prefix for the network. Enter the ending part of the IPv6 network address plus a slash (/) and the prefix length. The USG will append it to the selected delegated prefix. The combined address is the network prefix for the network. For example, you got a delegated prefix of 2003:1234:5678/48. You want to divide it into 2003:1234:5678:1111/64 for this interface and 2003:1234:5678:2222/64 for another interface. You can use ::1111/64 and ::2222/64 for the suffix address respectively. But if you do not want to divide the delegated prefix into subnetworks, enter ::0/48 here, which keeps the same prefix length (/48) as the delegated prefix. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 197 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the final network prefix combined by the delegated prefix and the suffix. Address Interface Parameters Egress Bandwidth Ingress Bandwidth MTU Connectivity Check Enable Connectivity Check Check Method Check Period Check Timeout Check Fail Tolerance Check Default Gateway Check this address Check Port DHCP Setting DHCP Relay Server 1 Relay Server 2 Note: This field displays the combined address after you click OK and reopen this screen. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1500. Usually, this value is 1500. The USG can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often to check the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the USG stops routing to the gateway. The USG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check. Select this to turn on the connection check. Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts. Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure. Enter the number of consecutive failures before the USG stops routing through the gateway. Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check. Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check. The DHCP settings are available for the OPT, LAN and DMZ interfaces. Select what type of DHCP service the USG provides to the network. Choices are:
None - the USG does not provide any DHCP services. There is already a DHCP server on the network. DHCP Relay - the USG routes DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers you specify. The DHCP server(s) may be on another network. DHCP Server - the USG assigns IP addresses and provides subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the network. The USG is the DHCP server for the network. These fields appear if the USG is a DHCP Relay. Enter the IP address of a DHCP server for the network. This field is optional. Enter the IP address of another DHCP server for the network. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 198 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION These fields appear if the USG is a DHCP Server. Enter the IP address from which the USG begins allocating IP addresses. If you want to assign a static IP address to a specific computer, click Add Static DHCP. IP Pool Start Address Pool Size First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server First WINS Server, Second WINS Server Default Router Lease time Extended Options Add Edit Remove
#
Name Code Type Value If this field is blank, the Pool Size must also be blank. In this case, the USG can assign every IP address allowed by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interfaces IP address. Enter the number of IP addresses to allocate. This number must be at least one and is limited by the interfaces Subnet Mask. For example, if the Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 and IP Pool Start Address is 10.10.10.10, the USG can allocate 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.254, or 245 IP addresses. If this field is blank, the IP Pool Start Address must also be blank. In this case, the USG can assign every IP address allowed by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interfaces IP address. Specify the IP addresses up to three DNS servers for the DHCP clients to use. Use one of the following ways to specify these IP addresses. Custom Defined - enter a static IP address. From ISP - select the DNS server that another interface received from its DHCP server. USG - the DHCP clients use the IP address of this interface and the USG works as a DNS relay. Type the IP address of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server that you want to send to the DHCP clients. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using. If you set this interface to DHCP Server, you can select to use either the interfaces IP address or another IP address as the default router. This default router will become the DHCP clients default gateway. To use another IP address as the default router, select Custom Defined and enter the IP address. Specify how long each computer can use the information (especially the IP address) before it has to request the information again. Choices are:
infinite - select this if IP addresses never expire days, hours, and minutes - select this to enter how long IP addresses are valid. This table is available if you selected DHCP server. Configure this table if you want to send more information to DHCP clients through DHCP packets. Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 9.3.4 on page 165. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the options name. This is the options code number. This is the options type. This is the options value. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 199 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL Enable IP/MAC Binding Enable Logs for IP/MAC Binding Violation Static DHCP Table Add Edit Remove
#
IP Address MAC Address Description RIP Setting Enable RIP Direction DESCRIPTION Select this option to have the USG enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses for this VLAN. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses. Select this option to have the USG generate a log if a device connected to this VLAN attempts to use an IP address that is bound to another devices MAC address. Configure a list of static IP addresses the USG assigns to computers connected to the interface. Otherwise, the USG assigns an IP address dynamically using the interfaces IP Pool Start Address and Pool Size. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. Enter the IP address to assign to a device with this entrys MAC address. Enter the MAC address to which to assign this entrys IP address. Enter a description to help identify this static DHCP entry. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. See Section 10.6 on page 238 for more information about RIP. Select this to enable RIP on this interface. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select the RIP direction from the drop-down list box. BiDir - This interface sends and receives routing information. In-Only - This interface receives routing information. Send Version Receive Version V2-Broadcast OSPF Setting Area Priority Link Cost Passive Interface Out-Only - This interface sends routing information. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select the RIP version(s) used for sending RIP packets. Choices are 1, 2, and 1 and 2. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select the RIP version(s) used for receiving RIP packets. Choices are 1, 2, and 1 and 2. This field is effective when RIP is enabled. Select this to send RIP-2 packets using subnet broadcasting; otherwise, the USG uses multicasting. See Section 10.7 on page 240 for more information about OSPF. Select the area in which this interface belongs. Select None to disable OSPF in this interface. Enter the priority (between 0 and 255) of this interface when the area is looking for a Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). The highest-priority interface identifies the DR, and the second-highest-priority interface identifies the BDR. Set the priority to zero if the interface can not be the DR or BDR. Enter the cost (between 1 and 65,535) to route packets through this interface. Select this to stop forwarding OSPF routing information from the selected interface. As a result, this interface only receives routing information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 200 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 76 Configuration > Network > Interface > VLAN > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select an authentication method, or disable authentication. To exchange OSPF routing information with peer border routers, you must use the same authentication method that they use. Choices are:
Authentication Text Authentication Key MD5 Authentication ID MD5 Authentication Key Related Setting Configure WAN TRUNK Configure Policy Route OK Cancel Same-as-Area - use the default authentication method in the area None - disable authentication Text - authenticate OSPF routing information using a plain-text password MD5 - authenticate OSPF routing information using MD5 encryption This field is available if the Authentication is Text. Type the password for text authentication. The key can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the ID for MD5 authentication. The ID can be between 1 and 255. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the password for MD5 authentication. The password can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. Click WAN TRUNK to go to a screen where you can set this VLAN to be part of a WAN trunk for load balancing. Click Policy Route to go to the screen where you can manually configure a policy route to associate traffic with this VLAN. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.8 Bridge Interfaces This section introduces bridges and bridge interfaces and then explains the screens for bridge interfaces. Bridge Overview A bridge creates a connection between two or more network segments at the layer-2 (MAC address) level. In the following example, bridge X connects four network segments. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 201 Chapter 9 Interfaces When the bridge receives a packet, the bridge records the source MAC address and the port on which it was received in a table. It also looks up the destination MAC address in the table. If the bridge knows on which port the destination MAC address is located, it sends the packet to that port. If the destination MAC address is not in the table, the bridge broadcasts the packet on every port
(except the one on which it was received). In the example above, computer A sends a packet to computer B. Bridge X records the source address 0A:0A:0A:0A:0A:0A and port 2 in the table. It also looks up 0B:0B:0B:0B:0B:0B in the table. There is no entry yet, so the bridge broadcasts the packet on ports 1, 3, and 4. Table 77 Example: Bridge Table After Computer A Sends a Packet to Computer B MAC ADDRESS 0A:0A:0A:0A:0A:0A PORT 2 If computer B responds to computer A, bridge X records the source address 0B:0B:0B:0B:0B:0B and port 4 in the table. It also looks up 0A:0A:0A:0A:0A:0A in the table and sends the packet to port 2 accordingly. Table 78 Example: Bridge Table After Computer B Responds to Computer A MAC ADDRESS 0A:0A:0A:0A:0A:0A 0B:0B:0B:0B:0B:0B PORT 2 4 Bridge Interface Overview A bridge interface creates a software bridge between the members of the bridge interface. It also becomes the USGs interface for the resulting network. Unlike the device-wide bridge mode in ZyNOS-based USGs, this USG can bridge traffic between some interfaces while it routes traffic for other interfaces. The bridge interfaces also support more functions, like interface bandwidth parameters, DHCP settings, and connectivity check. To use the whole USG as a transparent bridge, add all of the USGs interfaces to a bridge interface. A bridge interface may consist of the following members:
Zero or one VLAN interfaces (and any associated virtual VLAN interfaces) Any number of Ethernet interfaces (and any associated virtual Ethernet interfaces) When you create a bridge interface, the USG removes the members entries from the routing table and adds the bridge interfaces entries to the routing table. For example, this table shows the routing table before and after you create bridge interface br0 (250.250.250.0/23) between lan1 and vlan1. Table 79 Example: Routing Table Before and After Bridge Interface br0 Is Created IP ADDRESS(ES) 210.210.210.0/24 210.211.1.0/24 221.221.221.0/24 222.222.222.0/24 230.230.230.192/26 IP ADDRESS(ES) 221.221.221.0/24 230.230.230.192/26 241.241.241.241/32 242.242.242.242/32 250.250.250.0/23 DESTINATION lan1 lan1:1 vlan0 vlan1 wan2 DESTINATION vlan0 wan2 dmz dmz br0 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 202 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 79 Example: Routing Table Before and After Bridge Interface br0 Is Created (continued) IP ADDRESS(ES) DESTINATION 241.241.241.241/32 242.242.242.242/32 DESTINATION dmz dmz IP ADDRESS(ES) In this example, virtual Ethernet interface lan1:1 is also removed from the routing table when lan1 is added to br0. Virtual interfaces are automatically added to or remove from a bridge interface when the underlying interface is added or removed. 9.8.1 Bridge Summary This screen lists every bridge interface and virtual interface created on top of bridge interfaces. If you enabled IPv6 in the Configuration > System > IPv6 screen, you can also configure bridge interfaces used for your IPv6 network on this screen. To access this screen, click Configuration >
Network > Interface > Bridge. Figure 140 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge Each field is described in the following table. Table 80 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge LABEL Configuration / IPv6 Configuration DESCRIPTION Use the Configuration section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Configuration section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your USG to an IPv6 network. Both sections have similar fields as described below. Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To open the screen where you can create a virtual interface, select an interface and click Create Virtual Interface. Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Create Virtual Interface USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 203 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 80 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge (continued) LABEL Object References DESCRIPTION Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the name of the interface. This field displays the current IP address of the interface. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, the interface does not have an IP address yet. This screen also shows whether the IP address is a static IP address (STATIC) or dynamically assigned (DHCP). IP addresses are always static in virtual interfaces. This field displays the Ethernet interfaces and VLAN interfaces in the bridge interface. It is blank for virtual interfaces. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
#
Status Name IP Address Member Apply Reset 9.8.2 Bridge Add/Edit This screen lets you configure IP address assignment, interface bandwidth parameters, DHCP settings, and connectivity check for each bridge interface. To access this screen, click the Add or Edit icon in the Bridge Summary screen. The following screen appears. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 204 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 141 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 205 Chapter 9 Interfaces Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add Each field is described in the table below. DESCRIPTION Use this button to display both IPv4 and IPv6, IPv4-only, or IPv6-only configuration fields. Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit LABEL IPv4/IPv6 View /
IPv4 View / IPv6 View Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create New Object Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Click this button to create a DHCPv6 lease or DHCPv6 request object that you may use for the DHCPv6 settings in this screen. General Settings Enable Interface Select this to enable this interface. Clear this to disable this interface. General IPv6 Setting USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 206 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to enable IPv6 on this interface. Otherwise, clear this to disable it. Enable IPv6 Interface Properties Interface Type Interface Name Zone Description Member Configuration Available Member IP Address Assignment Get Automatically Use Fixed IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Metric Enable IGMP Support Select one of the following option depending on the type of network to which the USG is connected or if you want to additionally manually configure some related settings. internal is for connecting to a local network. Other corresponding configuration options: DHCP server and DHCP relay. The USG automatically adds default SNAT settings for traffic flowing from this interface to an external interface. external is for connecting to an external network (like the Internet). The USG automatically adds this interface to the default WAN trunk. For general, the rest of the screens options do not automatically adjust and you must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for the interface. This field is read-only if you are editing the interface. Enter the name of the bridge interface. The format is brx, where x is 0 - 11. For example, br0, br3, and so on. Select the zone to which the interface is to belong. You use zones to apply security settings such as security policy and remote management. Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. This field displays Ethernet interfaces and VLAN interfaces that can become part of the bridge interface. An interface is not available in the following situations:
There is a virtual interface on top of it It is already used in a different bridge interface Select one, and click the >> arrow to add it to the bridge interface. Each bridge interface can only have one VLAN interface. This field displays the interfaces that are part of the bridge interface. Select one, and click the << arrow to remove it from the bridge interface. Select this if this interface is a DHCP client. In this case, the DHCP server configures the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway automatically. Select this if you want to specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway manually. This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address for this interface. This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. This field is enabled if you select Use Fixed IP Address. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The USG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Select this to allow the USG to act as an IGMP proxy for hosts connected on the IGMP downstream interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 207 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Upstream Enable IGMP Upstream on the interface which connects to a router running IGMP that is closer to the multicast server. Enable IGMP Downstream on the interface which connects to the multicast hosts. IGMP Downstream IPv6 Address Assignment Enable Stateless Address Auto-
configuration
(SLAAC) Link-Local address IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Gateway Metric Address from DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Add Edit Remove
#
Delegated Prefix Suffix Address Address DHCPv6 Setting DUID These IP address fields configure an IPv6 IP address on the interface itself. Select this to enable IPv6 stateless auto-configuration on this interface. The interface will generate an IPv6 IP address itself from a prefix obtained from an IPv6 router in the network. This displays the IPv6 link-local address and the network prefix that the USG generates itself for the interface. Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix length for this interface if you want to use a static IP address. This field is optional. The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. Enter the IPv6 address of the default outgoing gateway using colon (:) hexadecimal notation. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Use this table to have the USG obtain an IPv6 prefix from the ISP or a connected uplink router for an internal network, such as the LAN or DMZ. You have to also enter a suffix address which is appended to the delegated prefix to form an address for this interface. See Prefix Delegation on page 144 for more information. To use prefix delegation, you must:
Create at least one DHCPv6 request object before configuring this table. The external interface must be a DHCPv6 client. You must configure the DHCPv6 request options using a DHCPv6 request object with the type of prefix-delegation. Assign the prefix delegation to an internal interface and enable router advertisement on that interface. Click this to create an entry. Select an entry and click this to change the settings. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Select the DHCPv6 request object to use from the drop-down list. Enter the ending part of the IPv6 address, a slash (/), and the prefix length. The USG will append it to the delegated prefix. For example, you got a delegated prefix of 2003:1234:5678/48. You want to configure an IP address of 2003:1234:5678:1111::1/128 for this interface, then enter
::1111:0:0:0:1/128 in this field. This field displays the combined IPv6 IP address for this interface. Note: This field displays the combined address after you click OK and reopen this screen. This field displays the DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID) of the interface, which is unique and used for identification purposes when the interface is exchanging DHCPv6 messages with others. See DHCPv6 on page 145 for more information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 208 Chapter 9 Interfaces DUID as MAC Customized DUID Enable Rapid Commit Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this if you want the DUID is generated from the interfaces default MAC address. If you want to use a customized DUID, enter it here for the interface. Select this to shorten the DHCPv6 message exchange process from four to two steps. This function helps reduce heavy network traffic load. Note: Make sure you also enable this option in the DHCPv6 clients to make rapid commit work. Information Refresh Time Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing information retrieved from DHCPv6. Request Address This field is available if you set this interface to DHCPv6 Client. Select this to get an IPv6 IP address for this interface from the DHCP server. Clear this to not get any IP address information through DHCPv6. If this interface is a DHCPv6 client, use this section to configure DHCPv6 request settings that determine what additional information to get from the DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6 Request Options /
DHCPv6 Lease Options If the interface is a DHCPv6 server, use this section to configure DHCPv6 lease settings that determine what to offer to the DHCPv6 clients. Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 9.3.3 on page 164 for more information. Select an entry and click this to change the settings. Select an entry and click this to delete it from this table. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This field displays the name of the DHCPv6 request or lease object. This field displays the type of the object. This field displays the IPv6 prefix that the USG obtained from an uplink router (Server is selected) or will advertise to its clients (Client is selected). When Relay is selected, select this check box and an interface from the drop-down list if you want to use it as the relay server. When Relay is selected, select this check box and enter the IP address of a DHCPv6 server as the relay server. Add Remove Object Reference
#
Name Type Value Interface Relay Server IPv6 Router Advertisement Setting Enable Router Advertisement Advertised Hosts Get Network Configuration From DHCPv6 Advertised Hosts Get Other Configuration From DHCPv6 Select this to enable this interface to send router advertisement messages periodically. See IPv6 Router Advertisement on page 145 for more information. Select this to have the USG indicate to hosts to obtain network settings (such as prefix and DNS settings) through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the USG indicate to hosts that DHCPv6 is not available and they should use the prefix in the router advertisement message. Select this to have the USG indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the USG indicate to hosts that DNS information is not available in this network. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 209 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select the router preference (Low, Medium or High) for the interface. The interface sends this preference in the router advertisements to tell hosts what preference they should use for the USG. This helps hosts to choose their default router especially when there are multiple IPv6 router in the network. Router Preference MTU Hop Limit Advertised Prefix Table Add Edit Remove
#
IPv6 Address/
Prefix Length Advertised Prefix from DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation Add Edit Remove
#
Delegated Prefix Suffix Address Address Interface Parameters Egress Bandwidth Note: Make sure the hosts also support router preference to make this function work. The Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each IPv6 data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Enter the maximum number of network segments that a packet can cross before reaching the destination. When forwarding an IPv6 packet, IPv6 routers are required to decrease the Hop Limit by 1 and to discard the IPv6 packet when the Hop Limit is 0. Configure this table only if you want the USG to advertise a fixed prefix to the network. Click this to create an IPv6 prefix address. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Enter the IPv6 network prefix address and the prefix length. The prefix length indicates what the left-most part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network, that is, the network address. Use this table to configure the network prefix if you want to use a delegated prefix as the beginning part of the network prefix. Click this to create an entry in this table. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. Select the DHCPv6 request object to use for generating the network prefix for the network. Enter the ending part of the IPv6 network address plus a slash (/) and the prefix length. The USG will append it to the selected delegated prefix. The combined address is the network prefix for the network. For example, you got a delegated prefix of 2003:1234:5678/48. You want to divide it into 2003:1234:5678:1111/64 for this interface and 2003:1234:5678:2222/64 for another interface. You can use ::1111/64 and ::2222/64 for the suffix address respectively. But if you do not want to divide the delegated prefix into subnetworks, enter ::0/48 here, which keeps the same prefix length (/48) as the delegated prefix. This is the final network prefix combined by the selected delegated prefix and the suffix. Note: This field displays the combined address after you click OK and reopen this screen. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 210 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This is reserved for future use. Ingress Bandwidth MTU DHCP Setting DHCP Relay Server 1 Relay Server 2 IP Pool Start Address Pool Size First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server First WINS Server, Second WINS Server Default Router Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Allowed values are 576 - 1500. Usually, this value is 1500. Select what type of DHCP service the USG provides to the network. Choices are:
None - the USG does not provide any DHCP services. There is already a DHCP server on the network. DHCP Relay - the USG routes DHCP requests to one or more DHCP servers you specify. The DHCP server(s) may be on another network. DHCP Server - the USG assigns IP addresses and provides subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server information to the network. The USG is the DHCP server for the network. These fields appear if the USG is a DHCP Relay. Enter the IP address of a DHCP server for the network. This field is optional. Enter the IP address of another DHCP server for the network. These fields appear if the USG is a DHCP Server. Enter the IP address from which the USG begins allocating IP addresses. If you want to assign a static IP address to a specific computer, click Add Static DHCP. If this field is blank, the Pool Size must also be blank. In this case, the USG can assign every IP address allowed by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interfaces IP address. Enter the number of IP addresses to allocate. This number must be at least one and is limited by the interfaces Subnet Mask. For example, if the Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0 and IP Pool Start Address is 10.10.10.10, the USG can allocate 10.10.10.10 to 10.10.10.254, or 245 IP addresses. If this field is blank, the IP Pool Start Address must also be blank. In this case, the USG can assign every IP address allowed by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask, except for the first address (network address), last address (broadcast address) and the interfaces IP address. Specify the IP addresses up to three DNS servers for the DHCP clients to use. Use one of the following ways to specify these IP addresses. Custom Defined - enter a static IP address. From ISP - select the DNS server that another interface received from its DHCP server. USG - the DHCP clients use the IP address of this interface and the USG works as a DNS relay. Type the IP address of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server that you want to send to the DHCP clients. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using. If you set this interface to DHCP Server, you can select to use either the interfaces IP address or another IP address as the default router. This default router will become the DHCP clients default gateway. To use another IP address as the default router, select Custom Defined and enter the IP address. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 211 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Specify how long each computer can use the information (especially the IP address) before it has to request the information again. Choices are:
Lease time Extended Options Add Edit Remove
#
Name Code Type Value Enable IP/MAC Binding Enable Logs for IP/MAC Binding Violation Static DHCP Table Add Edit Remove
#
IP Address MAC Address Description Connectivity Check Enable Connectivity Check Check Method infinite - select this if IP addresses never expire days, hours, and minutes - select this to enter how long IP addresses are valid. This table is available if you selected DHCP server. Configure this table if you want to send more information to DHCP clients through DHCP packets. Click this to create an entry in this table. See Section 9.3.4 on page 165. Select an entry in this table and click this to modify it. Select an entry in this table and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the options name. This is the options code number. This is the options type. This is the options value. Select this option to have this interface enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses. Select this option to have the USG generate a log if a device connected to this interface attempts to use an IP address that is bound to another devices MAC address. Configure a list of static IP addresses the USG assigns to computers connected to the interface. Otherwise, the USG assigns an IP address dynamically using the interfaces IP Pool Start Address and Pool Size. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. Enter the IP address to assign to a device with this entrys MAC address. Enter the MAC address to which to assign this entrys IP address. Enter a description to help identify this static DHCP entry. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. The interface can regularly check the connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. You specify how often the interface checks the connection, how long to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure, and how many consecutive failures are required before the USG stops routing to the gateway. The USG resumes routing to the gateway the first time the gateway passes the connectivity check. Select this to turn on the connection check. Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Check Period Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 212 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 81 Configuration > Network > Interface > Bridge > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure. Enter the number of consecutive failures before the USG stops routing through the gateway. Select this to use the default gateway for the connectivity check. Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check. Click WAN TRUNK to go to a screen where you can configure the interface as part of a WAN trunk for load balancing. Click Policy Route to go to the screen where you can manually configure a policy route to associate traffic with this bridge interface. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Check Timeout Check Fail Tolerance Check Default Gateway Check this address Check Port Related Setting Configure WAN TRUNK Configure Policy Route OK Cancel 9.9 Virtual Interfaces Use virtual interfaces to tell the USG where to route packets. Virtual interfaces can also be used in VPN gateways (see Chapter 21 on page 332). Virtual interfaces can be created on top of Ethernet interfaces, VLAN interfaces, or bridge interfaces. Virtual VLAN interfaces recognize and use the same VLAN ID. Otherwise, there is no difference between each type of virtual interface. Network policies (for example, security policies) that apply to the underlying interface automatically apply to the virtual interface as well. Like other interfaces, virtual interfaces have an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway used to make routing decisions. However, you have to manually specify the IP address and subnet mask;
virtual interfaces cannot be DHCP clients. Like other interfaces, you can restrict bandwidth through virtual interfaces, but you cannot change the MTU. The virtual interface uses the same MTU that the underlying interface uses. Unlike other interfaces, virtual interfaces do not provide DHCP services, and they do not verify that the gateway is available. 9.9.1 Virtual Interfaces Add/Edit This screen lets you configure IP address assignment and interface parameters for virtual interfaces. To access this screen, click the Create Virtual Interface icon in the Ethernet, VLAN, or bridge interface summary screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 213 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 142 Configuration > Network > Interface > Create Virtual Interface Each field is described in the table below. Table 82 Configuration > Network > Interface > Create Virtual Interface LABEL Interface Properties Interface Name DESCRIPTION Description IP Address Assignment IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Metric Interface Parameters Egress Bandwidth Ingress Bandwidth OK Cancel This field is read-only. It displays the name of the virtual interface, which is automatically derived from the underlying Ethernet interface, VLAN interface, or bridge interface. Enter a description of this interface. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. Enter the IP address for this interface. Enter the subnet mask of this interface in dot decimal notation. The subnet mask indicates what part of the IP address is the same for all computers in the network. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The USG sends packets to the gateway when it does not know how to route the packet to its destination. The gateway should be on the same network as the interface. Enter the priority of the gateway (if any) on this interface. The USG decides which gateway to use based on this priority. The lower the number, the higher the priority. If two or more gateways have the same priority, the USG uses the one that was configured first. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can send through the interface to the network. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. This is reserved for future use. Enter the maximum amount of traffic, in kilobits per second, the USG can receive from the network through the interface. Allowed values are 0 - 1048576. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 214 Chapter 9 Interfaces 9.10 Interface Technical Reference Here is more detailed information about interfaces on the USG. IP Address Assignment Most interfaces have an IP address and a subnet mask. This information is used to create an entry in the routing table. Figure 143 Example: Entry in the Routing Table Derived from Interfaces lan1 wan1 Table 83 Example: Routing Table Entries for Interfaces IP ADDRESS(ES) 100.100.1.1/16 200.200.200.1/24 DESTINATION lan1 wan1 For example, if the USG gets a packet with a destination address of 100.100.25.25, it routes the packet to interface lan1. If the USG gets a packet with a destination address of 200.200.200.200, it routes the packet to interface wan1. In most interfaces, you can enter the IP address and subnet mask manually. In PPPoE/PPTP interfaces, however, the subnet mask is always 255.255.255.255 because it is a point-to-point interface. For these interfaces, you can only enter the IP address. In many interfaces, you can also let the IP address and subnet mask be assigned by an external DHCP server on the network. In this case, the interface is a DHCP client. Virtual interfaces, however, cannot be DHCP clients. You have to assign the IP address and subnet mask manually. In general, the IP address and subnet mask of each interface should not overlap, though it is possible for this to happen with DHCP clients. In the example above, if the USG gets a packet with a destination address of 5.5.5.5, it might not find any entries in the routing table. In this case, the packet is dropped. However, if there is a default router to which the USG should send this packet, you can specify it as a gateway in one of the interfaces. For example, if there is a default router at 200.200.200.100, you can create a gateway at 200.200.200.100 on ge2. In this case, the USG creates the following entry in the routing table. Table 84 Example: Routing Table Entry for a Gateway IP ADDRESS(ES) 0.0.0.0/0 DESTINATION 200.200.200.100 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 215 Chapter 9 Interfaces The gateway is an optional setting for each interface. If there is more than one gateway, the USG uses the gateway with the lowest metric, or cost. If two or more gateways have the same metric, the USG uses the one that was set up first (the first entry in the routing table). In PPPoE/PPTP interfaces, the other computer is the gateway for the interface by default. In this case, you should specify the metric. If the interface gets its IP address and subnet mask from a DHCP server, the DHCP server also specifies the gateway, if any. Interface Parameters The USG restricts the amount of traffic into and out of the USG through each interface. Egress bandwidth sets the amount of traffic the USG sends out through the interface to the network. Ingress bandwidth sets the amount of traffic the USG allows in through the interface from the network.At the time of writing, the USG does not support ingress bandwidth management. If you set the bandwidth restrictions very high, you effectively remove the restrictions. The USG also restricts the size of each data packet. The maximum number of bytes in each packet is called the maximum transmission unit (MTU). If a packet is larger than the MTU, the USG divides it into smaller fragments. Each fragment is sent separately, and the original packet is re-assembled later. The smaller the MTU, the more fragments sent, and the more work required to re-assemble packets correctly. On the other hand, some communication channels, such as Ethernet over ATM, might not be able to handle large data packets. DHCP Settings Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP, RFC 2131, RFC 2132) provides a way to automatically set up and maintain IP addresses, subnet masks, gateways, and some network information (such as the IP addresses of DNS servers) on computers in the network. This reduces the amount of manual configuration you have to do and usually uses available IP addresses more efficiently. In DHCP, every network has at least one DHCP server. When a computer (a DHCP client) joins the network, it submits a DHCP request. The DHCP servers get the request; assign an IP address; and provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and available network information to the DHCP client. When the DHCP client leaves the network, the DHCP servers can assign its IP address to another DHCP client. In the USG, some interfaces can provide DHCP services to the network. In this case, the interface can be a DHCP relay or a DHCP server. As a DHCP relay, the interface routes DHCP requests to DHCP servers on different networks. You can specify more than one DHCP server. If you do, the interface routes DHCP requests to all of them. It is possible for an interface to be a DHCP relay and a DHCP client simultaneously. As a DHCP server, the interface provides the following information to DHCP clients. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 216 Chapter 9 Interfaces IP address - If the DHCP clients MAC address is in the USGs static DHCP table, the interface assigns the corresponding IP address. If not, the interface assigns IP addresses from a pool, defined by the starting address of the pool and the pool size. Table 85 Example: Assigning IP Addresses from a Pool START IP ADDRESS 50.50.50.33 75.75.75.1 99.99.1.1 120.120.120.100 POOL SIZE 5 200 1023 100 RANGE OF ASSIGNED IP ADDRESS 50.50.50.33 - 50.50.50.37 75.75.75.1 - 75.75.75.200 99.99.1.1 - 99.99.4.255 120.120.120.100 - 120.120.120.199 The USG cannot assign the first address (network address) or the last address (broadcast address) in the subnet defined by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask. For example, in the first entry, if the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the USG cannot assign 50.50.50.0 or 50.50.50.255. If the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the USG cannot assign 50.50.0.0 or 50.50.255.255. Otherwise, it can assign every IP address in the range, except the interfaces IP address. If you do not specify the starting address or the pool size, the interface the maximum range of IP addresses allowed by the interfaces IP address and subnet mask. For example, if the interfaces IP address is 9.9.9.1 and subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, the starting IP address in the pool is 9.9.9.2, and the pool size is 253. Subnet mask - The interface provides the same subnet mask you specify for the interface. See IP Address Assignment on page 215. Gateway - The interface provides the same gateway you specify for the interface. See IP Address Assignment on page 215. DNS servers - The interface provides IP addresses for up to three DNS servers that provide DNS services for DHCP clients. You can specify each IP address manually (for example, a companys own DNS server), or you can refer to DNS servers that other interfaces received from DHCP servers (for example, a DNS server at an ISP). These other interfaces have to be DHCP clients. It is not possible for an interface to be the DHCP server and a DHCP client simultaneously. WINS WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) is a Windows implementation of NetBIOS Name Server
(NBNS) on Windows. It keeps track of NetBIOS computer names. It stores a mapping table of your networks computer names and IP addresses. The table is dynamically updated for IP addresses assigned by DHCP. This helps reduce broadcast traffic since computers can query the server instead of broadcasting a request for a computer names IP address. In this way WINS is similar to DNS, although WINS does not use a hierarchy (unlike DNS). A network can have more than one WINS server. Samba can also serve as a WINS server. PPPoE/PPTP Overview Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE, RFC 2516) and Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
(PPTP, RFC 2637) are usually used to connect two computers over phone lines or broadband connections. PPPoE is often used with cable modems and DSL connections. It provides the following advantages:
The access and authentication method works with existing systems, including RADIUS. You can access one of several network services. This makes it easier for the service provider to offer the service USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 217 Chapter 9 Interfaces PPPoE does not usually require any special configuration of the modem. PPTP is used to set up virtual private networks (VPN) in unsecure TCP/IP environments. It sets up two sessions. 1 2 The first one runs on TCP port 1723. It is used to start and manage the second one. The second one uses Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE, RFC 2890) to transfer information between the computers. PPTP is convenient and easy-to-use, but you have to make sure that firewalls support both PPTP sessions. 9.11 Trunk Overview Use trunks for WAN traffic load balancing to increase overall network throughput and reliability. Load balancing divides traffic loads between multiple interfaces. This allows you to improve quality of service and maximize bandwidth utilization for multiple ISP links. Maybe you have two Internet connections with different bandwidths. You could set up a trunk that uses spillover or weighted round robin load balancing so time-sensitive traffic (like video) usually goes through the higher-bandwidth interface. For other traffic, you might want to use least load first load balancing to even out the distribution of the traffic load. Suppose ISP A has better connections to Europe while ISP B has better connections to Australia. You could use policy routes and trunks to have traffic for your European branch office primarily use ISP A and traffic for your Australian branch office primarily use ISP B. Or maybe one of the USG's interfaces is connected to an ISP that is also your Voice over IP (VoIP) service provider. You can use policy routing to send the VoIP traffic through a trunk with the interface connected to the VoIP service provider set to active and another interface (connected to another ISP) set to passive. This way VoIP traffic goes through the interface connected to the VoIP service provider whenever the interfaces connection is up. Use the Trunk summary screen (Section 9.12 on page 221) to view the list of configured trunks and which load balancing algorithm each trunk uses. Use the Add Trunk screen (Section 9.12.1 on page 222) to configure the member interfaces for a trunk and the load balancing algorithm the trunk uses. Use the Add System Default screen (Section 9.12.2 on page 224) to configure the load balancing algorithm for the system default trunk. 9.11.1 What You Need to Know Add WAN interfaces to trunks to have multiple connections share the traffic load. If one WAN interfaces connection goes down, the USG sends traffic through another member of the trunk. For example, you connect one WAN interface to one ISP and connect a second WAN interface to a second ISP. The USG balances the WAN traffic load between the connections. If one interface's connection goes down, the USG can automatically send its traffic through another interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 218 Chapter 9 Interfaces You can also use trunks with policy routing to send specific traffic types through the best WAN interface for that type of traffic. If that interfaces connection goes down, the USG can still send its traffic through another interface. You can define multiple trunks for the same physical interfaces. 1 2 3 LAN user A logs into server B on the Internet. The USG uses wan1 to send the request to server B. The USG is using active/active load balancing. So when LAN user A tries to access something on the server, the request goes out through wan2. The server finds that the request comes from wan2s IP address instead of wan1s IP address and rejects the request. If link sticking had been configured, the USG would have still used wan1 to send LAN user As request to the server and server would have given the user A access. Load Balancing Algorithms The following sections describe the load balancing algorithms the USG can use to decide which interface the traffic (from the LAN) should use for a session. In the load balancing section, a session may refer to normal connection-oriented, UDP or SNMP2 traffic. The available bandwidth you configure on the USG refers to the actual bandwidth provided by the ISP and the measured bandwidth refers to the bandwidth an interface is currently using. Least Load First The least load first algorithm uses the current (or recent) outbound bandwidth utilization of each trunk member interface as the load balancing index(es) when making decisions about to which interface a new session is to be distributed. The outbound bandwidth utilization is defined as the measured outbound throughput over the available outbound bandwidth. Here the USG has two WAN interfaces connected to the Internet. The configured available outbound bandwidths for WAN 1 and WAN 2 are 512K and 256K respectively. Figure 144 Least Load First Example The outbound bandwidth utilization is used as the load balancing index. In this example, the measured (current) outbound throughput of WAN 1 is 412K and WAN 2 is 198K. The USG calculates the load balancing index as shown in the table below. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 219 Chapter 9 Interfaces Since WAN 2 has a smaller load balancing index (meaning that it is less utilized than WAN 1), the USG will send the subsequent new session traffic through WAN 2. Table 86 Least Load First Example INTERFACE WAN 1 WAN 2 OUTBOUND AVAILABLE (A) 512 K 256 K Weighted Round Robin MEASURED (M) 412 K 198 K LOAD BALANCING INDEX
(M/A) 0.8 0.77 Round Robin scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when an interface has more traffic than it can handle. A queue is given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that interface. This queue then moves to the back of the list. The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth, and then moves to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the number of queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty. The Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm is best suited for situations when the bandwidths set for the two WAN interfaces are different. Similar to the Round Robin (RR) algorithm, the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm sets the USG to send traffic through each WAN interface in turn. In addition, the WAN interfaces are assigned weights. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. For example, in the figure below, the configured available bandwidth of WAN1 is 1M and WAN2 is 512K. You can set the USG to distribute the network traffic between the two interfaces by setting the weight of wan1 and wan2 to 2 and 1 respectively. The USG assigns the traffic of two sessions to wan1 and one session's traffic to wan2 in each round of 3 new sessions. Figure 145 Weighted Round Robin Algorithm Example Spillover The spillover load balancing algorithm sends network traffic to the first interface in the trunk member list until the interfaces maximum allowable load is reached, then sends the excess network traffic of new sessions to the next interface in the trunk member list. This continues as long as there are more member interfaces and traffic to be sent through them. Suppose the first trunk member interface uses an unlimited access Internet connection and the second is billed by usage. Spillover load balancing only uses the second interface when the traffic load exceeds the threshold on the first interface. This fully utilizes the bandwidth of the first interface to reduce Internet usage fees and avoid overloading the interface. In this example figure, the upper threshold of the first interface is set to 800K. The USG sends network traffic of new sessions that exceed this limit to the secondary WAN interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 220 Chapter 9 Interfaces Figure 146 Spillover Algorithm Example 9.12 The Trunk Summary Screen Click Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk to open the Trunk screen. This screen lists the configured trunks and the load balancing algorithm that each is configured to use. Figure 147 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk The following table describes the items in this screen. Table 87 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Configuration DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Configure what to do with existing passive mode interface connections when an interface set to active mode in the same trunk comes back up. Select this to terminate existing connections on an interface which is set to passive mode when any interface set to active mode in the same trunk comes back up. Disconnect Connections Before Falling Back USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 221 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 87 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk (continued) LABEL Enable Default SNAT DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG use the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address of the packets it sends out through its WAN trunks. The USG automatically adds SNAT settings for traffic it routes from internal interfaces to external interfaces. Select whether the USG is to use the default system WAN trunk or one of the user configured WAN trunks as the default trunk for routing traffic from internal interfaces to external interfaces. The USG automatically adds all external interfaces into the pre-configured system default SYSTEM_DEFAULT_WAN_TRUNK. You cannot delete it. You can create your own User Configuration trunks and customize the algorithm, member interfaces and the active/passive mode. Click this to create a new user-configured trunk. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove a user-configured trunk, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. This field displays the label that you specified to identify the trunk. This field displays the load balancing method the trunk is set to use. Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Default Trunk Selection User Configuration /
System Default Add Edit Remove Object References
#
Name Algorithm Apply Reset 9.12.1 Configuring a User-Defined Trunk Click Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk, in the User Configuration table click the Add (or Edit) icon to open the following screen. Use this screen to create or edit a WAN trunk entry. Figure 148 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Add (or Edit) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 222 Chapter 9 Interfaces Each field is described in the table below. Table 88 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Add (or Edit) LABEL Name DESCRIPTION This is read-only if you are editing an existing trunk. When adding a new trunk, enter a descriptive name for this trunk. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select a load balancing method to use from the drop-down list box. Load Balancing Algorithm Load Balancing Index(es) Add Edit Remove Move
#
Member Mode Weight Select Weighted Round Robin to balance the traffic load between interfaces based on their respective weights. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. For example, if the weight ratio of wan1 and wan2 interfaces is 2:1, the USG chooses wan1 for 2 sessions traffic and wan2 for 1 sessions traffic in each round of 3 new sessions. Select Least Load First to send new session traffic through the least utilized trunk member. Select Spillover to send network traffic through the first interface in the group member list until there is enough traffic that the second interface needs to be used
(and so on). This field is available if you selected to use the Least Load First or Spillover method. Select Outbound, Inbound, or Outbound + Inbound to set the traffic to which the USG applies the load balancing method. Outbound means the traffic traveling from an internal interface (ex. LAN) to an external interface (ex. WAN). Inbound means the opposite. The table lists the trunks member interfaces. You can add, edit, remove, or move entries for user configured trunks. Click this to add a member interface to the trunk. Select an interface and click Add to add a new member interface after the selected member interface. Select an entry and click Edit to modify the entrys settings. To remove a member interface, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To move an interface to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the interface. This column displays the priorities of the groups interfaces. The order of the interfaces in the list is important since they are used in the order they are listed. Click this table cell and select an interface to be a group member. If you select an interface that is part of another Ethernet interface, the USG does not send traffic through the interface as part of the trunk. For example, if you have physical port 5 in the ge2 representative interface, you must select interface ge2 in order to send traffic through port 5 as part of the trunk. If you select interface ge5 as a member here, the USG will not send traffic through port 5 as part of the trunk. Click this table cell and select Active to have the USG always attempt to use this connection. Select Passive to have the USG only use this connection when all of the connections set to active are down. You can only set one of a groups interfaces to passive mode. This field displays with the weighted round robin load balancing algorithm. Specify the weight (1~10) for the interface. The weights of the different member interfaces form a ratio. This ratio determines how much traffic the USG assigns to each member interface. The higher an interfaces weight is (relative to the weights of the interfaces), the more sessions that interface should handle. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 223 Chapter 9 Interfaces Table 88 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Add (or Edit) (continued) LABEL Ingress Bandwidth DESCRIPTION This is reserved for future use. This field displays with the least load first load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the USG is to allow to come in through the interface per second. Note: You can configure the bandwidth of an interface in the corresponding interface edit screen. Egress Bandwidth This field displays with the least load first or spillover load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the USG is to send out through the interface per second. Spillover OK Cancel Note: You can configure the bandwidth of an interface in the corresponding interface edit screen. This field displays with the spillover load balancing algorithm. Specify the maximum bandwidth of traffic in kilobits per second (1~1048576) to send out through the interface before using another interface. When this spillover bandwidth limit is exceeded, the USG sends new session traffic through the next interface. The traffic of existing sessions still goes through the interface on which they started. The USG uses the group member interfaces in the order that they are listed. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 9.12.2 Configuring the System Default Trunk In the Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk screen and the System Default section, select the default trunk entry and click Edit to open the following screen. Use this screen to change the load balancing algorithm and view the bandwidth allocations for each member interface. Note: The available bandwidth is allocated to each member interface equally and is not allowed to be changed for the default trunk. Figure 149 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Edit (System Default) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 224 Chapter 9 Interfaces Each field is described in the table below. Table 89 Configuration > Network > Interface > Trunk > Edit (System Default) LABEL Name Load Balancing Algorithm DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of the selected system default trunk. Select the load balancing method to use for the trunk. Select Weighted Round Robin to balance the traffic load between interfaces based on their respective weights. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. For example, if the weight ratio of wan1 and wan2 interfaces is 2:1, the USG chooses wan1 for 2 sessions traffic and wan2 for 1 sessions traffic in each round of 3 new sessions. Select Least Load First to send new session traffic through the least utilized trunk member. Select Spillover to send network traffic through the first interface in the group member list until there is enough traffic that the second interface needs to be used
(and so on). The table lists the trunks member interfaces. This table is read-only. This column displays the priorities of the groups interfaces. The order of the interfaces in the list is important since they are used in the order they are listed. This column displays the name of the member interfaces. This field displays Active if the USG always attempt to use this connection. This field displays Passive if the USG only use this connection when all of the connections set to active are down. Only one of a groups interfaces can be set to passive mode. This field displays with the weighted round robin load balancing algorithm. Specify the weight (1~10) for the interface. The weights of the different member interfaces form a ratio. s This is reserved for future use. This field displays with the least load first load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the USG is to allow to come in through the interface per second. This field displays with the least load first or spillover load balancing algorithm. It displays the maximum number of kilobits of data the USG is to send out through the interface per second. This field displays with the spillover load balancing algorithm. Specify the maximum bandwidth of traffic in kilobits per second (1~1048576) to send out through the interface before using another interface. When this spillover bandwidth limit is exceeded, the USG sends new session traffic through the next interface. The traffic of existing sessions still goes through the interface on which they started.
#
Member Mode Weight Ingress Bandwidth Egress Bandwidth Spillover OK Cancel The USG uses the group member interfaces in the order that they are listed. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 225 CHAPTER 10 Routing 10.1 Policy and Static Routes Overview Use policy routes and static routes to override the USGs default routing behavior in order to send packets through the appropriate interface or VPN tunnel. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the USGs LAN interface. The USG routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the USGs default gateway (R1). You create one policy route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another policy route to communicate with a separate network behind another router (R3) connected to the LAN. Figure 150 Example of Policy Routing Topology A LAN WAN R3 R1 R2 Note: You can generally just use policy routes. You only need to use static routes if you have a large network with multiple routers where you use RIP or OSPF to propagate routing information to other routers. 10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Policy Route screens (see Section 10.2 on page 228) to list and configure policy routes. Use the Static Route screens (see Section 10.3 on page 235) to list and configure static routes. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 226 Chapter 10 Routing 10.1.2 What You Need to Know Policy Routing Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the USG takes the shortest path to forward a packet. IP Policy Routing (IPPR) provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis, prior to the normal routing. How You Can Use Policy Routing Source-Based Routing Network administrators can use policy-based routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections. Bandwidth Shaping You can allocate bandwidth to traffic that matches routing policies and prioritize traffic. You can also use policy routes to manage other types of traffic (like ICMP traffic) and send traffic through VPN tunnels. Cost Savings IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high-bandwidth, high-
cost paths while using low-cost paths for batch traffic. Load Sharing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths. NAT - The USG performs NAT by default for traffic going to or from the WAN interfaces. A routing policys SNAT allows network administrators to have traffic received on a specified interface use a specified IP address as the source IP address. Note: The USG automatically uses SNAT for traffic it routes from internal interfaces to external interfaces. For example LAN to WAN traffic. Static Routes The USG usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the USG send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. Configure static routes if you need to use RIP or OSPF to propagate the routing information to other routers. See Chapter 10 on page 238 for more on RIP and OSPF. Policy Routes Versus Static Routes Policy routes are more flexible than static routes. You can select more criteria for the traffic to match and can also use schedules, NAT, and bandwidth management. Policy routes are only used within the USG itself. Static routes can be propagated to other routers using RIP or OSPF. Policy routes take priority over static routes. If you need to use a routing policy on the USG and propagate it to other routers, you could configure a policy route and an equivalent static route. DiffServ QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 227 Chapter 10 Routing DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. DSCP Marking and Per-Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field. DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits) DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies. 10.2 Policy Route Screen Click Configuration > Network > Routing to open the Policy Route screen. Use this screen to see the configured policy routes and turn policy routing based bandwidth management on or off. A policy route defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria. The action is taken only when all the criteria are met. The criteria can include the user name, source address and incoming interface, destination address, schedule, IP protocol (ICMP, UDP, TCP, etc.) and port. The actions that can be taken include:
Routing the packet to a different gateway, outgoing interface, VPN tunnel, or trunk. Limiting the amount of bandwidth available and setting a priority for traffic. IPPR follows the existing packet filtering facility of RAS in style and in implementation. If you enabled IPv6 in the Configuration > System > IPv6 screen, you can also configure policy routes used for your IPv6 networks on this screen. Click on the icons to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting, and other information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 228 Chapter 10 Routing Figure 151 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 90 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Enable BWM DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. IPv4 Configuration /
IPv6 Configuration Use IPv4/IPv6 Policy Route to Override Direct Route Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Move
#
This is a global setting for enabling or disabling bandwidth management on the USG. You must enable this setting to have individual policy routes apply bandwidth management. Use the IPv4 Configuration section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Configuration section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your USG to an IPv6 network. Both sections have similar fields as described below. Select this to have the USG forward packets that match a policy route according to the policy route instead of sending the packets directly to a connected network. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To change a rules position in the numbered list, select the rule and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that rule and press
[ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering. This is the number of an individual policy route. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 229 Chapter 10 Routing Table 90 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route (continued) LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This icon is lit when the entry is active, red when the next hops connection is down, and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the name of the user (group) object from which the packets are sent. any means all users. This is the name of the schedule object. none means the route is active at all times if enabled. This is the interface on which the packets are received. This is the name of the source IP address (group) object. any means all IP addresses. This is the name of the destination IP address (group) object. any means all IP addresses. This is the DSCP value of incoming packets to which this policy route applies. any means all DSCP values or no DSCP marker. default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort traffic The af entries stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 237 for more details. This is the name of the service object. any means all services. This is the name of a service object. The USG applies the policy route to the packets sent from the corresponding service port. any means all service ports. This is the next hop to which packets are directed. It helps forward packets to their destinations and can be a router, VPN tunnel, outgoing interface or trunk. This is how the USG handles the DSCP value of the outgoing packets that match this route. If this field displays a DSCP value, the USG applies that DSCP value to the routes outgoing packets. preserve means the USG does not modify the DSCP value of the routes outgoing packets. default means the USG sets the DSCP value of the routes outgoing packets to 0. The af choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 237 for more details. This is the source IP address that the route uses. It displays none if the USG does not perform NAT for this route. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. User Schedule Incoming Source Destination DSCP Code Service Source Port Next-Hop DSCP Marking SNAT Apply Reset 10.2.1 Policy Route Edit Screen Click Configuration > Network > Routing to open the Policy Route screen. Then click the Add or Edit icon in the IPv4 Configuration or IPv6 Configuration section. The Add Policy Route or Policy Route Edit screen opens. Use this screen to configure or edit a policy route. Both IPv4 and IPv6 policy route have similar settings except the Address Translation (SNAT) settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 230 Chapter 10 Routing Figure 152 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route > Add/Edit (IPv4 Configuration) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 231 Chapter 10 Routing Figure 153 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route > Add/Edit (IPv6 Configuration) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Table 91 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route > Add/Edit LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create new Object Configuration Enable Description Criteria User Incoming Select this to activate the policy. Enter a descriptive name of up to 31 printable ASCII characters for the policy. Use this to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Select a user name or user group from which the packets are sent. Select where the packets are coming from; any, an interface, a tunnel, an SSL VPN, or the USG itself. For an interface, a tunnel, or an SSL VPN, you also need to select the individual interface, VPN tunnel, or SSL VPN connection. Select a source IP address object from which the packets are sent. Select a destination IP address object to which the traffic is being sent. If the next hop is a dynamic VPN tunnel and you enable Auto Destination Address, the USG uses the local network of the peer router that initiated an incoming dynamic IPSec tunnel as the destination address of the policy instead of your configuration here. Source Address Destination Address USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 232 Chapter 10 Routing Table 91 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DSCP Code DESCRIPTION Select a DSCP code point value of incoming packets to which this policy route applies or select User Define to specify another DSCP code point. The lower the number the higher the priority with the exception of 0 which is usually given only best-effort treatment. any means all DSCP value or no DSCP marker. default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort traffic The af choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 237 for more details. Use this field to specify a custom DSCP code point when you select User Define in the previous field. Select a schedule to control when the policy route is active. none means the route is active at all times if enabled. Select a service or service group to identify the type of traffic to which this policy route applies. Select a service or service group to identify the source port of packets to which the policy route applies. Select Auto to have the USG use the routing table to find a next-hop and forward the matched packets automatically. Select Gateway to route the matched packets to the next-hop router or switch you specified in the Gateway field. You have to set up the next-hop router or switch as a HOST address object first. Select VPN Tunnel to route the matched packets via the specified VPN tunnel. Select Trunk to route the matched packets through the interfaces in the trunk group based on the load balancing algorithm. Select Interface to route the matched packets through the specified outgoing interface to a gateway (which is connected to the interface). This field displays when you select Gateway in the Type field. Select a HOST address object. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your USG that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router or switch on the same segment as your USG's interface(s). This field displays when you select VPN Tunnel in the Type field. Select a VPN tunnel through which the packets are sent to the remote network that is connected to the USG directly. This field displays when you select VPN Tunnel in the Type field. Select this to have the USG use the local network of the peer router that initiated an incoming dynamic IPSec tunnel as the destination address of the policy. Leave this cleared if you want to manually specify the destination address. This field displays when you select Trunk in the Type field. Select a trunk group to have the USG send the packets via the interfaces in the group. This field displays when you select Interface in the Type field. Select an interface to have the USG send traffic that matches the policy route through the specified interface. User-Defined DSCP Code Schedule Service Source Port Next-Hop Type Gateway VPN Tunnel Auto Destination Address Trunk Interface USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 233 Chapter 10 Routing Table 91 Configuration > Network > Routing > Policy Route > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DSCP Marking DESCRIPTION Set how the USG handles the DSCP value of the outgoing packets that match this route. Select one of the pre-defined DSCP values to apply or select User Define to specify another DSCP value. The af choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. See Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ on page 237 for more details. Select preserve to have the USG keep the packets original DSCP value. Select default to have the USG set the DSCP value of the packets to 0. Use this field to specify a custom DSCP value. Use this section to configure NAT for the policy route. This section does not apply to policy routes that use a VPN tunnel as the next hop. Select none to not use NAT for the route. Select outgoing-interface to use the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address of the packets that matches this route. To use SNAT for a virtual interface that is in the same WAN trunk as the physical interface to which the virtual interface is bound, the virtual interface and physical interface must be in different subnets. Otherwise, select a pre-defined address (group) to use as the source IP address(es) of the packets that match this route. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new address (group) to use as the source IP address(es) of the packets that match this route. Use this part of the screen to configure a route connectivity check and disable the policy if the interface is down. Select this to disable the policy if the interface is down or disabled. This is available for Interface and Trunk in the Type field above. Select this to turn on the connection check. This is available for Interface and Gateway in the Type field above. Select the method that the gateway allows. Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the gateway you specify to make sure it is still available. Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts (5-600 seconds). Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure (1-
10 seconds). Enter the number of consecutive failures before the USG stops routing using this policy
(1-10). This field only displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check (1-65535). Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. User-Defined DSCP Code Address Translation Source Network Address Translation Healthy Check Disable policy route automatically while Interface link down Enable Connectivity Check Check Method:
Check Period:
Check Timeout:
Check Fail Tolerance:
Check Port:
Check this address:
OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 234 Chapter 10 Routing 10.3 IP Static Route Screen Click Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route to open the Static Route screen. This screen displays the configured static routes. Configure static routes to be able to use RIP or OSPF to propagate the routing information to other routers. If you enabled IPv6 in the Configuration > System > IPv6 screen, you can also configure static routes used for your IPv6 networks on this screen. Figure 154 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 92 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route LABEL IPv4 Configuration /
IPv6 Configuration DESCRIPTION Use the IPv4 Configuration section for IPv4 network settings. Use the IPv6 Configuration section for IPv6 network settings if you connect your USG to an IPv6 network. Both sections have similar fields as described below. Click this to create a new static route. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. This is the number of an individual static route. This is the destination IP address. This is the IP subnet mask. This is the IPv6 prefix for the destination IP address. This is the IP address of the next-hop gateway or the interface through which the traffic is routed. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your USG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. This is the routes priority among the USGs routes. The smaller the number, the higher priority the route has. Add Edit Remove
#
Destination Subnet Mask Prefix Next-Hop Metric 10.3.1 Static Route Add/Edit Screen Select a static route index number and click Add or Edit. The screen shown next appears. Use this screen to configure the required information for a static route. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 235 Chapter 10 Routing Figure 155 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route > Add (IPv4 Configuration) Figure 156 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route > Add (IPv6 Configuration) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 93 Configuration > Network > Routing > Static Route > Add LABEL Destination IP DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, enter the specific IP address here and use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 (for IPv4) in the Subnet Mask field or a prefix of 128
(for IPv6) in the Prefix Length field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. For IPv6, if you want to send all traffic to the gateway or interface specified in the Gateway IP or Interface field, enter :: in this field and 0 in the Prefix Length field. Enter the IP subnet mask here. Enter the number of left-most digits in the destination IP address, which indicates the network prefix. Enter :: in the Destination IP field and 0 in this field if you want to send all traffic to the gateway or interface specified in the Gateway IP or Interface field. Select the radio button and enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same segment as your USG's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Select the radio button and a predefined interface through which the traffic is sent. Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be 0~127. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Subnet Mask Prefix Length Gateway IP Interface Metric OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 236 Chapter 10 Routing 10.4 Policy Routing Technical Reference Here is more detailed information about some of the features you can configure in policy routing. NAT and SNAT NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address in a packet in one network to a different IP address in another network. Use SNAT (Source NAT) to change the source IP address in one network to a different IP address in another network. Assured Forwarding (AF) PHB for DiffServ Assured Forwarding (AF) behavior is defined in RFC 2597. The AF behavior group defines four AF classes. Inside each class, packets are given a high, medium or low drop precedence. The drop precedence determines the probability that routers in the network will drop packets when congestion occurs. If congestion occurs between classes, the traffic in the higher class (smaller numbered class) is generally given priority. Combining the classes and drop precedence produces the following twelve DSCP encodings from AF11 through AF43. The decimal equivalent is listed in brackets. Table 94 Assured Forwarding (AF) Behavior Group CLASS 2 AF21 (18) AF22 (20) AF23 (22) Low Drop Precedence Medium Drop Precedence High Drop Precedence CLASS 1 AF11 (10) AF12 (12) AF13 (14) CLASS 3 AF31 (26) AF32 (28) AF33 (30) CLASS 4 AF41 (34) AF42 (36) AF43 (38) Maximize Bandwidth Usage The maximize bandwidth usage option allows the USG to divide up any available bandwidth on the interface (including unallocated bandwidth and any allocated bandwidth that a policy route is not using) among the policy routes that require more bandwidth. When you enable maximize bandwidth usage, the USG first makes sure that each policy route gets up to its bandwidth allotment. Next, the USG divides up an interfaces available bandwidth
(bandwidth that is unbudgeted or unused by the policy routes) depending on how many policy routes require more bandwidth and on their priority levels. When only one policy route requires more bandwidth, the USG gives the extra bandwidth to that policy route. When multiple policy routes require more bandwidth, the USG gives the highest priority policy routes the available bandwidth first (as much as they require, if there is enough available bandwidth), and then to lower priority policy routes if there is still bandwidth available. The USG distributes the available bandwidth equally among policy routes with the same priority level. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 237 Chapter 10 Routing 10.5 Routing Protocols Overview Routing protocols give the USG routing information about the network from other routers. The USG stores this routing information in the routing table it uses to make routing decisions. In turn, the USG can also use routing protocols to propagate routing information to other routers. Routing protocols are usually only used in networks using multiple routers like campuses or large enterprises. Use the RIP screen (see Section 10.6 on page 238) to configure the USG to use RIP to receive and/or send routing information. Use the OSPF screen (see Section 10.7 on page 240) to configure general OSPF settings and manage OSPF areas. Use the OSPF Area Add/Edit screen (see Section 10.7.2 on page 244) to create or edit an OSPF area. 10.5.1 What You Need to Know The USG supports two standards, RIP and OSPF, for routing protocols. RIP and OSPF are compared here and discussed further in the rest of the chapter. Table 95 RIP vs. OSPF Network Size Metric RIP OSPF Small (with up to 15 routers) Large Hop count Convergence Slow Finding Out More Bandwidth, hop count, throughput, round trip time and reliability. Fast See Section 10.8 on page 247 for background information on routing protocols. 10.6 The RIP Screen RIP (Routing Information Protocol, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing information with other routers. RIP is a vector-space routing protocol, and, like most such protocols, it uses hop count to decide which route is the shortest. Unfortunately, it also broadcasts its routes asynchronously to the network and converges slowly. Therefore, RIP is more suitable for small networks (up to 15 routers). In the USG, you can configure two sets of RIP settings before you can use it in an interface. First, the Authentication field specifies how to verify that the routing information that is received is the same routing information that is sent. This is discussed in more detail in Authentication Types on page 247. Second, the USG can also redistribute routing information from non-RIP networks, specifically OSPF networks and static routes, to the RIP network. Costs might be calculated differently, however, so you use the Metric field to specify the cost in RIP terms. RIP uses UDP port 520. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 238 Chapter 10 Routing Use the RIP screen to specify the authentication method and maintain the policies for redistribution. Click Configuration > Network > Routing > RIP to open the following screen. Figure 157 Configuration > Network > Routing > RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 96 Configuration > Network > Routing Protocol > RIP LABEL Authentication DESCRIPTION Authentication Select the authentication method used in the RIP network. This authentication protects the integrity, but not the confidentiality, of routing updates. Text Authentication Key MD5 Authentication ID MD5 Authentication Key Redistribute Active OSPF Metric None uses no authentication. Text uses a plain text password that is sent over the network (not very secure). MD5 uses an MD5 password and authentication ID (most secure). This field is available if the Authentication is Text. Type the password for text authentication. The key can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the ID for MD5 authentication. The ID can be between 1 and 255. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the password for MD5 authentication. The password can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. Select this to use RIP to advertise routes that were learned through OSPF. Type the cost for routes provided by OSPF. The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with 1 usually used for directly connected networks. The number does not have to be precise, but it must be between 0 and 16. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually used. Active Static Route Select this to use RIP to advertise routes that were learned through the static route configuration. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 239 Chapter 10 Routing Table 96 Configuration > Network > Routing Protocol > RIP (continued) LABEL Metric Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Type the cost for routes provided by the static route configuration. The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with 1 usually used for directly connected networks. The number does not have to be precise, but it must be between 0 and 16. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually used. Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 10.7 The OSPF Screen OSPF (Open Shortest Path First, RFC 2328) is a link-state protocol designed to distribute routing information within a group of networks, called an Autonomous System (AS). OSPF offers some advantages over vector-space routing protocols like RIP. OSPF supports variable-length subnet masks, which can be set up to use available IP addresses more efficiently. OSPF filters and summarizes routing information, which reduces the size of routing tables throughout the network. OSPF responds to changes in the network, such as the loss of a router, more quickly. OSPF considers several factors, including bandwidth, hop count, throughput, round trip time, and reliability, when it calculates the shortest path. OSPF converges more quickly than RIP. Naturally, OSPF is also more complicated than RIP, so OSPF is usually more suitable for large networks. OSPF uses IP protocol 89. OSPF Areas An OSPF Autonomous System (AS) is divided into one or more areas. Each area represents a group of adjacent networks and is identified by a 32-bit ID. In OSPF, this number may be expressed as an integer or as an IP address. There are several types of areas. The backbone is the transit area that routes packets between other areas. All other areas are connected to the backbone. A normal area is a group of adjacent networks. A normal area has routing information about the OSPF AS, any networks outside the OSPF AS to which it is directly connected, and any networks outside the OSPF AS that provide routing information to any area in the OSPF AS. A stub area has routing information about the OSPF AS. It does not have any routing information about any networks outside the OSPF AS, including networks to which it is directly connected. It relies on a default route to send information outside the OSPF AS. A Not So Stubby Area (NSSA, RFC 1587) has routing information about the OSPF AS and networks outside the OSPF AS to which the NSSA is directly connected. It does not have any routing information about other networks outside the OSPF AS. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 240 Chapter 10 Routing Each type of area is illustrated in the following figure. Figure 158 OSPF: Types of Areas This OSPF AS consists of four areas, areas 0-3. Area 0 is always the backbone. In this example, areas 1, 2, and 3 are all connected to it. Area 1 is a normal area. It has routing information about the OSPF AS and networks X and Y. Area 2 is a stub area. It has routing information about the OSPF AS, but it depends on a default route to send information to networks X and Y. Area 3 is a NSSA. It has routing information about the OSPF AS and network Y but not about network X. OSPF Routers Every router in the same area has the same routing information. They do this by exchanging Hello messages to confirm which neighbor (layer-3) devices exist, and then they exchange database descriptions (DDs) to create a synchronized link-state database. The link-state database contains records of router IDs, their associated links and path costs. The link-state database is then constantly updated through Link State Advertisements (LSA). Each router uses the link state database and the Dijkstra algorithm to compute the least cost paths to network destinations. Like areas, each router has a unique 32-bit ID in the OSPF AS, and there are several types of routers. Each type is really just a different role, and it is possible for one router to play multiple roles at one time. An internal router (IR) only exchanges routing information with other routers in the same area. An Area Border Router (ABR) connects two or more areas. It is a member of all the areas to which it is connected, and it filters, summarizes, and exchanges routing information between them. An Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) exchanges routing information with routers in networks outside the OSPF AS. This is called redistribution in OSPF. Table 97 OSPF: Redistribution from Other Sources to Each Type of Area SOURCE \ TYPE OF AREA Static routes RIP NORMAL Yes Yes NSSA Yes Yes STUB No Yes A backbone router (BR) has at least one interface with area 0. By default, every router in area 0 is a backbone router, and so is every ABR. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 241 Chapter 10 Routing Each type of router is illustrated in the following example. Figure 159 OSPF: Types of Routers In order to reduce the amount of traffic between routers, a group of routers that are directly connected to each other selects a designated router (DR) and a backup designated router (BDR). All of the routers only exchange information with the DR and the BDR, instead of exchanging information with all of the other routers in the group. The DR and BDR are selected by priority; if two routers have the same priority, the highest router ID is used. The DR and BDR are selected in each group of routers that are directly connected to each other. If a router is directly connected to several groups, it might be a DR in one group, a BDR in another group, and neither in a third group all at the same time. Virtual Links In some OSPF AS, it is not possible for an area to be directly connected to the backbone. In this case, you can create a virtual link through an intermediate area to logically connect the area to the backbone. This is illustrated in the following example. Figure 160 OSPF: Virtual Link In this example, area 100 does not have a direct connection to the backbone. As a result, you should set up a virtual link on both ABR in area 10. The virtual link becomes the connection between area 100 and the backbone. You cannot create a virtual link to a router in a different area. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 242 Chapter 10 Routing OSPF Configuration Follow these steps when you configure OSPF on the USG. Enable OSPF. Set up the OSPF areas. Configure the appropriate interfaces. See Section 9.3.1 on page 148. Set up virtual links, as needed. 1 2 3 4 10.7.1 Configuring the OSPF Screen Use the first OSPF screen to specify the OSPF router the USG uses in the OSPF AS and maintain the policies for redistribution. In addition, it provides a summary of OSPF areas, allows you to remove them, and opens the OSPF Add/Edit screen to add or edit them. Click Configuration > Network > Routing > OSPF to open the following screen. Figure 161 Configuration > Network > Routing > OSPF The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 10.7.2 on page 244 for more information as well. Table 98 Configuration > Network > Routing Protocol > OSPF LABEL OSPF Router ID DESCRIPTION Select the 32-bit ID the USG uses in the OSPF AS. Redistribute Active RIP Default - the first available interface IP address is the USGs ID. User Defined - enter the ID (in IP address format) in the field that appears when you select User Define. Select this to advertise routes that were learned from RIP. The USG advertises routes learned from RIP to Normal and NSSA areas but not to Stub areas. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 243 Chapter 10 Routing Table 98 Configuration > Network > Routing Protocol > OSPF (continued) LABEL Type DESCRIPTION Select how OSPF calculates the cost associated with routing information from RIP. Choices are: Type 1 and Type 2. Metric Type 1 - cost = OSPF AS cost + external cost (Metric) Type 2 - cost = external cost (Metric); the OSPF AS cost is ignored. Type the external cost for routes provided by RIP. The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. The way this is used depends on the Type field. This value is usually the average cost in the OSPF AS, and it can be between 1 and 16777214. Active Static Route Select this to advertise routes that were learned from static routes. The USG Type Metric Area Add Edit Remove
#
Area Type Authentication Apply Reset advertises routes learned from static routes to all types of areas. Select how OSPF calculates the cost associated with routing information from static routes. Choices are: Type 1 and Type 2. Type 1 - cost = OSPF AS cost + external cost (Metric) Type 2 - cost = external cost (Metric); the OSPF AS cost is ignored. Type the external cost for routes provided by static routes. The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes. The way this is used depends on the Type field. This value is usually the average cost in the OSPF AS, and it can be between 1 and 16777214. This section displays information about OSPF areas in the USG. Click this to create a new OSPF area. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific area. This field displays the 32-bit ID for each area in IP address format. This field displays the type of area. This type is different from the Type field above. This field displays the default authentication method in the area. Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 10.7.2 OSPF Area Add/Edit Screen The OSPF Area Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new area or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the OSPF summary screen (see Section 10.7 on page 240), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 244 Chapter 10 Routing Figure 162 Configuration > Network > Routing > OSPF > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 99 Configuration > Network > Routing > OSPF > Add LABEL Area ID Type DESCRIPTION Type the unique, 32-bit identifier for the area in IP address format. Select the type of OSPF area. Normal - This area is a normal area. It has routing information about the OSPF AS and about networks outside the OSPF AS. Stub - This area is an stub area. It has routing information about the OSPF AS but not about networks outside the OSPF AS. It depends on a default route to send information outside the OSPF AS. NSSA - This area is a Not So Stubby Area (NSSA), per RFC 1587. It has routing information about the OSPF AS and networks that are outside the OSPF AS and are directly connected to the NSSA. It does not have information about other networks outside the OSPF AS. Select the default authentication method used in the area. This authentication protects the integrity, but not the confidentiality, of routing updates. None uses no authentication. Authentication Text uses a plain text password that is sent over the network (not very secure). MD5 uses an MD5 password and authentication ID (most secure). This field is available if the Authentication is Text. Type the password for text authentication. The key can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the default ID for MD5 authentication in the area. The ID can be between 1 and 255. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the default password for MD5 authentication in the area. The password can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. This section is displayed if the Type is Normal. Create a virtual link if you want to connect a different area (that does not have a direct connection to the backbone) to the backbone. You should set up the virtual link on the ABR that is connected to the other area and on the ABR that is connected to the backbone. Click this to create a new virtual link. Text Authentication Key MD5 Authentication ID MD5 Authentication Key Virtual Link Add USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 245 Chapter 10 Routing Table 99 Configuration > Network > Routing > OSPF > Add (continued) LABEL Edit DESCRIPTION Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific area. This is the 32-bit ID (in IP address format) of the other ABR in the virtual link. This is the authentication method the virtual link uses. This authentication protects the integrity, but not the confidentiality, of routing updates. Remove
#
Peer Router ID Authentication None uses no authentication. Text uses a plain text password that is sent over the network (not very secure). Hover your cursor over this label to display the password. MD5 uses an MD5 password and authentication ID (most secure). Hover your cursor over this label to display the authentication ID and key. OK Cancel Same as Area has the virtual link also use the Authentication settings above. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.7.3 Virtual Link Add/Edit Screen The Virtual Link Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new virtual link or edit an existing one. When the OSPF add or edit screen (see Section 10.7.2 on page 244) has the Type set to Normal, a Virtual Link table displays. Click either the Add icon or an entry and the Edit icon to display a screen like the following. Figure 163 Configuration > Network > Routing > OSPF > Add > Add USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 246 Chapter 10 Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 100 Configuration > Network > Routing > OSPF > Add > Add LABEL Peer Router ID Authentication DESCRIPTION Enter the 32-bit ID (in IP address format) of the other ABR in the virtual link. Select the authentication method the virtual link uses. This authentication protects the integrity, but not the confidentiality, of routing updates. None uses no authentication. Text uses a plain text password that is sent over the network (not very secure). MD5 uses an MD5 password and authentication ID (most secure). Text Authentication Key MD5 Authentication ID MD5 Authentication Key OK Cancel Same as Area has the virtual link also use the Authentication settings above. This field is available if the Authentication is Text. Type the password for text authentication. The key can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the default ID for MD5 authentication in the area. The ID can be between 1 and 255. This field is available if the Authentication is MD5. Type the default password for MD5 authentication in the area. The password can consist of alphanumeric characters and the underscore, and it can be up to 16 characters long. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.8 Routing Protocol Technical Reference Here is more detailed information about RIP and OSPF. Authentication Types Authentication is used to guarantee the integrity, but not the confidentiality, of routing updates. The transmitting router uses its key to encrypt the original message into a smaller message, and the smaller message is transmitted with the original message. The receiving router uses its key to encrypt the received message and then verifies that it matches the smaller message sent with it. If the received message is verified, then the receiving router accepts the updated routing information. The transmitting and receiving routers must have the same key. The USG supports three types of authentication for RIP and OSPF routing protocols:
None - no authentication is used. Text authentication using a plain text password, and the (unencrypted) password is sent over the network. This method is usually used temporarily to prevent network problems. MD5 authentication using an MD5 password and authentication ID. MD5 is an authentication method that produces a 128-bit checksum, called a message-digest, for each packet. It also includes an authentication ID, which can be set to any value between 1 and 255. The USG only accepts packets if these conditions are satisfied. The packets authentication ID is the same as the authentication ID of the interface that received it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 247 Chapter 10 Routing The packets message-digest is the same as the one the USG calculates using the MD5 password. For RIP, authentication is not available in RIP version 1. In RIP version 2, you can only select one authentication type for all interfaces. For OSPF, the USG supports a default authentication type by area. If you want to use this default in an interface or virtual link, you set the associated Authentication Type field to Same as Area. As a result, you only have to update the authentication information for the area to update the authentication type used by these interfaces and virtual links. Alternatively, you can override the default in any interface or virtual link by selecting a specific authentication method. Please see the respective interface sections for more information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 248 CHAPTER 11 DDNS 11.1 DDNS Overview Dynamic DNS (DDNS) services let you use a domain name with a dynamic IP address. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the DDNS screen (see Section 11.2 on page 250) to view a list of the configured DDNS domain names and their details. Use the DDNS Add/Edit screen (see Section 11.2.1 on page 251) to add a domain name to the USG or to edit the configuration of an existing domain name. 11.1.2 What You Need to Know DNS maps a domain name to a corresponding IP address and vice versa. Similarly, Dynamic DNS
(DDNS) maps a domain name to a dynamic IP address. As a result, anyone can use the domain name to contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.) or to access your FTP server or Web site, regardless of the current (dynamic) IP address. Note: You must have a public WAN IP address to use Dynamic DNS. You must set up a dynamic DNS account with a supported DNS service provider before you can use Dynamic DNS services with the USG. When registration is complete, the DNS service provider gives you a password or key. At the time of writing, the USG supports the following DNS service providers. See the listed websites for details about the DNS services offered by each. Table 101 DDNS Service Providers PROVIDER DynDNS Dynu No-IP Peanut Hull 3322 Selfhost SERVICE TYPES SUPPORTED Dynamic DNS, Static DNS, and Custom DNS Basic, Premium No-IP Peanut Hull 3322 Dynamic DNS, 3322 Static DNS Selfhost WEBSITE www.dyndns.com www.dynu.com www.no-ip.com www.oray.cn www.3322.org selfhost.de Note: Record your DDNS accounts user name, password, and domain name to use to configure the USG. After you configure the USG, it automatically sends updated IP addresses to the DDNS service provider, which helps redirect traffic accordingly. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 249 Chapter 11 DDNS 11.2 The DDNS Screen The DDNS screen provides a summary of all DDNS domain names and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to add new domain names, edit the configuration for existing domain names, and delete domain names. Click Configuration > Network > DDNS to open the following screen. Figure 164 Configuration > Network > DDNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 102 Configuration > Network > DDNS LABEL Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate
#
Status Profile Name DDNS Type Domain Name Primary Interface/IP Backup Interface/IP DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This is the number of an individual DDNS profile. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the descriptive profile name for this entry. This field displays which DDNS service you are using. This field displays each domain name the USG can route. This field displays the interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name followed by how the USG determines the IP address for the domain name. from interface - The IP address comes from the specified interface. auto detected -The DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the USG for the IP address to use for the domain name. custom - The IP address is static. This field displays the alternate interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name followed by how the USG determines the IP address for the domain name. The USG uses the backup interface and IP address when the primary interface is disabled, its link is down or its connectivity check fails. from interface - The IP address comes from the specified interface. auto detected -The DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the USG for the IP address to use for the domain name. custom - The IP address is static. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 250 Chapter 11 DDNS Table 102 Configuration > Network > DDNS (continued) LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 11.2.1 The Dynamic DNS Add/Edit Screen The DDNS Add/Edit screen allows you to add a domain name to the USG or to edit the configuration of an existing domain name. Click Configuration > Network > DDNS and then an Add or Edit icon to open this screen. Figure 165 Configuration > Network > DDNS > Add USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 251 Chapter 11 DDNS Figure 166 Configuration > Network > DDNS > Add - Custom The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 103 Configuration > Network > DDNS > Add LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Enable DDNS Profile Profile Name DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Select this check box to use this DDNS entry. When you are adding a DDNS entry, type a descriptive name for this DDNS entry in the USG. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. DDNS Type HTTPS Username Password Retype to Confirm This field is read-only when you are editing an entry. Select the type of DDNS service you are using. Select User custom to create your own DDNS service and configure the DYNDNS Server, URL, and Additional DDNS Options fields below. Select this to encrypt traffic using SSL (port 443), including traffic with username and password, to the DDNS server. Not all DDNS providers support this option. Type the user name used when you registered your domain name. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric characters and the underscore. Spaces are not allowed. For a Dynu DDNS entry, this user name is the one you use for logging into the service, not the name recorded in your personal information in the Dynu website. Type the password provided by the DDNS provider. You can use up to 64 alphanumeric characters and the underscore. Spaces are not allowed. Type the password again to confirm it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 252 Chapter 11 DDNS DESCRIPTION Table 103 Configuration > Network > DDNS > Add (continued) LABEL DDNS Settings Domain name Primary Binding Address Interface IP Address Custom IP Backup Binding Address Interface IP Address Custom IP Enable Wildcard Type the domain name you registered. You can use up to 255 characters. Use these fields to set how the USG determines the IP address that is mapped to your domain name in the DDNS server. The USG uses the Backup Binding Address if the interface specified by these settings is not available. Select the interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name. Select Any to let the domain name be used with any interface. The options available in this field vary by DDNS provider. Interface -The USG uses the IP address of the specified interface. This option appears when you select a specific interface in the Primary Binding Address Interface field. Auto - If the interface has a dynamic IP address, the DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the USG for the IP address to use for the domain name. You may want to use this if there are one or more NAT routers between the USG and the DDNS server. Note: The USG may not determine the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the USG and the DDNS server. Custom - If you have a static IP address, you can select this to use it for the domain name. The USG still sends the static IP address to the DDNS server. This field is only available when the IP Address is Custom. Type the IP address to use for the domain name. Use these fields to set an alternate interface to map the domain name to when the interface specified by the Primary Binding Interface settings is not available. Select the interface to use for updating the IP address mapped to the domain name. Select Any to let the domain name be used with any interface. Select None to not use a backup address. The options available in this field vary by DDNS provider. Interface -The USG uses the IP address of the specified interface. This option appears when you select a specific interface in the Backup Binding Address Interface field. Auto -The DDNS server checks the source IP address of the packets from the USG for the IP address to use for the domain name. You may want to use this if there are one or more NAT routers between the USG and the DDNS server. Note: The USG may not determine the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the USG and the DDNS server. Custom - If you have a static IP address, you can select this to use it for the domain name. The USG still sends the static IP address to the DDNS server. This field is only available when the IP Address is Custom. Type the IP address to use for the domain name. This option is only available with a DynDNS account. Enable the wildcard feature to alias subdomains to be aliased to the same IP address as your (dynamic) domain name. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 253 Chapter 11 DDNS Table 103 Configuration > Network > DDNS > Add (continued) LABEL Mail Exchanger DESCRIPTION This option is only available with a DynDNS account. DynDNS can route e-mail for your domain name to a mail server (called a mail exchanger). For example, DynDNS routes e-mail for john-doe@yourhost.dyndns.org to the host record specified as the mail exchanger. If you are using this service, type the host record of your mail server here. Otherwise leave the field blank. See www.dyndns.org for more information about mail exchangers. This option is only available with a DynDNS account. Select this check box if you are using DynDNSs backup service for e-mail. With this service, DynDNS holds onto your e-mail if your mail server is not available. Once your mail server is available again, the DynDNS server delivers the mail to you. See www.dyndns.org for more information about this service. This field displays when you select User custom from the DDNS Type field above. Type the IP address of the server that will host the DDSN service. This field displays when you select User custom from the DDNS Type field above. Type the URL that can be used to access the server that will host the DDSN service. This field displays when you select User custom from the DDNS Type field above. These are the options supported at the time of writing:
dyndns_system to specify the DYNDNS Server type - for example, dyndns@dyndns.org ip_server_name which should be the URL to get the servers public IP address - for example, http://myip.easylife.tw/
Backup Mail Exchanger DYNDNS Server URL Additional DDNS Options OK Cancel Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 254
1 2 | Users Manual Part 3 | Users Manual | 4.19 MiB |
CHAPTER 12 NAT 12.1 NAT Overview NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network. Use Network Address Translation
(NAT) to make computers on a private network behind the USG available outside the private network. If the USG has only one public IP address, you can make the computers in the private network available by using ports to forward packets to the appropriate private IP address. Suppose you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 167 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the NAT screens (see Section 12.2 on page 255) to view and manage the list of NAT rules and see their configuration details. You can also create new NAT rules and edit or delete existing ones. 12.1.2 What You Need to Know NAT is also known as virtual server, port forwarding, or port translation. 12.2 The NAT Screen The NAT summary screen provides a summary of all NAT rules and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new NAT rules and edit and delete existing NAT rules. To access this USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 255 Chapter 12 NAT screen, login to the Web Configurator and click Configuration > Network > NAT. The following screen appears, providing a summary of the existing NAT rules. Click on the icons to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting, and other information. Figure 168 Configuration > Network > NAT The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 104 Configuration > Network > NAT LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the name of the entry. This field displays what kind of NAT this entry performs: Virtual Server, 1:1 NAT, or Many 1:1 NAT. This field displays the interface on which packets for the NAT entry are received. This field displays the original destination IP address (or address object) of traffic that matches this NAT entry. It displays any if there is no restriction on the original destination IP address. This field displays the new destination IP address for the packet. This field displays the service used by the packets for this NAT entry. It displays any if there is no restriction on the services. This field displays the original destination port(s) of packets for the NAT entry. This field is blank if there is no restriction on the original destination port. This field displays the new destination port(s) for the packet. This field is blank if there is no restriction on the original destination port. Remove Activate Inactivate
#
Status Name Mapping Type Interface Original IP Mapped IP Protocol Original Port Mapped Port USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 256 Chapter 12 NAT Table 104 Configuration > Network > NAT (continued) LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 12.2.1 The NAT Add/Edit Screen The NAT Add/Edit screen lets you create new NAT rules and edit existing ones. To open this window, open the NAT summary screen. (See Section 12.2 on page 255.) Then, click on an Add icon or Edit icon to open the following screen. Figure 169 Configuration > Network > NAT > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 105 Configuration > Network > NAT > Add LABEL Create new Object Enable Rule Rule Name DESCRIPTION Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Use this option to turn the NAT rule on or off. Type in the name of the NAT rule. The name is used to refer to the NAT rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 257 Chapter 12 NAT Table 105 Configuration > Network > NAT > Add (continued) LABEL Classification DESCRIPTION Select what kind of NAT this rule is to perform. Virtual Server - This makes computers on a private network behind the USG available to a public network outside the USG (like the Internet). 1:1 NAT - If the private network server will initiate sessions to the outside clients, select this to have the USG translate the source IP address of the servers outgoing traffic to the same public IP address that the outside clients use to access the server. Many 1:1 NAT - If you have a range of private network servers that will initiate sessions to the outside clients and a range of public IP addresses, select this to have the USG translate the source IP address of each servers outgoing traffic to the same one of the public IP addresses that the outside clients use to access the server. The private and public ranges must have the same number of IP addresses. One many 1:1 NAT rule works like multiple 1:1 NAT rules, but it eases configuration effort since you only create one rule. Select the interface on which packets for the NAT rule must be received. It can be an Ethernet, VLAN, bridge, or PPPoE/PPTP interface. Specify the destination IP address of the packets received by this NAT rules specified incoming interface. any - Select this to use all of the incoming interfaces IP addresses including dynamic addresses or those of any virtual interfaces built upon the selected incoming interface. User Defined - Select this to manually enter an IP address in the User Defined field. For example, you could enter a static public IP assigned by the ISP without having to create a virtual interface for it. Host address - select a host address object to use the IP address it specifies. The list also includes address objects based on interface IPs. So for example you could select an address object based on a WAN interface even if it has a dynamic IP address. This field is available if Original IP is User Defined. Type the destination IP address that this NAT rule supports. This field displays for Many 1:1 NAT. Select the destination IP address subnet or IP address range that this NAT rule supports. The original and mapped IP address subnets or ranges must have the same number of IP addresses. Select to which translated destination IP address this NAT rule forwards packets. User Defined - this NAT rule supports a specific IP address, specified in the User Defined field. HOST address - the drop-down box lists all the HOST address objects in the USG. If you select one of them, this NAT rule supports the IP address specified by the address object. This field is available if Mapped IP is User Defined. Type the translated destination IP address that this NAT rule supports. This field displays for Many 1:1 NAT. Select to which translated destination IP address subnet or IP address range this NAT rule forwards packets. The original and mapped IP address subnets or ranges must have the same number of IP addresses. Incoming Interface Original IP User Defined Original IP Original IP Subnet/
Range Mapped IP User Defined Original IP Mapped IP Subnet/
Range USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 258 Chapter 12 NAT Table 105 Configuration > Network > NAT > Add (continued) LABEL Port Mapping Type DESCRIPTION Use the drop-down list box to select how many original destination ports this NAT rule supports for the selected destination IP address (Original IP). Choices are:
Any - this NAT rule supports all the destination ports. Port - this NAT rule supports one destination port. Ports - this NAT rule supports a range of destination ports. You might use a range of destination ports for unknown services or when one server supports more than one service. Service - this NAT rule supports a service such as FTP (see Object > Service >
Service) Service-Group - this NAT rule supports a group of services such as all service objects related to DNS (see Object > Service > Service Group) This field is available if Mapping Type is Port or Ports. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, or Any) used by the service requesting the connection. This field is available if Mapping Type is Port. Enter the original destination port this NAT rule supports. This field is available if Mapping Type is Port. Enter the translated destination port if this NAT rule forwards the packet. This field is available if Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the beginning of the range of original destination ports this NAT rule supports. This field is available if Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the end of the range of original destination ports this NAT rule supports. This field is available if Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the beginning of the range of translated destination ports if this NAT rule forwards the packet. This field is available if Mapping Type is Ports. Enter the end of the range of translated destination ports if this NAT rule forwards the packet. The original port range and the mapped port range must be the same size. Enable NAT loopback to allow users connected to any interface (instead of just the specified Incoming Interface) to use the NAT rules specified Original IP address to access the Mapped IP device. For users connected to the same interface as the Mapped IP device, the USG uses that interfaces IP address as the source address for the traffic it sends from the users to the Mapped IP device. For example, if you configure a NAT rule to forward traffic from the WAN to a LAN server, enabling NAT loopback allows users connected to other interfaces to also access the server. For LAN users, the USG uses the LAN interfaces IP address as the source address for the traffic it sends to the LAN server. See NAT Loopback on page 260 for more details. If you do not enable NAT loopback, this NAT rule only applies to packets received on the rules specified incoming interface. By default the security policy blocks incoming connections from external addresses. After you configure your NAT rule settings, click the Security Policy link to configure a security policy to allow the NAT rules traffic to come in. The USG checks NAT rules before it applies To-USG security policies, so To-USG security policies, do not apply to traffic that is forwarded by NAT rules. The USG still checks other security policies, according to the source IP address and mapped IP address. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to return to the NAT summary screen without creating the NAT rule (if it is new) or saving any changes (if it already exists). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 259 Protocol Type Original Port Mapped Port Original Start Port Original End Port Mapped Start Port Mapped End Port Enable NAT Loopback Security Policy OK Cancel Chapter 12 NAT 12.3 NAT Technical Reference Here is more detailed information about NAT on the USG. NAT Loopback Suppose an NAT 1:1 rule maps a public IP address to the private IP address of a LAN SMTP e-mail server to give WAN users access. NAT loopback allows other users to also use the rules original IP to access the mail server. For example, a LAN users computer at IP address 192.168.1.89 queries a public DNS server to resolve the SMTP servers domain name (xxx.LAN-SMTP.com in this example) and gets the SMTP servers mapped public IP address of 1.1.1.1. Figure 170 LAN Computer Queries a Public DNS Server DNS xxx.LAN-SMTP.com = 1.1.1.1 xxx.LAN-SMTP.com = ?
1.1.1.1 LAN 192.168.1.21 192.168.1.89 The LAN users computer then sends traffic to IP address 1.1.1.1. NAT loopback uses the IP address of the USGs LAN interface (192.168.1.1) as the source address of the traffic going from the LAN users to the LAN SMTP server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 260 Figure 171 LAN to LAN Traffic Chapter 12 NAT NAT Source 192.168.1.1 Source 192.168.1.89 SMTP LAN SMTP 192.168.1.21 192.168.1.89 The LAN SMTP server replies to the USGs LAN IP address and the USG changes the source address to 1.1.1.1 before sending it to the LAN user. The return traffics source matches the original destination address (1.1.1.1). If the SMTP server replied directly to the LAN user without the traffic going through NAT, the source would not match the original destination address which would cause the LAN users computer to shut down the session. Figure 172 LAN to LAN Return Traffic NAT Source 192.168.1.21 SMTP LAN Source 1.1.1.1 SMTP 192.168.1.21 192.168.1.89 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 261 CHAPTER 13 HTTP Redirect 13.1 Overview HTTP redirect forwards the clients HTTP request (except HTTP traffic destined for the USG) to a web proxy server. In the following example, proxy server A is connected to the DMZ interface. When a client connected to the LAN1 zone wants to open a web page, its HTTP request is redirected to proxy server A first. If proxy server A cannot find the web page in its cache, a policy route allows it to access the Internet to get them from a server. Proxy server A then forwards the response to the client. Figure 173 HTTP Redirect Example LAN1 13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the HTTP Redirect screens (see Section 13.2 on page 263) to display and edit the HTTP redirect rules. 13.1.2 What You Need to Know Web Proxy Server A proxy server helps client devices make indirect requests to access the Internet or outside network resources/services. A proxy server can act as a security policy or an ALG (application layer gateway) between the private network and the Internet or other networks. It also keeps hackers from knowing internal IP addresses. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 262 Chapter 13 HTTP Redirect A client connects to a web proxy server each time he/she wants to access the Internet. The web proxy provides caching service to allow quick access and reduce network usage. The proxy checks its local cache for the requested web resource first. If it is not found, the proxy gets it from the specified server and forwards the response to the client. HTTP Redirect, Security Policy and Policy Route With HTTP redirect, the relevant packet flow for HTTP traffic is:
1 Security Policy 2 HTTP Redirect 3 Policy Route Even if you set a policy route to the same incoming interface and service as a HTTP redirect rule, the USG checks the HTTP redirect rules first and forwards HTTP traffic to a proxy server if matched. You need to make sure there is no security policy(s) blocking the HTTP requests from the client to the proxy server. You also need to manually configure a policy route to forward the HTTP traffic from the proxy server to the Internet. To make the example in Figure 173 on page 262 work, make sure you have the following settings. For HTTP traffic between lan1 and dmz:
a from LAN1 to DMZ security policy (default) to allow HTTP requests from lan1 to dmz. Responses to this request are allowed automatically. a HTTP redirect rule to forward HTTP traffic from lan1 to proxy server A. For HTTP traffic between dmz and wan1:
a from DMZ to WAN security policy (default) to allow HTTP requests from dmz to wan1. Responses to these requests are allowed automatically. a policy route to forward HTTP traffic from proxy server A to the Internet. 13.2 The HTTP Redirect Screen To configure redirection of a HTTP request to a proxy server, click Configuration > Network >
HTTP Redirect. This screen displays the summary of the HTTP redirect rules. Note: You can configure up to one HTTP redirect rule for each (incoming) interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 263 Chapter 13 HTTP Redirect Figure 174 Configuration > Network > HTTP Redirect The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 106 Configuration > Network > HTTP Redirect LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the descriptive name of a rule. This is the interface on which the request must be received. This is the IP address of the proxy server. This is the service port number used by the proxy server. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Remove Activate Inactivate
#
Status Name Interface Proxy Server Port Apply Reset 13.2.1 The HTTP Redirect Edit Screen Click Network > HTTP Redirect to open the HTTP Redirect screen. Then click the Add or Edit icon to open the HTTP Redirect Edit screen where you can configure the rule. Figure 175 Network > HTTP Redirect > Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 264 Chapter 13 HTTP Redirect The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 107 Network > HTTP Redirect > Edit LABEL Enable Name DESCRIPTION Use this option to turn the HTTP redirect rule on or off. Enter a name to identify this rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select the interface on which the HTTP request must be received for the USG to forward it to the specified proxy server. Enter the IP address of the proxy server. Enter the port number that the proxy server uses. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Interface Proxy Server Port OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 265 CHAPTER 14 ALG 14.1 ALG Overview Application Layer Gateway (ALG) allows the following applications to operate properly through the USGs NAT. SIP - Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) - An application-layer protocol that can be used to create voice and multimedia sessions over Internet. H.323 - A teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio, data and video conferencing. FTP - File Transfer Protocol - an Internet file transfer service. The following example shows SIP signaling (1) and audio (2) sessions between SIP clients A and B and the SIP server. Figure 176 SIP ALG Example The ALG feature is only needed for traffic that goes through the USGs NAT. 14.1.1 What You Need to Know Application Layer Gateway (ALG), NAT and Security Policy The USG can function as an Application Layer Gateway (ALG) to allow certain NAT un-friendly applications (such as SIP) to operate properly through the USGs NAT and security policy. The USG dynamically creates an implicit NAT session and security policy session for the applications traffic from the WAN to the LAN. The ALG on the USG supports all of the USGs NAT mapping types. FTP ALG The FTP ALG allows TCP packets with a specified port destination to pass through. If the FTP server is located on the LAN, you must also configure NAT (port forwarding) and security policies if you USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 266 Chapter 14 ALG want to allow access to the server from the WAN. Bandwidth management can be applied to FTP ALG traffic. H.323 ALG The H.323 ALG supports peer-to-peer H.323 calls. The H.323 ALG handles H.323 calls that go through NAT or that the USG routes. You can also make other H.323 calls that do not go through NAT or routing. Examples would be calls between LAN IP addresses that are on the same subnet. The H.323 ALG allows calls to go out through NAT. For example, you could make a call from a private IP address on the LAN to a peer device on the WAN. The H.323 ALG operates on TCP packets with a specified port destination. Bandwidth management can be applied to H.323 ALG traffic. The USG allows H.323 audio connections. The USG can also apply bandwidth management to traffic that goes through the H.323 ALG. The following example shows H.323 signaling (1) and audio (2) sessions between H.323 devices A and B. Figure 177 H.323 ALG Example SIP ALG SIP phones can be in any zone (including LAN, DMZ, WAN), and the SIP server and SIP clients can be in the same network or different networks. The SIP server cannot be on the LAN. It must be on the WAN or the DMZ. There should be only one SIP server (total) on the USGs private networks. Any other SIP servers must be on the WAN. So for example you could have a Back-to-Back User Agent such as the IPPBX x6004 or an asterisk PBX on the DMZ or on the LAN but not on both. Using the SIP ALG allows you to use bandwidth management on SIP traffic. Bandwidth management can be applied to FTP ALG traffic. Use the option in the Configuration > BWM screen to configure the highest bandwidth available for SIP traffic. The SIP ALG handles SIP calls that go through NAT or that the USG routes. You can also make other SIP calls that do not go through NAT or routing. Examples would be calls between LAN IP addresses that are on the same subnet. The SIP ALG supports peer-to-peer SIP calls. The security policy (by default) allows peer to peer calls from the LAN zone to go to the WAN zone and blocks peer to peer calls from the WAN zone to the LAN zone. The SIP ALG allows UDP packets with a specified port destination to pass through. The USG allows SIP audio connections. You do not need to use TURN (Traversal Using Relay NAT) for VoIP devices behind the USG when you enable the SIP ALG. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 267 Chapter 14 ALG Peer-to-Peer Calls and the USG The USG ALG can allow peer-to-peer VoIP calls for both H.323 and SIP. You must configure the security policy and NAT (port forwarding) to allow incoming (peer-to-peer) calls from the WAN to a private IP address on the LAN (or DMZ). VoIP Calls from the WAN with Multiple Outgoing Calls When you configure the security policy and NAT (port forwarding) to allow calls from the WAN to a specific IP address on the LAN, you can also use policy routing to have H.323 (or SIP) calls from other LAN or DMZ IP addresses go out through a different WAN IP address. The policy routing lets the USG correctly forward the return traffic for the calls initiated from the LAN IP addresses. For example, you configure the security policy and NAT to allow LAN IP address A to receive calls from the Internet through WAN IP address 1. You also use a policy route to have LAN IP address A make calls out through WAN IP address 1. Configure another policy route to have H.323 (or SIP) calls from LAN IP addresses B and C go out through WAN IP address 2. Even though only LAN IP address A can receive incoming calls from the Internet, LAN IP addresses B and C can still make calls out to the Internet. Figure 178 VoIP Calls from the WAN with Multiple Outgoing Calls VoIP with Multiple WAN IP Addresses With multiple WAN IP addresses on the USG, you can configure different security policy and NAT
(port forwarding) rules to allow incoming calls from each WAN IP address to go to a specific IP address on the LAN (or DMZ). Use policy routing to have the H.323 (or SIP) calls from each of those LAN or DMZ IP addresses go out through the same WAN IP address that calls come in on. The policy routing lets the USG correctly forward the return traffic for the calls initiated from the LAN IP addresses. For example, you configure security policy and NAT rules to allow LAN IP address A to receive calls through public WAN IP address 1. You configure different security policy and port forwarding rules to allow LAN IP address B to receive calls through public WAN IP address 2. You configure corresponding policy routes to have calls from LAN IP address A go out through WAN IP address 1 and calls from LAN IP address B go out through WAN IP address 2. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 268 Chapter 14 ALG Figure 179 VoIP with Multiple WAN IP Addresses 14.1.2 Before You Begin You must also configure the security policy and enable NAT in the USG to allow sessions initiated from the WAN. 14.2 The ALG Screen Click Configuration > Network > ALG to open the ALG screen. Use this screen to turn ALGs off or on, configure the port numbers to which they apply, and configure SIP ALG time outs. Figure 180 Configuration > Network > ALG USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 269 Chapter 14 ALG The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 108 Configuration > Network > ALG LABEL Enable SIP ALG Enable SIP Transformations Enable Configure SIP Inactivity Timeout SIP Media Inactivity Timeout SIP Signaling Inactivity Timeout Restrict Peer to Peer Signaling Connection Restrict Peer to Peer Media Connection SIP Signaling Port Additional SIP Signaling Port (UDP) for Transformations Enable H.323 ALG Enable H.323 Transformations H.323 Signaling Port Additional H.323 Signaling Port for Transformations Enable FTP ALG DESCRIPTION Turn on the SIP ALG to detect SIP traffic and help build SIP sessions through the USGs NAT. Select this to have the USG modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the SIP data payload. You do not need to use this if you have a SIP device or server that will modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the SIP data payload. Select this option to have the USG apply SIP media and signaling inactivity time out limits. Use this field to set how many seconds (1~86400) the USG will allow a SIP session to remain idle (without voice traffic) before dropping it. If no voice packets go through the SIP ALG before the timeout period expires, the USG deletes the audio session. You cannot hear anything and you will need to make a new call to continue your conversation. Most SIP clients have an expire mechanism indicating the lifetime of signaling sessions. The SIP user agent sends registration packets to the SIP server periodically and keeps the session alive in the USG. If the SIP client does not have this mechanism and makes no calls during the USG SIP timeout, the USG deletes the signaling session after the timeout period. Enter the SIP signaling session timeout value (1~86400). A signaling connection is used to set up the SIP connection. Enable this if you want signaling connections to only arrive from the IP address(es) you registered with. Signaling connections from other IP addresses will be dropped. A media connection is the audio transfer in a SIP connection. Enable this if you want media connections to only arrive from the IP address(es) you registered with. Media connections from other IP addresses will be dropped. If you are using a custom UDP port number (not 5060) for SIP traffic, enter it here. Use the Add icon to add fields if you are also using SIP on additional UDP port numbers. If you are also using SIP on an additional UDP port number, enter it here. Turn on the H.323 ALG to detect H.323 traffic (used for audio communications) and help build H.323 sessions through the USGs NAT. Select this to have the USG modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the H.323 data payload. You do not need to use this if you have a H.323 device or server that will modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the H.323 data payload. If you are using a custom TCP port number (not 1720) for H.323 traffic, enter it here. If you are also using H.323 on an additional TCP port number, enter it here. Turn on the FTP ALG to detect FTP (File Transfer Program) traffic and help build FTP sessions through the USGs NAT. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 270 Chapter 14 ALG Table 108 Configuration > Network > ALG (continued) LABEL Enable FTP Transformations DESCRIPTION Select this option to have the USG modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the FTP data payload to match the USGs NAT environment. Clear this option if you have an FTP device or server that will modify IP addresses and port numbers embedded in the FTP data payload to match the USGs NAT environment. If you are using a custom TCP port number (not 21) for FTP traffic, enter it here. If you are also using FTP on an additional TCP port number, enter it here. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. FTP Signaling Port Additional FTP Signaling Port for Transformations Apply Reset 14.3 ALG Technical Reference Here is more detailed information about the Application Layer Gateway. ALG Some applications cannot operate through NAT (are NAT un-friendly) because they embed IP addresses and port numbers in their packets data payload. The USG examines and uses IP address and port number information embedded in the VoIP traffics data stream. When a device behind the USG uses an application for which the USG has VoIP pass through enabled, the USG translates the devices private IP address inside the data stream to a public IP address. It also records session port numbers and allows the related sessions to go through the security policy so the applications traffic can come in from the WAN to the LAN. ALG and Trunks If you send your ALG-managed traffic through an interface trunk and all of the interfaces are set to active, you can configure routing policies to specify which interface the ALG-managed traffic uses. You could also have a trunk with one interface set to active and a second interface set to passive. The USG does not automatically change ALG-managed connections to the second (passive) interface when the active interfaces connection goes down. When the active interfaces connection fails, the client needs to re-initialize the connection through the second interface (that was set to passive) in order to have the connection go through the second interface. VoIP clients usually re-
register automatically at set intervals or the users can manually force them to re-register. FTP File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is an Internet file transfer service that operates on the Internet and over TCP/IP networks. A system running the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client. The service allows users to send commands to the server for uploading and downloading files. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 271 Chapter 14 ALG H.323 H.323 is a standard teleconferencing protocol suite that provides audio, data and video conferencing. It allows for real-time point-to-point and multipoint communication between client computers over a packet-based network that does not provide a guaranteed quality of service. NetMeeting uses H.323. SIP The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet. SIP is used in VoIP (Voice over IP), the sending of voice signals over the Internet Protocol. SIP signaling is separate from the media for which it handles sessions. The media that is exchanged during the session can use a different path from that of the signaling. SIP handles telephone calls and can interface with traditional circuit-switched telephone networks. RTP When you make a VoIP call using H.323 or SIP, the RTP (Real time Transport Protocol) is used to handle voice data transfer. See RFC 1889 for details on RTP. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 272 CHAPTER 15 UPnP 15.1 UPnP and NAT-PMP Overview The USG supports both UPnP and NAT-PMP to permit networking devices to discover each other and connect seamlessly. Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. A gateway that supports UPnP is called Internet Gateway Device (IGD). The standardized Device Control Protocol (DCP) is defined by the UPnP Forum for IGDs to configure port mapping automatically. NAT Port Mapping Protocol (NAT-PMP), introduced by Apple and implemented in current Apple products, is used as an alternative NAT traversal solution to the UPnP IGD protocol. NAT-PMP runs over UDP port 5351. NAT-PMP is much simpler than UPnP IGD and mainly designed for small home networks. It allows a client behind a NAT router to retrieve the routers public IP address and port number and make them known to the peer device with which it wants to communicate. The client can automatically configure the NAT router to create a port mapping to allow the peer to contact it. 15.2 What You Need to Know UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. 15.2.1 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 273 Chapter 15 UPnP 15.2.2 Cautions with UPnP and NAT-PMP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening security policy ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP or NAT-PMP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the USG allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled or NAT-PMP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP or NAT-PMP if this is not your intention. 15.3 UPnP Screen Use this screen to enable UPnP and NAT-PMP on your USG. Click Configuration > Network > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 181 Configuration > Network > UPnP USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 274 Chapter 15 UPnP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 109 Configuration > Network > UPnP LABEL Enable UPnP DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate UPnP on the USG. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the USG's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). NAT Port Mapping Protocol (NAT-PMP) automates port forwarding to allow a computer in a private network (behind the USG) to automatically configure the USG to allow computers outside the private network to contact it. Select this check box to activate NAT-PMP on the USG. Be aware that anyone could use a NAT-PMP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the USG's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP-enabled or NAT-PMP-enabled applications to bypass the security policy. Clear this check box to have the security policy block all UPnP or NAT-PMP application packets (for example, MSN packets). Select through which WAN interface(s) you want to send out traffic from UPnP-enabled or NAT-PMP-enabled applications. If the WAN interface you select loses its connection, the USG attempts to use the other WAN interface. If the other WAN interface also does not work, the USG drops outgoing packets from UPnP-enabled or NAT-PMP-enabled applications. The Available list displays the name(s) of the internal interface(s) on which the USG supports UPnP and/or NAT-PMP. To enable UPnP and/or NAT-PMP on an interface, you can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entriess and click the right arrow button to add to the Member list. To remove an interface, select the name(s) in the Member list and click the left arrow button. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Enable NAT-PMP Allow UPnP or NAT-PMP to pass through Firewall Outgoing WAN Interface Support LAN List Apply Reset 15.4 Technical Reference The sections show examples of using UPnP. 15.4.1 Turning on UPnP in Windows 7 Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows 7. UPnP server is installed in Windows 7. Activate UPnP on the USG. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the USG. Turn on your computer and the USG. 1 Click the start icon, Control Panel and then the Network and Sharing Center. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 275 Chapter 15 UPnP 2 Click Change Advanced Sharing Settings. 3 Select Turn on network discovery and click Save Changes. Network discovery allows your computer to find other computers and devices on the network and other computers on the network to find your computer. This makes it easier to share files and printers. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 276 Chapter 15 UPnP 15.4.2 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the USG. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the USG. Turn on your computer and the USG. 15.4.2.1 Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device 1 2 Click start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. Right-click the icon and select Properties. Figure 182 Network Connections 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 183 Internet Connection Properties 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 277 Chapter 15 UPnP Figure 184 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings Figure 185 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add Note: When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 5 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 186 System Tray Icon 6 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 278 Chapter 15 UPnP Figure 187 Internet Connection Status 15.4.3 Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the USG without finding out the IP address of the USG first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the USG. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 279 Chapter 15 UPnP Figure 188 Network Connections 4 5 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. Right-click on the icon for your USG and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 189 Network Connections: My Network Places 6 Right-click on the icon for your USG and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the USG. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 280 Chapter 15 UPnP Figure 190 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 281 CHAPTER 16 IP/MAC Binding 16.1 IP/MAC Binding Overview IP address to MAC address binding helps ensure that only the intended devices get to use privileged IP addresses. The USG uses DHCP to assign IP addresses and records the MAC address it assigned to each IP address. The USG then checks incoming connection attempts against this list. A user cannot manually assign another IP to his computer and use it to connect to the USG. Suppose you configure access privileges for IP address 192.168.1.27 and use static DHCP to assign it to Tims computers MAC address of 12:34:56:78:90:AB. IP/MAC binding drops traffic from any computer trying to use IP address 192.168.1.27 with another MAC address. Figure 191 IP/MAC Binding Example Tim Jim MAC: 12:34:56:78:90:AB IP: 192.168.1.27 MAC: AB:CD:EF:12:34:56 IP: 192.168.1.27 16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Summary and Edit screens (Section 16.2 on page 283) to bind IP addresses to MAC addresses. Use the Exempt List screen (Section 16.3 on page 285) to configure ranges of IP addresses to which the USG does not apply IP/MAC binding. 16.1.2 What You Need to Know DHCP IP/MAC address bindings are based on the USGs dynamic and static DHCP entries. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 282 Chapter 16 IP/MAC Binding Interfaces Used With IP/MAC Binding IP/MAC address bindings are grouped by interface. You can use IP/MAC binding with Ethernet, bridge, VLAN, and WLAN interfaces. You can also enable or disable IP/MAC binding and logging in an interfaces configuration screen. 16.2 IP/MAC Binding Summary Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding to open the IP/MAC Binding Summary screen. This screen lists the total number of IP to MAC address bindings for devices connected to each supported interface. Figure 192 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Summary The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 110 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Summary LABEL Edit DESCRIPTION Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the name of an interface that supports IP/MAC binding. This field displays the interfaces total number of IP/MAC bindings and IP addresses that the interface has assigned by DHCP. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Activate Inactivate
#
Status Interface Number of Binding Apply 16.2.1 IP/MAC Binding Edit Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit to open the IP/MAC Binding Edit screen. Use this screen to configure an interfaces IP to MAC address binding settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 283 Chapter 16 IP/MAC Binding Figure 193 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 111 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit LABEL IP/MAC Binding Settings DESCRIPTION Interface Name Enable IP/MAC Binding Enable Logs for IP/
MAC Binding Violation Static DHCP Bindings Add Edit Remove
#
IP Address MAC Address Description OK Cancel This field displays the name of the interface within the USG and the interfaces IP address and subnet mask. Select this option to have this interface enforce links between specific IP addresses and specific MAC addresses. This stops anyone else from manually using a bound IP address on another device connected to this interface. Use this to make use only the intended users get to use specific IP addresses. Select this option to have the USG generate a log if a device connected to this interface attempts to use an IP address not assigned by the USG. This table lists the bound IP and MAC addresses. The USG checks this table when it assigns IP addresses. If the computers MAC address is in the table, the USG assigns the corresponding IP address. You can also access this table from the interfaces edit screen. Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. This is the index number of the static DHCP entry. This is the IP address that the USG assigns to a device with the entrys MAC address. This is the MAC address of the device to which the USG assigns the entrys IP address. This helps identify the entry. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 16.2.2 Static DHCP Edit Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit to open the IP/MAC Binding Edit screen. Click the Add or Edit icon to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure an interfaces IP to MAC address binding settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 284 Chapter 16 IP/MAC Binding Figure 194 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 112 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Edit > Add LABEL Interface Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the name of the interface within the USG and the interfaces IP address and subnet mask. Enter the IP address that the USG is to assign to a device with the entrys MAC address. Enter the MAC address of the device to which the USG assigns the entrys IP address. Enter up to 64 printable ASCII characters to help identify the entry. For example, you may want to list the computers owner. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. IP Address MAC Address Description OK Cancel 16.3 IP/MAC Binding Exempt List Click Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Exempt List to open the IP/MAC Binding Exempt List screen. Use this screen to configure ranges of IP addresses to which the USG does not apply IP/MAC binding. Figure 195 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Exempt List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 113 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Exempt List LABEL Add Edit Remove DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Click an entry or select it and click Edit to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 285 Chapter 16 IP/MAC Binding Table 113 Configuration > Network > IP/MAC Binding > Exempt List (continued) LABEL
#
Name Start IP DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the IP/MAC binding list entry. Enter a name to help identify this entry. Enter the first IP address in a range of IP addresses for which the USG does not apply IP/
MAC binding. Enter the last IP address in a range of IP addresses for which the USG does not apply IP/MAC binding. Click the Add icon to add a new entry. End IP Add icon Apply Click the Remove icon to delete an entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete it. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 286 CHAPTER 17 Layer 2 Isolation 17.1 Overview Layer-2 isolation is used to prevent connected devices from communicating with each other in the USGs local network(s), except for the devices in the white list, when layer-2 isolation is enabled on the USG and the local interface(s). Note: The security policy control must be enabled before you can use layer-2 isolation. In the following example, layer-2 isolation is enabled on the USGs interface Vlan1. A printer, PC and AP are in the Vlan1. The IP address of network printer (C) is added to the white list. With this setting, the connected AP then cannot communicate with the PC (D), but can access the network printer (C), server (B), wireless client (A) and the Internet. Figure 196 Layer-2 Isolation Application 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the General screen (Section 17.2 on page 288) to enable layer-2 isolation on the USG and the internal interface(s). Use the White List screen (Section 17.3 on page 288) to enable and configures the white list. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 287 Chapter 17 Layer 2 Isolation 17.2 Layer-2 Isolation General Screen This screen allows you to enable Layer-2 isolation on the USG and specific internal interface(s). To access this screen click Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation. Figure 197 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 114 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation LABEL Enable Layer2 Isolation DESCRIPTION Select this option to turn on the layer-2 isolation feature on the USG. Member List Apply Reset Note: You can enable this feature only when the security policy is enabled. The Available list displays the name(s) of the internal interface(s) on which you can enable layer-2 isolation. To enable layer-2 isolation on an interface, you can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entriess and click the right arrow button to add to the Member list. To remove an interface, select the name(s) in the Member list and click the left arrow button. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 17.3 White List Screen IP addresses that are not listed in the white list are blocked from communicating with other devices in the layer-2-isolation-enabled internal interface(s) except for broadcast packets. To access this screen click Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 288 Chapter 17 Layer 2 Isolation Figure 198 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 115 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List LABEL Enable White List Select this option to turn on the white list on the USG. DESCRIPTION Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate
#
Status IP Address Description Apply Reset Note: You can enable this feature only when the security policy is enabled. Click this to add a new rule. Click this to edit the selected rule. Click this to remove the selected rule. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific rule. This icon is lit when the rule is active and dimmed when the rule is inactive. This field displays the IP address of device that can be accessed by the devices connected to an internal interface on which layer-2 isolation is enabled. This field displays the description for the IP address in this rule. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 17.3.1 Add/Edit White List Rule This screen allows you to create a new rule in the white list or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select an entry from the list and click the Edit button. Note: You can configure up to 100 white list rules on the USG. Note: You need to know the IP address of each connected device that you want to allow to be accessed by other devices when layer-2 isolation is enabled. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 289 Chapter 17 Layer 2 Isolation Figure 199 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List > Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 116 Configuration > Network > Layer 2 Isolation > White List > Add/Edit LABEL Enable Host IP Address Description DESCRIPTION Select this option to turn on the rule. Enter an IPv4 address associated with this rule. Specify a description for the IP address associated with this rule. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores allowed. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 290 CHAPTER 18 Inbound Load Balancing 18.1 Inbound Load Balancing Overview Inbound load balancing enables the USG to respond to a DNS query messagewith a different IP address for DNS name resolution. The USG checks which member interface has the least load and responds to the DNS query message with the interfaces IP address. In the following figure, an Internet host (A) sends a DNS query message to the DNS server (D) in order to resolve a domain name of www.example.com. DNS server D redirects it to the USG (Z)s WAN1 with an IP address of 1.1.1.1. The USG receives the DNS query message and responds to it with the WAN2s IP address, 2.2.2.2, because the WAN2 has the least load at that moment. Another Internet host (B) also sends a DNS query message to ask where www.example.com is. The USG responds to it with the WAN1s IP address, 1.1.1.1, since WAN1 has the least load this time. Figure 200 DNS Load Balancing Example W W A:
Where is www.example.com?
D Its 2.2.2.2. Z:
2 1.1.1.1 A:
D:
Where is www.example.com?
Ask 1.1.1.1. 1 Internet A Z 2.2.2.2 3 B:
Where is www.example.com?
D Its 1.1.1.1 Z:
2 3 1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2 Z B:
D:
Where is www.example.com?
Ask 1.1.1.1. 1 Internet B 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Inbound LB screen (see Section 18.2 on page 292) to view a list of the configured DNS load balancing rules. Use the Inbound LB Add/Edit screen (see Section 18.2.1 on page 293) to add or edit a DNS load balancing rule. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 291 Chapter 18 Inbound Load Balancing 18.2 The Inbound LB Screen The Inbound LB screen provides a summary of all DNS load balancing rules and the details. You can also use this screen to add, edit, or remove the rules. Click Configuration > Network >
Inbound LB to open the following screen. Note: After you finish the inbound load balancing settings, go to security policy and NAT screens to configure the corresponding rule and virtual server to allow the Internet users to access your internal servers. Figure 201 Configuration > Network > DNS Inbound LB The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 117 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB LABEL Global Setting Enable DNS Load Balancing Configuration Add Edit Select this to enable DNS load balancing. Remove Activate Inactivate Move Status Priority Query Domain Name Query From Address Query From Zone Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To move an entry to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the entry. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the order in which the USG checks the member interfaces of this DNS load balancing rule. This field displays the domain name for which the USG manages load balancing between the specified interfaces. This field displays the source IP address of the DNS query messages to which the USG applies the DNS load balancing rule. The USG applies the DNS load balancing rule to the query messages received from this zone. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 292 Chapter 18 Inbound Load Balancing Table 117 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB (continued) LABEL Load Balancing Member This field displays the member interfaces which the USG manages for load DESCRIPTION Algorithm Apply Reset balancing. This field displays the load balancing method the USG uses for this DNS load balancing rule. Weighted Round Robin - Each member interface is assigned a weight. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. For example, if the weight ratio of wan1 and wan2 interfaces is 2:1, the USG chooses wan1 for 2 sessions traffic and wan2 for 1 sessions traffic in each round of 3 new sessions. Least Connection - The USG chooses choose a member interface which is handling the least number of sessions. Least Load - Outbound - The USG chooses a member interface which is handling the least amount of outgoing traffic. Least Load - Inbound - The USG chooses a member interface which is handling the least amount of incoming traffic. Least Load - Total - The USG chooses a member interface which is handling the least amount of outgoing and incoming traffic. Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 18.2.1 The Inbound LB Add/Edit Screen The Add DNS Load Balancing screen allows you to add a domain name for which the USG manages load balancing between the specified interfaces. You can configure the USG to apply DNS load balancing to some specific hosts only by configuring the Query From settings. Click Configuration > Network > Inbound LB and then the Add or Edit icon to open this screen. Figure 202 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB > Add USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 293 Chapter 18 Inbound Load Balancing The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Use this to configure any new setting objects that you need to use in this screen. Table 118 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB > Add/Edit LABEL Create New Object General Settings Enable DNS Setting Query Domain Name Select this to enable this DNS load balancing rule. Type up to 255 characters for a domain name for which you want the USG to manage DNS load balancing. You can use a wildcard (*) to let multiple domains match the name. For example, use *.example.com to specify any domain name that ends with example.com would match. Enter the number of seconds the USG recommends DNS request hosts to keep the DNS entry in their caches before removing it. Enter 0 to have the USG not recommend this so the DNS request hosts will follow their DNS servers TTL setting. Time to Live Query From Setting IP Address Zone Load Balancing Member Load Balancing Algorithm Failover IP Address Add Edit Enter the IP address of a computer or a DNS server which makes the DNS queries upon which to apply this rule. DNS servers process client queries using recursion or iteration:
In recursion, DNS servers make recursive queries on behalf of clients. So you have to configure this field to the DNS servers IP address when recursion is used. In iteration, a client asks the DNS server and expects the best and immediate answer without the DNS server contacting other DNS servers. If the primary DNS server cannot provide the best answer, the client makes iteration queries to other configured DNS servers to resolve the name. You have to configure this field to the clients IP address when iteration is used. Select the zone of DNS query messages upon which to apply this rule. Select a load balancing method to use from the drop-down list box. Select Weighted Round Robin to balance the traffic load between interfaces based on their respective weights. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. For example, if the weight ratio of wan1 and wan2 interfaces is 2:1, the USG chooses wan1 for 2 sessions traffic and wan2 for every sessions traffic in each round of 3 new sessions. Select Least Connection to have the USG choose the member interface which is handling the least number of sessions. Select Least Load - Outbound to have the USG choose the member interface which is handling the least amount of outgoing traffic. Select Least Load - Inbound to have the USG choose the member interface which is handling the least amount of incoming traffic. Select Least Load - Total to have the USG choose the member interface which is handling the least amount of outgoing and incoming traffic. Enter an alternate IP address with which the USG will respond to a DNS query message when the load balancing algorithm cannot find any available interface. Click this to create a new member interface for this rule. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 294 Chapter 18 Inbound Load Balancing Table 118 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. This field displays the order in which the USG checks this rules member interfaces. This field displays the IP address of the member interface. This field displays the name of the member interface. The USG manages load balancing between the member interfaces. This field is available if you selected Weighted Round Robin as the load balancing algorithm. This field displays the weight of the member interface. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
#
IP Address Monitor Interface Weight OK Cancel 18.2.2 The Inbound LB Member Add/Edit Screen The Add Load Balancing Member screen allows you to add a member interface for the DNS load balancing rule. Click Configuration > Network > Inbound LB > Add or Edit and then an Add or Edit icon to open this screen. Figure 203 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB > Add/Edit > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 119 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB > Add/Edit > Add/Edit LABEL Member Monitor Interface DESCRIPTION The USG checks each member interfaces loading in the order displayed here. Select an interface to associate it with the DNS load balancing rule. This field also displays whether the IP address is a static IP address (Static), dynamically assigned
(Dynamic) or obtained from a DHCP server (DHCP Client), as well as the IP address and subnet mask. This field is available if you selected Weighted Round Robin for the load balancing algorithm. Weight IP Address Specify the weight of the member interface. An interface with a larger weight gets more chances to transmit traffic than an interface with a smaller weight. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 295 Chapter 18 Inbound Load Balancing Table 119 Configuration > Network > Inbound LB > Add/Edit > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Same as Monitor Interface Custom OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Select this to send the IP address displayed in the Monitor Interface field to the DNS query senders. Select this and enter another IP address to send to the DNS query senders. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 296 CHAPTER 19 Web Authentication 19.1 Web Auth Overview Web authentication can intercept network traffic, according to the authentication policies, until the user authenticates his or her connection, usually through a specifically designated login web page. This means all web page requests can initially be redirected to a special web page that requires users to authenticate their sessions. Once authentication is successful, they can then connect to the rest of the network or Internet. As soon as a user attempt to open a web page, the USG reroutes his/her browser to a web portal page that prompts him/her to log in. Figure 204 Web Authentication Example The web authentication page only appears once per authentication session. Unless a user session times out or he/she closes the connection, he or she generally will not see it again during the same session. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Configuration > Web Authentication screens (Section 19.2 on page 298) to create and manage web authentication policies. Use the Configuration > Web Authentication > SSO screen (Section 19.3 on page 302) to configure how the USG communictates with a Single Sign-On agent. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 297 Chapter 19 Web Authentication 19.1.2 What You Need to Know Single Sign-On A SSO (Single Sign On) agent integrates Domain Controller and USG authentication mechanisms, so that users just need to log in once (single) to get access to permitted resources. Forced User Authentication Instead of making users for which user-aware policies have been configured go to the USG Login screen manually, you can configure the USG to display the Login screen automatically whenever it routes HTTP traffic for anyone who has not logged in yet. Note: This works with HTTP traffic only. The USG does not display the Login screen when users attempt to send other kinds of traffic. The USG does not automatically route the request that prompted the login, however, so users have to make this request again. 19.2 Web Authentication Screen The Web Authentication screen displays the web portal settings and web authentication policies you have configured on the USG. The screen differs depending on what you select in the Authentication field. Click Configuration > Web Authentication to display the screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 298 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Figure 205 Configuration > Web Authentication (Web Portal) The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure. Table 120 Configuration > Web Authentication LABEL Enable Web Authentication DESCRIPTION Select Enable Web Authentication to turn on the web authentication feature. Internal Web Portal External Web Portal Login URL Once enabled, all network traffic is blocked until a client authenticates with the USG through the specifically designated web portal. Select this to use the default login page built into the USG. If you later assign a custom login page, you can still return to the USGs default page as it is saved indefinitely. The login page appears whenever the web portal intercepts network traffic, preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to the network. You can customize the login page built into the USG in the System > WWW > Login Page screen. Select this to use a custom login page from an external web portal instead of the default one built into the USG. You can configure the look and feel of the web portal page. Specify the login pages URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/login.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed. Specify the logout pages URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/logout.html. Logout URL The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed. Welcome URL Specify the welcome pages URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/welcome.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 299 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Table 120 Configuration > Web Authentication (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Specify the session pages URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/session.html. Session URL Error URL Download Exceptional Services Web Authentication Policy Summary Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Move Status Priority Source Destination Schedule Authentication Description Apply Reset The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed. Specify the error pages URL; for example, http://IIS server IP Address/error.html. The Internet Information Server (IIS) is the web server on which the web portal files are installed. Click this to download an example web portal file for your reference. Use this table to list services that users can access without logging in. In the list, select one or more entries and click Remove to delete it or them. Keeping DNS as a member allows users computers to resolve domain names into IP addresses. Click Add to add new services that users can access without logging in. Use this table to manage the USGs list of web authentication policies. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To move an entry to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the interface. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the position of the authentication policy in the list. The priority is important as the policies are applied in order of priority. Default displays for the default authentication policy that the USG uses on traffic that does not match any exceptional service or other authentication policy. You can edit the default rule but not delete it. This displays the source address object to which this policy applies. This displays the destination address object to which this policy applies. This field displays the schedule object that dictates when the policy applies. none means the policy is active at all times if enabled. This field displays the authentication requirement for users when their traffic matches this policy. unnecessary - Users do not need to be authenticated. required - Users need to be authenticated. They must manually go to the login screen. The USG will not redirect them to the login screen. force - Users need to be authenticated. The USG automatically displays the login screen whenever it routes HTTP traffic for users who have not logged in yet. If the entry has a description configured, it displays here. This is n/a for the default policy. Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 300 Chapter 19 Web Authentication 19.2.1 Creating Exceptional Services This screen lists services that users can access without logging in. Click Add under Exceptional Services in the previous screen to display this screen. You can change the lists membership here. Available services appear on the left. Select any services you want users to be able to access without logging in and click the right arrow button -> to add them. The member services are on the right. Select any service that you want to remove from the member list, and click the left arrow <-
button to remove them. Then click OK to apply the changes and return to the main Web Authentication screen. Alternatively, click Cancel to discard the changes and return to the main Web Authentication screen. Figure 206 Configuration > Web Authentication > Add Exceptional Service 19.2.2 Creating/Editing an Authentication Policy Click Configuration > Web Authentication and then the Add (or Edit) icon in the Web Authentication Policy Summary section to open the Auth. Policy Add/Edit screen. Use this screen to configure an authentication policy. Figure 207 Configuration > Web Authentication > Add Authentication Policy USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 301 Chapter 19 Web Authentication The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure. Table 121 Configuration > Web Authentication > Add Authentication Policy LABEL Create new Object Enable Policy DESCRIPTION Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Select Address or Schedule. Select this check box to activate the authentication policy. This field is available for user-
configured policies. Enter a descriptive name of up to 60 printable ASCII characters for the policy. Spaces are allowed. This field is available for user-configured policies. Use this section of the screen to determine which traffic requires (or does not require) the senders to be authenticated in order to be routed. Description User Authentication Policy Source Address Destination Address Schedule Authentication Single Sign-on Force User Authentication OK Cancel Select a source address or address group for whom this policy applies. Select any if the policy is effective for every source. This is any and not configurable for the default policy. Select a destination address or address group for whom this policy applies. Select any if the policy is effective for every destination. This is any and not configurable for the default policy. Select a schedule that defines when the policy applies. Otherwise, select none and the rule is always effective. This is none and not configurable for the default policy. Select the authentication requirement for users when their traffic matches this policy. unnecessary - Users do not need to be authenticated. required - Users need to be authenticated. If Force User Authentication is selected, all HTTP traffic from unauthenticated users is redirected to a default or user-defined login page. Otherwise, they must manually go to the login screen. The USG will not redirect them to the login screen. This field is available for user-configured policies that require Single Sign-On (SSO). Select this to have the USG enable the SSO feature. You can set up this feature in the SSO screen. This field is available for user-configured policies that require authentication. Select this to have the USG automatically display the login screen when users who have not logged in yet try to send HTTP traffic. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 19.3 SSO Overview The SSO (Single Sign-On) function integrates Domain Controller and USG authentication mechanisms, so that users just need to log in once (single login) to get access to permitted resources. In the following figure, U user logs into a Domain Controller (DC) which passes the users login credentials to the SSO agent. The SSO agent checks that these credentials are correct with the AD server, and if the AD server confirms so, the SSO then notifies the USG to allow access for the user to the permitted resource (Internet access, for example). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 302 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Note: The USG, the DC, the SSO agent and the AD server must all be in the same domain and be able to communicate with each other. SSO does not support IPv6, LDAP or RADIUS; you must use it in an IPv4 network environment with Windows AD (Active Directory) authentication database. You must enable Web Authentication in the Configuration > Web Authentication screen. Figure 208 SSO Overview User Domain Controller U DC SSO Single Sign-On agent AD Active Directory Install the SSO Agent on one of the following platforms:
Windows 7 Professional (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows 2008 R2 (64-bit) Windows Server 2012 (64-bit) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 303 Chapter 19 Web Authentication 19.4 SSO - USG Configuration This section shows what you have to do on the USG in order to use SSO. Table 122 USG - SSO Agent Field Mapping USG SCREEN Web Authentication >
SSO FIELD Listen Port Web Authentication >
SSO Object > User/Group
> User > Add Primary Agent Port Group Identifier Object > AAA Server >
Active Directory > Add Base DN Object > AAA Server >
Active Directory > Add Bind DN Object > User/Group
> User > Add User Name Object > AAA Server >
Active Directory > Add Server Address Network > Interface >
Ethernet > wan (IPv4) IP address SSO FIELD Gateway Port Agent Listening Port Group Membership Base DN Bind DN Login Name Attribute Server Address Gateway IP SCREEN Agent Configuration Page > Gateway Setting Agent Configuration Page Agent Configuration Page > Configure LDAP/AD Server Agent Configuration Page > Configure LDAP/AD Server Agent Configuration Page > Configure LDAP/AD Server Agent Configuration Page > Configure LDAP/AD Server Agent Configuration Page > Configure LDAP/AD Server Agent Configuration Page > Gateway Setting 19.4.1 Configuration Overview These are the screens you need to configure:
Configure the USG to Communicate with SSO on page 304 Enable Web Authentication on page 305 Create a Security Policy on page 306 Configure User Information on page 307 Configure an Authentication Method on page 308 Configure Active Directory on page 309 or Configure Active Directory on page 309 19.4.2 Configure the USG to Communicate with SSO Use Configuration > Web Authentication > SSO to configure how the USG communicates with the Single Sign-On (SSO) agent. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 304 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Figure 209 Configuration > Web Authentication > SSO The following table gives an overview of the objects you can configure. Table 123 Configuration > Web Authentication > SSO LABEL Listen Port DESCRIPTION The default agent listening port is 2158. If you change it on the USG, then change it to the same number in the Gateway Port field on the SSO agent too. Type a number ranging from 1025 to 65535. Type 8-32 printable ASCII characters or exactly 32 hex characters (0-9; a-f). The Agent PreShareKey is used to encrypt communications between the USG and the SSO agent. Type the IPv4 address of the SSO agent. The USG and the SSO agent must be in the same domain and be able to communicate with each other. Type the same port number here as in the Agent Listening Port field on the SSO agent. Type a number ranging from 1025 to 65535. Type the IPv4 address of the backup SSO agent if there is one. The USG and the backup SSO agent must be in the same domain and be able to communicate with each other. Type the same port number here as in the Agent Listening Port field on the backup SSO agent if there is one. Type a number ranging from 1025 to 65535. Click this button to save your changes to the USG. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings Agent PreShareKey Primary Agent Address Primary Agent Port Secondary Agent Address
(Optional) Secondary Agent Port
(Optional) Apply Reset 19.4.3 Enable Web Authentication Enable Web Authentication and add a web authentication policy. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 305 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Make sure you select Enable Policy, Single Sign-On and choose required in Authentication. Do NOT select any as the source address unless you want all incoming connections to be authenticated!
See Table 120 on page 299 and Table 121 on page 302 for more information on configuring these screens. 19.4.4 Create a Security Policy Configure a Security Policy for SSO traffic source and destination direction in order to prevent the security policy from blocking this traffic. Go to Configuration > Security Policy > Policy and add a new policy if a default one does not cover the SSO web authentication traffic direction. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 306 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Configure the fields as shown in the following screen. Configure the source and destination addresses according to the SSO web authrntication traffic in your network. 19.4.5 Configure User Information Configure a User account of the ext-group-user type. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 307 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Configure Group Identifier to be the same as Group Membership on the SSO agent. 19.4.6 Configure an Authentication Method Configure Active Directory (AD) for authentication with SSO. Choose group ad as the authentication server for SSO. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 308 Chapter 19 Web Authentication 19.4.7 Configure Active Directory You must configure an Active Directory (AD) server in AAA Setup to be the same as AD configured on the SSO agent. The default AD server port is 389. If you change this, make sure you make the same changes on the SSO. Configure the Base DN exactly the same as on the Domain Controller and SSO. Bind DN is a user name and password that allows the USG to join the domain with administrative privileges. It is a required field. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 309 Chapter 19 Web Authentication 19.5 SSO Agent Configuration This section shows what you have to do on the SSO agent in order to work with the USG. After you install the SSO agent, you will see an icon in the system tray (bottom right of the screen) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 310 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Right-click the SSO icon and select Configure ZyXEL SSO Agent. Configure the Agent Listening Port, AD server exactly as you have done on the USG. Add the USG IP address as the Gateway. Make sure the USG and SSO agent are able to communicate with each other. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 311 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Configure the Server Address, Port, Base DN, Bind DN, Login Name Attribute and Group Membership for the AD server settings exactly as you have done on the USG. Group Membership is called Group Identifier on the USG. LDAP/AD Server Configuration USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 312 Chapter 19 Web Authentication Configure the Gateway IP address, Gateway Port and PreShareKey exactly as you have done in the USG Configuration > Web Authentication > SSO screen. If you want to use Generate Key to have the SSO create a random password, select Check to show PreShareKey as clear Text so as to see the password, then copy and paste it to the USG. After all SSO agent configurations are done, right-click the SSO icon in the system tray and select Enable ZyXEL SSO Agent. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 313 CHAPTER 20 Security Policy 20.1 Overview A security policy is a template of security settings that can be applied to specific traffic at specific times. The policy can be applied:
to a specific direction of travel of packets (from / to) to a specific source and destination address objects to a specific type of traffic (services) to a specific user or group of users at a specific schedule The policy can be configured:
to allow or deny traffic that matches the criteria above send a log or alert for traffic that matches the criteria above to apply the actions configured in the UTM profile (content filter, ) to traffic that matches the criteria above Note: Security policies can be applied to both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. The security policies can also limit the number of user sessions. The following example shows the USGs default security policies behavior for a specific direction of travel of packets. WAN to LAN traffic and how stateful inspection works. A LAN user can initiate a Telnet session from within the LAN zone and the USG allows the response. However, the USG blocks incoming Telnet traffic initiated from the WAN zone and destined for the LAN zone. Figure 210 Default Directional Security Policy Example 20.2 One Security OneSecurity.com is a website with guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting, and other information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 314 Chapter 20 Security Policy Note: Note that the walkthroughs do not perform the actual configuring, but just show you how to do it. This is an example of a port forwarding configuration walkthrough. Figure 211 Example of a Port Forwarding Configuration Walkthrough. 1 3 2 4 This is an example of L2TP over IPSec VPN Troubleshooting troubleshooting. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 315 Chapter 20 Security Policy Figure 212 Example of L2TP over IPSec Troubleshooting - 1 1 2 3 2 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 316 Chapter 20 Security Policy Figure 213 Example of L2TP over IPSec Troubleshooting - 2 3 In the USG, you will see icons that link to OneSecurity walkthroughs, troubleshooting and so on in certain screens. For example, at the time of writing, these are the OneSecurity icons you can see. Table 124 OneSecurity Icons ONESECURITY ICON SCREEN Click this icon to go to a series of screens that guide you how to configure the feature. Note that the walkthroughs do not perform the actual configuring, but just show you how to do it. Licensing > Registration Network > NAT Network > Routing > Policy Route UTM Profile > Content Filter UTM Profile > Anti-Spam VPN > IPSec VPN VPN > SSL VPN VPN > L2TP VPN Click this icon to go to a series of screens that guide you how to fix problems with the feature. Network > NAT Network > Routing > Policy Route UTM Profile > Content Filter UTM Profile > Anti-Spam VPN > IPSec VPN VPN > SSL VPN VPN > L2TP VPN Click this icon for more information on Content Filter, which controls access to specific web sites or web content. UTM Profile > Content Filter Click this icon for more information on Anti-Spam which can mark or discard spam (unsolicited commercial or junk e-mail) and e-mail from certain servers suspect of being used by spammers. UTM Profile > Anti-Spam USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 317 Chapter 20 Security Policy Table 124 OneSecurity Icons (continued) ONESECURITY ICON SCREEN Click this icon for more information on IPSec and SSL VPN. Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) VPN connects IPSec routers or remote users using IPSec client software. SSL VPN allows users to use a web browser for secure remote user login without need of a VPN router or VPN client software. VPN > IPSec VPN VPN > SSL VPN Click this icon to download VPN client software. VPN > IPSec VPN VPN > SSL VPN Click this icon for more information on the Wireless AP Controller which sets how the USG allows APs to connect to the wireless network. Wireless > AP Management > Mgnt. AP List 20.3 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Security Policy Control screens (Section 20.4 on page 320) to enable or disable policies, asymmetrical routes, and manage and configure policies. Use the Session Control screens (see Section 20.5 on page 326) to limit the number of concurrent NAT/security policies traffic sessions a client can use. 20.3.1 What You Need to Know Stateful Inspection The USG uses stateful inspection in its security policies. The USG restricts access by screening data packets against defined access rules. It also inspects sessions. For example, traffic from one zone is not allowed unless it is initiated by a computer in another zone first. Zones A zone is a group of interfaces. Group the USGs interfaces into different zones based on your needs. You can configure security policies for data passing between zones or even between interfaces. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 318 Chapter 20 Security Policy Default Directional Security Policy Behavior Security Policies can be grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. Here is the The USG has default Security Policy behavior for traffic going through the USG in various directions. Table 125 Directional Security Policy Behavior FROM ZONE TO ZONE From any to Device From LAN1 to any (other than the USG) From LAN2 to any (other than the USG) From LAN1 to Device From LAN2 to Device From WAN to Device BEHAVIOR DHCP traffic from any interface to the USG is allowed. Traffic from the LAN1 to any of the networks connected to the USG is allowed. Traffic from the LAN2 to any of the networks connected to the USG is allowed. Traffic from the LAN1 to the USG itself is allowed. Traffic from the LAN2 to the USG itself is allowed. The default services listed in To-Device Policies on page 319 are allowed from the WAN to the USG itself. All other WAN to USG traffic is dropped. Traffic that does not match any security policy is dropped. This includes traffic from the WAN to any of the networks behind the USG. This also includes traffic to or from interfaces that are not assigned to a zone
(extra-zone traffic). From any to any To-Device Policies Policies with Device as the To Zone apply to traffic going to the USG itself. By default:
The Security Policy allows only LAN, or WAN computers to access or manage the USG. The USG allows DHCP traffic from any interface to the USG. The USG drops most packets from the WAN zone to the USG itself and generates a log except for AH, ESP, GRE, HTTPS, IKE, NATT. When you configure a Security Policy rule for packets destined for the USG itself, make sure it does not conflict with your service control rule. The USG checks the security policy before the service control rules for traffic destined for the USG. A From Any To Device direction policy applies to traffic from an interface which is not in a zone. Global Security Policies Security Policies with from any and/or to any as the packet direction are called global Security Policies. The global Security Policies are the only Security Policies that apply to an interface that is not included in a zone. The from any policies apply to traffic coming from the interface and the to any policies apply to traffic going to the interface. Security Policy Rule Criteria The USG checks the schedule, user name (users login name on the USG), source IP address and object, destination IP address and object, IP protocol type of network traffic (service) and UTM profile criteria against the Security Policies (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a policy, the USG takes the action specified in the policy. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 319 Chapter 20 Security Policy User Specific Security Policies You can specify users or user groups in Security Policies. For example, to allow a specific user from any computer to access a zone by logging in to the USG, you can set up a policy based on the user name only. If you also apply a schedule to the Security Policy, the user can only access the network at the scheduled time. A user-aware Security Policy is activated whenever the user logs in to the USG and will be disabled after the user logs out of the USG. Session Limits Accessing the USG or network resources through the USG requires a NAT session and corresponding Security Policy session. Peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, may use a large number of NAT sessions. A single client could use all of the available NAT sessions and prevent others from connecting to or through the USG. The USG lets you limit the number of concurrent NAT/Security Policy sessions a client can use. 20.4 The Security Policy Screen Asymmetrical Routes If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the USGs LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the USG. This is called an asymmetrical or triangle route. This causes the USG to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. You can have the USG permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection). However, allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the USG. A better solution is to use virtual interfaces to put the USG and the backup gateway on separate subnets. Virtual interfaces allow you to partition your network into logical sections over the same interface. See the chapter about interfaces for more information. By putting LAN 1 and the alternate gateway (A in the figure) in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the USG to the LAN. The following steps and figure describe such a scenario. A computer on the LAN1 initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. The USG reroutes the packet to gateway A, which is in Subnet 2. The reply from the WAN goes to the USG. The USG then sends it to the computer on the LAN1 in Subnet 1. 1 2 3 4 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 320 Chapter 20 Security Policy Figure 214 Using Virtual Interfaces to Avoid Asymmetrical Routes 20.4.1 Configuring the Security Policy Control Screen Click Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control to open the Security Policy screen. Use this screen to enable or disable the Security Policy and asymmetrical routes, set a maximum number of sessions per host, and display the configured Security Policies. Specify from which zone packets come and to which zone packets travel to display only the policies specific to the selected direction. Note the following. Besides configuring the Security Policy, you also need to configure NAT rules to allow computers on the WAN to access LAN devices. The USG applies NAT (Destination NAT) settings before applying the Security Policies. So for example, if you configure a NAT entry that sends WAN traffic to a LAN IP address, when you configure a corresponding Security Policy to allow the traffic, you need to set the LAN IP address as the destination. The ordering of your policies is very important as policies are applied in sequence. The following screen shows the Security Policy summary screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 321 Chapter 20 Security Policy Figure 215 Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click Show Filter to display IPv4 and IPv6 (if enabled) security policy search filters. Table 126 Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control LABEL Show Filter/Hide Filter IPv4 / IPv6 Configuration From / To Use IPv4 / IPv6 search filters to find specific IPv4 and IPv6 (if enabled) security policies based on direction, application, user, source, destination and/or schedule. Select a zone to view all security policies from a particular zone and/or to a particular zone. any means all zones. Type an IPv4 or IPv6 IP address to view all security policies based on the IPv4 / IPv6 source address object used. IPv4 / IPv6 Source An IPv4 IP address is written as four integer blocks separated by periods. This is an example IPv4 address: 172.16.6.7. An 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address:
2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 322 Chapter 20 Security Policy Table 126 Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Type an IPv4 or IPv6 IP address to view all security policies based on the IPv4 / IPv6 destination address object used. IPv4 / IPv6 Destination An IPv4 IP address is written as four integer blocks separated by periods. This is an example IPv4 address: 172.16.6.7. An 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address:
2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. Service User Schedule View all security policies based the service object used. View all security policies based on user or user group object used. View all security policies based on the schedule object used. General Settings Enable or disable the Security Policy feature on the USG. Enable Policy Control IPv4/IPv6 Policy Management Use the following items to manage IPv4 and IPv6 policies. Select this to activate Security Policy on the USG to perform access control. Allow Asymmetrica l Route If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the USGs LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the USG. This is called an asymmetrical or triangle route. This causes the USG to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. Select this check box to have the USG permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection). Note: Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the USG. A better solution is to use virtual interfaces to put the USG and the backup gateway on separate subnets. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To change a policys position in the numbered list, select the policy and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that policy and press [ENTER] to move the policy to the number that you typed. Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Move Clone The ordering of your policies is important as they are applied in order of their numbering. Use Clone to create a new entry by modifying an existing one. Select an existing entry. Click Clone, type a number where the new entry should go and then press [ENTER]. A configuration copy of the selected entry pops up. You must at least change the name as duplicate entry names are not allowed. The following read-only fields summarize the policies you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. Priority This is the position of your Security Policy in the global policy list (including all through-
USG and to-USG policies). The ordering of your policies is important as policies are applied in sequence. Default displays for the default Security Policy behavior that the USG performs on traffic that does not match any other Security Policy. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. Status USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 323 Chapter 20 Security Policy Table 126 Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control (continued) LABEL Name From / To DESCRIPTION This is the name of the Security policy. This is the direction of travel of packets. Select from which zone the packets come and to which zone they go. Security Policies Rare grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. For example, from LAN to LAN means packets traveling from a computer or subnet on the LAN to either another computer or subnet on the LAN. From any displays all the Security Policies for traffic going to the selected To Zone. To any displays all the Security Policies for traffic coming from the selected From Zone. From any to any displays all of the Security Policies. To ZyWALL policies are for traffic that is destined for the USG and control which computers can manage the USG. This displays the IPv4 / IPv6 source address object to which this Security Policy applies. This displays the IPv4 / IPv6 destination address object to which this Security Policy applies. This displays the service object to which this Security Policy applies. This is the user name or user group name to which this Security Policy applies. This field tells you the schedule object that the policy uses. none means the policy is active at all times if enabled. This field displays whether the Security Policy silently discards packets without notification
(deny), permits the passage of packets (allow) or drops packets with notification (reject) This field shows you which UTM profiles (content filter, anti-spam) apply to this Security policy. Click an applied UTM profile icon to edit the profile directly. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. IPv4 / IPv6 Source IPv4 / IPv6 Destination Service User Schedule Action UTM Profile Apply Reset 20.4.2 The Security Policy Control Add/Edit Screen In the Security Policy Control screen, click the Edit or Add icon to display the Security Policy Edit or Add screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 324 Chapter 20 Security Policy Figure 216 Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Table 127 Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control > Add LABEL Create new Object Enable Name Description Select this check box to activate the Security policy. Type a name to identify the policy Enter a descriptive name of up to 60 printable ASCII characters for the Policy. Spaces are allowed. For through-USG policies, select the direction of travel of packets to which the policy applies. From To Source Destination Service User any means all interfaces. Device means packets destined for the USG itself. Select an IPv4 / IPv6 address or address group object to apply the policy to traffic coming from it. Select any to apply the policy to all traffic coming from IPv4 / IPv6 addresses. Select an IPv4 / IPv6 address or address group to apply the policy to traffic going to it. Select any to apply the policy to all traffic going to IPv4 / IPv6 addresses. Select a service or service group from the drop-down list box. This field is not available when you are configuring a to-USG policy. Select a user name or user group to which to apply the policy. The Security Policy is activated only when the specified user logs into the system and the policy will be disabled when the user logs out. Otherwise, select any and there is no need for user logging. Note: If you specified a source IP address (group) instead of any in the field below, the users IP address should be within the IP address range. Schedule Select a schedule that defines when the policy applies. Otherwise, select none and the policy is always effective. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 325 Chapter 20 Security Policy Table 127 Configuration > Security Policy > Policy Control > Add (continued) LABEL Action DESCRIPTION Use the drop-down list box to select what the Security Policy is to do with packets that match this policy. Select deny to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender. Select reject to discard the packets and send a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-
unreachable message to the sender. Select allow to permit the passage of the packets. Select whether to have the USG generate a log (log), log and alert (log alert) or not (no) when the policy is matched to the criteria listed above.. Use this section to apply anti- x profiles (created in the Configuration > UTM Profile screens) to traffic that matches the criteria above. You must have created a profile first;
otherwise none displays. Log matched traffic UTM Profile Use Log to generate a log (log), log and alert (log alert) or not (no) for all traffic that matches criteria in the profile. Select a Content Filter profile from the list box; none displays if no profiles have been created in the Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter screen. Content Filter Anti-Spam Select an Anti-Spam profile from the list box; none displays if no profiles have been created OK Cancel in the Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam screen. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 20.5 The Session Control Screen Click Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control to display the Security Policy Session Control screen. Use this screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT/Security Policy sessions a client can use. You can apply a default limit for all users and individual limits for specific users, addresses, or both. The individual limit takes priority if you apply both. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 326 Chapter 20 Security Policy Figure 217 Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 128 Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control LABEL General Settings UDP Session Time Out Session Limit Settings Enable Session limit IPv4 / IPv6 Rule Summary Set how many seconds the USG will allow a UDP session to remain idle (without UDP traffic) before closing it. Select this check box to control the number of concurrent sessions hosts can have. This table lists the rules for limiting the number of concurrent sessions hosts can have. Default Session per Host Add Edit This field is configurable only when you enable session limit. Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT/Security Policy sessions each client computer can have. If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve their performance. With heavy peer to peer application use, lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions. Create rules below to apply other limits for specific users or addresses. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 327 Chapter 20 Security Policy Table 128 Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control (continued) LABEL Remove Activate Inactivate Move Status
#
User IPv4 / IPv6 Address Description Limit Apply Reset DESCRIPTION To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To change a rules position in the numbered list, select the rule and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that rule and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your rules is important as they are applied in order of their numbering. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the index number of a session limit rule. It is not associated with a specific rule. This is the user name or user group name to which this session limit rule applies. This is the IPv4 / IPv6 address object to which this session limit rule applies. This is the information configured to help you identify the rule. This is how many concurrent sessions this user or address is allowed to have. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 20.5.1 The Session Control Add/Edit Screen Click Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control and the Add or Edit icon to display the Add or Edit screen. Use this screen to configure rules that define a session limit for specific users or addresses. Figure 218 Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control > Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 129 Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control > Add / Edit LABEL Create new Object Enable Rule Description DESCRIPTION Use to configure new settings for User or Address objects that you need to use in this screen.Click on the down arrow to see the menu. Select this check box to turn on this session limit rule. Enter information to help you identify this rule. Use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 328 Chapter 20 Security Policy Table 129 Configuration > Security Policy > Session Control > Add / Edit (continued) LABEL User DESCRIPTION Select a user name or user group to which to apply the rule. The rule is activated only when the specified user logs into the system and the rule will be disabled when the user logs out. Otherwise, select any and there is no need for user logging. Note: If you specified an IP address (or address group) instead of any in the field below, the users IP address should be within the IP address range. Address IPv6 Address Session Limit per Host Select the IPv4 source address or address group to which this rule applies. Select any to apply the rule to all IPv4 source addresses. Select the IPv6 source address or address group to which this rule applies. Select any to apply the rule to all IPv6 source addresses. Use this field to set a limit to the number of concurrent NAT/Security Policy sessions this rules users or addresses can have. OK Cancel For this rules users and addresses, this setting overrides the Default Session per Host setting in the general Security Policy Session Control screen. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 20.6 Security Policy Example Applications Suppose you decide to block LAN users from using IRC (Internet Relay Chat) through the Internet. To do this, you would configure a LAN to WAN Security Policy that blocks IRC traffic from any source IP address from going to any destination address. You do not need to specify a schedule since you need the Security Policy to always be in effect. The following figure shows the results of this policy. Figure 219 Blocking All LAN to WAN IRC Traffic Example Your Security Policy would have the following settings. Table 130 Blocking All LAN to WAN IRC Traffic Example
#
1 2 DESTINATION Any Any SOURCE Any Any USER Any Any SCHEDULE Any Any UTM PROFILE IRC Any ACTION Deny Allow The first row blocks LAN access to the IRC service on the WAN. The second row is the Security Policys default policy that allows all LAN1 to WAN traffic. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 329 Chapter 20 Security Policy The USG applies the security policies in order. So for this example, when the USG receives traffic from the LAN, it checks it against the first policy. If the traffic matches (if it is IRC traffic) the security policy takes the action in the policy (drop) and stops checking the subsequent security policies. Any traffic that does not match the first security policy will match the second security policy and the USG forwards it. Now suppose you need to let the CEO use IRC. You configure a LAN1 to WAN security policy that allows IRC traffic from the IP address of the CEOs computer. You can also configure a LAN to WAN policy that allows IRC traffic from any computer through which the CEO logs into the USG with his/
her user name. In order to make sure that the CEOs computer always uses the same IP address, make sure it either:
Has a static IP address, or You configure a static DHCP entry for it so the USG always assigns it the same IP address. Now you configure a LAN1 to WAN security policy that allows IRC traffic from the IP address of the CEOs computer (172.16.1.7 for example) to go to any destination address. You do not need to specify a schedule since you want the security policy to always be in effect. The following figure shows the results of your two custom policies. Figure 220 Limited LAN to WAN IRC Traffic Example Your security policy would have the following configuration. Table 131 Limited LAN1 to WAN IRC Traffic Example 1
#
1 2 3 DESTINATION Any Any Any SOURCE 172.16.1.7 Any Any USER Any Any Any SCHEDULE Any Any Any UTM PROFILE IRC IRC Any ACTION Allow Deny Allow The first row allows the LAN1 computer at IP address 172.16.1.7 to access the IRC service on the WAN. The second row blocks LAN1 access to the IRC service on the WAN. The third row is the default policy of allowing all traffic from the LAN1 to go to the WAN. Alternatively, you configure a LAN1 to WAN policy with the CEOs user name (say CEO) to allow IRC traffic from any source IP address to go to any destination address. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 330 Chapter 20 Security Policy Your Security Policy would have the following settings. Table 132 Limited LAN1 to WAN IRC Traffic Example 2
#
1 2 3 DESTINATION Any Any Any SOURCE Any Any Any USER CEO Any Any SCHEDULE Any Any Any UTM PROFILE IRC IRC Any ACTION Allow Deny Allow The first row allows any LAN1 computer to access the IRC service on the WAN by logging into the USG with the CEOs user name. The second row blocks LAN1 access to the IRC service on the WAN. The third row is the default policy of allowing allows all traffic from the LAN1 to go to the WAN. The policy for the CEO must come before the policy that blocks all LAN1 to WAN IRC traffic. If the policy that blocks all LAN1 to WAN IRC traffic came first, the CEOs IRC traffic would match that policy and the USG would drop it and not check any other security policies. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 331 CHAPTER 21 IPSec VPN 21.1 Virtual Private Networks (VPN) Overview A virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication, access control and auditing. It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses TCP/IP for communication. IPSec VPN Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) VPN connects IPSec routers or remote users using IPSec client software. This standards-based VPN offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network. IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality, data integrity and authentication at the IP layer. The USG can also combine multiple IPSec VPN connections into one secure network. Here local USG X uses an IPSec VPN tunnel to remote (peer) USG Y to connect the local (A) and remote (B) networks. Figure 221 IPSec VPN Example Internet Key Exchange (IKE): IKEv1 and IKEv2 The USG supports IKEv1 and IKEv2 for IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. IKE (Internet Key Exchange) is a protocol used in setting up security associations that allows two parties to send data securely. IKE uses certificates or pre-shared keys for authentication and a DiffieHellman key exchange to set up a shared session secret from which encryption keys are derived. A security policy for each peer must be manually created. IPSec VPN consists of two phases: Phase 1 and Phase 2. Phase 1's purpose is to establish a secure authenticated communication channel by using the DiffieHellman key exchange algorithm to generate a shared secret key to encrypt IKE communications. This negotiation results in one single bi-directional ISAKMP Security Association (SA). The authentication can be performed using either pre-shared key (shared secret), signatures, or public key encryption. Phase 1 operates in either USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 332 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Main Mode or Aggressive Mode. Main Mode protects the identity of the peers, but Aggressive Mode does not. During Phase 2, the remote IPSec routers use the secure channel established in Phase 1 to negotiate Security Associations for IPsec. The negotiation results in a minimum of two unidirectional security associations (one inbound and one outbound). Phase 2 uses Quick Mode
(only). Quick mode occurs after IKE has established the secure tunnel in Phase 1. It negotiates a shared IPSec policy, derives shared secret keys used for the IPSec security algorithms, and establishes IPSec SAs. Quick mode is also used to renegotiate a new IPSec SA when the IPSec SA lifetime expires. In the USG, use the VPN Connection tab to set up Phase 2 and the VPN Gateway tab to set up Phase 1. Some differences between IKEv1 and IKEv2 include:
IKEv2 uses less bandwidth than IKEv1. IKEv2 uses one exchange procedure with 4 messages. IKEv1 uses two phases with Main Mode (9 messages) or Aggressive Mode (6 messages) in phase 1. IKEv2 supports Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) authentication, and IKEv1 supports X-
Auth. EAP is important when connecting to existing enterprise authentication systems. IKEv2 always uses NAT traversal and Dead Peer Detection (DPD), but they can be disabled in IKEv1 using USG firmware (the default is on). Configuration payload (includes the IP address pool in the VPN setup data) is supported in IKEv2
(off by default), but not in IKEv1. Narrowed (has the SA apply only to IP addresses in common between the USG and the remote IPSec router) is supported in IKEv2, but not in IKEv1. The IKEv2 protocol supports connectivity checks which is used to detect whether the tunnel is still up or not. If the check fails (the tunnel is down), IKEv2 can re-establish the connection automatically. The USG uses firmware to perform connectivity checks when using IKEv1. SSL VPN SSL VPN uses remote users web browsers to provide the easiest-to-use of the USGs VPN solutions. A user just browses to the USGs web address and enters his user name and password to securely connect to the USGs network. Remote users do not need to configure security settings. Here a user uses his browser to securely connect to network resources in the same way as if he were part of the internal network. See Chapter 22 on page 367 for more on SSL VPN. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 333 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Figure 222 SSL VPN https://
LAN (192.168.1.X) Web Mail File Share Web-based Application Non-Web Application Server L2TP VPN L2TP VPN uses the L2TP and IPSec client software included in remote users Android, iOS, or Windows operating systems for secure connections to the network behind the USG. The remote users do not need their own IPSec gateways or third-party VPN client software. For example, configure sales representatives laptops, tablets, or smartphones to securely connect to the USGs network. See Chapter 25 on page 395 for more on L2TP over IPSec. Figure 223 L2TP VPN 21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the VPN Connection screens (see Section 21.2 on page 337) to specify which IPSec VPN gateway an IPSec VPN connection policy uses, which devices behind the IPSec routers can use the VPN tunnel, and the IPSec SA settings (phase 2 settings). You can also activate or deactivate and connect or disconnect each VPN connection (each IPSec SA). Use the VPN Gateway screens (see Section 21.2.1 on page 338) to manage the USGs VPN gateways. A VPN gateway specifies the IPSec routers at either end of a VPN tunnel and the IKE SA settings (phase 1 settings). You can also activate and deactivate each VPN gateway. Use the VPN Concentrator screens (see Section 21.4 on page 353) to combine several IPSec VPN connections into a single secure network. Use the Configuration Provisioning screen (see Section 21.5 on page 355) to set who can retrieve VPN rule settings from the USG using the USG IPSec VPN Client. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 334 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN 21.1.2 What You Need to Know An IPSec VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases. Each phase establishes a security association (SA), a contract indicating what security parameters the USG and the remote IPSec router will use. The first phase establishes an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) SA between the USG and remote IPSec router. The second phase uses the IKE SA to securely establish an IPSec SA through which the USG and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and remote network. This is illustrated in the following figure. Figure 224 VPN: IKE SA and IPSec SA In this example, a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B. Inside networks A and B, the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the networks. Between routers X and Y, the data is protected by tunneling, encryption, authentication, and other security features of the IPSec SA. The IPSec SA is secure because routers X and Y established the IKE SA first. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 335 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Application Scenarios The USGs application scenarios make it easier to configure your VPN connection settings. Table 133 IPSec VPN Application Scenarios SITE-TO-SITE SITE-TO-SITE WITH DYNAMIC PEER REMOTE ACCESS
(SERVER ROLE) REMOTE ACCESS
(CLIENT ROLE) Choose this if the remote IPSec router has a static IP address or a domain name. This USG can initiate the VPN tunnel. The remote IPSec router can also initiate the VPN tunnel if this USG has a static IP address or a domain name. Choose this if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic IP address. Choose this to allow incoming connections from IPSec VPN clients. You dont specify the remote IPSec routers address, but you specify the remote policy (the addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router). This USG must have a static IP address or a domain name. Only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN tunnel. The clients have dynamic IP addresses and are also known as dial-in users. You dont specify the addresses of the client IPSec routers or the remote policy. This creates a dynamic IPSec VPN rule that can let multiple clients connect. Only the clients can initiate the VPN tunnel. Choose this to connect to an IPSec server. This USG is the client
(dial-in user). Client role USGs initiate IPSec VPN connections to a server role USG. This USG can have a dynamic IP address. The IPSec server doesnt configure this USGs IP address or the addresses of the devices behind it. Only this USG can initiate the VPN tunnel. Finding Out More See Section 21.6 on page 357 for IPSec VPN background information. See the help in the IPSec VPN quick setup wizard screens. 21.1.3 Before You Begin This section briefly explains the relationship between VPN tunnels and other features. It also gives some basic suggestions for troubleshooting. You should set up the following features before you set up the VPN tunnel. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 336 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN In any VPN connection, you have to select address objects to specify the local policy and remote policy. You should set up the address objects first. In a VPN gateway, you can select an Ethernet interface, virtual Ethernet interface, VLAN interface, or virtual VLAN interface to specify what address the USG uses as its IP address when it establishes the IKE SA. You should set up the interface first. In a VPN gateway, you can enable extended authentication. If the USG is in server mode, you should set up the authentication method (AAA server) first. The authentication method specifies how the USG authenticates the remote IPSec router. In a VPN gateway, the USG and remote IPSec router can use certificates to authenticate each other. Make sure the USG and the remote IPSec router will trust each others certificates. 21.2 The VPN Connection Screen Click Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN to open the VPN Connection screen. The VPN Connection screen lists the VPN connection policies and their associated VPN gateway(s), and various settings. In addition, it also lets you activate or deactivate and connect or disconnect each VPN connection (each IPSec SA). Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. Click on the icons to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting and other information. Figure 225 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 337 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Each field is discussed in the following table. Table 134 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection LABEL Global Setting DESCRIPTION The following two fields are for all IPSec VPN policies. Use Policy Route to control dynamic IPSec rules Click on the VPN icon to go to the ZyXEL VPN Client product page at the ZyXEL website. Select this to be able to use policy routes to manually specify the destination addresses of dynamic IPSec rules. You must manually create these policy routes. The USG automatically obtains source and destination addresses for dynamic IPSec rules that do not match any of the policy routes. Clear this to have the USG automatically obtain source and destination addresses for all dynamic IPSec rules. Select this to fragment packets larger than the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) that have the "Don't Fragment" bit in the IP header turned on. When you clear this the USG drops packets larger than the MTU that have the "Don't Fragment" bit in the header turned on. Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To connect an IPSec SA, select it and click Connect. To disconnect an IPSec SA, select it and click Disconnect. Select an entry and click Object Reference to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific connection. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. The connect icon is lit when the interface is connected and dimmed when it is disconnected. This field displays the name of the IPSec SA. This field displays the VPN gateway in use for this VPN connection. This field displays what IP version the associated VPN gateway(s) is using. An IPv4 gateway may use an IKEv1 or IKEv2 SA. An IPv6 gateway may use IKEv2 only. This field displays the local policy and the remote policy, respectively. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Ignore
"Don't Fragment"
setting in packet header IPv4 / IPv6 Configuration Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Connect Disconnect Object Reference
#
Status Name VPN Gateway Gateway IP Version Policy Apply Reset 21.2.1 The VPN Connection Add/Edit (IKE) Screen The VPN Connection Add/Edit Gateway screen allows you to create a new VPN connection policy or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Configuration > VPN Connection screen (see Section 21.2 on page 337), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 338 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Figure 226 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection > Edit (IKE) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 339 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Table 135 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection > Edit LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create new Object General Settings Enable Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Connection Name Nailed-Up Enable Replay Detection Enable NetBIOS Broadcast over IPSec MSS Adjustment Narrowed VPN Gateway Application Scenario Select this check box to activate this VPN connection. Type the name used to identify this IPSec SA. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select this if you want the USG to automatically renegotiate the IPSec SA when the SA life time expires. Select this check box to detect and reject old or duplicate packets to protect against Denial-of-Service attacks. Select this check box if you the USG to send NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) packets through the IPSec SA. NetBIOS packets are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. It may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through IPSec SAs in order to allow local computers to find computers on the remote network and vice versa. Select Custom Size to set a specific number of bytes for the Maximum Segment Size
(MSS) meaning the largest amount of data in a single TCP segment or IP datagram for this VPN connection. Some VPN clients may not be able to use a custom MSS size if it is set too small. In that case those VPN clients will ignore the size set here and use the minimum size that they can use. Select Auto to have the USG automatically set the MSS for this VPN connection. If the IP range on the USG (local policy) and the local IP range on the remote IPSec router overlap in an IKEv2 SA, then you may select Narrowed to have the SA only apply to the IP addresses in common. Here are some examples. USG (local policy) Remote IPSec router IKEv2 SA-1 192.168.20.0/24 192.168.20.1 ~ 192.168.20.20 Narrowed 192.168.20.1 ~ 192.168.20.20 IKEv2 SA- 2 192.168.30.50 ~ 192.168.30.70 192.168.30.60 ~ 192.168.30.80 Narrowed 192.168.30.60 ~ 192.168.30.70 Select the scenario that best describes your intended VPN connection. Site-to-site - Choose this if the remote IPSec router has a static IP address or a domain name. This USG can initiate the VPN tunnel. Site-to-site with Dynamic Peer - Choose this if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic IP address. Only the remote IPSec router can initiate the VPN tunnel. Remote Access (Server Role) - Choose this to allow incoming connections from IPSec VPN clients. The clients have dynamic IP addresses and are also known as dial-
in users. Only the clients can initiate the VPN tunnel. Remote Access (Client Role) - Choose this to connect to an IPSec server. This USG is the client (dial-in user) and can initiate the VPN tunnel. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 340 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 135 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection > Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select the VPN gateway this VPN connection is to use or select Create Object to add another VPN gateway for this VPN connection to use. VPN Gateway Policy Local Policy Remote Policy Enable GRE over IPSec Select the address corresponding to the local network. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new one. Select the address corresponding to the remote network. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new one. Select this to allow traffic using the Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) tunneling protocol through an IPSec tunnel. Policy Enforcement Clear this to allow traffic with source and destination IP addresses that do not match the local and remote policy to use the VPN tunnel. Leave this cleared for free access between the local and remote networks. Configuration Payload Enable Configuration Payload IP Address Pool:
First DNS Server
(optional) Second DNS Server (Optional) First WINS Server
(Optional) Second WINS Server (Optional) Phase 2 Settings SA Life Time Active Protocol Selecting this restricts who can use the VPN tunnel. The USG drops traffic with source and destination IP addresses that do not match the local and remote policy. This is only available when you have created an IKEv2 Gateway and are using Remote Access (Server Role). Select this to have at least have the IP address pool included in the VPN setup data. Select an address object from the drop-down list box. The Domain Name System (DNS) maps a domain name to an IP address and vice versa. The USG uses these (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for VPN. Enter a DNS server's IP address. Enter a secondary DNS server's IP address that is checked if the first one is unavailable. Type the IP address of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server that you want to send to the DHCP clients. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using. Enter a secondary WINS server's IP address that is checked if the first one is unavailable. Type the maximum number of seconds the IPSec SA can last. Shorter life times provide better security. The USG automatically negotiates a new IPSec SA before the current one expires, if there are users who are accessing remote resources. Select which protocol you want to use in the IPSec SA. Choices are:
AH (RFC 2402) - provides integrity, authentication, sequence integrity (replay resistance), and non-repudiation but not encryption. If you select AH, you must select an Authentication algorithm. ESP (RFC 2406) - provides encryption and the same services offered by AH, but its authentication is weaker. If you select ESP, you must select an Encryption algorithm and Authentication algorithm. Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and latency (delay). Encapsulation The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same active protocol. Select which type of encapsulation the IPSec SA uses. Choices are Tunnel - this mode encrypts the IP header information and the data. Transport - this mode only encrypts the data. The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same encapsulation. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 341 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 135 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection > Edit (continued) LABEL Proposal Add Edit Remove
#
Encryption DESCRIPTION Use this section to manage the encryption algorithm and authentication algorithm pairs the USG accepts from the remote IPSec router for negotiating the IPSec SA. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific proposal. The sequence of proposals should not affect performance significantly. This field is applicable when the Active Protocol is ESP. Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IPSec SA. Choices are:
NULL - no encryption key or algorithm DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES128 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES192 - a 192-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES256 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm The USG and the remote IPSec router must both have at least one proposal that uses use the same encryption and the same key. Longer keys are more secure, but require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data in the IPSec SA. Choices are SHA1, SHA256, SHA512 and MD5. SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower. Authentication Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) The USG and the remote IPSec router must both have a proposal that uses the same authentication algorithm. Select whether or not you want to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) and, if you do, which Diffie-Hellman key group to use for encryption. Choices are:
none - disable PFS DH1 - enable PFS and use a 768-bit random number DH2 - enable PFS and use a 1024-bit random number DH5 - enable PFS and use a 1536-bit random number PFS changes the root key that is used to generate encryption keys for each IPSec SA. The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group. PFS is ignored in initial IKEv2 authentication but is used when reauthenticating. Select the security zone into which to add this VPN connection policy. Any security rules or settings configured for the selected zone apply to this VPN connection policy. The USG can regularly check the VPN connection to the gateway you specified to make sure it is still available. Select this to turn on the VPN connection check. Related Settings Zone Connectivity Check Enable Connectivity Check USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 342 Check this Address Select this to specify a domain name or IP address for the connectivity check. Enter Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 135 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection > Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select how the USG checks the connection. The peer must be configured to respond to the method you select. Check Method Check Port Check Period Check Timeout Check Fail Tolerance Check the First and Last IP Address in the Remote Policy Log Inbound/Outbound traffic NAT Outbound Traffic Source NAT Source Destination SNAT Inbound Traffic Source NAT Source Destination Select icmp to have the USG regularly ping the address you specify to make sure traffic can still go through the connection. You may need to configure the peer to respond to pings. Select tcp to have the USG regularly perform a TCP handshake with the address you specify to make sure traffic can still go through the connection. You may need to configure the peer to accept the TCP connection. This field displays when you set the Check Method to tcp. Specify the port number to use for a TCP connectivity check. Enter the number of seconds between connection check attempts. Enter the number of seconds to wait for a response before the attempt is a failure. Enter the number of consecutive failures allowed before the USG disconnects the VPN tunnel. The USG resumes using the first peer gateway address when the VPN connection passes the connectivity check. that domain name or IP address in the field next to it. Select this to have the USG check the connection to the first and last IP addresses in the connections remote policy. Make sure one of these is the peer gateways LAN IP address. Select this to have the USG generate a log every time it checks this VPN connection. This translation hides the source address of computers in the local network. It may also be necessary if you want the USG to route packets from computers outside the local network through the IPSec SA. Select the address object that represents the original source address (or select Create Object to configure a new one). This is the address object for the computer or network outside the local network. The size of the original source address range
(Source) must be equal to the size of the translated source address range (SNAT). Select the address object that represents the original destination address (or select Create Object to configure a new one). This is the address object for the remote network. Select the address object that represents the translated source address (or select Create Object to configure a new one). This is the address object for the local network. The size of the original source address range (Source) must be equal to the size of the translated source address range (SNAT). This translation hides the source address of computers in the remote network. Select the address object that represents the original source address (or select Create Object to configure a new one). This is the address object for the remote network. The size of the original source address range (Source) must be equal to the size of the translated source address range (SNAT). Select the address object that represents the original destination address (or select Create Object to configure a new one). This is the address object for the local network. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 343 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 135 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection > Edit (continued) LABEL SNAT DESCRIPTION Select the address object that represents the translated source address (or select Create Object to configure a new one). This is the address that hides the original source address. The size of the original source address range (Source) must be equal to the size of the translated source address range (SNAT). This translation forwards packets (for example, mail) from the remote network to a specific computer (for example, the mail server) in the local network. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select it and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that entry and press [ENTER] to move the entry to the number that you typed. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific NAT record. However, the order of records is the sequence in which conditions are checked and executed. Select the address object that represents the original destination address. This is the address object for the remote network. Select the address object that represents the desired destination address. For example, this is the address object for the mail server. Select the protocol required to use this translation. Choices are: TCP, UDP, or All. These fields are available if the protocol is TCP or UDP. Enter the original destination port or range of original destination ports. The size of the original port range must be the same size as the size of the mapped port range. These fields are available if the protocol is TCP or UDP. Enter the translated destination port or range of translated destination ports. The size of the original port range must be the same size as the size of the mapped port range. Click OK to save the changes. Click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the main VPN screen. Destination NAT Add Edit Remove Move
#
Original IP Mapped IP Protocol Original Port Start
/ Original Port End Mapped Port Start
/ Mapped Port End OK Cancel 21.3 The VPN Gateway Screen The VPN Gateway summary screen displays the IPSec VPN gateway policies in the USG, as well as the USGs address, remote IPSec routers address, and associated VPN connections for each one. In addition, it also lets you activate and deactivate each VPN gateway. To access this screen, click Configuration > VPN > Network > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway. The following screen appears. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 344 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Figure 227 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway Each field is discussed in the following table. See Section 21.3.1 on page 346 for more information. Table 136 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. Activate Inactivate Object References Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings Remove
#
Status Name My address Secure Gateway VPN Connection IKE Version Apply Reset use the entry. See Section 9.3.2 on page 163 for an example. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific VPN gateway. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the name of the VPN gateway This field displays the interface or a domain name the USG uses for the VPN gateway. This field displays the IP address(es) of the remote IPSec routers. This field displays VPN connections that use this VPN gateway. This field displays whether the gateway is using IKEv1 or IKEv2. IKEv1 applies to IPv4 traffic only. IKEv2 applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. IKE (Internet Key Exchange) is a protocol used in setting up security associations that allows two parties to send data securely. See Section 21.1 on page 332 for more information on IKEv1 and IKEv2. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 345 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN 21.3.1 The VPN Gateway Add/Edit Screen The VPN Gateway Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new VPN gateway policy or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the VPN Gateway summary screen (see Section 21.3 on page 344), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 346 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Figure 228 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway > Add/Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 347 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Table 137 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway > Add/Edit LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create New Object General Settings Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Enable VPN Gateway Name Select this to activate the VPN Gateway policy. Type the name used to identify this VPN gateway. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. IKE Version IKEv1 / IKEv2 Gateway Settings Select IKEv1 or IKEv2. IKEv1 applies to IPv4 traffic only. IKEv2 applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic. IKE (Internet Key Exchange) is a protocol used in setting up security associations that allows two parties to send data securely. See Section 21.1 on page 332 for more information on IKEv1 and IKEv2. My Address Select how the IP address of the USG in the IKE SA is defined. If you select Interface, select the Ethernet interface, VLAN interface, virtual Ethernet interface, virtual VLAN interface or PPPoE/PPTP interface. The IP address of the USG in the IKE SA is the IP address of the interface. If you select Domain Name / IP, enter the domain name or the IP address of the USG. The IP address of the USG in the IKE SA is the specified IP address or the IP address corresponding to the domain name. 0.0.0.0 is not generally recommended as it has the USG accept IPSec requests destined for any interface address on the USG. Select how the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA is defined. Select Static Address to enter the domain name or the IP address of the remote IPSec router. You can provide a second IP address or domain name for the USG to try if it cannot establish an IKE SA with the first one. Fall back to Primary Peer Gateway when possible: When you select this, if the connection to the primary address goes down and the USG changes to using the secondary connection, the USG will reconnect to the primary address when it becomes available again and stop using the secondary connection. Users will lose their VPN connection briefly while the USG changes back to the primary connection. To use this, the peer device at the secondary address cannot be set to use a nailed-
up VPN connection. In the Fallback Check Interval field, set how often to check if the primary address is available. Select Dynamic Address if the remote IPSec router has a dynamic IP address (and does not use DDNS). Note: The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same authentication method to establish the IKE SA. Peer Gateway Address Authentication USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 348 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 137 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG and remote IPSec router use a pre-shared key (password) to identify each other when they negotiate the IKE SA. Type the pre-shared key in the field to the right. The pre-shared key can be:
Pre-Shared Key Certificate User-based PSK Local ID Type Content alphanumeric characters or ,;.|`~!@#$%^&*()_+\{}':./<>=-"
pairs of hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) characters, preceded by 0x. Type 0x at the beginning of a hexadecimal key. For example,
"0x0123456789ABCDEF" is in hexadecimal format; 0123456789ABCDEF is in ASCII format. If you use hexadecimal, you must enter twice as many characters since you need to enter pairs. The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same pre-shared key. Select unmasked to see the pre-shared key in readable plain text. Select this to have the USG and remote IPSec router use certificates to authenticate each other when they negotiate the IKE SA. Then select the certificate the USG uses to identify itself to the remote IPsec router. This certificate is one of the certificates in My Certificates. If this certificate is self-
signed, import it into the remote IPsec router. If this certificate is signed by a CA, the remote IPsec router must trust that CA. Note: The IPSec routers must trust each others certificates. The USG uses one of its Trusted Certificates to authenticate the remote IPSec routers certificate. The trusted certificate can be a self-signed certificate or that of a trusted CA that signed the remote IPSec routers certificate. User-based PSK (IKEv1 only) generates and manages separate pre-shared keys for every user. This enables multiple users, each with a unique key, to access the same VPN gateway policy with one-to-one authentication and strong encryption. Access can be denied on a per-user basis thus allowing VPN SA user-based policies. Click User-
Based PSK then select a user or group object who is allowed VPN SA access using this VPN gateway policy. This is for IKEv1 only. This field is read-only if the USG and remote IPSec router use certificates to identify each other. Select which type of identification is used to identify the USG during authentication. Choices are:
IPv4 or IPv6 - the USG is identified by an IP address DNS - the USG is identified by a domain name E-mail - the USG is identified by the string specified in this field This field is read-only if the USG and remote IPSec router use certificates to identify each other. Type the identity of the USG during authentication. The identity depends on the Local ID Type. IP - type an IP address; if you type 0.0.0.0, the USG uses the IP address specified in the My Address field. This is not recommended in the following situations:
There is a NAT router between the USG and remote IPSec router. You want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between IPSec SA requests that come from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses. In these situations, use a different IP address, or use a different Local ID Type. DNS - type the fully qualified domain name (FQDN). This value is only used for identification and can be any string that matches the peer ID string. E-mail - the USG is identified by the string you specify here; you can use up to 63 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. This value is only used for identification and can be any string. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 349 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 137 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select which type of identification is used to identify the remote IPSec router during authentication. Choices are:
Peer ID Type IP - the remote IPSec router is identified by an IP address DNS - the remote IPSec router is identified by a domain name E-mail - the remote IPSec router is identified by the string specified in this field Any - the USG does not check the identity of the remote IPSec router If the USG and remote IPSec router use certificates, there is one more choice. Content Subject Name - the remote IPSec router is identified by the subject name in the certificate This field is disabled if the Peer ID Type is Any. Type the identity of the remote IPSec router during authentication. The identity depends on the Peer ID Type. If the USG and remote IPSec router do not use certificates, IP - type an IP address; see the note at the end of this description. DNS - type the fully qualified domain name (FQDN). This value is only used for identification and can be any string that matches the peer ID string. E-mail - the remote IPSec router is identified by the string you specify here; you can use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated. This value is only used for identification and can be any string. If the USG and remote IPSec router use certificates, type the following fields from the certificate used by the remote IPSec router. IP - subject alternative name field; see the note at the end of this description. DNS - subject alternative name field E-mail - subject alternative name field Subject Name - subject name (maximum 255 ASCII characters, including spaces) Note: If Peer ID Type is IP, please read the rest of this section. If you type 0.0.0.0, the USG uses the IP address specified in the Secure Gateway Address field. This is not recommended in the following situations:
There is a NAT router between the USG and remote IPSec router. You want the remote IPSec router to be able to distinguish between IPSec SA requests that come from IPSec routers with dynamic WAN IP addresses. In these situations, use a different IP address, or use a different Peer ID Type. Type the maximum number of seconds the IKE SA can last. When this time has passed, the USG and remote IPSec router have to update the encryption and authentication keys and re-negotiate the IKE SA. This does not affect any existing IPSec SAs, however. Select the negotiation mode to use to negotiate the IKE SA. Choices are Main - this encrypts the USGs and remote IPSec routers identities but takes more time to establish the IKE SA Aggressive - this is faster but does not encrypt the identities Phase 1 Settings SA Life Time
(Seconds) Negotiation Mode Proposal The USG and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode. Use this section to manage the encryption algorithm and authentication algorithm pairs the USG accepts from the remote IPSec router for negotiating the IKE SA. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 350 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 137 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Add Edit Remove
#
DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific proposal. The sequence of proposals should not affect performance significantly. Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:
Encryption DES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm 3DES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm AES128 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES192 - a 192-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm AES256 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm Authentication The USG and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption algorithm. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data in the IPSec SA. Choices are SHA1, SHA256, SHA512 and MD5. SHA is generally considered stronger than MD5, but it is also slower. Key Group The remote IPSec router must use the same authentication algorithm. Select which Diffie-Hellman key group (DHx) you want to use for encryption keys. Choices are:
DH1 - use a 768-bit random number DH2 - use a 1024-bit random number DH5 - use a 1536-bit random number NAT Traversal The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group. Select this if any of these conditions are satisfied. Dead Peer Detection (DPD) This IKE SA might be used to negotiate IPSec SAs that use ESP as the active protocol. There are one or more NAT routers between the USG and remote IPSec router, and these routers do not support IPSec pass-thru or a similar feature. The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal, and the NAT routers have to forward packets with UDP port 500 and UDP 4500 headers unchanged. This field applies for IKEv1 only. NAT Traversal is always performed when you use IKEv2. Select this check box if you want the USG to make sure the remote IPSec router is there before it transmits data through the IKE SA. The remote IPSec router must support DPD. If there has been no traffic for at least 15 seconds, the USG sends a message to the remote IPSec router. If the remote IPSec router responds, the USG transmits the data. If the remote IPSec router does not respond, the USG shuts down the IKE SA. If the remote IPSec router does not support DPD, see if you can use the VPN connection connectivity check (see Section 21.2.1 on page 338). This field applies for IKEv1 only. Dead Peer Detection (DPD) is always performed when you use IKEv2. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 351 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 137 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL X Auth / Extended Authentication Protocol X-Auth DESCRIPTION This part of the screen displays X-Auth when using IKEv1 and Extended Authentication Protocol when using IKEv2. Enable Extended Authentication Server Mode Client Mode User Name Password Retype to Confirm Extended Authentication Protocol Enable Extended Authentication Server Mode Client Mode User Name Password Retype to Confirm OK Cancel This displays when using IKEv1. When different users use the same VPN tunnel to connect to the USG (telecommuters sharing a tunnel for example), use X-auth to enforce a user name and password check. This way even though telecommuters all know the VPN tunnels security settings, each still has to provide a unique user name and password. Select this if one of the routers (the USG or the remote IPSec router) verifies a user name and password from the other router using the local user database and/or an external server. Select this if the USG authenticates the user name and password from the remote IPSec router. You also have to select the authentication method, which specifies how the USG authenticates this information. Select this radio button if the USG provides a username and password to the remote IPSec router for authentication. You also have to provide the User Name and the Password. This field is required if the USG is in Client Mode for extended authentication. Type the user name the USG sends to the remote IPSec router. The user name can be 1-31 ASCII characters. It is case-sensitive, but spaces are not allowed. This field is required if the USG is in Client Mode for extended authentication. Type the password the USG sends to the remote IPSec router. The password can be 1-31 ASCII characters. It is case-sensitive, but spaces are not allowed. Type the exact same password again here to make sure an error was not made when typing it originally. This displays when using IKEv2. EAP uses a certificate for authentication. Select this if one of the routers (the USG or the remote IPSec router) verifies a user name and password from the other router using the local user database and/or an external server or a certificate. Select this if the USG authenticates the user name and password from the remote IPSec router. You also have to select an AAA method, which specifies how the USG authenticates this information and who may be authenticated (Allowed User). Select this radio button if the USG provides a username and password to the remote IPSec router for authentication. You also have to provide the User Name and the Password. This field is required if the USG is in Client Mode for extended authentication. Type the user name the USG sends to the remote IPSec router. The user name can be 1-31 ASCII characters. It is case-sensitive, but spaces are not allowed. This field is required if the USG is in Client Mode for extended authentication. Type the password the USG sends to the remote IPSec router. The password can be 1-31 ASCII characters. It is case-sensitive, but spaces are not allowed. Type the exact same password again here to make sure an error was not made when typing it originally. Click OK to save your settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 352 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN 21.4 VPN Concentrator A VPN concentrator combines several IPSec VPN connections into one secure network. Figure 229 VPN Topologies (Fully Meshed and Hub and Spoke) 1 2 In a fully-meshed VPN topology (1 in the figure), there is a VPN connection between every pair of routers. In a hub-and-spoke VPN topology (2 in the figure), there is a VPN connection between each spoke router (B, C, D, and E) and the hub router (A), which uses the VPN concentrator. The VPN concentrator routes VPN traffic between the spoke routers and itself. A VPN concentrator reduces the number of VPN connections that you have to set up and maintain in the network. You might also be able to consolidate the policy routes in each spoke router, depending on the IP addresses and subnets of each spoke. However a VPN concentrator is not for every situation. The hub router is a single failure point, so a VPN concentrator is not as appropriate if the connection between spoke routers cannot be down occasionally (maintenance, for example). There is also more burden on the hub router. It receives VPN traffic from one spoke, decrypts it, inspects it to find out to which spoke to route it, encrypts it, and sends it to the appropriate spoke. Therefore, a VPN concentrator is more suitable when there is a minimum amount of traffic between spoke routers. 21.4.1 VPN Concentrator Requirements and Suggestions Consider the following when using the VPN concentrator. The local IP addresses configured in the VPN rules should not overlap. The concentrator must have at least one separate VPN rule for each spoke. In the local policy, specify the IP addresses of the networks with which the spoke is to be able to have a VPN tunnel. This may require you to use more than one VPN rule for each spoke. To have all Internet access from the spoke routers go through the VPN tunnel, set the VPN rules in the spoke routers to use 0.0.0.0 (any) as the remote IP address. Your security policies can still block VPN packets. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 353 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN 21.4.2 VPN Concentrator Screen The VPN Concentrator summary screen displays the VPN concentrators in the USG. To access this screen, click Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Concentrator. Figure 230 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Concentrator Each field is discussed in the following table. See Section 21.4.3 on page 354 for more information. DESCRIPTION Choose to configure for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Table 138 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Concentrator LABEL IPv4/IPv6 Configuration Add Edit Remove
#
Name Group Members Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific concentrator. This field displays the name of the VPN concentrator. These are the VPN connection policies that are part of the VPN concentrator. 21.4.3 The VPN Concentrator Add/Edit Screen Use the VPN Concentrator Add/Edit screen to create or edit a VPN concentrator. To access this screen, go to the VPN Concentrator summary screen (see Section 21.4 on page 353), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 354 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Figure 231 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Concentrator > Add/Edit Each field is described in the following table. Table 139 VPN > IPSec VPN > Concentrator > Add/Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Enter the name of the concentrator. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select the concentrators IPSec VPN connection policies. Member Note: You must disable policy enforcement in each member. See Section 21.2.1 on page 338. IPSec VPN connection policies that do not belong to a VPN concentrator appear under Available. Select any VPN connection policies that you want to add to the VPN concentrator and click the right arrow button to add them. The VPN concentrators member VPN connections appear under Member. Select any VPN connections that you want to remove from the VPN concentrator, and click the left arrow button to remove them. Click OK to save your changes in the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. OK Cancel 21.5 USG IPSec VPN Client Configuration Provisioning Use the Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Configuration Provisioning screen to configure who can retrieve VPN rule settings from the USG using the USG IPSec VPN Client. In the USG IPSec VPN Client, you just need to enter the IP address of the USG to get all the VPN rule settings automatically. You do not need to manually configure all rule settings in the USG IPSec VPN client. VPN rules for the USG IPSec VPN Client have certain restrictions. They must not contain the following settings:
AH active protocol NULL encryption SHA512 authentication A subnet or range remote policy USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 355 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN The following VPN Gateway rules configured on the USG cannot be provisioned to the IPSec VPN Client:
IPv4 rules with IKEv2 version IPv4 rules with User-based PSK authentication IPv6 rules In the USG Quick Setup wizard, you can use the VPN Settings for Configuration Provisioning wizard to create a VPN rule that will not violate these restrictions. Figure 232 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Configuration Provisioning Each field is discussed in the following table. DESCRIPTION Select this for users to be able to retrieve VPN rule settings using the USG IPSec VPN client. Table 140 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Configuration Provisioning LABEL Enable Configuration Provisioning Client Authentication Method Choose how users should be authenticated. They can be authenticated using the local database on the USG or an external authentication database such as LDAP, Active Directory or RADIUS. default is a method you configured in Object > Auth Method. You may configure multiple methods there. If you choose the local database on the USG, then configure users using the Object > User/Group screen. If you choose LDAP, Active Directory or RADIUS authentication servers, then configure users on the respective server. When you add or edit a configuration provisioning entry, you are allowed to set the VPN Connection and Allowed User fields. Configuration Duplicate entries are not allowed. You cannot select the same VPN Connection and Allowed User pair in a new entry if the same pair exists in a previous entry. You can bind different rules to the same user, but the USG will only allow VPN rule setting retrieval for the first match found. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 356 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 140 Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > Configuration Provisioning (continued) LABEL Add DESCRIPTION Click Add to bind a configured VPN rule to a user or group. Only that user or group may then retrieve the specified VPN rule settings. If you click Add without selecting an entry in advance then the new entry appears as the first entry. Entry order is important as the USG searches entries in the order listed here to find a match. After a match is found, the USG stops searching. If you want to add an entry as number three for example, then first select entry 2 and click Add. To reorder an entry, use Move. Select an existing entry and click Edit to change its settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. Make sure that Enable Configuration Provisioning is also selected. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. Use Move to reorder a selected entry. Select an entry, click Move, type the number where the entry should be moved, press <ENTER>, then click Apply. This icon shows if the entry is active (yellow) or not (gray). VPN rule settings can only be retrieved when the entry is activated (and Enable Configuration Provisioning is also selected). Priority shows the order of the entry in the list. Entry order is important as the USG searches entries in the order listed here to find a match. After a match is found the USG stops searching. Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Move Status Priority VPN Connection This field shows all configured VPN rules that match the rule criteria for the USG IPSec VPN Allowed User client. Select a rule to bind to the associated user or group. Select which user or group of users is allowed to retrieve the associated VPN rule settings using the USG IPSec VPN client. A user may belong to a number of groups. If entries are configured for different groups, the USG will allow VPN rule setting retrieval based on the first match found. Apply Reset Users of type admin or limited-admin are not allowed. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 21.6 IPSec VPN Background Information Here is some more detailed IPSec VPN background information. IKE SA Overview The IKE SA provides a secure connection between the USG and remote IPSec router. It takes several steps to establish an IKE SA. The negotiation mode determines how many. There are two negotiation modes--main mode and aggressive mode. Main mode provides better security, while aggressive mode is faster. Note: Both routers must use the same negotiation mode. These modes are discussed in more detail in Negotiation Mode on page 361. Main mode is used in various examples in the rest of this section. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 357 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN The USG supports IKEv1 and IKEv2. See Section 21.1 on page 332 for more information. IP Addresses of the USG and Remote IPSec Router To set up an IKE SA, you have to specify the IP addresses of the USG and remote IPSec router. You can usually enter a static IP address or a domain name for either or both IP addresses. Sometimes, your USG might offer another alternative, such as using the IP address of a port or interface, as well. You can also specify the IP address of the remote IPSec router as 0.0.0.0. This means that the remote IPSec router can have any IP address. In this case, only the remote IPSec router can initiate an IKE SA because the USG does not know the IP address of the remote IPSec router. This is often used for telecommuters. IKE SA Proposal The IKE SA proposal is used to identify the encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and Diffie-Hellman (DH) key group that the USG and remote IPSec router use in the IKE SA. In main mode, this is done in steps 1 and 2, as illustrated next. Figure 233 IKE SA: Main Negotiation Mode, Steps 1 - 2: IKE SA Proposal One or more proposals, each one consisting of:
- encryption algorithm
- authentication algorithm
- Diffie-Hellman key group 1 2 X Y The USG sends one or more proposals to the remote IPSec router. (In some devices, you can only set up one proposal.) Each proposal consists of an encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and DH key group that the USG wants to use in the IKE SA. The remote IPSec router selects an acceptable proposal and sends the accepted proposal back to the USG. If the remote IPSec router rejects all of the proposals, the USG and remote IPSec router cannot establish an IKE SA. Note: Both routers must use the same encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and DH key group. In most USGs, you can select one of the following encryption algorithms for each proposal. The algorithms are listed in order from weakest to strongest. Data Encryption Standard (DES) is a widely used method of data encryption. It applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data. Triple DES (3DES) is a variant of DES. It iterates three times with three separate keys, effectively tripling the strength of DES. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is a newer method of data encryption that also uses a secret key. AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data. It is faster than 3DES. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 358 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Some USGs also offer stronger forms of AES that apply 192-bit or 256-bit keys to 128-bit blocks of data. In most USGs, you can select one of the following authentication algorithms for each proposal. The algorithms are listed in order from weakest to strongest. MD5 (Message Digest 5) produces a 128-bit digest to authenticate packet data. SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) produces a 160-bit digest to authenticate packet data. SHA256 (Secure Hash Algorithm) produces a 256-bit digest to authenticate packet data. SHA512 (Secure Hash Algorithm) produces a 512-bit digest to authenticate packet data. See Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Exchange on page 359 for more information about DH key groups. Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Exchange The USG and the remote IPSec router use DH public-key cryptography to establish a shared secret. The shared secret is then used to generate encryption keys for the IKE SA and IPSec SA. In main mode, this is done in steps 3 and 4, as illustrated next. Figure 234 IKE SA: Main Negotiation Mode, Steps 3 - 4: DH Key Exchange Diffie-Hellman key exchange 3 4 X Y DH public-key cryptography is based on DH key groups. Each key group is a fixed number of bits long. The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to encrypt and decrypt information. For example, DH2 keys (1024 bits) are more secure than DH1 keys (768 bits), but DH2 keys take longer to encrypt and decrypt. Authentication Before the USG and remote IPSec router establish an IKE SA, they have to verify each others identity. This process is based on pre-shared keys and router identities. In main mode, the USG and remote IPSec router authenticate each other in steps 5 and 6, as illustrated below. The identities are also encrypted using the encryption algorithm and encryption key the USG and remote IPSec router selected in previous steps. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 359 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Figure 235 IKE SA: Main Negotiation Mode, Steps 5 - 6: Authentication (continued) USG identity, consisting of Step 5:
pre-shared key
- ID type
- content Step 6:
pre-shared key
- ID type
- content Remote IPSec router identity, consisting of 5 6 X Y You have to create (and distribute) a pre-shared key. The USG and remote IPSec router use it in the authentication process, though it is not actually transmitted or exchanged. Note: The USG and the remote IPSec router must use the same pre-shared key. Router identity consists of ID type and content. The ID type can be domain name, IP address, or e-
mail address, and the content is a (properly-formatted) domain name, IP address, or e-mail address. The content is only used for identification. Any domain name or e-mail address that you enter does not have to actually exist. Similarly, any domain name or IP address that you enter does not have to correspond to the USGs or remote IPSec routers properties. The USG and the remote IPSec router have their own identities, so both of them must store two sets of information, one for themselves and one for the other router. Local ID type and content refers to the ID type and content that applies to the router itself, and peer ID type and content refers to the ID type and content that applies to the other router. Note: The USGs local and peer ID type and content must match the remote IPSec routers peer and local ID type and content, respectively. For example, in Table 141 on page 360, the USG and the remote IPSec router authenticate each other successfully. In contrast, in Table 142 on page 361, the USG and the remote IPSec router cannot authenticate each other and, therefore, cannot establish an IKE SA. Table 141 VPN Example: Matching ID Type and Content USG Local ID type: E-mail Local ID content: tom@yourcompany.com Peer ID type: IP Peer ID content: 1.1.1.2 REMOTE IPSEC ROUTER Local ID type: IP Local ID content: 1.1.1.2 Peer ID type: E-mail Peer ID content: tom@yourcompany.com USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 360 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Table 142 VPN Example: Mismatching ID Type and Content USG Local ID type: E-mail Local ID content: tom@yourcompany.com Peer ID type: IP Peer ID content: 1.1.1.20 REMOTE IPSEC ROUTER Local ID type: IP Local ID content: 1.1.1.2 Peer ID type: E-mail Peer ID content: tom@yourcompany.com It is also possible to configure the USG to ignore the identity of the remote IPSec router. In this case, you usually set the peer ID type to Any. This is less secure, so you should only use this if your USG provides another way to check the identity of the remote IPSec router (for example, extended authentication) or if you are troubleshooting a VPN tunnel. Additional Topics for IKE SA This section provides more information about IKE SA. Negotiation Mode There are two negotiation modes--main mode and aggressive mode. Main mode provides better security, while aggressive mode is faster. Main mode takes six steps to establish an IKE SA. Steps 1 - 2: The USG sends its proposals to the remote IPSec router. The remote IPSec router selects an acceptable proposal and sends it back to the USG. Steps 3 - 4: The USG and the remote IPSec router exchange pre-shared keys for authentication and participate in a Diffie-Hellman key exchange, based on the accepted DH key group, to establish a shared secret. Steps 5 - 6: Finally, the USG and the remote IPSec router generate an encryption key (from the shared secret), encrypt their identities, and exchange their encrypted identity information for authentication. In contrast, aggressive mode only takes three steps to establish an IKE SA. Aggressive mode does not provide as much security because the identity of the USG and the identity of the remote IPSec router are not encrypted. It is usually used in remote-access situations, where the address of the initiator is not known by the responder and both parties want to use pre-shared keys for authentication. For example, the remote IPSec router may be a telecommuter who does not have a static IP address. VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal In the following example, there is another router (A) between router X and router Y. Figure 236 VPN/NAT Example If router A does NAT, it might change the IP addresses, port numbers, or both. If router X and router Y try to establish a VPN tunnel, the authentication fails because it depends on this information. The routers cannot establish a VPN tunnel. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 361 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN X A Y Most routers like router A now have an IPSec pass-thru feature. This feature helps router A recognize VPN packets and route them appropriately. If router A has this feature, router X and router Y can establish a VPN tunnel as long as the active protocol is ESP. (See Active Protocol on page 363 for more information about active protocols.) If router A does not have an IPSec pass-thru or if the active protocol is AH, you can solve this problem by enabling NAT traversal. In NAT traversal, router X and router Y add an extra header to the IKE SA and IPSec SA packets. If you configure router A to forward these packets unchanged, router X and router Y can establish a VPN tunnel. You have to do the following things to set up NAT traversal. Enable NAT traversal on the USG and remote IPSec router. Configure the NAT router to forward packets with the extra header unchanged. (See the field description for detailed information about the extra header.) The extra header may be UDP port 500 or UDP port 4500, depending on the standard(s) the USG and remote IPSec router support. X-Auth / Extended Authentication X-Auth / Extended authentication is often used when multiple IPSec routers use the same VPN tunnel to connect to a single IPSec router. For example, this might be used with telecommuters. In extended authentication, one of the routers (the USG or the remote IPSec router) provides a user name and password to the other router, which uses a local user database and/or an external server to verify the user name and password. If the user name or password is wrong, the routers do not establish an IKE SA. You can set up the USG to provide a user name and password to the remote IPSec router, or you can set up the USG to check a user name and password that is provided by the remote IPSec router. If you use extended authentication, it takes four more steps to establish an IKE SA. These steps occur at the end, regardless of the negotiation mode (steps 7-10 in main mode, steps 4-7 in aggressive mode). Certificates It is possible for the USG and remote IPSec router to authenticate each other with certificates. In this case, you do not have to set up the pre-shared key, local identity, or remote identity because the certificates provide this information instead. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 362 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Instead of using the pre-shared key, the USG and remote IPSec router check the signatures on each others certificates. Unlike pre-shared keys, the signatures do not have to match. The local and peer ID type and content come from the certificates. Note: You must set up the certificates for the USG and remote IPSec router first. IPSec SA Overview Once the USG and remote IPSec router have established the IKE SA, they can securely negotiate an IPSec SA through which to send data between computers on the networks. Note: The IPSec SA stays connected even if the underlying IKE SA is not available anymore. This section introduces the key components of an IPSec SA. Local Network and Remote Network In an IPSec SA, the local network, the one(s) connected to the USG, may be called the local policy. Similarly, the remote network, the one(s) connected to the remote IPSec router, may be called the remote policy. Active Protocol The active protocol controls the format of each packet. It also specifies how much of each packet is protected by the encryption and authentication algorithms. IPSec VPN includes two active protocols, AH (Authentication Header, RFC 2402) and ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload, RFC 2406). Note: The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same active protocol. Usually, you should select ESP. AH does not support encryption, and ESP is more suitable with NAT. Encapsulation There are two ways to encapsulate packets. Usually, you should use tunnel mode because it is more secure. Transport mode is only used when the IPSec SA is used for communication between the USG and remote IPSec router (for example, for remote management), not between computers on the local and remote networks. Note: The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same encapsulation. These modes are illustrated below. Figure 237 VPN: Transport and Tunnel Mode Encapsulation Original Packet IP Header TCP Header Data Transport Mode Packet IP Header AH/ESP Header TCP Header Data USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 363 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Figure 237 VPN: Transport and Tunnel Mode Encapsulation Tunnel Mode Packet IP Header AH/ESP Header IP Header TCP Header Data In tunnel mode, the USG uses the active protocol to encapsulate the entire IP packet. As a result, there are two IP headers:
Outside header: The outside IP header contains the IP address of the USG or remote IPSec router, whichever is the destination. Inside header: The inside IP header contains the IP address of the computer behind the USG or remote IPSec router. The header for the active protocol (AH or ESP) appears between the IP headers. In transport mode, the encapsulation depends on the active protocol. With AH, the USG includes part of the original IP header when it encapsulates the packet. With ESP, however, the USG does not include the IP header when it encapsulates the packet, so it is not possible to verify the integrity of the source IP address. IPSec SA Proposal and Perfect Forward Secrecy An IPSec SA proposal is similar to an IKE SA proposal (see IKE SA Proposal on page 358), except that you also have the choice whether or not the USG and remote IPSec router perform a new DH key exchange every time an IPSec SA is established. This is called Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS). If you enable PFS, the USG and remote IPSec router perform a DH key exchange every time an IPSec SA is established, changing the root key from which encryption keys are generated. As a result, if one encryption key is compromised, other encryption keys remain secure. If you do not enable PFS, the USG and remote IPSec router use the same root key that was generated when the IKE SA was established to generate encryption keys. The DH key exchange is time-consuming and may be unnecessary for data that does not require such security. PFS is ignored in initial IKEv2 authentication but is used when reauthenticating. Additional Topics for IPSec SA This section provides more information about IPSec SA in your USG. Authentication and the Security Parameter Index (SPI) For authentication, the USG and remote IPSec router use the SPI, instead of pre-shared keys, ID type and content. The SPI is an identification number. Note: The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI. NAT for Inbound and Outbound Traffic The USG can translate the following types of network addresses in IPSec SA. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 364 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Source address in outbound packets - this translation is necessary if you want the USG to route packets from computers outside the local network through the IPSec SA. Source address in inbound packets - this translation hides the source address of computers in the remote network. Destination address in inbound packets - this translation is used if you want to forward packets
(for example, mail) from the remote network to a specific computer (like the mail server) in the local network. Each kind of translation is explained below. The following example is used to help explain each one. Figure 238 VPN Example: NAT for Inbound and Outbound Traffic Source Address in Outbound Packets (Outbound Traffic, Source NAT) This translation lets the USG route packets from computers that are not part of the specified local network (local policy) through the IPSec SA. For example, in Figure 238 on page 365, you have to configure this kind of translation if you want computer M to establish a connection with any computer in the remote network (B). If you do not configure it, the remote IPSec router may not route messages for computer M through the IPSec SA because computer Ms IP address is not part of its local policy. To set up this NAT, you have to specify the following information:
Source - the original source address; most likely, computer Ms network. Destination - the original destination address; the remote network (B). SNAT - the translated source address; the local network (A). Source Address in Inbound Packets (Inbound Traffic, Source NAT) You can set up this translation if you want to change the source address of computers in the remote network. To set up this NAT, you have to specify the following information:
Source - the original source address; the remote network (B). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 365 Chapter 21 IPSec VPN Destination - the original destination address; the local network (A). SNAT - the translated source address; a different IP address (range of addresses) to hide the original source address. Destination Address in Inbound Packets (Inbound Traffic, Destination NAT) You can set up this translation if you want the USG to forward some packets from the remote network to a specific computer in the local network. For example, in Figure 238 on page 365, you can configure this kind of translation if you want to forward mail from the remote network to the mail server in the local network (A). You have to specify one or more rules when you set up this kind of NAT. The USG checks these rules similar to the way it checks rules for a security policy. The first part of these rules define the conditions in which the rule apply. Original IP - the original destination address; the remote network (B). Protocol - the protocol [TCP, UDP, or both] used by the service requesting the connection. Original Port - the original destination port or range of destination ports; in Figure 238 on page 365, it might be port 25 for SMTP. The second part of these rules controls the translation when the condition is satisfied. Mapped IP - the translated destination address; in Figure 238 on page 365, the IP address of the mail server in the local network (A). Mapped Port - the translated destination port or range of destination ports. The original port range and the mapped port range must be the same size. IPSec VPN Example Scenario Here is an example site-to-site IPSec VPN scenario. Figure 239 Site-to-site IPSec VPN Example LAN LAN 1.2.3.4 2.2.2.2 192.168.1.0/24 172.16.1.0/24 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 366 CHAPTER 22 SSL VPN 22.1 Overview Use SSL VPN to allow users to use a web browser for secure remote user login. The remote users do not need a VPN router or VPN client software. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the VPN > SSL VPN > Access Privilege screens (see Section 22.2 on page 368) to configure SSL access policies. Use the Click VPN > SSL VPN > Global Setting screen (see Section 22.3 on page 372) to set the IP address of the USG (or a gateway device) on your network for full tunnel mode access, enter access messages or upload a custom logo to be displayed on the remote user screen. Use the VPN > SSL VPN > SecuExtender screen ( see Section 22.4 on page 374) to update and check the current and latest version of the Security Extender. 22.1.2 What You Need to Know Full Tunnel Mode In full tunnel mode, a virtual connection is created for remote users with private IP addresses in the same subnet as the local network. This allows them to access network resources in the same way as if they were part of the internal network. Figure 240 Network Access Mode: Full Tunnel Mode SSL Access Policy An SSL access policy allows the USG to perform the following tasks:
limit user access to specific applications or file sharing server on the network. allow user access to specific networks. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 367 Chapter 22 SSL VPN assign private IP addresses and provide DNS/WINS server information to remote users to access internal networks. SSL Access Policy Objects The SSL access policies reference the following objects. If you update this information, in response to changes, the USG automatically propagates the changes through the SSL policies that use the object(s). When you delete an SSL policy, the objects are not removed. Table 143 Objects OBJECT TYPE OBJECT SCREEN User Account/
User Group SSL Application User Accounts Application IP Pool Address Server Addresses VPN Network Address Address DESCRIPTION Configure a user account or user group to which you want to apply this SSL access policy. Configure an SSL application object to specify the type of application and the address of the local computer, server, or web site SSL users are to be able to access. Configure an address object that defines a range of private IP addresses to assign to user computers so they can access the internal network through a VPN connection. Configure address objects for the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers that the USG sends to the VPN connection users. Configure an address object to specify which network segment users are allowed to access through a VPN connection. You cannot delete an object that is referenced by an SSL access policy. To delete the object, you must first unassociate the object from the SSL access policy. 22.2 The SSL Access Privilege Screen Click VPN > SSL VPN to open the Access Privilege screen. This screen lists the configured SSL access policies. Click on the icons to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting and other information. Figure 241 VPN > SSL VPN > Access Privilege USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 368 Chapter 22 SSL VPN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 144 VPN > SSL VPN > Access Privilege LABEL Access Policy Summary DESCRIPTION This screen shows a summary of SSL VPN policies created. Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Move Object References
#
Status Name User/Group Click on the VPN icon to go to the ZyXEL VPN Client product page at the ZyXEL website. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To move an entry to a different number in the list, click the Move icon. In the field that appears, specify the number to which you want to move the interface. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. Click Refresh to update information on this screen. This field displays the index number of the entry. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field displays the descriptive name of the SSL access policy for identification purposes. This field displays the user account or user group name(s) associated to an SSL access policy. Access Policy Summary Apply Reset This field displays up to three names. This field displays details about the SSL application object this policy uses including its name, type, and address. Click Apply to save the settings. Click Reset to discard all changes. 22.2.1 The SSL Access Privilege Policy Add/Edit Screen To create a new or edit an existing SSL access policy, click the Add or Edit icon in the Access Privilege screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 369 Chapter 22 SSL VPN Figure 242 VPN > SSL VPN > Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 145 VPN > SSL VPN > Access Privilege > Add/Edit LABEL Create new Object Configuration Enable Policy Select this option to activate this SSL access policy. DESCRIPTION Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 370 Chapter 22 SSL VPN Table 145 VPN > SSL VPN > Access Privilege > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name to identify this policy. You can enter up to 31 characters (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) with no spaces allowed. Select the zone to which to add this SSL access policy. You use zones to apply security settings such as security policy and remote management. Enter additional information about this SSL access policy. You can enter up to 60 characters ("0-9", "a-z", "A-Z", "-" and "_"). The Selectable User/Group Objects list displays the name(s) of the user account and/
or user group(s) to which you have not applied an SSL access policy yet. Zone Description User/Group To associate a user or user group to this SSL access policy, select a user account or user group and click the right arrow button to add to the Selected User/Group Objects list. You can select more than one name. To remove a user or user group, select the name(s) in the Selected User/Group Objects list and click the left arrow button. Note: Although you can select admin and limited-admin accounts in this screen, they are reserved for device configuration only. You cannot use them to access the SSL VPN portal. SSL Application List (Optional) The Selectable Application Objects list displays the name(s) of the SSL application(s) you can select for this SSL access policy. To associate an SSL application to this SSL access policy, select a name and click the right arrow button to add to the Selected Application Objects list. You can select more than one application. To remove an SSL application, select the name(s) in the Selected Application Objects list and click the left arrow button. Note: To allow access to shared files on a Windows 7 computer, within Windows 7 you must enable sharing on the folder and also go to the Network and Sharing Centers Advanced sharing settings and turn on the current network profiles file and printer sharing. Network Extension (Optional) Enable Network Extension Select this option to create a VPN tunnel between the authenticated users and the internal network. This allows the users to access the resources on the network as if they were on the same local network. This includes access to resources not supported by SSL application objects. For example this lets users Telnet to the internal network even though the USG does not have SSL application objects for Telnet. Force all client traffic to SSL VPN tunnel NetBIOS broadcast over SSL VPN Tunnel Assign IP Pool DNS/WINS Server 1..2 Clear this option to disable this feature. Users can only access the applications as defined by the VPN tunnels selected SSL application settings and the remote user computers are not made to be a part of the local network. Select this to send all traffic from the SSL VPN clients through the SSL VPN tunnel. This replaces the default gateway of the SSL VPN clients with the SSL VPN gateway. Select this to search for a remote computer and access its applications as if it was in a Local Area Network. The user can find a computer not only by its IP adress but also by computer name. Define a separate pool of IP addresses to assign to the SSL users. Select it here. The SSL VPN IP pool should not overlap with IP addresses on the USG's local networks
(LAN and DMZ for example), the SSL user's network, or the networks you specify in the SSL VPN Network List. Select the name of the DNS or WINS server whose information the USG sends to the remote users. This allows them to access devices on the local network using domain names instead of IP addresses. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 371 Chapter 22 SSL VPN Table 145 VPN > SSL VPN > Access Privilege > Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Network List DESCRIPTION To allow user access to local network(s), select a network name in the Selectable Address Objects list and click the right arrow button to add to the Selected Address Objects list. You can select more than one network. OK Cancel To block access to a network, select the network name in the Selected Address Objects list and click the left arrow button. Click OK to save the changes and return to the main Access Privilege screen. Click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the main Access Privilege screen. 22.3 The SSL Global Setting Screen Click VPN > SSL VPN and click the Global Setting tab to display the following screen. Use this screen to set the IP address of the USG (or a gateway device) on your network for full tunnel mode access, enter access messages or upload a custom logo to be displayed on the remote user screen. Figure 243 VPN > SSL VPN > Global Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 146 VPN > SSL VPN > Global Setting LABEL Global Setting Network Extension Local IP Specify the IP address of the USG (or a gateway device) for full tunnel mode SSL VPN access. Leave this field to the default settings unless it conflicts with another interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 372 Chapter 22 SSL VPN DESCRIPTION Table 146 VPN > SSL VPN > Global Setting (continued) LABEL SSL VPN Login Domain Name SSL VPN Login Domain Name 1/
2 Specify a full domain name for users to use for SSL VPN login. The domain name must be registered to one of the USGs IP addresses or be one of the USGs DDNS entries. You can specify up to two domain names so you could use one domain name for each of two WAN ports. For example, www.zyxel.com is a fully qualified domain name where www is the host. Message Login Message Logout Message Update Client Virtual Desktop Logo Browse Upload Reset Logo to Default Apply Reset The USG displays the normal login screen without the button for logging into the Web Configurator. Specify a message to display on the screen when a user logs in and an SSL VPN connection is established successfully. You can enter up to 60 characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z,
'()+,/:=?;!*#@$_%-") with spaces allowed. Specify a message to display on the screen when a user logs out and the SSL VPN connection is terminated successfully. You can enter up to 60 characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z,
'()+,/:=?;!*#@$_%-") with spaces allowed. You can upload a graphic logo to be displayed on the web browser on the remote user computer. The ZyXEL company logo is the default logo. Specify the location and file name of the logo graphic or click Browse to locate it. Note: The logo graphic must be GIF, JPG, or PNG format. The graphic should use a resolution of 103 x 29 pixels to avoid distortion when displayed. The USG automatically resizes a graphic of a different resolution to 103 x 29 pixels. The file size must be 100 kilobytes or less. Transparent background is recommended. Click Browse to locate the graphic file on your computer. Click Upload to transfer the specified graphic file from your computer to the USG. Click Reset Logo to Default to display the ZyXEL company logo on the remote users web browser. Click Apply to save the changes and/or start the logo file upload process. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 22.3.1 How to Upload a Custom Logo 1 2 3 4 Follow the steps below to upload a custom logo to display on the remote user SSL VPN screens. Click VPN > SSL VPN and click the Global Setting tab to display the configuration screen. Click Browse to locate the logo graphic. Make sure the file is in GIF, JPG, or PNG format. Click Apply to start the file transfer process. Log in as a user to verify that the new logo displays properly. The following shows an example logo on the remote user screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 373 Chapter 22 SSL VPN Figure 244 Example Logo Graphic Display 22.4 USG SecuExtender The USG automatically loads the USG SecuExtender client program to your computer after a successful login to an SSL VPN tunnel with network extension support enabled. The USG SecuExtender lets you:
Access servers, remote desktops and manage files as if you were on the local network. Use applications like e-mail, file transfer, and remote desktop programs directly without using a browser. For example, you can use Outlook for e-mail instead of the USGs web-based e-mail. Use applications, even proprietary applications, for which the USG does not offer SSL application objects. The applications must be installed on your computer. For example, to use the VNC remote desktop program, you must have the VNC client installed on your computer. Please refer to the SecuExtender chapter for details. Figure 245 Configuration > VPN > SSL VPN > SecuExtender. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 374 Chapter 22 SSL VPN The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 147 Configuration > VPN > SSL VPN > SecuExtender LABEL Latest Version Current Version Note:
Update Now DESCRIPTION This displays the latest version of the USG Security SecuExtender that is available. This displays the current version of SecuExtender that is installed in the USG. You need to register first at portal.myzyxel.com to download the latest version of SecuExtender. The USG periodically checks if theres a later version of SecuExtender at the portal. The Update Now button is enabled when thre is.Click Update Now to get the latest version of SecuExtender. 22.4.1 Example: Configure USG for SecuExtender Make these configurations on the USG to allow the remote user to access resources behind the USG using SecuExtender. These steps can be performed in any order. 1 Create a user that can log into the USG. Using the USG web configurator, go to Configuration >
Object > User > Add and substitute your information for the information shown in the following example. Figure 246 Create a User 2 Next create an SSL VPN Access Privilege policy substituting your information for the information shown in the following example. Using the USG web configurator, go to Configuration > VPN >
SSL VPN > Access Privilege > Add. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 375 Chapter 22 SSL VPN Figure 247 Create an SSL VPN Access Privilege Policy 3 Then create File Sharing and Web Application SSL Application objects. Using the USG web configurator, go to Configuration > Object > SSL Application > Add and select the Type accordingly. Substitute your information for the information shown in the following example. Figure 248 Create a File Sharing SSL Application Object USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 376 Chapter 22 SSL VPN Create a Web Application SSL Application Object USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 377 CHAPTER 23 SSL User Screens 23.1 Overview This chapter introduces the remote user SSL VPN screens. The following figure shows a network example where a remote user (A) logs into the USG from the Internet to access the web server
(WWW) on the local network. Figure 249 Network Example WWW 23.1.1 What You Need to Know Internet A The USG can use SSL VPN to provide secure connections to network resources such as applications, files, intranet sites or e-mail through a web-based interface and using Microsoft Outlook Web Access (OWA). Network Resource Access Methods As a remote user, you can access resources on the local network using one of the following methods. Using a supported web browser Once you have successfully logged in through the USG, you can access intranet sites, web-based applications, or web-based e-mails using one of the supported web browsers. Using the USG SecuExtender client Once you have successfully logged into the USG, if the SSL VPN access policy has network extension enabled the USG automatically loads the USG SecuExtender client program to your computer. With the USG SecuExtender, you can access network resources, remote desktops and manage files as if you were on the local network. See Chapter 24 on page 391 for more on the USG SecuExtender. System Requirements Here are the browser and computer system requirements for remote user access. Windows 7 (32 or 64-bit), Vista (32 or 64-bit), 2003 (32-bit), XP (32-bit), or 2000 (32-bit) Internet Explorer 7 and above or Firefox 1.5 and above USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 378 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Using RDP requires Internet Explorer Suns Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.6 or later installed and enabled. Required Information A remote user needs the following information from the network administrator to log in and access network resources. the domain name or IP address of the USG the login account user name and password if also required, the user name and/or password to access the network resource Certificates The remote users computer establishes an HTTPS connection to the USG to access the login screen. If instructed by your network administrator, you must install or import a certificate
(provided by the USG or your network administrator). Finding Out More See Chapter 22 on page 367 for how to configure SSL VPN on the USG. 23.2 Remote SSL User Login This section shows you how to access and log into the network through the USG. Example screens for Internet Explorer are shown. 1 Open a web browser and enter the web site address or IP address of the USG. For example, http:/
/sslvpn.mycompany.com. Figure 250 Enter the Address in a Web Browser 2 Click OK or Yes if a security screen displays. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 379 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Figure 251 Login Security Screen 3 A login screen displays. Enter the user name and password of your login account. If a token password is also required, enter it in the One-Time Password field. Click SSL VPN to log in and establish an SSL VPN connection to the network to access network resources. Figure 252 Login Screen 4 Your computer starts establishing a secure connection to the USG after a successful login. This may take up to two minutes. If you get a message about needing Java, download and install it and restart your browser and re-login. If a certificate warning screen displays, click OK, Yes or Continue. Figure 253 Java Needed Message 5 The USG tries to install the SecuExtender client. As shown next, you may have to click some pop-
ups to get your browser to allow the installation. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 380 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Figure 254 ActiveX Object Installation Blocked by Browser Figure 255 SecuExtender Blocked by Internet Explorer 6 The USG tries to run the ssltun application. You may need to click something to get your browser to allow this. In Internet Explorer, click Run. Figure 256 SecuExtender Progress 7 Click Next to use the setup wizard to install the SecuExtender client on your computer. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 381 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Figure 257 SecuExtender Progress 8 If a screen like the following displays, click Continue Anyway to finish installing the SecuExtender client on your computer. Figure 258 Installation Warning 9 The Application screen displays showing the list of resources available to you. See Figure 259 on page 383 for a screen example. Note: Available resource links vary depending on the configuration your network administrator made. 23.3 The SSL VPN User Screens This section describes the main elements in the remote user screens. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 382 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Figure 259 Remote User Screen 1 2 3 4 5 6 The following table describes the various parts of a remote user screen. Table 148 Remote User Screen Overview
#
1 2 3 4 5 6 DESCRIPTION Click on a menu tab to go to the Application or File Sharing screen. Click this icon to log out and terminate the secure connection. Click this icon to create a bookmark to the SSL VPN user screen in your web browser. Click this icon to display the on-line help window. Select your preferred language for the interface. This part of the screen displays a list of the resources available to you. In the Application screen, click on a link to access or display the access method. In the File Sharing screen, click on a link to open a file or directory. 23.4 Bookmarking the USG You can create a bookmark of the USG by clicking the Add to Favorite icon. This allows you to access the USG using the bookmark without having to enter the address every time. 1 2 In any remote user screen, click the Add to Favorite icon. A screen displays. Accept the default name in the Name field or enter a descriptive name to identify this link. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 383 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens 3 Click OK to create a bookmark in your web browser. Figure 260 Add Favorite 23.5 Logging Out of the SSL VPN User Screens To properly terminate a connection, click on the Logout icon in any remote user screen. 1 2 Click the Logout icon in any remote user screen. A prompt window displays. Click OK to continue. Figure 261 Logout: Prompt 23.6 SSL User Application Screen Use the Application tabs screen to access web-based applications (such as web sites and e-mail) on the network through the SSL VPN connection. Which applications you can access depends on the USGs configuration. The Name field displays the descriptive name for an application. The Type field displays wether the application is a web site (Web Server) or web-based e-mail using Microsoft Outlook Web Access
(OWA). To access a web-based application, simply click a link in the Application screen to display the web screen in a separate browser window. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 384 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Figure 262 Application 23.7 SSL User File Sharing The File Sharing screen lets you access files on a file server through the SSL VPN connection. Use it to display and access shared files/folders on a file server. You can also perform the following actions:
Access a folder. Open a file (if your web browser cannot open the file, you are prompted to download it). Save a file to your computer. Create a new folder. Rename a file or folder. Delete a file or folder. Upload a file. Note: Available actions you can perform in the File Sharing screen vary depending on the rights granted to you on the file server. 23.7.1 The Main File Sharing Screen The first File Sharing screen displays the name(s) of the shared folder(s) available. The following figure shows an example with one file share. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 385 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Figure 263 File Sharing 23.7.2 Opening a File or Folder You can open a file if the file extension is recognized by the web browser and the associated application is installed on your computer. 1 2 3 Log in as a remote user and click the File Sharing tab. Click on a file share icon. If an access user name and password are required, a screen displays as shown in the following figure. Enter the account information and click Login to continue. Figure 264 File Sharing: Enter Access User Name and Password USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 386 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens 4 A list of files/folders displays. Double click a file to open it in a separate browser window or select a file and click Download to save it to your computer. You can also click a folder to access it. For this example, click on a .doc file to open the Word document. Figure 265 File Sharing: Open a Word File 23.7.3 Downloading a File You are prompted to download a file which cannot be opened using a web browser. Follow the on-screen instructions to download and save the file to your computer. Then launch the associated application to open the file. 23.7.4 Saving a File After you have opened a file in a web browser, you can save a copy of the file by clicking File >
Save As and following the on-screen instructions. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 387 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Figure 266 File Sharing: Save a Word File 23.7.5 Creating a New Folder To create a new folder in the file share location, click the New Folder icon. Specify a descriptive name for the folder. You can enter up to 356 characters. Then click Add. Note: Make sure the length of the folder name does not exceed the maximum allowed on the file server. Figure 267 File Sharing: Create a New Folder 23.7.6 Renaming a File or Folder To rename a file or folder, select a file or folder and click the Rename icon. Figure 268 File Sharing: Rename USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 388 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens A popup window displays. Specify the new name and/or file extension in the field provided. You can enter up to 356 characters. Then click Apply. Note: Make sure the length of the name does not exceed the maximum allowed on the file server. You may not be able to open a file if you change the file extension. Figure 269 File Sharing: Rename 23.7.7 Deleting a File or Folder Click the Delete icon next to a file or folder to remove it. 23.7.8 Uploading a File 1 2 3 4 Follow the steps below to upload a file to the file server. Log into the remote user screen and click the File Sharing tab. Click Upload and specify the location and/or name of the file you want to upload. Or click Browse to locate it. Click OK to send the file to the file server. After the file is uploaded successfully, you should see the name of the file and a message in the screen. Figure 270 File Sharing: File Upload USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 389 Chapter 23 SSL User Screens Note: Uploading a file with the same name and file extension replaces the existing file on the file server. No warning message is displayed. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 390
1 2 | Users Manual Part 4 | Users Manual | 3.29 MiB |
CHAPTER 24 USG SecuExtender (Windows) The USG automatically loads the USG SecuExtender for Windows client program to your computer after a successful login to an SSL VPN tunnel with network extension support enabled. Note: For information on using the USG SecuExtender for Mac client program, please see its Users Guide at the download library on the ZyXEL website. The USG SecuExtender (Windows) lets you:
Access servers, remote desktops and manage files as if you were on the local network. Use applications like e-mail, file transfer, and remote desktop programs directly without using a browser. For example, you can use Outlook for e-mail instead of the USGs web-based e-mail. Use applications, even proprietary applications, for which the USG does not offer SSL application objects. The applications must be installed on your computer. For example, to use the VNC remote desktop program, you must have the VNC client installed on your computer. 24.1 The USG SecuExtender Icon The USG SecuExtender icon color indicates the SSL VPN tunnels connection status. Figure 271 USG SecuExtender Icon Green: the SSL VPN tunnel is connected. You can connect to the SSL application and network resources. You can also use another application to access resources behind the USG. Gray: the SSL VPN tunnels connection is suspended. This means the SSL VPN tunnel is connected, but the USG SecuExtender will not send any traffic through it until you right-click the icon and resume the connection. Red: the SSL VPN tunnel is not connected. You cannot connect to the SSL application and network resources. 24.2 Status Right-click the USG SecuExtender icon in the system tray and select Status to open the Status screen. Use this screen to view the USG SecuExtenders connection status and activity statistics. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 391 Chapter 24 USG SecuExtender (Windows) Figure 272 USG SecuExtender Status The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 149 USG SecuExtender Status LABEL Connection Status SecuExtender IP Address DNS Server 1/2 This is the IP address the USG assigned to this remote user computer for an SSL VPN connection. These are the IP addresses of the DNS server and backup DNS server for the SSL VPN connection. DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. Your computer uses the DNS server specified here to resolve domain names for resources you access through the SSL VPN connection. These are the IP addresses of the WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) and backup WINS servers for the SSL VPN connection. The WINS server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using. These are the networks (including netmask) that you can access through the SSL VPN connection. This is how long the computer has been connected to the SSL VPN tunnel. This is how many bytes and packets the computer has sent through the SSL VPN connection. This is how many bytes and packets the computer has received through the SSL VPN connection. WINS Server 1/2 Network 1~8 Activity Connected Time Transmitted Received 24.3 View Log If you have problems with the USG SecuExtender, customer support may request you to provide information from the log. Right-click the USG SecuExtender icon in the system tray and select Log to open a notepad file of the USG SecuExtenders log. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 392 Chapter 24 USG SecuExtender (Windows) Figure 273 USG SecuExtender Log Example
##################################################################################
##############
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] Build Datetime: Feb 24 2009/
10:25:07
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DEBUG] rasphone.pbk: C:\Documents and Settings\11746\rasphone.pbk
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DEBUG] SecuExtender.log:
C:\Documents and Settings\11746\SecuExtender.log
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] Check Parameters
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] Connect to 172.23.31.19:443/
10444
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] Parameter is OK
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] Checking System status...
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] Checking service (first) ...
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] SecuExtender Helper is running
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] System is OK
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DEBUG] Connect to 2887196435/443
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] Handshake LoopCounter: 0
[ 2009/03/12 13:35:50 ][SecuExtender Agent][DETAIL] 611 bytes of handshake data received 24.4 Suspend and Resume the Connection When the USG SecuExtender icon in the system tray is green, you can right-click the icon and select Suspend Connection to keep the SSL VPN tunnel connected but not send any traffic through it until you right-click the icon and resume the connection. 24.5 Stop the Connection Right-click the icon and select Stop Connection to disconnect the SSL VPN tunnel. 24.6 Uninstalling the USG SecuExtender Do the following if you need to remove the USG SecuExtender. 1 2 Click start > All Programs > ZyXEL > USG SecuExtender > Uninstall ZyWALL SecuExtender. In the confirmation screen, click Yes. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 393 Chapter 24 USG SecuExtender (Windows) Figure 274 Uninstalling the USG SecuExtender Confirmation 3 Windows uninstalls the USG SecuExtender. Figure 275 USG SecuExtender Uninstallation USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 394 CHAPTER 25 L2TP VPN 25.1 Overview L2TP VPN uses the L2TP and IPSec client software included in remote users Android, iOS, Windows or Mac OS X operating systems for secure connections to the network behind the USG. The remote users do not need their own IPSec gateways or third-party VPN client software. Figure 276 L2TP VPN Overview 25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the L2TP VPN screen (see Section 25.2 on page 396) to configure the USGs L2TP VPN settings. Use the VPN Setup Wizard screen in Quick Setup (Chapter 4 on page 49) to configure the USGs L2TP VPN settings. 25.1.2 What You Need to Know The Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) works at layer 2 (the data link layer) to tunnel network traffic between two peers over another network (like the Internet). In L2TP VPN, an IPSec VPN tunnel is established first and then an L2TP tunnel is built inside it. See Chapter 21 on page 332 for information on IPSec VPN. IPSec Configuration Required for L2TP VPN You must configure an IPSec VPN connection prior to proper L2TP VPN usage (see Chapter 25 on page 395 for details). The IPSec VPN connection must:
Be enabled. Use transport mode. Use Pre-Shared Key authentication. Use a VPN gateway with the Secure Gateway set to 0.0.0.0 if you need to allow L2TP VPN clients to connect from more than one IP address. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 395 Chapter 25 L2TP VPN Using the Quick Setup VPN Setup Wizard The VPN Setup Wizard is an easy and convenient way to configure the L2TP VPN settings. Click Configuration > Quick Setup > VPN Setup > VPN Settings for L2TP VPN Settings to get started. Policy Route The Policy Route for return traffic (from LAN to L2TP clients) is automatically created when USG adds a new L2TP connection, allowing users access the resources on a network without additional configuration. However, if some of the traffic from the L2TP clients needs to go to the Internet, you will need to create a policy route to send that traffic from the L2TP tunnels out through a WAN trunk. This task can be easily performed by clicking the Allow L2TP traffic through WAN checkbox at Quick Setup > VPN Setup > Allow L2TP traffic through WAN. Figure 277 Policy Route for L2TP VPN LAN_SUBNET 25.2 L2TP VPN Screen L2TP_POOL Click Configuration > VPN > L2TP VPN to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure the USGs L2TP VPN settings. Note: Disconnect any existing L2TP VPN sessions before modifying L2TP VPN settings. The remote users must make any needed matching configuration changes and re-
establish the sessions using the new settings. Click on the icons to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting, and other information. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 396 Chapter 25 L2TP VPN Figure 278 Configuration > VPN > L2TP VPN The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Table 150 Configuration > VPN > L2TP VPN LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Create new Object Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Enable L2TP Over IPSec VPN Connection Use this field to turn the USGs L2TP VPN function on or off. Select the IPSec VPN connection the USG uses for L2TP VPN. All of the configured VPN connections display here, but the one you use must meet the requirements listed in IPSec Configuration Required for L2TP VPN on page 395. Note: Modifying this VPN connection (or the VPN gateway that it uses) disconnects any existing L2TP VPN sessions. IP Address Pool Select the pool of IP addresses that the USG uses to assign to the L2TP VPN clients. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new pool of IP addresses. Authentication Method Authentication Server Certificate This should not conflict with any WAN, LAN, DMZ or WLAN subnet even if they are not in use. Select how the USG authenticates a remote user before allowing access to the L2TP VPN tunnel. The authentication method has the USG check a users user name and password against the USGs local database, a remote LDAP, RADIUS, a Active Directory server, or more than one of these. Select the certificate to use to identify the USG for L2TP VPN connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. The certificate is used with the EAP, PEAP, and MSCHAPv2 authentication protocols. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 397 Chapter 25 L2TP VPN Table 150 Configuration > VPN > L2TP VPN (continued) LABEL Allowed User DESCRIPTION The remote user must log into the USG to use the L2TP VPN tunnel. Select a user or user group that can use the L2TP VPN tunnel. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new user account. Otherwise, select any to allow any user with a valid account and password on the USG to log in. The USG sends a Hello message after waiting this long without receiving any traffic from the remote user. The USG disconnects the VPN tunnel if the remote user does not respond. Specify the IP addresses of DNS servers to assign to the remote users. You can specify these IP addresses two ways. Custom Defined - enter a static IP address. Keep Alive Timer First DNS Server, Second DNS Server First WINS Server, Second WINS Server Apply Reset From ISP - use the IP address of a DNS server that another interface received from its DHCP server. The WINS (Windows Internet Naming Service) server keeps a mapping table of the computer names on your network and the IP addresses that they are currently using. Type the IP addresses of up to two WINS servers to assign to the remote users. You can specify these IP addresses two ways. Click Apply to save your changes in the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 25.2.1 Example: L2TP and USG Behind a NAT Router If the USG (Z) is behind a NAT router (N), then do the following for remote clients (C) to access the network behind the USG (Z) using L2TP over IPv4. 1 Create an address object in Configuration > Object > Address for the WAN IP address of the NAT router. 2 Go to Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection and click Add for IPv4 Configuration to create a new VPN connection. 3 Select Remote Access (Server Role) as the VPN scenario for the remote client. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 398 Chapter 25 L2TP VPN 4 Select the NAT router WAN IP address object as the Local Policy. 5 Go to Configuration > VPN > L2TP VPN and select the VPN Connection just configured. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 399 CHAPTER 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) 26.1 Overview Bandwidth management provides a convenient way to manage the use of various services on the network. It manages general protocols (for example, HTTP and FTP) and applies traffic prioritization to enhance the performance of delay-sensitive applications like voice and video. 26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the BWM screens (see Section 26.2 on page 404) to control bandwidth for services passing through the USG, and to identify the conditions that define the bandwidth control. 26.1.2 What You Need to Know When you allow a service, you can restrict the bandwidth it uses. It controls TCP and UDP traffic. Use policy routes to manage other types of traffic (like ICMP). Note: Bandwidth management in policy routes has priority over TCP and UDP traffic policies. If you want to use a service, make sure both the security policy allow the services packets to go through the USG. Note: The USG checks security policies before it checks bandwidth management rules for traffic going through the USG. Bandwidth management examines every TCP and UDP connection passing through the USG. Then, you can specify, by port, whether or not the USG continues to route the connection. BWM Type The USG supports three types of bandwidth management: Shared, Per user and Per-Source-IP. The Shared BWM type is selected by default in a bandwidth management rule. All matched taffic shares the bandwidth configured in the rule. If the BWM type is set to Per user in a rule, each user that matches the rule can use up to the configured bandwidth by his/her own. Select the Per-Source-IP type when you want to set the maximum bandwidth for traffic from an individual source IP address. In the following example, you configure a Per user bandwidth management rule for radius-users to limit outgoing traffic to 300 kbs. Then all radius-users (A, B and C) can send 300 kbps of traffic. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 400 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) DiffServ and DSCP Marking QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types. DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going. Connection and Packet Directions Bandwidth management looks at the connection direction, that is, from which interface the connection was initiated and to which interface the connection is going. A connection has outbound and inbound packet flows. The USG controls the bandwidth of traffic of each flow as it is going out through an interface or VPN tunnel. The outbound traffic flows from the connection initiator to the connection responder. The inbound traffic flows from the connection responder to the connection initiator. For example, a LAN1 to WAN connection is initiated from LAN1 and goes to the WAN. Outbound traffic goes from a LAN1 device to a WAN device. Bandwidth management is applied before sending the packets out a WAN interface on the USG. Inbound traffic comes back from the WAN device to the LAN1 device. Bandwidth management is applied before sending the traffic out a LAN1 interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 401 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Figure 279 LAN1 to WAN Connection and Packet Directions LAN1 Connection Outbound BWM BWM Inbound Outbound and Inbound Bandwidth Limits You can limit an applications outbound or inbound bandwidth. This limit keeps the traffic from using up too much of the out-going interfaces bandwidth. This way you can make sure there is bandwidth for other applications. When you apply a bandwidth limit to outbound or inbound traffic, each member of the out-going zone can send up to the limit. Take a LAN1 to WAN policy for example. Outbound traffic is limited to 200 kbps. The connection initiator is on the LAN1 so outbound means the traffic traveling from the LAN1 to the WAN. Each of the WAN zones two interfaces can send the limit of 200 kbps of traffic. Inbound traffic is limited to 500 kbs. The connection initiator is on the LAN1 so inbound means the traffic traveling from the WAN to the LAN1. Figure 280 LAN1 to WAN, Outbound 200 kbps, Inbound 500 kbps Outbound 200 kbps Inbound 500 kbps Bandwidth Management Priority The USG gives bandwidth to higher-priority traffic first, until it reaches its configured bandwidth rate. Then lower-priority traffic gets bandwidth. The USG uses a fairness-based (round-robin) scheduler to divide bandwidth among traffic flows with the same priority. The USG automatically treats traffic with bandwidth management disabled as priority 7 (the lowest priority). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 402 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Maximize Bandwidth Usage Maximize bandwidth usage allows applications with maximize bandwidth usage enabled to borrow any unused bandwidth on the out-going interface. After each application gets its configured bandwidth rate, the USG uses the fairness- based scheduler to divide any unused bandwidth on the out-going interface amongst applications that need more bandwidth and have maximize bandwidth usage enabled. Unused bandwidth is divided equally. Higher priority traffic does not get a larger portion of the unused bandwidth. Bandwidth Management Behavior The following sections show how bandwidth management behaves with various settings. For example, you configure DMZ to WAN policies for FTP servers A and B. Each server tries to send 1000 kbps, but the WAN is set to a maximum outgoing speed of 1000 kbps. You configure policy A for server As traffic and policy B for server Bs traffic. Figure 281 Bandwidth Management Behavior 1000 kbps BWM 1000 kbps 1000 kbps Configured Rate Effect In the following table the configured rates total less than the available bandwidth and maximize bandwidth usage is disabled, both servers get their configured rate. Table 151 Configured Rate Effect CONFIGURED RATE POLICY MAX. B. U. PRIORITY ACTUAL RATE A B 300 kbps 200 kbps No No 1 1 300 kbps 200 kbps Priority Effect Here the configured rates total more than the available bandwidth. Because server A has higher priority, it gets up to its configured rate (800 kbps), leaving only 200 kbps for server B. Table 152 Priority Effect POLICY CONFIGURED RATE MAX. B. U. PRIORITY ACTUAL RATE A B 800 kbps 1000 kbps Yes Yes 1 2 800 kbps 200 kbps USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 403 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Maximize Bandwidth Usage Effect With maximize bandwidth usage enabled, after each server gets its configured rate, the rest of the available bandwidth is divided equally between the two. So server A gets its configured rate of 300 kbps and server B gets its configured rate of 200 kbps. Then the USG divides the remaining bandwidth (1000 - 500 = 500) equally between the two (500 / 2 = 250 kbps for each). The priority has no effect on how much of the unused bandwidth each server gets. So server A gets its configured rate of 300 kbps plus 250 kbps for a total of 550 kbps. Server B gets its configured rate of 200 kbps plus 250 kbps for a total of 450 kbps. Table 153 Maximize Bandwidth Usage Effect POLICY CONFIGURED RATE MAX. B. U. PRIORITY ACTUAL RATE A B 300 kbps 200 kbps Yes Yes 1 2 550 kbps 450 kbps Priority and Over Allotment of Bandwidth Effect Server A has a configured rate that equals the total amount of available bandwidth and a higher priority. You should regard extreme over allotment of traffic with different priorities (as shown here) as a configuration error. Even though the USG still attempts to let all traffic get through and not be lost, regardless of its priority, server B gets almost no bandwidth with this configuration. Table 154 Priority and Over Allotment of Bandwidth Effect POLICY CONFIGURED RATE MAX. B. U. PRIORITY ACTUAL RATE A B 1000 kbps 1000 kbps Yes Yes 1 2 999 kbps 1 kbps 26.2 The Bandwidth Management Screen The Bandwidth management screens control the bandwidth allocation for TCP and UDP traffic. You can use source interface, destination interface, destination port, schedule, user, source, destination information, DSCP code and service type as criteria to create a sequence of specific conditions, similar to the sequence of rules used by firewalls, to specify how the USG handles the DSCP value and allocate bandwidth for the matching packets. Click Configuration > BWM to open the following screen. This screen allows you to enable/disable bandwidth management and add, edit, and remove user-defined bandwidth management policies. The default bandwidth management policy is the one with the priority of default. It is the last policy the USG checks if traffic does not match any other bandwidth management policies you have configured. You cannot remove, activate, deactivate or move the default bandwidth management policy. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 404 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Figure 282 Configuration > Bandwidth Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 26.2.1 on page 406 for more information as well. Table 155 Configuration > Bandwidth Management LABEL Enable BWM Add DESCRIPTION Select this check box to activate management bandwidth. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select it and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put that entry and press [ENTER] to move the entry to the number that you typed. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. The status icon is not available for the default bandwidth management policy. This field displays a sequential value for each bandwidth management policy and it is not associated with a specific setting. This field displays default for the default bandwidth management policy. This field displays additional information about this policy. This field displays the below types of BWM:
Shared, when the policy is set for all matched traffic Per User, when the policy is set for an individual user or a user group Per-Source-IP, when the policy is set for a source IP Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Move Status Priority Description BWM Type User Schedule Incoming Interface Outgoing Interface Source Destination This is the type of user account to which the policy applies. If any displays, the policy applies to all user accounts. This is the schedule that defines when the policy applies. none means the policy always applies. This is the source interface of the traffic to which this policy applies. This is the destination interface of the traffic to which this policy applies. This is the source address or address group for whom this policy applies. If any displays, the policy is effective for every source. This is the destination address or address group for whom this policy applies. If any displays, the policy is effective for every destination. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 405 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Table 155 Configuration > Bandwidth Management LABEL DSCP Code DESCRIPTION These are the DSCP code point values of incoming and outgoing packets to which this policy applies. The lower the number the higher the priority with the exception of 0 which is usually given only best-effort treatment. any means all DSCP value or no DSCP marker. default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort traffic The af options stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. App and the service name displays if you selected Application Object for the service type. An Application Object is a pre-defined service. Obj and the service name displays if you selected Service Object for the service type. A Service Object is a customized pre-defined service or another service. Mouse over the service object name to view the corresponding IP protocol number. This field shows the amount of bandwidth the traffic can use. In - This is how much inbound bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the matching traffic to use. Inbound refers to the traffic the USG sends to a connections initiator. If no displays here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the inbound traffic. Out - This is how much outgoing bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the matching traffic to use. Outbound refers to the traffic the USG sends out from a connections initiator. If no displays here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the outbound traffic. Pri - This is the priority for the incoming (the first Pri value) or outgoing (the second Pri value) traffic that matches this policy. The smaller the number, the higher the priority. Traffic with a higher priority is given bandwidth before traffic with a lower priority. The USG ignores this number if the incoming and outgoing limits are both set to 0. In this case the traffic is automatically treated as being set to the lowest priority (7) regardless of this fields configuration. This is how the USG handles the DSCP value of the incoming and outgoing packets that match this policy. In - Inbound, the traffic the USG sends to a connections initiator. Out - Outbound, the traffic the USG sends out from a connections initiator. If this field displays a DSCP value, the USG applies that DSCP value to the routes outgoing packets. preserve means the USG does not modify the DSCP value of the routes outgoing packets. default means the USG sets the DSCP value of the routes outgoing packets to 0. The af choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Service Type BWM In/Pri/Out/Pri DSCP Marking Apply Reset 26.2.1 The Bandwidth Management Add/Edit Screen The Configuration > Bandwidth Management Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new condition or edit an existing one. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 406 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) 802.1P Marking Use 802.1P to prioritize outgoing traffic from a VLAN interface. The Priority Code is a 3-bit field within a 802.1Q VLAN tag thats used to prioritize associated outgoing VLAN traffic. "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. Table 156 Single Tagged 802.1Q Frame Format DA SA TPID Priority VID Len/Etype Data FCS IEEE 802.1Q customer tagged frame Table 157 802.1Q Frame DA SA TPID VID Destination Address Source Address Tag Protocol IDentifier VLAN ID Priority Len/Etype Data FCS 802.1p Priority Length and type of Ethernet frame Frame data Frame Check Sequence The following table is a guide to types of traffic for the priority code. Table 158 Priority Code and Types of Traffic PRIORITY 0 (lowest) 1 TRAFFIC TYPES Background Best Effort 2 3 4 5 6 Excellent Effort Critical Applications Video, less than 100 ms latency and jitter Voice, less than 10 ms latency and jitter Internetwork Control 7 (highest) Network Control To access this screen, go to the Configuration > Bandwidth Management screen (see Section 26.2 on page 404), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. Figure 283 Configuration > Bandwidth Management > Edit (For the Default Policy) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 407 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Figure 284 Configuration > Bandwidth Management > Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 159 Configuration > Bandwidth Management > Add/Edit LABEL Create new Object Configuration Enable Description DESCRIPTION Use to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Select this check box to turn on this policy. Enter a description of this policy. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. Use this section to configure the conditions of traffic to which this policy applies. Criteria USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 408 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Table 159 Configuration > Bandwidth Management > Add/Edit LABEL BWM Type DESCRIPTION This field displays the below types of BWM rule:
User Schedule Incoming Interface Outgoing Interface Source Destination DSCP Code User-Defined DSCP Code Service Type Service Object DSCP Marking Shared, when the policy is set for all users Per User, when the policy is set for an individual user or a user group Per Source IP, when the policy is set for a source IP Select a user name or user group to which to apply the policy. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new user account. Select any to apply the policy for every user. Select a schedule that defines when the policy applies or select Create Object to configure a new one. Otherwise, select none to make the policy always effective. Select the source interface of the traffic to which this policy applies. Select the destination interface of the traffic to which this policy applies. Select a source address or address group for whom this policy applies. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new one. Select any if the policy is effective for every source. Select a destination address or address group for whom this policy applies. Use Create new Object if you need to configure a new one. Select any if the policy is effective for every destination. Select a DSCP code point value of incoming packets to which this policy route applies or select User Defined to specify another DSCP code point. The lower the number the higher the priority with the exception of 0 which is usually given only best-effort treatment. any means all DSCP value or no DSCP marker. default means traffic with a DSCP value of 0. This is usually best effort traffic The af choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. Use this field to specify a custom DSCP code point. Select Service Object if you want a specific service (defined in a service object) to which the policy applies. This field is available if you selected Service Object as the service type. Select a service or service group to identify the type of traffic to which this policy applies. any means all services. Set how the USG handles the DSCP value of the incoming and outgoing packets that match this policy. Inbound refers to the traffic the USG sends to a connections initiator. Outbound refers to the traffic the USG sends out from a connections initiator. Select one of the pre-defined DSCP values to apply or select User Defined to specify another DSCP value. The af choices stand for Assured Forwarding. The number following the af identifies one of four classes and one of three drop preferences. Select preserve to have the USG keep the packets original DSCP value. Bandwidth Shaping Select default to have the USG set the DSCP value of the packets to 0. Configure these fields to set the amount of bandwidth the matching traffic can use. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 409 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Table 159 Configuration > Bandwidth Management > Add/Edit LABEL Inbound kbps Outbound kbps Priority Maximize Bandwidth Usage Maximum 802.1P Marking Priority Code Interface Related Setting Log OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Type how much inbound bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the traffic to use. Inbound refers to the traffic the USG sends to a connections initiator. If you enter 0 here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the matching traffic that the USG sends to the initiator. Traffic with bandwidth management disabled (inbound and outbound are both set to 0) is automatically treated as the lowest priority (7). If the sum of the bandwidths for routes using the same next hop is higher than the actual transmission speed, lower priority traffic may not be sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth. Type how much outbound bandwidth, in kilobits per second, this policy allows the traffic to use. Outbound refers to the traffic the USG sends out from a connections initiator. If you enter 0 here, this policy does not apply bandwidth management for the matching traffic that the USG sends out from the initiator. Traffic with bandwidth management disabled (inbound and outbound are both set to 0) is automatically treated as the lowest priority (7). If the sum of the bandwidths for routes using the same next hop is higher than the actual transmission speed, lower priority traffic may not be sent if higher priority traffic uses all of the actual bandwidth. This field displays when the inbound or outbound bandwidth management is not set to 0. Enter a number between 1 and 7 to set the priority for traffic that matches this policy. The smaller the number, the higher the priority. Traffic with a higher priority is given bandwidth before traffic with a lower priority. The USG uses a fairness-based (round-robin) scheduler to divide bandwidth between traffic flows with the same priority. The number in this field is ignored if the incoming and outgoing limits are both set to 0. In this case the traffic is automatically treated as being set to the lowest priority (7) regardless of this fields configuration. This field displays when the inbound or outbound bandwidth management is not set to 0 and the BWM Type is set to Shared. Enable maximize bandwidth usage to let the traffic matching this policy borrow all unused bandwidth on the out-going interface. After each application or type of traffic gets its configured bandwidth rate, the USG uses the fairness-based scheduler to divide any unused bandwidth on the out-going interface among applications and traffic types that need more bandwidth and have maximize bandwidth usage enabled. If you did not enable Maximize Bandwidth Usage, then type the maximium unused bandwidth that traffic matching this policy is allowed to borrow on the out-going interface (in Kbps), here. Use 802.1P to prioritize outgoing traffic from a VLAN interface. This is a 3-bit field within a 802.1Q VLAN tag thats used to prioritize associated outgoing VLAN traffic. "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. See Table 158 on page 407. The setting configured here overwrites existing priority settings. Choose a VLAN interface to which to apply the priority level for matching frames. Select whether to have the USG generate a log (log), log and alert (log alert) or neither (no) when any traffic matches this policy. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 410 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) 26.2.1.1 Adding Objects for the BWM Policy Objects are parameters to which the Policy rules are built upon. There are three kinds of objects you can add/edit for the BWM policy, they are User, Schedule and Address objects. Click Configuration > BWM > Add > Create New Object > Add User to see the following screen. Figure 285 Configuration >BWM > Create New Object > Add User The following table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 160 Configuration > BWM > Create New Object > Add User LABEL User Name User Type DESCRIPTION Type a user or user group object name of the rule. Select a user type from the drop down menu. The user types are Admin, Limited admin, User, Guest, Ext-user, Ext-group-user. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 411 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Table 160 Configuration > BWM > Create New Object > Add User LABEL Password DESCRIPTION Type a password for the user object. The password can consist of alphanumeric characters, the underscore, and some punctuation marks (+-/*= :; .! @$&%#~
\ () ), and it can be up to eight characters long. Retype the password to confirm. Enter a description for this user object. It is not used elsewhere. You can use alphanumeric and ()+/:=?!*#@$_%- characters, and it can be up to 60 characters long. Choose either Use Default setting option, which shows the default Lease Time of 1,440 minutes and Reauthentication Time of 1,440 minutes or you can enter them manually by choosing Use Manual Settings option. This shows the Lease Time setting for the user, by default it is 1,440 minutes. This shows the Reauthentication Time for the user, by default it is 1,440 minutes. Click OK to save the setting. Click Cancel to abandon this screen. Retype Description Authentication Timeout Settings Lease Time Reauthentication Time OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 412 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Figure 286 Configuration > BWM > Create New Object > Add Schedule The following table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 161 Configuration > BWM > Create New Object > Add Schedule LABEL Name Type DESCRIPTION Enter a name for the schedule object of the rule. Select an option from the drop down menu for the schedule object. It will show One Time or Recurring. Click the icon menu on the right to choose a Start Date for the schedule object. Click the icon menu on the right to choose a Start Time for the schedule object. Click the icon menu on the right to choose a Stop Date for schedule object. Click the icon menu on the right to choose a Stop Time for the schedule object. Start Date Start Time Stop Date Stop Time USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 413 Chapter 26 BWM (Bandwidth Management) Figure 287 Configuration > BWM > Create New Object > Add Address The following table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 162 Configuration > BWM > Create New Object > Add Address LABEL Name Address Type DESCRIPTION Enter a name for the Address object of the rule. Select an Address Type from the drop down menu on the right. The Address Types are Host, Range, Subnet, Interface IP, Interface Subnet, and Interface Gateway. Enter an IP address for the Address object. Click OK to save the setting. Click Cancel to abandon the setting. IP Address OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 414 CHAPTER 27 Content Filtering 27.1 Overview Use the content filtering feature to control access to specific web sites or web content. 27.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Filter Profile screens (Section Figure 289 on page 420) to set up content filtering profiles. Use the Trusted Web Sites screens (Section 27.4 on page 430) to create a common list of good
(allowed) web site addresses. Use the Forbidden Web Sites screens (Section 27.5 on page 431) to create a common list of bad (blocked) web site addresses. 27.1.2 What You Need to Know Content Filtering Content filtering allows you to block certain web features, such as cookies, and/or block access to specific web sites. It can also block access to specific categories of web site content. You can create different content filter policies for different addresses, schedules, users or groups and content filter profiles. For example, you can configure one policy that blocks John Does access to arts and entertainment web pages during the workday and another policy that lets him access them after work. Content Filtering Policies A content filtering policy allows you to do the following. Use schedule objects to define when to apply a content filter profile. Use address and/or user/group objects to define to whose web access to apply the content filter profile. Apply a content filter profile that you have custom-tailored. Content Filtering Profiles A content filtering profile conveniently stores your custom settings for the following features. Category-based Blocking The USG can block access to particular categories of web site content, such as pornography or racial intolerance. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 415 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Restrict Web Features The USG can disable web proxies and block web features such as ActiveX controls, Java applets and cookies. Customize Web Site Access You can specify URLs to which the USG blocks access. You can alternatively block access to all URLs except ones that you specify. You can also have the USG block access to URLs that contain particular keywords. Content Filtering Configuration Guidelines When the USG receives an HTTP request, the content filter searches for a policy that matches the source address and time (schedule). The content filter checks the policies in order (based on the policy numbers). When a matching policy is found, the content filter allows or blocks the request depending on the settings of the filtering profile specified by the policy. Some requests may not match any policy. The USG allows the request if the default policy is not set to block. The USG blocks the request if the default policy is set to block. External Web Filtering Service When you register for and enable the external web filtering service, your USG accesses an external database that has millions of web sites categorized based on content. You can have the USG block, block and/or log access to web sites based on these categories. Keyword Blocking URL Checking The USG checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately when performing keyword blocking. The URLs domain name or IP address is the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the domain name is www.zyxel.com.tw. The file path is the characters that come after the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, the file path is news/pressroom.php. Since the USG checks the URLs domain name (or IP address) and file path separately, it will not find items that go across the two. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/
pressroom.php, the USG would find tw in the domain name (www.zyxel.com.tw). It would also find news in the file path (news/pressroom.php) but it would not find tw/news. Finding Out More See Section 27.6 on page 432 for content filtering background/technical information. 27.1.3 Before You Begin You must configure an address object, a schedule object and a filtering profile before you can set up a content security policy. You must have Content Filtering license in order to use the function.subscribe to use the external database content filtering (see the Licensing > Registration screens). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 416 Chapter 27 Content Filtering 27.2 Content Filter Profile Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile> Content Filter > Profile to open the Content Filter Profile screen. Use this screen to enable content filtering, view and order your list of content filter policies, create a denial of access message or specify a redirect URL and check your external web filtering service registration status. Click on the icons to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting and other information. Figure 288 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 163 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Profile LABEL General Settings Enable Content Filter Report Service Report Server Select this check box to have the USG collect category-based content filtering statistics. Click this link to choose where your USG is registered: myZyXEL.com or myZyXEL.com 2.0. Choose myZyXEL.com 2.0 for a model in this series. Specify the allowable time period in seconds for accessing the external web filtering services server. Content Filter Category Service Timeout USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 417 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 163 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Profile (continued) LABEL Denied Access Message DESCRIPTION Enter a message to be displayed when content filter blocks access to a web page. Use up to 127 characters (0-9a-zA-Z;/?:@&=+$\.-_!~*'()%,). For example, Access to this web page is not allowed. Please contact the network administrator. It is also possible to leave this field blank if you have a URL specified in the Redirect URL field. In this case if the content filter blocks access to a web page, the USG just opens the web page you specified without showing a denied access message. Enter the URL of the web page to which you want to send users when their web access is blocked by content filter. The web page you specify here opens in a new frame below the denied access message. Use http:// or https:// followed by up to 262 characters (0-9a-zA-Z;/
?:@&=+$\.-_!~*'()%). For example, http://192.168.1.17/blocked access. Click Add to create a new content filter rule. Click Edit to make changes to a content filter rule. Click Remove the delete a content filter rule. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. Click Refresh to update information on this screen. This column lists the index numbers of the content filter profile. This column lists the names of the content filter profile rule. This column lists the description of the content filter profile rule. This displays the number of times an Object Reference is used in a rule. This read-only field displays the status of your content-filtering database service registration. Not Licensed displays if you have not successfully registered and activated the service. Expired displays if your subscription to the service has expired. Licensed displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the service. You can view content filter reports after you register the USG and activate the subscription service in the Registration screen. This read-only field displays what kind of service registration you have for the content-filtering database. None displays if you have not successfully registered and activated the service. Standard displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the service. Trial displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the trial service subscription. This field displays the date your service license expires. This link appears if you have not registered for the service or the service has expired. Click this link to go to the screen where you can register for the service. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Redirect URL Profile Management Add Edit Remove Object Reference
#
Name Description Reference License Status License Type Expiration Date Register Now Apply Reset USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 418 Chapter 27 Content Filtering 27.3 Content Filter Profile Add or Edit Screen Click Configuration > UTM > Content Filter > Profile > Add or Edit to open the Add Filter Profile screen. Configure Category Service and Custom Service tabs. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 419 Chapter 27 Content Filtering 27.3.1 Content Filter Add Profile Category Service Figure 289 Content Filter > Profile > Add Filter Profile > Category Service USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 420 Chapter 27 Content Filtering The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 164 Configuration > UTM Profile> Content Filter > Profile > Add > Category Service LABEL License Status DESCRIPTION This read-only field displays the status of your content-filtering database service registration. License Type Name Description Enable Content Filter Category Service Action for Unsafe Web Pages Not Licensed displays if you have not successfully registered and activated the service. Expired displays if your subscription to the service has expired. Licensed displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the service. You can view content filter reports after you register the USG and activate the subscription service in the Registration screen. This read-only field displays what kind of service registration you have for the content-filtering database. None displays if you have not successfully registered and activated the service. Standard displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the standard content filtering service. Trial displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the trial service subscription. Enter a descriptive name for this content filtering profile name. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Enter a description for the content filtering profile rule to help identify the purpose of rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-
sensitive. This field is optional. Enable external database content filtering to have the USG check an external database to find to which category a requested web page belongs. The USG then blocks or forwards access to the web page depending on the configuration of the rest of this page. Select Pass to allow users to access web pages that match the unsafe categories that you select below. Select Block to prevent users from accessing web pages that match the unsafe categories that you select below. When external database content filtering blocks access to a web page, it displays the denied access message that you configured in the Content Filter General screen along with the category of the blocked web page. Select Warn to display a warning message before allowing users to access web pages that match the unsafe categories that you select below. Select Log to record attempts to access web pages that match the unsafe categories that you select below. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 421 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 164 Configuration > UTM Profile> Content Filter > Profile > Add > Category Service LABEL DESCRIPTION Select Pass to allow users to access web pages that match the other categories that you select below. Action for Managed Web Pages Action for Unrated Web Pages Action When Category Server Is Unavailable Select Categories Select All Categories Clear All Categories Security Threat (unsafe) Anonymizers Botnets Compromised Select Block to prevent users from accessing web pages that match the other categories that you select below. When external database content filtering blocks access to a web page, it displays the denied access message that you configured in the Content Filter General screen along with the category of the blocked web page. Select Log to record attempts to access web pages that match the other categories that you select below. Select Pass to allow users to access web pages that the external web filtering service has not categorized. Select Block to prevent users from accessing web pages that the external web filtering service has not categorized. When the external database content filtering blocks access to a web page, it displays the denied access message that you configured in the Content Filter General screen along with the category of the blocked web page. Select Warn to display a warning message before allowing users to access web pages that the external web filtering service has not categorized. Select Log to record attempts to access web pages that are not categorized. Select Pass to allow users to access any requested web page if the external content filtering database is unavailable. Select Block to block access to any requested web page if the external content filtering database is unavailable. Select Warn to display a warning message before allowing users to access any requested web page if the external content filtering database is unavailable. The following are possible causes for the external content filtering server not being available:
There is no response from the external content filtering server within the time period specified in the Content Filter Server Unavailable Timeout field. The USG is not able to resolve the domain name of the external content filtering database. There is an error response from the external content filtering database. This can be caused by an expired content filtering registration (External content filterings license key is invalid). Select Log to record attempts to access web pages that occur when the external content filtering database is unavailable. Select this check box to restrict access to all site categories listed below. Select this check box to clear the selected categories below. Theese are the categories of web pages that are known to pose a threat to users or their computers. Sites and proxies that act as an intermediary for surfing to other Web sites in an anonymous fashion, whether to circumvent Web filtering or for other reasons. For example, blog.go2.tw, anonymizer.com, www.qu365.com. Sites that use bots (zombies) including command-and-control sites. Sites that have been compromised by someone other than the site owner in order to install malicious programs without the user's knowledge. Includes sites that may be vulnerable to a particular high-risk attack. For example, www.wokoo.net, movie.sx.zj.cn. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 422 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 164 Configuration > UTM Profile> Content Filter > Profile > Add > Category Service LABEL Malware Network Errors Parked Domains Phishing & Fraud Spam Sites Managed Categories Test Web Site Category URL to test If you think the category is incorrect Test Against Content Filter Category Server OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Sites that install unwanted software on a user's computer with the intent to enable third-party monitoring or make system changes without the user's consent. For example, www.tqlkg.com, aladel.net. Sites that do not resolve to any IP address. Sites that are inactive, typically reserved for later use. They most often do not contain their own content, may simply say "under construction," "purchase this domain," or display advertisements. For example, www.moemoon.com, artlin.net, img.sedoparking.com. Sites that are used for deceptive or fraudulent purposes (e.g. phishing), such as stealing financial or other user account information. These sites are most often designed to appear as legitimate sites in order to mislead users into entering their credentials. For example, optimizedby.rmxads.com, 218.1.71.226/.../e3b. Sites that have been promoted through spam techniques. For example, img.tongji.linezing.com, banner.chinesegamer.net. These are categories of web pages based on their content. Select categories in this section to control access to specific types of Internet content. You must have the Category Service content filtering license to filter these categories. See the next table for category details. You can check which category a web page belongs to. Enter a web site URL in the text box. When the content filter is active, you should see the web pages category. The query fails if the content filter is not active. Click this link to see the category recorded in the USGs content filtering database for the web page you specified (if the database has an entry for it). Click this button to see the category recorded in the external content filter servers database for the web page you specified. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. The following table describes the managed categories. Alcohol & Tobacco Table 165 Managed Category Descriptions DESCRIPTION CATEGORY Sites that provide advertising graphics or other ad content files such as Advertisements & Pop-Ups banners and pop-ups. For example, pagead2.googlesyndication.com, ad.yieldmanager.com. Sites that promote or sell alcohol- or tobacco-related products or services. For example, www.drinks.com.tw, www.p9.com.tw, beer.ttl.com.tw. Sites with artistic content or relating to artistic institutions such as theaters, museums, galleries, dance companies, photography, and digital graphic resources. For example, www.npm.gov.tw, www.nmh.gov.tw. Sites that provide business related information such as corporate Web sites. Information, services, or products that help businesses of all sizes to do their day-to-day commercial activities. For example, www.kinkos.com, www.proctorgamble.com, www.bbb.org. Sites that enable web-based exchange of realtime messages through chat services or chat rooms. For example, me.sohu.com, blufiles.storage.live.com. Business Chat Arts USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 423 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 165 Managed Category Descriptions (continued) Child Abuse Images Computers & Technology Criminal Activity Cults Dating & Personals Download Sites Education Entertainment Fashion & Beauty Finance Forums & Newsgroups Gambling Games General Government Greeting cards Sites that portray or discuss children in sexual or other abusive acts. For example, a.uuzhijia.info. Sites that contain information about computers, software, hardware, IT, peripheral and computer services, such as product reviews, discussions, and IT news. For example, www.informationsecurity.com.tw, blog.ithome.com.tw. Sites that offer advice on how to commit illegal or criminal activities, or to avoid detection. These can include how to commit murder, build bombs, pick locks, etc. Also includes sites with information about illegal manipulation of electronic devices, hacking, fraud and illegal distribution of software. For example, www.hackbase.com, jia.hackbase.com, ad.adver.com.tw. Sites relating to non-traditional religious practice typically known as "cults,"
that is, considered to be false, unorthodox, extremist, or coercive, with members often living under the direction of a charismatic leader. For example, www.churchofsatan.com, www.ccya.org.tw. Sites that promote networking for interpersonal relationships such as dating and marriage. Includes sites for match-making, online dating, spousal introduction. For example, www.i-part.com.tw, www.imatchi.com. Sites that contain downloadable software, whether shareware, freeware, or for a charge. Includes peer-to-peer sites. For example, www.hotdl.com, toget.pchome.com.tw, www.azroo.com. Sites sponsored by educational institutions and schools of all types including distance education. Includes general educational and reference materials such as dictionaries, encyclopedias, online courses, teaching aids and discussion guides. For example, www.tfam.museum, www.lksf.org, www.1980.org.tw.. Sites related to television, movies, music and video (including video on demand), such as program guides, celebrity sites, and entertainment news. For example, www.ctitv.com.tw, www.hboasia.com, www.startv.com.tw. Sites concerning fashion, jewelry, glamour, beauty, modeling, cosmetics or related products or services. Includes product reviews, comparisons, and general consumer information. For example, women.sohu.com, baodian.women.sohu.com. Sites related to banking, finance, payment or investment, including banks, brokerages, online stock trading, stock quotes, fund management, insurance companies, credit unions, credit card companies, and so on. For example, www.concords.com.tw, www.polaris.com.tw, www.bochk.com. Sites for sharing information in the form of newsgroups, forums, bulletin boards. For example, ck101.com, my.xuite.net, ptt.cc. Sites that offer or are related to online gambling, lottery, casinos and betting agencies involving chance. For example, www.taiwanlottery.com.tw, www.i-
win.com.tw, www.hkjc.com. Sites relating to computer or other games, information about game producers, or how to obtain cheat codes. Game-related publication sites. For example, www.gamer.com.tw, www.wowtaiwan.com.tw, tw.lineage.gamania.com. Sites that do not clearly fall into other categories, for example, blank Web pages. For example, bs.serving-sys.com, simg.sinajs.cn, i0.itc.cn. Sites run by governmental organizations, departments, or agencies, including police departments, fire departments, customs bureaus, emergency services, civil defense, counterterrorism organizations, military and hospitals. For example, www.ey.gov.tw, www.whitehouse.gov, www.npa.gov.tw. Sites that allow people to send and receive greeting cards and postcards. For example, www.e-card.com.tw, card.ivy.net.tw. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 424 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 165 Managed Category Descriptions (continued) Hacking Hate & Intolerance Health & Medicine Illegal Drug Illegal Software Image Sharing Information Security Instant Messaging Job Search Leisure & Recreation News Non-profits & NGOs Nudity Peer-to-Peer Personal Sites Politics Sites that promote or give advice about how to gain unauthorized access to proprietary computer systems, for the purpose of stealing information, perpetrating fraud, creating viruses, or committing other illegal activity related to theft of digital information. For example, www.hackbase.com, www.chinahacker.com. Sites that promote a supremacist political agenda, encouraging oppression of people or groups of people based on their race, religion, gender, age, disability, sexual orientation or nationality. For example, www.racist-jokes.com, aryan-
nations.org, whitepower.com. Sites containing information pertaining to health, healthcare services, fitness and well-being, including information about medical equipment, hospitals, drugstores, nursing, medicine, procedures, prescription medications, etc. For example, www.lksf.org, www.ohayo.com.tw. Sites with information on the purchase, manufacture, and use of illegal or recreational drugs and their paraphernalia, and misuse of prescription drugs and other compounds For example, www.cannabis.net, www.amphetamines.com. Sites that illegally distribute software or copyrighted materials such as movies or music, software cracks, illicit serial numbers, illegal license key generators. For example, www.zhaokey.com.cn, www.tiansha.net. Sites that host digital photographs and images, online photo albums and digital photo exchanges. For example, photo.pchome.com.tw, photo.xuite.net, photobucket.com. Sites that provide legitimate information about data protection, including newly discovered vulnerabilities and how to block them. For example, www.informationsecurity.com.tw, www.itis.tw. Sites that enable logging in to instant messaging services such as ICQ, AOL Instant Messenger, IRC, MSN, Jabber, Yahoo Messenger, and the like. For example, www.meebo.com, www.aim.com, www. ebuddy.com. Sites containing job listings, career information, assistance with job searches
(such as resume writing, interviewing tips, etc.), employment agencies or head hunters. For example, www.104.com.tw, www.1111.com.tw, www.yes123.com.tw. Sites relating to recreational activities and hobbies including zoos, public recreation centers, pools, amusement parks, and hobbies such as gardening, literature, arts & crafts, home improvement, home d?cor, family, etc. For example, tpbg.tfri.gov.tw, tw.fashion.yahoo.com, www.relaxtimes.com.tw. Sites covering news and current events such as newspapers, newswire services, personalized news services, broadcasting sites, and magazines. For example, www.tvbs.com.tw?Awww.ebc.net.tw?Awww.iset.com.tw. Sites devoted to clubs, communities, unions, and non-profit organizations. Many of these groups exist for educational or charitable purposes. For example, www.tzuchi.org.tw, web.redcross.org.tw, www.lksf.org. Sites that contain full or partial nudity that are not necessarily overtly sexual in intent. Includes sites that advertise or sell lingerie, intimate apparel, or swimwear. For example, www.easyshop.com.tw, www.faster-swim.com.tw, image.baidu.com. Sites that enable direct exchange of files between users without dependence on a central server. For example, www.eyny.com. Sites about or hosted by personal individuals, including those hosted on commercial sites. For example, blog.yam.com, www.wretch.cc, blog.xuite.net. Sites that promote political parties or political advocacy, or provide information about political parties, interest groups, elections, legislation or lobbying. Also includes sites that offer legal information and advice. For example, www.kmt.org.tw, www.dpp.org.tw, cpc.people.com.cn. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 425 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 165 Managed Category Descriptions (continued) Pornography/Sexually Explicit Private IP Addresses Real Estate Religion Restaurants & Dining School Cheating Search Engines & Portals Sex Education Shopping Social Networking Sports Streaming Media &
Downloads Tasteless Translators Transportation Sites that contain explicit sexual content. Includes adult products such as sex toys, CD-ROMs, and videos, adult services such as videoconferencing, escort services, and strip clubs, erotic stories and textual descriptions of sexual acts. For example, www.dvd888.com, www.18center.com, blog.sina.com.tw. Sites that are private IP addresses as defined in RFC 1918, that is, hosts that do not require access to hosts in other enterprises (or require just limited access) and whose IP address may be ambiguous between enterprises but are well defined within a certain enterprise. For example, 172.21.20.123, 192.168.35.62. Sites relating to commercial or residential real estate services, including renting, purchasing, selling or financing homes, offices, etc. For example, www.sinyi.com.tw, www.yungching.com.tw, house.focus.cn. Sites that deal with faith, human spirituality or religious beliefs, including sites of churches, synagogues, mosques and other houses of worship. For example, www.fgs.org.tw, www.twtaoism.net, www.fhl.net. Sites that list, review, promote or advertise food, dining or catering services. Includes sites for recipes, cooking instruction and tips, food products, and wine advisors. For example, www.jogoya.com.tw, www.dintaifung.com.tw, www2.pizzahut.com.tw. Sites that promote unethical practices such as cheating or plagiarism by providing test answers, written essays, research papers, or term papers. For example, www.zydk788.com, www.huafengksw.com. Sites enabling the searching of the Web, newsgroups, images, directories, and other online content. Includes portal and directory sites such as white/yellow pages. For example, tw.yahoo.com, www.pchome.com.tw, www.google.com.tw. Sites relating to sex education, including subjects such as respect for partner, abortion, gay and lesbian lifestyle, contraceptives, sexually transmitted diseases, and pregnancy. For example, apps.rockyou.com, www.howmama.com.tw, www.mombaby.com.tw. Sites for online shopping, catalogs, online ordering, auctions, classified ads. Excludes shopping for products and services exclusively covered by another category such as health & medicine. For example, shopping.pchome.com.tw, buy.yahoo.com.tw, www.tkec.com.tw. Sites that enable social networking for online communities of various topics, for friendship, dating, or professional reasons. For example, www.facebook.com, www.flickr.com, www.groups.google.com. Sites relating to sports teams, fan clubs, scores and sports news. Relates to all sports, whether professional or recreational. For example, www.yankees.com, www.nba.com, mlb.mlb.com. Sites that deliver streaming content, such as Internet radio, Internet TV or MP3 and live or archived media download sites. Includes fan sites, or official sites run by musicians, bands, or record labels. For example, www.youtube.com, pfp.sina.com.cn, my.xunlei.com. Sites with offensive or tasteless content such as bathroom humor or profanity. For example, comedycentral.com, dilbert.com. Sites that translate Web pages or phrases from one language to another. These sites may be used to attempt to bypass a filtering system. For example, translate.google.com.tw, www.smartlinkcorp.com, translation.paralink.com. Sites that provide information about motor vehicles such as cars, motorcycles, boats, trucks, RVs and the like. Includes manufacturer sites, dealerships, review sites, pricing, , online purchase sites, enthusiasts clubs, etc. For example, www.toyota.com.tw, www.ford.com.tw, www.sym.com.tw. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 426 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 165 Managed Category Descriptions (continued) Travel Unknown Violence Weapons Web-based Email Sites that provide travel and tourism information or online booking of travel services such as airlines, accommodations, car rentals. Includes regional or city information sites. For example, www.startravel.com.tw, taipei.grand.hyatt.com.tw, www.car-plus.com.tw. Unknown For example, www.669.com.tw, www.appleballoon.com.tw, www.uimco.com.tw. Sites that contain images or text depicting or advocating physical assault against humans, animals, or institutions. Sites of a particularly gruesome nature such as shocking depictions of blood or wounds, or cruel animal treatment. For example, crimescene.com, deathnet.com, michiganmilitia.com. Sites that depict, sell, review or describe guns and weapons, including for sport. For example, www.ak-47.net, warfare.ru. Sites that enable users to send and receive email through a web-accessible email account. For example, mail.163.com, mail.google.com, mail.yahoo.com.tw. 27.3.2 Content Filter Add Filter Profile Custom Service Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Filter Profile > Add or Edit > Custom Service to open the Custom Service screen. You can create a list of good (allowed) web site addresses and a list of bad (blocked) web site addresses. You can also block web sites based on whether the web sites address contains a keyword. Use this screen to add or remove specific sites or keywords from the filter list. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 427 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Figure 290 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Filter Profile > Custom Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 166 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Profile > Custom Service LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name for this content filtering profile name. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Enter a description for the content filtering profile rule to help identify the purpose of rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Description Enable Custom Service This field is optional. Select this check box to allow trusted web sites and block forbidden web sites. Content filter list customization may be enabled and disabled without re-entering these site names. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 428 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 166 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Profile > Custom Service (continued) LABEL Allow Web traffic for trusted web sites only DESCRIPTION When this box is selected, the USG blocks Web access to sites that are not on the Trusted Web Sites list. If they are chosen carefully, this is the most effective way to block objectionable material. Select this check box to check the common trusted and forbidden web sites lists. See Section 27.4 on page 430 and Section 27.5 on page 431 for information on configuring these lists. Select the check box(es) to restrict a feature. Select the check box(es) to restrict a feature. Check Common Trusted/
Forbidden List Restricted Web Features Block ActiveX Java Cookies Web Proxy Allow Java/ActiveX/Cookies/
Web proxy to trusted web sites Trusted Web Sites Add Edit Remove
#
Trusted Web Site Forbidden Web Site List Add Edit When you download a page containing ActiveX or Java, that part of the web page will be blocked with an X. When you download a page coming from a Web Proxy, the whole web page will be blocked. When you download a page containing cookies, the cookies will be removed, but the page will not be blocked. ActiveX is a tool for building dynamic and active web pages and distributed object applications. When you visit an ActiveX web site, ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser, where they remain in case you visit the site again. Java is a programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds. Cookies are files stored on a computers hard drive. Some web servers use them to track usage and provide service based on ID. A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security, administrative control, and caching service. When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server. When this box is selected, the USG will permit Java, ActiveX and Cookies from sites on the Trusted Web Sites list to the LAN. In certain cases, it may be desirable to allow Java, ActiveX or Cookies from sites that are known and trusted. These are sites that you want to allow access to, regardless of their content rating, can be allowed by adding them to this list. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This displays the index number of the trusted web sites. This column displays the trusted web sites already added. Enter host names such as www.good-site.com into this text field. Do not enter the complete URL of the site that is, do not include http://. All subdomains are allowed. For example, entering *zyxel.com also allows www.zyxel.com, partner.zyxel.com, press.zyxel.com, and so on. You can also enter just a top level domain. For example, enter *.com to allow all .com domains. Use up to 127 characters (0-9a-z-). The casing does not matter. * can be used as a wildcard to match any string. The entry must contain at least one
. or it will be invalid. Sites that you want to block access to, regardless of their content rating, can be allowed by adding them to this list. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 429 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Table 166 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Profile > Custom Service (continued) LABEL Remove
#
Forbidden Web Sites DESCRIPTION Select an entry and click this to delete it. This displays the index number of the forbidden web sites. This list displays the forbidden web sites already added. Enter host names such as www.bad-site.com into this text field. Do not enter the complete URL of the site that is, do not include http://. All subdomains are also blocked. For example, entering *bad-site.com also blocks www.bad-site.com, partner.bad-site.com, press.bad-site.com, and do on. You can also enter just a top level domain. For example, enter
*.com to block all .com domains. Use up to 127 characters (0-9a-z-). The casing does not matter. * can be used as a wildcard to match any string. The entry must contain at least one
. or it will be invalid. This section allows you to block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This displays the index number of the blocked URL keywords. This list displays the keywords already added. Enter a keyword or a numerical IP address to block. You can also enter a numerical IP address. Use up to 127 case-insensitive characters (0-9a-zA-Z;/?:@&=+$\.-
_!~*()%). * can be used as a wildcard to match any string. Use |* to indicate a single wildcard character. For example enter *Bad_Site* to block access to any web page that includes the exact phrase Bad_Site. This does not block access to web pages that only include part of the phrase (such as Bad for example). Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. Blocked URL Keywords Add Edit Remove
#
Blocked URL Keywords OK Cancel 27.4 Content Filter Trusted Web Sites Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Trusted Web Sites to open the Trusted Web Sites screen. You can create a common list of good (allowed) web site addresses. When you configure Filter Profiles, you can select the option to check the Common Trusted Web Sites list. Use this screen to add or remove specific sites from the filter list. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 430 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Figure 291 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Trusted Web Sites The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 167 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Trusted Web Sites LABEL Common Trusted Web Sites Add Edit Remove
#
Trusted Web Site Apply Reset DESCRIPTION These are sites that you want to allow access to, regardless of their content rating, can be allowed by adding them to this list. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This displays the index number of the trusted web sites. This column displays the trusted web sites already added. Enter host names such as www.good-site.com into this text field. Do not enter the complete URL of the site that is, do not include http://. All subdomains are allowed. For example, entering zyxel.com also allows www.zyxel.com, partner.zyxel.com, press.zyxel.com, and so on. You can also enter just a top level domain. For example, enter .com to allow all
.com domains. Use up to 127 characters (0-9a-z-). The casing does not matter. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 27.5 Content Filter Forbidden Web Sites Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Forbidden Web Sites to open the Forbidden Web Sites screen. You can create a common list of bad (blocked) web site addresses. When you configure Filter Profiles, you can select the option to check the Common Forbidden Web Sites list. Use this screen to add or remove specific sites from the filter list. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 431 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Figure 292 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Forbidden Web Sites The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 168 Configuration > UTM Profile > Content Filter > Forbidden Web Sites LABEL Common Forbidden Web Sites Add Edit Remove
#
Forbidden Web Sites DESCRIPTION Sites that you want to block access to, regardless of their content rating, can be allowed by adding them to this list. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. This displays the index number of the forbidden web sites. This list displays the forbidden web sites already added. Enter host names such as www.bad-site.com into this text field. Do not enter the complete URL of the site that is, do not include http://. All subdomains are also blocked. For example, entering bad-site.com also blocks www.bad-site.com, partner.bad-site.com, press.bad-site.com, and do on. You can also enter just a top level domain. For example, enter .com to block all .com domains. Apply Cancel Use up to 127 characters (0-9a-z-). The casing does not matter. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 27.6 Content Filter Technical Reference This section provides content filtering background information. External Content Filter Server Lookup Procedure The content filter lookup process is described below. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 432 Chapter 27 Content Filtering Figure 293 Content Filter Lookup Procedure 1 2 A computer behind the USG tries to access a web site. The USG looks up the web site in its cache. If an attempt to access the web site was made in the past, a record of that web sites category will be in the USGs cache. The USG blocks, blocks and logs or just logs the request based on your configuration. 3 Use the Content Filter Cache screen to configure how long a web site address remains in the cache as well as view those web site addresses. All of the web site address records are also cleared from the local cache when the USG restarts. 4 If the USG has no record of the web site, it queries the external content filter database and simultaneously sends the request to the web server. 5 The external content filter server sends the category information back to the USG, which then blocks and/or logs access to the web site based on the settings in the content filter profile. The web sites address and category are then stored in the USGs content filter cache. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 433 CHAPTER 28 Anti-Spam 28.1 Overview The anti-spam feature can mark or discard spam (unsolicited commercial or junk e-mail). Use the white list to identify legitimate e-mail. Use the black list to identify spam e-mail. The USG can also check e-mail against a DNS black list (DNSBL) of IP addresses of servers that are suspected of being used by spammers. 28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Profile screens (Section 28.3 on page 436) to turn anti-spam on or off and manage anti-
spam policies. Use the Mail Scan screen (Section 28.4 on page 439) to enable and configure the mail scan functions. Use the Black/White List screens (Section 28.5 on page 441) to set up a black list to identify spam and a white list to identify legitimate e-mail. Use the DNSBL screens (Section 28.7 on page 446) to have the USG check e-mail against DNS Black Lists. 28.1.2 What You Need to Know White List Configure white list entries to identify legitimate e-mail. The white list entries have the USG classify any e-mail that is from a specified sender or uses a specified header field and header value as being legitimate (see E-mail Headers on page 435 for more on mail headers). The anti-spam feature checks an e-mail against the white list entries before doing any other anti-spam checking. If the e-
mail matches a white list entry, the USG classifies the e-mail as legitimate and does not perform any more anti-spam checking on that individual e-mail. A properly configured white list helps keep important e-mail from being incorrectly classified as spam. The white list can also increases the USGs anti-spam speed and efficiency by not having the USG perform the full anti-spam checking process on legitimate e-mail. Black List Configure black list entries to identify spam. The black list entries have the USG classify any e-mail that is from or forwarded by a specified IP address or uses a specified header field and header value as being spam. If an e-mail does not match any of the white list entries, the USG checks it against the black list entries. The USG classifies an e-mail that matches a black list entry as spam and immediately takes the configured action for dealing with spam. If an e-mail matches a blacklist entry, the USG does not perform any more anti-spam checking on that individual e-mail. A properly USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 434 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam configured black list helps catch spam e-mail and increases the USGs anti-spam speed and efficiency. SMTP and POP3 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the Internets message transport standard. It controls the sending of e-mail messages between servers. E-mail clients (also called e-mail applications) then use mail server protocols such as POP (Post Office Protocol) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) to retrieve e-mail. E-mail clients also generally use SMTP to send messages to a mail server. The older POP2 requires SMTP for sending messages while the newer POP3 can be used with or without it. This is why many e-mail applications require you to specify both the SMTP server and the POP or IMAP server (even though they may actually be the same server). The USGs anti-spam feature checks SMTP (TCP port 25) and POP3 (TCP port 110) e-mails by default. You can also specify custom SMTP and POP3 ports for the USG to check. E-mail Headers Every email has a header and a body. The header is structured into fields and includes the addresses of the recipient and sender, the subject, and other information about the e-mail and its journey. The body is the actual message text and any attachments. You can have the USG check for specific header fields with specific values. E-mail programs usually only show you the To:, From:, Subject:, and Date: header fields but there are others such as Received: and Content-Type:. To see all of an e-mails header, you can select an e-mail in your e-mail program and look at its properties or details. For example, in Microsofts Outlook Express, select a mail and click File > Properties > Details. This displays the e-mails header. Click Message Source to see the source for the entire mail including both the header and the body. E-mail Header Buffer Size The USG has a 5 K buffer for an individual e-mail header. If an e-mails header is longer than 5 K, the USG only checks up to the first 5 K. DNSBL A DNS Black List (DNSBL) is a server that hosts a list of IP addresses known or suspected of having sent or forwarded spam. A DNSBL is also known as a DNS spam blocking list. The USG can check the routing addresses of e-mail against DNSBLs and classify an e-mail as spam if it was sent or forwarded by a computer with an IP address in the DNSBL. Finding Out More See Section 28.8 on page 448 for more background information on anti-spam. 28.2 Before You Begin Before using the Anti-Spam features (IP Reputation, Mail Content Analysis and Virus Outbreak Detection) you must activate your Anti-Spam Service license. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 435 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Configure your zones before you configure anti-spam. 28.3 The Anti-Spam Profile Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam to open the Anti-Spam Profile screen. Use this screen to turn the anti-spam feature on or off and manage anti-spam policies. You can also select the action the USG takes when the mail sessions threshold is reached. Click on the icons to go to the OneSecurity.com website where there is guidance on configuration walkthroughs, troubleshooting and other information. Figure 294 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Profilel The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 169 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Profile LABEL General Settings Action taken when mail sessions threshold is reached An e-mail session is when an e-mail client and e-mail server (or two e-mail servers) connect through the USG. Select how to handle concurrent e-mail sessions that exceed the maximum number of concurrent e-mail sessions that the anti-spam feature can handle. See the chapter of product specifications for the threshold. Select Forward Session to have the USG allow the excess e-mail sessions without any spam filtering. Select Drop Session to have the USG drop mail connections to stop the excess e-mail sessions. The e-mail client or server will have to re-attempt to send or receive e-mail later when the number of e-mail sessions is under the threshold. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. Add Edit Remove USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 436 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Table 169 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. Click Refresh to update information in this screen. This is the index number of the anti-spam rule. Antis-spam rules are applied in turn. The name identifies the anti-spam rule. This is some optional extra information on the rule. This shows which types (protocols) of traffic to scan for spam. This shows how many objects are referenced in the rule. Object Reference Priority Name Description Scan Options Reference License License Status This read-only field displays the status of your anti-spam scanning service registration. Not Licensed displays if you have not successfully registered and activated the service. Expired displays if your subscription to the service has expired. License Type Licensed displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the service. This read-only field displays what kind of service registration you have for the anti-spam scanning. None displays if you have not successfully registered and activated the service. Standard displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the service with your iCards PIN number. Trial displays if you have successfully registered the USG and activated the trial service subscription. This field displays the date your service license expires. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Expiration Date Apply Reset 28.3.1 The Anti-Spam Profile Add or Edit Screen Click the Add or Edit icon in the Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Profile screen to display the configuration screen as shown next. Use this screen to configure an anti-spam policy that controls what traffic direction of e-mail to check, which e-mail protocols to scan, the scanning options, and the action to take on spam traffic. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 437 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Figure 295 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Profile > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 170 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Profile > Add LABEL General Settings DESCRIPTION Name Description Log Enter a descriptive name for this anti-spam rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Enter a description for the anti-spam rule to help identify the purpose of rule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. This field is optional. Select how the USG is to log the event when the DNSBL times out or an e-mail matches the white list, black list, or DNSBL. no: Do not create a log. log: Create a log on the USG. log alert: An alert is an e-mailed log for more serious events that may need more immediate attention. Select this option to have the USG send an alert. Scan Options Check White List Select this check box to check e-mail against the white list. The USG classifies e-mail that matches a white list entry as legitimate (not spam). Check Black List Select this check box to check e-mail against the black list. The USG classifies e-mail Check IP Reputation
(SMTP Only) that matches a black list entry as spam. Select this to use IP reputation to identify Spam or Unwanted Bulk Email by the senders IP address. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 438 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Table 170 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Profile > Add (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to identify Spam Email by content, such as malicious content. Check Mail Content Check Virus Outbreak Check DNSBL Actions for Spam Mail Select this to scan emails for attached viruses. Select this check box to check e-mail against the USGs configured DNSBL domains. The USG classifies e-mail that matches a DNS black list as spam. Use this section to set how the USG is to handle spam mail. SMTP Select how the USG is to handle spam SMTP mail. Select drop to discard spam SMTP mail. Select forward to allow spam SMTP mail to go through. POP3 OK Cancel Select forward with tag to add a spam tag to an SMTP spam mails mail subject and send it on to the destination. Select how the USG is to handle spam POP3 mail. Select forward to allow spam POP3 mail to go through. Select forward with tag to add a spam tag to an POP3 spam mails mail subject and send it on to the destination. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 28.4 The Mail Scan Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Mail Scan to open the Mail Scan screen. Use this screen to enable and configure the Mail Scan functions. You must first enable the Mail Scan functions on this screen before selecting them in the Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam
> Profile > Add/Edit screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 439 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Figure 296 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Mail Scan The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 171 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Mail Scan LABEL Sender Reputation Enable Sender Reputation Checking (SMTP only) Mail Content Analysis Enable Mail Content Analysis Mail Content Spam Tag Select this to have the USG scan for spam e-mail by IP Reputation. Spam or Unwanted Bulk Email is determined by the senders IP address. Select this to identify Spam Email by content, such as malicious content. Enter a message or label (up to 15 ASCII characters) to add to the beginning of the mail subject of e-mails that are determined to spam based on the mail content analysis. This tag is only added if the anti-spam policy is configured to forward spam mail with a spam tag. Specify the name and value for the X-Header to be added when an email is determined to be spam by mail content. Mail Content X-
Header Virus Outbreak Detection USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 440 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam DESCRIPTION This scans emails for attached viruses. Table 171 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Mail Scan LABEL Enable Virus Outbreak Detection Virus Outbreak Tag Enter a message or label (up to 15 ASCII characters) to add to the beginning of the mail subject of e-mails that are determined have an attached viruses. This tag is only added if the anti-spam policy is configured to forward spam mail with a spam tag. Specify the name and value for the X-Header to be added when an email is determined to have an attached virus. Virus Outbreak X-
Header Query Timeout Settings SMTP Select how the USG is to handle SMTP mail query timeout. Select drop to discard SMTP mail. Select forward to allow SMTP mail to go through. POP3 Select forward with tag to add a tag to an SMTP query timeout mails mail subject and send it on to the destination. Select how the USG is to handle POP3 mail query timeout. Select forward to allow POP3 mail to go through. Select forward with tag to add a tag to an POP3 query timeout mails mail subject and send it on to the destination. Set how long the USG waits for a reply from the mail scan server. If there is no reply before this time period expires, the USG takes the action defined in the relevant Actions when Query Timeout field. Enter a message or label (up to 15 ASCII characters) to add to the mail subject of e-
mails that the USG forwards if queries to the mail scan servers time out. Timeout Value Timeout Tag Timeout X-Header Specify the name and value for the X-Header to be added when queries to the mail scan Apply Reset servers time out. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 28.5 The Anti-Spam Black List Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black /White List to display the Anti-Spam Black List screen. Configure the black list to identify spam e-mail. You can create black list entries based on the senders or relay servers IP address or e-mail address. You can also create entries that check for particular e-mail header fields with specific values or specific subject text. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 441 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Figure 297 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List > Black List The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 172 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List > Black List LABEL General Settings Enable Black List Checking Black List Spam Tag Select this check box to have the USG treat e-mail that matches (an active) black list entry as spam. Enter a message or label (up to 15 ASCII characters) to add to the mail subject of e-
mails that match the USGs spam black list. Specify the name and value for the X-Header to be added to e-mails that match the USGs spam black list. Black List X-Header Rule Summary Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Status
#
Type Content Apply Reset Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the entrys index number in the list. This field displays whether the entry is based on the e-mails subject, source or relay IP address, source e-mail address, or header. This field displays the subject content, source or relay IP address, source e-mail address, or header value for which the entry checks. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 442 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam 28.5.1 The Anti-Spam Black or White List Add/Edit Screen In the anti-spam Black List or White List screen, click the Add icon or an Edit icon to display the following screen. Use this screen to configure an anti-spam black list entry to identify spam e-mail. You can create entries based on specific subject text, or the senders or relays IP address or e-mail address. You can also create entries that check for particular header fields and values. Figure 298 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List > Black List (or White List)
> Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 173 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List > Black/White List > Add LABEL Enable Rule DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG use this entry as part of the black or white list. To actually use the entry, you must also turn on the use of the list in the corresponding list screen, enable the anti-spam feature in the anti-spam general screen, and configure an anti-spam policy to use the list. Use this field to base the entry on the e-mails subject, source or relay IP address, source e-mail address, or header. Select Subject to have the USG check e-mail for specific content in the subject line. Select IP Address to have the USG check e-mail for a specific source or relay IP address. Select IPv6 Address to have the USG check e-mail for a specific source or relay IPv6 address. Select E-Mail Address to have the USG check e-mail for a specific source e-mail address or domain name. Select Mail Header to have the USG check e-mail for specific header fields and values. Configure black list header entries to check for e-mail from bulk mail programs or with content commonly used in spam. Configure white list header entries to allow certain header values that identify the e-mail as being from a trusted source. This field displays when you select the Subject type. Enter up to 63 ASCII characters of text to check for in e-mail headers. Spaces are not allowed, although you could substitute a question mark (?). See Section 28.5.2 on page 444 for more details. This field displays when you select the IP Address type. Enter an IP address in dotted decimal notation. This field displays when you select the IPv6 Address type. Enter an IPv6 address with prefix. This field displays when you select the IP type. Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable. This field displays when you select the E-Mail type. Enter a keyword (up to 63 ASCII characters). See Section 28.5.2 on page 444 for more details. Type Mail Subject Keyword Sender or Mail Relay IP Address Sender or Mail Relay IPv6 Address Netmask Sender E-Mail Address USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 443 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Table 173 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List > Black/White List > Add LABEL Mail Header Field Name DESCRIPTION This field displays when you select the Mail Header type. Type the name part of an e-mail header (the part that comes before the colon). Use up to 63 ASCII characters. Field Value Keyword For example, if you want the entry to check the Received: header for a specific mail servers domain, enter Received here. This field displays when you select the Mail Header type. Type the value part of an e-mail header (the part that comes after the colon). Use up to 63 ASCII characters. For example, if you want the entry to check the Received: header for a specific mail servers domain, enter the mail servers domain here. OK Cancel See Section 28.5.2 on page 444 for more details. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 28.5.2 Regular Expressions in Black or White List Entries The following applies for a black or white list entry based on an e-mail subject, e-mail address, or e-mail header value. Use a question mark (?) to let a single character vary. For example, use a?c (without the quotation marks) to specify abc, acc and so on. You can also use a wildcard (*). For example, if you configure *def.com, any e-mail address that ends in def.com matches. So mail.def.com matches. The wildcard can be anywhere in the text string and you can use more than one wildcard. You cannot use two wildcards side by side, there must be other characters between them. The USG checks the first header with the name you specified in the entry. So if the e-mail has more than one Received header, the USG checks the first one. 28.6 The Anti-Spam White List Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List and then the White List tab to display the Anti-Spam White List screen. Configure the white list to identify legitimate e-mail. You can create white list entries based on the senders or relays IP address or e-mail address. You can also create entries that check for particular header fields and values or specific subject text. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 444 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Figure 299 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List > White List The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 174 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > Black/White List > White List LABEL General Settings Enable White List Checking White List X-Header Select this check box to have the USG forward e-mail that matches (an active) white list entry without doing any more anti-spam checking on that individual e-mail. Specify the name and value for the X-Header to be added to e-mails that match the USGs spam white list. Rule Summary Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Status
#
Type Content Apply Reset Click this to create a new entry. See Section 28.5.1 on page 443 for details. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. See Section 28.5.1 on page 443 for details. Select an entry and click this to delete it. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the entrys index number in the list. This field displays whether the entry is based on the e-mails subject, source or relay IP address, source e-mail address, or a header. This field displays the subject content, source or relay IP address, source e-mail address, or header value for which the entry checks. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 445 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam 28.7 The DNSBL Screen Click Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > DNSBL to display the anti-spam DNSBL screen. Use this screen to configure the USG to check the sender and relay IP addresses in e-mail headers against DNS (Domain Name Service)-based spam Black Lists (DNSBLs). Figure 300 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > DNSBL USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 446 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 175 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > DNSBL LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Enable DNS Black List
(DNSBL) Checking DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. DNSBL Spam Tag DSBNL X-Header Max. IPs Checking Per Mail IP Selection Per Mail Query Timeout Setting SMTP POP3 Timeout Value Timeout Tag Timeout X-Header DNSBL Domain List Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Select this to have the USG check the sender and relay IP addresses in e-mail headers against the DNSBL servers maintained by the DNSBL domains listed in the USG. Enter a message or label (up to 15 ASCII characters) to add to the beginning of the mail subject of e-mails that have a sender or relay IP address in the header that matches a black list maintained by one of the DNSBL domains listed in the USG. This tag is only added if the anti-spam policy is configured to forward spam mail with a spam tag. Specify the name and value for the X-Header to be added to e-mails that have a sender or relay IP address in the header that matches a black list maintained by one of the DNSBL domains listed in the USG. Set the maximum number of sender and relay server IP addresses in the mail header to check against the DNSBL domain servers. Select first N IPs to have the USG start checking from the first IP address in the mail header. This is the IP of the sender or the first server that forwarded the mail. Select last N IPs to have the USG start checking from the last IP address in the mail header. This is the IP of the last server that forwarded the mail. Select how the USG is to handle SMTP mail (mail going to an e-mail server) if the queries to the DNSBL domains time out. Select drop to discard SMTP mail. Select forward to allow SMTP mail to go through. Select forward with tag to add a DNSBL timeout tag to the mail subject of an SMTP mail and send it. Select how the USG is to handle POP3 mail (mail coming to an e-mail client) if the queries to the DNSBL domains time out. Select forward to allow POP3 mail to go through. Select forward with tag to add a DNSBL timeout tag to the mail subject of an POP3 mail and send it. Set how long the USG waits for a reply from the DNSBL domains listed below. If there is no reply before this time period expires, the USG takes the action defined in the relevant Actions when Query Timeout field. Enter a message or label (up to 15 ASCII characters) to add to the mail subject of e-
mails that the USG forwards if queries to the DNSBL domains time out. Specify the name and value for the X-Header to be added to e-mails that the USG forwards if queries to the DNSBL domains time out. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click this to be able to modify it. Select an entry and click this to delete it. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 447 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Table 175 Configuration > UTM Profile > Anti-Spam > DNSBL (continued) LABEL Status DESCRIPTION The activate (light bulb) icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This is the entrys index number in the list. This is the name of a domain that maintains DNSBL servers. Enter the domain that is maintaining a DNSBL. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
#
DNSBL Domain Apply Reset 28.8 Anti-Spam Technical Reference Here is more detailed anti-spam information. DNSBL The USG checks only public sender and relay IP addresses, it does not check private IP addresses. The USG sends a separate query (DNS lookup) for each sender or relay IP address in the e-mails header to each of the USGs DNSBL domains at the same time. The DNSBL servers send replies as to whether or not each IP address matches an entry in their list. Each IP address has a separate reply. As long as the replies are indicating the IP addresses do not match entries on the DNSBL lists, the USG waits until it receives at least one reply for each IP address. If the USG receives a DNSBL reply that one of the IP addresses is in the DNSBL list, the USG immediately classifies the e-mail as spam and takes the anti-spam policys configured action for spam. The USG does not wait for any more DNSBL replies. If the USG receives at least one non-spam reply for each of an e-mails routing IP addresses, the USG immediately classifies the e-mail as legitimate and forwards it. Any further DNSBL replies that come after the USG classifies an e-mail as spam or legitimate have no effect. The USG records DNSBL responses for IP addresses in a cache for up to 72 hours. The USG checks an e-mails sender and relay IP addresses against the cache first and only sends DNSBL queries for IP addresses that are not in the cache. Here is an example of an e-mail classified as spam based on DNSBL replies. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 448 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Figure 301 DNSBL Spam Detection Example IPs: a.a.a.a b.b.b.b 1 4 m ot s p a 2 a.a.a.a ?
b.b.b.b ?
a.a.a.a N a.a.a.a?
b.b.b.b?
DNSBL A DNSBL B a.a.a.a?b.b.b.b?
b.b.b.b Spam DNSBL C 3 1 The USG receives an e-mail that was sent from IP address a.a.a.a and relayed by an e-mail server at IP address b.b.b.b. The USG sends a separate query to each of its DNSBL domains for IP address a.a.a.a. The USG sends another separate query to each of its DNSBL domains for IP address b.b.b.b. 2 DNSBL A replies that IP address a.a.a.a does not match any entries in its list (not spam). 3 DNSBL C replies that IP address b.b.b.b matches an entry in its list. 4 The USG immediately classifies the e-mail as spam and takes the action for spam that you defined in the anti-spam policy. In this example it was an SMTP mail and the defined action was to drop the mail. The USG does not wait for any more DNSBL replies. Here is an example of an e-mail classified as legitimate based on DNSBL replies. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 449 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Figure 302 DNSBL Legitimate E-mail Detection Example IPs: c.c.c.c d.d.d.d 1 4 DNSBL A DNSBL B DNSBL C c.c.c.c ?
d.d.d.d ?
c.c.c.c?
d.d.d.d?
d.d.d.d Not spam c.c.c.c?d.d.d.d?
c.c.c.c Not spam 2 3 1 The USG receives an e-mail that was sent from IP address c.c.c.c and relayed by an e-mail server at IP address d.d.d.d. The USG sends a separate query to each of its DNSBL domains for IP address c.c.c.c. The USG sends another separate query to each of its DNSBL domains for IP address d.d.d.d. 2 DNSBL B replies that IP address d.d.d.d does not match any entries in its list (not spam). 3 DNSBL C replies that IP address c.c.c.c does not match any entries in its list (not spam). 4 Now that the USG has received at least one non-spam reply for each of the e-mails routing IP addresses, the USG immediately classifies the e-mail as legitimate and forwards it. The USG does not wait for any more DNSBL replies. If the USG receives conflicting DNSBL replies for an e-mail routing IP address, the USG classifies the e-mail as spam. Here is an example. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 450 Chapter 28 Anti-Spam Figure 303 Conflicting DNSBL Replies Example IPs: a.b.c.d w.x.y.z 1 4 m ot s p a 2 a.b.c.d ?
w .x.y.z ?
a.b.c.d N a.b.c.d?
w.x.y.z?
a.b.c.d Spam!
a.b.c.d?w.x.y.z?
3 DNSBL A DNSBL B DNSBL C 1 The USG receives an e-mail that was sent from IP address a.b.c.d and relayed by an e-mail server at IP address w.x.y.z. The USG sends a separate query to each of its DNSBL domains for IP address a.b.c.d. The USG sends another separate query to each of its DNSBL domains for IP address w.x.y.z. 2 DNSBL A replies that IP address a.b.c.d does not match any entries in its list (not spam). 3 While waiting for a DNSBL reply about IP address w.x.y.z, the USG receives a reply from DNSBL B saying IP address a.b.c.d is in its list. 4 The USG immediately classifies the e-mail as spam and takes the action for spam that you defined in the anti-spam policy. In this example it was an SMTP mail and the defined action was to drop the mail. The USG does not wait for any more DNSBL replies. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 451 CHAPTER 29 Object 29.1 Zones Overview Set up zones to configure network security and network policies in the USG. A zone is a group of interfaces and/or VPN tunnels. The USG uses zones instead of interfaces in many security and policy settings, such as Secure Policies rules, UTM Profile, and remote management. Zones cannot overlap. Each Ethernet interface, VLAN interface, bridge interface, PPPoE/PPTP interface and VPN tunnel can be assigned to at most one zone. Virtual interfaces are automatically assigned to the same zone as the interface on which they run. Figure 304 Example: Zones Use the Zone screens (see Section 29.7.2 on page 497) to manage the USGs zones. 29.1.1 What You Need to Know Zones effectively divide traffic into three types--intra-zone traffic, inter-zone traffic, and extra-zone traffic. Intra-zone Traffic Intra-zone traffic is traffic between interfaces or VPN tunnels in the same zone. For example, in Figure 304 on page 452, traffic between VLAN 2 and the Ethernet is intra-zone traffic. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 452 Chapter 29 Object Inter-zone Traffic Inter-zone traffic is traffic between interfaces or VPN tunnels in different zones. For example, in Figure 304 on page 452, traffic between VLAN 1 and the Internet is inter-zone traffic. This is the normal case when zone-based security and policy settings apply. Extra-zone Traffic Extra-zone traffic is traffic to or from any interface or VPN tunnel that is not assigned to a zone. For example, in Figure 304 on page 452, traffic to or from computer C is extra-zone traffic. Some zone-based security and policy settings may apply to extra-zone traffic, especially if you can set the zone attribute in them to Any or All. See the specific feature for more information. 29.1.2 The Zone Screen The Zone screen provides a summary of all zones. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove zones. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Zone. Figure 305 Configuration > Object > Zone The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 176 Configuration > Object > Zone LABEL User Configuration /
System Default Add Edit DESCRIPTION The USG comes with pre-configured System Default zones that you cannot delete. You can create your own User Configuration zones Click this to create a new, user-configured zone. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove a user-configured trunk, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. Click Refresh to update information in this screen. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any interface. This field displays the name of the zone. This field displays the names of the interfaces that belong to each zone. This field displays the number of times an Object Reference is used in a policy. Remove Object References
#
Name Member Reference USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 453 Chapter 29 Object 29.1.2.1 Zone Edit The Zone Edit screen allows you to add or edit a zone. To access this screen, go to the Zone screen (see Section 29.7.2 on page 497), and click the Add icon or an Edit icon. Figure 306 Configuration > Object > Zone > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 177 Configuration > Object > Zone > Add/Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION For a system default zone, the name is read only. For a user-configured zone, type the name used to refer to the zone. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores (_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Available lists the interfaces and VPN tunnels that do not belong to any zone. Select the interfaces and VPN tunnels that you want to add to the zone you are editing, and click the right arrow button to add them. Member lists the interfaces and VPN tunnels that belong to the zone. Select any interfaces that you want to remove from the zone, and click the left arrow button to remove them. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Member List OK Cancel 29.2 User/Group Overview This section describes how to set up user accounts, user groups, and user settings for the USG. You can also set up rules that control when users have to log in to the USG before the USG routes traffic for them. The User screen (see Section 29.2.2 on page 457) provides a summary of all user accounts. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 454 Chapter 29 Object The Group screen (see Section 29.2.3 on page 460) provides a summary of all user groups. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove user groups. User groups may consist of access users and other user groups. You cannot put admin users in user groups The Setting screen (see Section 29.2.4 on page 461) controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the USG. You can also use this screen to specify when users must log in to the USG before it routes traffic for them. The MAC Address screen (see Section 29.2.5 on page 466) allows you to configure the MAC addresses or OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) of wireless clients for MAC authentication using the local user database. The OUI is the first three octets in a MAC address and uniquely identifies the manufacturer of a network device. 29.2.1 What You Need To Know User Account A user account defines the privileges of a user logged into the USG. User accounts are used in security policies, in addition to controlling access to configuration and services in the USG. User Types These are the types of user accounts the USG uses. ABILITIES Table 178 Types of User Accounts TYPE Admin Users admin limited-admin Change USG configuration (web, CLI) Look at USG configuration (web, CLI) LOGIN METHOD(S) WWW, TELNET, SSH, FTP, Console WWW, TELNET, SSH, Console Perform basic diagnostics (CLI) Access Users user guest ext-user ext-group-user Access network services WWW, TELNET, SSH Browse user-mode commands (CLI) Access network services External user account External group user account WWW WWW WWW Note: The default admin account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the authentication method setting. (See Chapter 29 on page 510 for more information about authentication methods.) Ext-User Accounts Set up an ext-user account if the user is authenticated by an external server and you want to set up specific policies for this user in the USG. If you do not want to set up policies for this user, you do not have to set up an ext-user account. All ext-user users should be authenticated by an external server, such as AD, LDAP or RADIUS. If the USG tries to use the local database to authenticate an ext-user, the authentication attempt always fails. (This is related to AAA servers and authentication methods, which are discussed in those chapters in this guide.) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 455 Chapter 29 Object Note: If the USG tries to authenticate an ext-user using the local database, the attempt always fails. Once an ext-user user has been authenticated, the USG tries to get the user type (see Table 178 on page 455) from the external server. If the external server does not have the information, the USG sets the user type for this session to User. For the rest of the user attributes, such as reauthentication time, the USG checks the following places, in order. 1 User account in the remote server. 2 User account (Ext-User) in the USG. 3 Default user account for AD users (ad-users), LDAP users (ldap-users) or RADIUS users (radius-
users) in the USG. See Setting up User Attributes in an External Server on page 468 for a list of attributes and how to set up the attributes in an external server. Ext-Group-User Accounts Ext-Group-User accounts work are similar to ext-user accounts but allow you to group users by the value of the group membership attribute configured for the AD or LDAP server. See Section 29.8.5.1 on page 505 for more on the group membership attribute. User Groups User groups may consist of user accounts or other user groups. Use user groups when you want to create the same rule for several user accounts, instead of creating separate rules for each one. Note: You cannot put access users and admin users in the same user group. Note: You cannot put the default admin account into any user group. The sequence of members in a user group is not important. User Awareness By default, users do not have to log into the USG to use the network services it provides. The USG automatically routes packets for everyone. If you want to restrict network services that certain users can use via the USG, you can require them to log in to the USG first. The USG is then aware of the user who is logged in and you can create user-aware policies that define what services they can use. See Section 29.2.6 on page 467 for a user-aware login example. Finding Out More See Section 29.2.6 on page 467 for some information on users who use an external authentication server in order to log in. The USG supports TTLS using PAP so you can use the USGs local user database to authenticate users with WPA or WPA2 instead of needing an external RADIUS server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 456 Chapter 29 Object 29.2.2 User/Group User Summary Screen The User screen provides a summary of all user accounts. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User/Group. Figure 307 Configuration > Object > User/Group > User The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 179 Configuration > Object > User/Group > User LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. This field displays the user name of each user. This field displays the types of user accounts the USG uses:
Remove Object References
#
User Name User Type admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the USG user - this user has access to the USGs services and can also browse user-mode limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the USG but not to change it commands (CLI). guest - this user has access to the USGs services but cannot look at the configuration ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-User Accounts on page 455 for more information about this type. ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-Group-User Accounts on page 456 for more information about this type. Description Reference This field displays the description for each user. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. 29.2.2.1 User Add/Edit Screen The User Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new user account or edit an existing one. 29.2.2.2 Rules for User Names Enter a user name from 1 to 31 characters. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 457 Chapter 29 Object The user name can only contain the following characters:
Alphanumeric A-z 0-9 (there is no unicode support) _ [underscores]
- [dashes]
The first character must be alphabetical (A-Z a-z), an underscore (_), or a dash (-). Other limitations on user names are:
User names are case-sensitive. If you enter a user 'bob' but use 'BOB' when connecting via CIFS or FTP, it will use the account settings used for 'BOB' not bob. User names have to be different than user group names. Here are the reserved user names:
adm debug ldap-users operator sync admin devicehaecived lp radius-users uucp any ftp mail root zyxel bin games news shutdown daemon halt nobody sshd To access this screen, go to the User screen (see Section 29.2.2 on page 457), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. Figure 308 Configuration > Object > User/Group > User > Add USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 458 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 180 Configuration > Object > User/Group > User > Add LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION Type the user name for this user account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. User names have to be different than user group names, and some words are reserved. See Section 29.2.2.2 on page 457. This field displays the types of user accounts the USG uses:
User Type admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the USG limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the USG but not to change it user - this user has access to the USGs services and can also browse user-mode guest - this user has access to the USGs services but cannot look at the commands (CLI). configuration. ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-User Accounts on page 455 for more information about this type. ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-Group-User Accounts on page 456 for more information about this type. Password This field is not available if you select the ext-user or ext-group-user type. Retype Group Identifier Associated AAA Server Object Description Authentication Timeout Settings Lease Time Reauthentication Time Configuration Validation Enter the password of this user account. It can consist of 4 - 31 alphanumeric characters. This field is not available if you select the ext-user or ext-group-user type. This field is available for a ext-group-user type user account. Specify the value of the AD or LDAP servers Group Membership Attribute that identifies the group to which this user belongs. This field is available for a ext-group-user type user account. Select the AAA server to use to authenticate this accounts users. Enter the description of each user, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Default descriptions are provided. If you want the system to use default settings, select Use Default Settings. If you want to set authentication timeout to a value other than the default settings, select Use Manual Settings then fill your preferred values in the fields that follow. If you select Use Default Settings in the Authentication Timeout Settings field, the default lease time is shown. If you select Use Manual Settings, you need to enter the number of minutes this user has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically (see Section 29.2.4 on page 461), the users can select this check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires. If you select Use Default Settings in the Authentication Timeout Settings field, the default lease time is shown. If you select Use Manual Settings, you need to type the number of minutes this user can be logged into the USG in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out. Use a user account from the group specified above to test if the configuration is correct. Enter the accounts user name in the User Name field and click Test. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 459 Chapter 29 Object Table 180 Configuration > Object > User/Group > User > Add (continued) LABEL OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.2.3 User/Group Group Summary Screen User groups consist of access users and other user groups. You cannot put admin users in user groups. The Group screen provides a summary of all user groups. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove user groups. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group. Figure 309 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 29.2.3.1 on page 460 for more information as well. Table 181 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Removing a group does not remove the user accounts in the group. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user group. This field displays the name of each user group. This field displays the description for each user group. This field lists the members in the user group. Each member is separated by a comma. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. Remove Object References
#
Group Name Description Member Reference 29.2.3.1 Group Add/Edit Screen The Group Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new user group or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Group screen (see Section 29.2.3 on page 460), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 460 Chapter 29 Object Figure 310 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 182 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Group > Add LABEL Name Description Member List DESCRIPTION Type the name for this user group. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. User group names have to be different than user names. Enter the description of the user group, if any. You can use up to 60 characters, punctuation marks, and spaces. The Member list displays the names of the users and user groups that have been added to the user group. The order of members is not important. Select users and groups from the Available list that you want to be members of this group and move them to the Member list. You can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries and use the arrow button to move them. OK Cancel Move any members you do not want included to the Available list. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.2.4 User/Group Setting Screen The Setting screen controls default settings, login settings, lockout settings, and other user settings for the USG. You can also use this screen to specify when users must log in to the USG before it routes traffic for them. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > User/
Group > Setting. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 461 Chapter 29 Object Figure 311 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 183 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting LABEL User Authentication Timeout Settings Default Authentication Timeout Settings DESCRIPTION These authentication timeout settings are used by default when you create a new user account. They also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user accounts authentication timeout settings. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. Edit
#
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 462 Chapter 29 Object Table 183 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION These are the kinds of user account the USG supports. User Type Lease Time Reauthentication Time Miscellaneous Settings Allow renewing lease time automatically Enable user idle detection User idle timeout User Logon Settings Limit the number of simultaneous logons for administration account Maximum number per administration account Limit the number of simultaneous logons for access account Maximum number per access account admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the USG limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the USG but not to change it user - this user has access to the USGs services but cannot look at the guest - this user has access to the USGs services but cannot look at the configuration configuration ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-User Accounts on page 455 for more information about this type. ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-Group-User Accounts on page 456 for more information about this type. This is the default lease time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the number of minutes the user has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically (see Section 29.2.4 on page 461), the users can select this check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires. This is the default reauthentication time in minutes for each type of user account. It defines the number of minutes the user can be logged into the USG in one session before having to log in again. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out. Select this check box if access users can renew lease time automatically, as well as manually, simply by selecting the Updating lease time automatically check box on their screen. This is applicable for access users. Select this check box if you want the USG to monitor how long each access user is logged in and idle (in other words, there is no traffic for this access user). The USG automatically logs out the access user once the User idle timeout has been reached. This is applicable for access users. This field is effective when Enable user idle detection is checked. Type the number of minutes each access user can be logged in and idle before the USG automatically logs out the access user. Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous logins by admin users. If you do not select this, admin users can login as many times as they want at the same time using the same or different IP addresses. This field is effective when Limit ... for administration account is checked. Type the maximum number of simultaneous logins by each admin user. Select this check box if you want to set a limit on the number of simultaneous logins by non-admin users. If you do not select this, access users can login as many times as they want as long as they use different IP addresses. This field is effective when Limit ... for access account is checked. Type the maximum number of simultaneous logins by each access user. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 463 Chapter 29 Object Table 183 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting (continued) LABEL User Lockout Settings DESCRIPTION Enable logon retry limit Maximum retry count Lockout period Apply Reset Select this check box to set a limit on the number of times each user can login unsuccessfully (for example, wrong password) before the IP address is locked out for a specified amount of time. This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the maximum number of times each user can login unsuccessfully before the IP address is locked out for the specified lockout period. The number must be between 1 and 99. This field is effective when Enable logon retry limit is checked. Type the number of minutes the user must wait to try to login again, if logon retry limit is enabled and the maximum retry count is reached. This number must be between 1 and 65,535 (about 45.5 days). Click Apply to save the changes. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 29.2.4.1 Default User Authentication Timeout Settings Edit Screens The Default Authentication Timeout Settings Edit screen allows you to set the default authentication timeout settings for the selected type of user account. These default authentication timeout settings also control the settings for any existing user accounts that are set to use the default settings. You can still manually configure any user accounts authentication timeout settings. To access this screen, go to the Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting screen (see Section 29.2.4 on page 461), and click one of the Default Authentication Timeout Settings sections Edit icons. Figure 312 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting > Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 464 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 184 Configuration > Object > User/Group > Setting > Edit LABEL User Type DESCRIPTION This read-only field identifies the type of user account for which you are configuring the default settings. admin - this user can look at and change the configuration of the USG limited-admin - this user can look at the configuration of the USG but not to change it. user - this user has access to the USGs services but cannot look at the guest - this user has access to the USGs services but cannot look at the configuration. configuration. ext-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-User Accounts on page 455 for more information about this type. ext-group-user - this user account is maintained in a remote server, such as RADIUS or LDAP. See Ext-Group-User Accounts on page 456 for more information about this type. Lease Time Enter the number of minutes this type of user account has to renew the current session before the user is logged out. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Admin users renew the session every time the main screen refreshes in the Web Configurator. Access users can renew the session by clicking the Renew button on their screen. If you allow access users to renew time automatically (see Section 29.2.4 on page 461), the users can select this check box on their screen as well. In this case, the session is automatically renewed before the lease time expires. Type the number of minutes this type of user account can be logged into the USG in one session before the user has to log in again. You can specify 1 to 1440 minutes. You can enter 0 to make the number of minutes unlimited. Unlike Lease Time, the user has no opportunity to renew the session without logging out. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. Reauthentication Time OK Cancel 29.2.4.2 User Aware Login Example Access users cannot use the Web Configurator to browse the configuration of the USG. Instead, after access users log into the USG, the following screen appears. Figure 313 Web Configurator for Non-Admin Users USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 465 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 185 Web Configurator for Non-Admin Users LABEL User-defined lease time (max
... minutes) Renew DESCRIPTION Access users can specify a lease time shorter than or equal to the one that you specified. The default value is the lease time that you specified. Access users can click this button to reset the lease time, the amount of time remaining before the USG automatically logs them out. The USG sets this amount of time according to the User-defined lease time field in this screen Lease time field in the User Add/Edit screen (see Section 29.2.5.1 on page 467) Lease time field in the Setting screen (see Section 29.2.4 on page 461) This box appears if you checked the Allow renewing lease time automatically box in the Setting screen. (See Section 29.2.4 on page 461.) Access users can select this check box to reset the lease time automatically 30 seconds before it expires. Otherwise, access users have to click the Renew button to reset the lease time. This field displays the amount of lease time that remains, though the user might be able to reset it. This field displays the amount of time that remains before the USG automatically logs the access user out, regardless of the lease time. Updating lease time automatically Remaining time before lease timeout Remaining time before auth. timeout 29.2.5 User/Group MAC Address Summary Screen This screen shows the MAC addresses of wireless clients, which can be authenticated by their MAC addresses using the local user database. Click Configuration > Object > User/Group > MAC Address to open this screen. Note: You need to configure an SSID security profiles MAC authentication settings to have the AP use the USGs local database to authenticate wireless clients by their MAC addresses. Figure 314 Configuration > Object > User/Group > MAC Address The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 186 Configuration > Object > User/Group > MAC Address LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 466 Chapter 29 Object Table 186 Configuration > Object > User/Group > MAC Address (continued) LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. This field displays the MAC address or OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier of computer hardware manufacturers) of wireless clients using MAC authentication with the USG local user database. This field displays a description of the device identified by the MAC address or OUI. MAC Address/
OUI Description 29.2.5.1 MAC Address Add/Edit Screen This screen allows you to create a new allowed device or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the MAC Address screen (see Section 29.2.5 on page 466), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. Figure 315 Configuration > Object > User/Group > MAC Address > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 187 Configuration > Object > User/Group > MAC Address > Add LABEL MAC Address/
OUI DESCRIPTION Type the MAC address (six hexadecimal number pairs separated by colons or hyphens) or OUI (three hexadecimal number pairs separated by colons or hyphens) to identify specific wireless clients for MAC authentication using the USG local user database. The OUI is the first three octets in a MAC address and uniquely identifies the manufacturer of a network device. Enter an optional description of the wireless device(s) identified by the MAC or OUI. You can use up to 60 characters, punctuation marks, and spaces. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. Description OK Cancel 29.2.6 User /Group Technical Reference This section provides some information on users who use an external authentication server in order to log in. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 467 Chapter 29 Object Setting up User Attributes in an External Server To set up user attributes, such as reauthentication time, in LDAP or RADIUS servers, use the following keywords in the user configuration file. Table 188 LDAP/RADIUS: Keywords for User Attributes KEYWORD type leaseTime reauthTime CORRESPONDING ATTRIBUTE IN WEB CONFIGURATOR User Type. Possible Values: admin, limited-admin, user, guest. Lease Time. Possible Values: 1-1440 (minutes). Reauthentication Time. Possible Values: 1-1440 (minutes). The following examples show you how you might set up user attributes in LDAP and RADIUS servers. Figure 316 LDAP Example: Keywords for User Attributes type: admin leaseTime: 99 reauthTime: 199 Figure 317 RADIUS Example: Keywords for User Attributes type=user;leaseTime=222;reauthTime=222 Creating a Large Number of Ext-User Accounts If you plan to create a large number of Ext-User accounts, you might use CLI commands, instead of the Web Configurator, to create the accounts. Extract the user names from the LDAP or RADIUS server, and create a shell script that creates the user accounts. 29.3 AP Profile Overview This section shows you how to configure preset profiles for the Access Points (APs) connected to your USGs wireless network. The Radio screen (Section 29.3.1 on page 469) creates radio configurations that can be used by the APs. The SSID screen (Section 29.3.2 on page 475) configures three different types of profiles for your networked APs. 29.3.0.1 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this section. Wireless Profiles At the heart of all wireless AP configurations on the USG are profiles. A profile represents a group of saved settings that you can use across any number of connected APs. You can set up the following wireless profile types:
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 468 Chapter 29 Object Radio - This profile type defines the properties of an APs radio transmitter. You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the USG. SSID - This profile type defines the properties of a single wireless network signal broadcast by an AP. Each radio on a single AP can broadcast up to 8 SSIDs. You can have a maximum of 32 SSID profiles on the USG. Security - This profile type defines the security settings used by a single SSID. It controls the encryption method required for a wireless client to associate itself with the SSID. You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the USG. MAC Filtering - This profile provides an additional layer of security for an SSID, allowing you to block access or allow access to that SSID based on wireless client MAC addresses. If a clients MAC address is on the list, then it is either allowed or denied, depending on how you set up the MAC Filter profile. You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the USG. SSID The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) is the name that identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. In other words, it is the name of the wireless network that clients use to connect to it. WEP WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption scrambles all data packets transmitted between the AP and the wireless stations associated with it in order to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key for data encryption and decryption. WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA(2) and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. IEEE 802.1x The IEEE 802.1x standard outlines enhanced security methods for both the authentication of wireless stations and encryption key management. Authentication is done using an external RADIUS server. 29.3.1 Radio Screen This screen allows you to create radio profiles for the APs on your network. A radio profile is a list of settings that the built-in AP can use to configure its radio transmitters. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 469 Chapter 29 Object Note: You can have a maximum of 32 radio profiles on the USG. Figure 318 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new radio profile. Click this to edit the selected radio profile. Click this to remove the selected radio profile. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. Table 189 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Radio LABEL Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Object Reference Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected radio profile.
#
This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. Status This field indicates the name assigned to the radio profile. Profile Name This field indicates the frequency band which this radio profile is configured to use. Frequency Band Channel ID This field indicates the broadcast channel which this radio profile is configured to use. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Apply Reset Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 470 Chapter 29 Object 29.3.1.1 Add/Edit Radio Profile This screen allows you to create a new radio profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a radio profile from the list and click the Edit button. Figure 319 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 190 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile LABEL Hide / Show Advanced Settings Create New Object DESCRIPTION Click this to hide or show the Advanced Settings in this window. Select an item from this menu to create a new object of that type. Any objects created in this way are automatically linked to this radio profile. General Settings USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 471 Chapter 29 Object Table 190 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile (continued) LABEL Activate Profile Name 802.11 Band DESCRIPTION Select this option to make this profile active. Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters to be used as this profiles name. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Select the wireless band which this radio profile should use. 2.4 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients. Channel Width 5 GHz is the frequency used by IEEE 802.11ac/a/n wireless clients. Select the wireless channel bandwidth you want the AP to use. A standard 20 MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 217Mbps (2.4GHz) or 217Mbps (5GHZ) whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 450Mbps (2.4GHz) or 450Mbps (5GHZ). An IEEE 802.11ac-specific 80MHz channel offers speeds of up to 1.3Gbps. 40 MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. A 80 MHz channel consists of two adjacent 40 MHz channels. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz or 80 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Because not all devices support 40 MHz and/or 80 MHz channels, select 20/40MHz or 20/40/80MHz to allow the AP to adjust the channel bandwidth automatically. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. Select the wireless channel which this radio profile should use. Select DCS to have the AP automatically select the radio channel upon which it broadcasts by scanning the area around it and determining what channels are currently being used by other devices. Select Manual and specify the channels the AP uses. It is recommended that you choose the channel least in use by other APs in the region where this profile will be implemented. This will reduce the amount of interference between wireless clients and the AP to which this profile is assigned. Some 5 GHz channels include the label indoor use only. These are for use with an indoor AP only. Do not use them with an outdoor AP. Note: If you change the country code later, Channel Selection is set to Manual automatically. This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS. Enter a number of minutes. This regulates how often the USG surveys the other APs within its broadcast radius. If the channel on which it is currently broadcasting suddenly comes into use by another AP, the USG will then dynamically select the next available clean channel or a channel with lower interference. This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS. Select this to have the AP wait until all connected clients have disconnected before switching channels. If you disable this then the AP switches channels immediately regardless of any client connections. In this instance, clients that are connected to the AP when it switches channels are dropped. Channel Selection DCS Time Interval Enable DCS Client Aware USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 472 Chapter 29 Object Table 190 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field is available when you set Channel Selection to DCS. 2.4 GHz Channel Selection Method Channel ID Select auto to have the AP search for available channels automatically in the 2.4 GHz band. The available channels vary depending on what you select in the 2.4 GHz Channel Deployment field. Select manual and specify the channels the AP uses in the 2.4 GHz band. This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 2.4 GHz Channel Selection Method to manual. 2.4 GHz Channel Deployment Select the check boxes of the channels that you want the AP to use. This field is available only when you set Channel Selection to DCS and set 2.4 GHz Channel Selection Method to auto. Select Three-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to channels 1,6, and 11, the three channels that are sufficiently attenuated to have almost no impact on one another. In other words, this allows you to minimize channel interference by limiting channel-hopping to these three safe channels. Select Four-Channel Deployment to limit channel switching to four channels. Depending on the country domain, if the only allowable channels are 1-11 then the USG uses channels 1, 4, 7, 11 in this configuration; otherwise, the USG uses channels 1, 5, 9, 13 in this configuration. Four channel deployment expands your pool of possible channels while keeping the channel interference to a minimum. This field is available only when you select 11a, 11a/n or 11ac in the 802.11 Band field. Select this if your APs are operating in an area known to have RADAR devices. This allows the device to downgrade its frequency to below 5 GHz in the event a RADAR signal is detected, thus preventing it from interfering with that signal. Enabling this forces the AP to select a non-DFS channel. This shows auto and allows the AP to search for available channels automatically in the 5 GHz band. Select the country where the USG is located/installed. Enable 5 GHz DFS Aware 5 GHz Channel Selection Method Advanced Settings Country Code The available channels vary depending on the country you selected. Be sure to select the correct/same country for both radios on an AP and all connected APs, in order to prevent roaming failure and interference to other systems. This field is available only when the channel width is 20/40MHz or 20/40/80MHz. Guard Interval Set the guard interval for this radio profile to either short or long. The guard interval is the gap introduced between data transmission from users in order to reduce interference. Reducing the interval increases data transfer rates but also increases interference. Increasing the interval reduces data transfer rates but also reduces interference. Select this to enable A-MPDU aggregation. Message Protocol Data Unit (MPDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames along with their 802.11n headers and wraps them in a 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput in environments that are prone to high error rates. Enter the maximum frame size to be aggregated. Enter the maximum number of frames to be aggregated each time. Enable A-MPDU Aggregation A-MPDU Limit A-MPDU Subframe USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 473 Chapter 29 Object Table 190 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select this to enable A-MSDU aggregation. Beacon Interval When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon Enable A-MSDU Aggregation A-MSDU Limit RTS/CTS Threshold DTIM Enable Signal Threshold Station Signal Threshold Disassociate Station Threshold Allow Station Connection after Multiple Retries Station Retry Count Multicast Settings Transmission Mode Multicast Rate
(Mbps) Mac Service Data Unit (MSDU) aggregation collects Ethernet frames without any of their 802.11n headers and wraps the header-less payload in a single 802.11n MAC header. This method is useful for increasing bandwidth throughput. It is also more efficient than A-MPDU except in environments that are prone to high error rates. Enter the maximum frame size to be aggregated. Use RTS/CTS to reduce data collisions on the wireless network if you have wireless clients that are associated with the same AP but out of range of one another. When enabled, a wireless client sends an RTS (Request To Send) and then waits for a CTS
(Clear To Send) before it transmits. This stops wireless clients from transmitting packets at the same time (and causing data collisions). A wireless client sends an RTS for all packets larger than the number (of bytes) that you enter here. Set the RTS/CTS equal to or higher than the fragmentation threshold to turn RTS/CTS off. interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again. The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low-power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point. Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Active Power Management mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 255. Select the check box to use the signal threshold to ensure wireless clients receive good throughput. This allows only wireless clients with a strong signal to connect to the AP. Clear the check box to not require wireless clients to have a minimum signal strength to connect to the AP. Set a minimum client signal strength. A wireless client is allowed to connect to the AP only when its signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold.
-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -76 is the weakest. Set a minimum kick-off signal strength. When a wireless clients signal strength is lower than the specified threshold, the USG disconnects the wireless client from the AP.
-20 dBm is the strongest signal you can require and -90 is the weakest. Select this option to allow a wireless client to try to associate with the AP again after it is disconnected due to weak signal strength. Set the maximum number of times a wireless client can attempt to re-connect to the AP. Use this section to set a transmission mode and maximum rate for multicast traffic. Set how the AP handles multicast traffic. Select Multicast to Unicast to broadcast wireless multicast traffic to all of the wireless clients as unicast traffic. Unicast traffic dynamically changes the data rate based on the applications bandwidth requirements. The retransmit mechanism of unicast traffic provides more reliable transmission of the multicast traffic, although it also produces duplicate packets. Select Fixed Multicast Rate to send wireless multicast traffic at a single data rate. You must know the multicast applications bandwidth requirements and set it in the following field. If you set the multicast transmission mode to fixed multicast rate, set the data rate for multicast traffic here. For example, to deploy 4 Mbps video, select a fixed multicast rate higher than 4 Mbps. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 474 Chapter 29 Object Table 190 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > Add/Edit Radio Profile (continued) LABEL OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.3.2 SSID Screen The SSID screens allow you to configure three different types of profiles for your networked APs: an SSID list, which can assign specific SSID configurations to your APs; a security list, which can assign specific encryption methods to the APs when allowing wireless clients to connect to them;
and a MAC filter list, which can limit connections to an AP based on wireless clients MAC addresses. 29.3.2.1 SSID List This screen allows you to create and manage SSID configurations that can be used by the APs. An SSID, or Service Set IDentifier, is basically the name of the wireless network to which a wireless client can connect. The SSID appears as readable text to any device capable of scanning for wireless frequencies (such as the WiFi adapter in a laptop), and is displayed as the wireless network name when a person makes a connection to it. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID. Note: You can have a maximum of 32 SSID profiles on the USG. Figure 320 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 191 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List LABEL Add Edit Remove Object Reference Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected SSID profile (for example, DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new SSID profile. Click this to edit the selected SSID profile. Click this to remove the selected SSID profile.
#
Profile Name SSID Security Profile QoS radio profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile. This field indicates the name assigned to the SSID profile. This field indicates the SSID name as it appears to wireless clients. This field indicates which (if any) security profile is associated with the SSID profile. This field indicates the QoS type associated with the SSID profile. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 475 Chapter 29 Object Table 191 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > SSID List (continued) LABEL MAC Filtering Profile VLAN ID DESCRIPTION This field indicates which (if any) MAC Filter Profile is associated with the SSID profile. This field indicates the VLAN ID associated with the SSID profile. 29.3.2.2 Add/Edit SSID Profile This screen allows you to create a new SSID profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select an SSID profile from the list and click the Edit button. Figure 321 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Add/Edit SSID Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 192 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Add/Edit SSID Profile LABEL Create new Object Profile Name DESCRIPTION Select an object type from the list to create a new one associated with this SSID profile. Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Enter the SSID name for this profile. This is the name visible on the network to wireless clients. Enter up to 32 characters, spaces and underscores are allowed. Select a security profile from this list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the Create new Object menu to create one. SSID Security Profile Note: It is highly recommended that you create security profiles for all of your SSIDs to enhance your network security. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 476 Chapter 29 Object Table 192 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Add/Edit SSID Profile (continued) LABEL MAC Filtering Profile DESCRIPTION Select a MAC filtering profile from the list to associate with this SSID. If none exist, you can use the Create new Object menu to create one. QoS VLAN ID Hidden SSID Enable Intra-BSS Traffic Blocking Local VAP Setting VLAN Support OK Cancel MAC filtering allows you to limit the wireless clients connecting to your network through a particular SSID by wireless client MAC addresses. Any clients that have MAC addresses not in the MAC filtering profile of allowed addresses are denied connections. The disable setting means no MAC filtering is used. Select a Quality of Service (QoS) access category to associate with this SSID. Access categories minimize the delay of data packets across a wireless network. Certain categories, such as video or voice, are given a higher priority due to the time sensitive nature of their data packets. QoS access categories are as follows:
disable: Turns off QoS for this SSID. All data packets are treated equally and not tagged with access categories. WMM: Enables automatic tagging of data packets. The USG assigns access categories to the SSID by examining data as it passes through it and making a best guess effort. If something looks like video traffic, for instance, it is tagged as such. WMM_VOICE: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as voice data. This is recommended if an SSID is used for activities like placing and receiving VoIP phone calls. WMM_VIDEO: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as video data. This is recommended for activities like video conferencing. WMM_BEST_EFFORT: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as best effort, meaning the data travels the best route it can without displacing higher priority traffic. This is good for activities that do not require the best bandwidth throughput, such as surfing the Internet. WMM_BACKGROUND: All wireless traffic to the SSID is tagged as low priority or background traffic, meaning all other access categories take precedence over this one. If traffic from an SSID does not have strict throughput requirements, then this access category is recommended. For example, an SSID that only has network printers connected to it. Enter the VLAN ID that will be used to tag all traffic originating from this SSID if the VLAN is different from the native VLAN. Select this if you want to hide your SSID from wireless clients. This tells any wireless clients in the vicinity of the AP using this SSID profile not to display its SSID name as a potential connection. Not all wireless clients respect this flag and display it anyway. When an SSID is hidden and a wireless client cannot see it, the only way you can connect to the SSID is by manually entering the SSID name in your wireless connection setup screen(s) (these vary by client, client connectivity software, and operating system). Select this option to prevent crossover traffic from within the same SSID. This part of the screen only applies to USG models that have built-in wireless functionality
(AP) - see Table 1 on page 18. Select On to have the USG assign the VLAN ID listed in the top part of the screen to the built-in AP. Select Off to have the USG ignore the VLAN ID listed in the top part of the screen. Select an Outgoing Interface to have the USG assign an IP address in the same subnet as the selected interface to the built-in AP. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 477 Chapter 29 Object 29.3.2.3 Security List This screen allows you to manage wireless security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. Wireless security is implemented strictly between the AP broadcasting the SSID and the stations that are connected to it. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List. Note: You can have a maximum of 32 security profiles on the USG. Figure 322 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 193 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security List LABEL Add Edit Remove Object Reference Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected security profile (for DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new security profile. Click this to edit the selected security profile. Click this to remove the selected security profile.
#
Profile Name Security Mode example, SSID profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile. This field indicates the name assigned to the security profile. This field indicates this profiles security mode (if any). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 478 Chapter 29 Object 29.3.2.3.1 Add/Edit Security Profile This screen allows you to create a new security profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a security profile from the list and click the Edit button. Note: This screens options change based on the Security Mode selected. Only the default screen is displayed here. Figure 323 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 194 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile LABEL Profile Name DESCRIPTION Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Select a security mode from the list: none, wep, wpa2, or wpa2-mix. Security Mode Radius Server Type Select Internal to use the USGs internal authentication database, or External to use an external RADIUS server for authentication. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 479 Chapter 29 Object DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG use the specified RADIUS server. Table 194 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile LABEL Primary /
Secondary Radius Server Activate Radius Server IP Address Radius Server Port Radius Server Secret MAC Authentication Select this to use an external server or the USGs local database to authenticate wireless Enter the port number of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication. Enter the shared secret password of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication. Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server to be used for authentication. clients by their MAC addresses. Users cannot get an IP address if the MAC authentication fails. Delimiter
(Account) Case (Account) Delimiter
(Calling Station ID) Case (Calling Station ID) 802.1X Auth. Method An external server can use the wireless clients account (username/password) or Calling Station ID for MAC authentication. Configure the ones the external server uses. Select the separator the external server uses for the two-character pairs within account MAC addresses. Select the case (upper or lower) the external server requires for letters in the account MAC addresses. RADIUS servers can require the MAC address in the Calling Station ID RADIUS attribute. Select the separator the external server uses for the pairs in calling station MAC addresses. Select the case (upper or lower) the external server requires for letters in the calling station MAC addresses. Select this to enable 802.1x secure authentication. This field is available only when you set the RADIUS server type to Internal. ReAuthenticatio n Timer Select an authentication method if you have created any in the Configuration >
Object > Auth. Method screen. Enter the interval (in seconds) between authentication requests. Enter a 0 for unlimited requests. The following fields are available if you set Security Mode to wep. Idle Timeout Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is discontinued. Authentication Type Select a WEP authentication method. Choices are Open or Share key. Key Length Select the bit-length of the encryption key to be used in WEP connections. If you select WEP-64:
Enter 10 hexadecimal digits in the range of A-F, a-f and 0-9 (for example, 0x11AA22BB33) for each Key used. or Enter 5 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from a-z, A-Z and 0-9 (for example, MyKey) for each Key used. If you select WEP-128:
Enter 26 hexadecimal digits in the range of A-F, a-f and 0-9 (for example, 0x00112233445566778899AABBCC) for each Key used. or Enter 13 ASCII characters (case sensitive) ranging from a-z, A-Z and 0-9 (for example, MyKey12345678) for each Key used. Key 1~4 Based on your Key Length selection, enter the appropriate length hexadecimal or ASCII key. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 480 Chapter 29 Object Table 194 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > Security Profile > Add/Edit Security Profile LABEL The following fields are available if you set Security Mode to wpa2 or wpa2-mix. PSK DESCRIPTION Select this option to use a Pre-Shared Key with WPA encryption. Enter a pre-shared key of between 8 and 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols) or 64 hexadecimal characters. Select an encryption cipher type from the list. Pre-Shared Key Cipher Type Idle Timeout Group Key Update Timer Pre-Authentication Management Frame Protection OK Cancel auto - This automatically chooses the best available cipher based on the cipher in use by the wireless client that is attempting to make a connection. tkip - This is the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol encryption method added later to the WEP encryption protocol to further secure. Not all wireless clients may support this. aes - This is the Advanced Encryption Standard encryption method. It is a more recent development over TKIP and considerably more robust. Not all wireless clients may support this. Enter the idle interval (in seconds) that a client can be idle before authentication is discontinued. Enter the interval (in seconds) at which the AP updates the group WPA encryption key. This field is available only when you set Security Mode to wpa2 or wpa2-mix and enable 802.1x authentication. Enable or Disable pre-authentication to allow the AP to send authentication information to other APs on the network, allowing connected wireless clients to switch APs without having to re-authenticate their network connection. This field is available only when you select wpa2 or wpa2-mix in the Security Mode field and set Cipher Type to aes. Data frames in 802.11 WLANs can be encrypted and authenticated with WEP, WPA or WPA2. But 802.11 management frames, such as beacon/probe response, association request, association response, de-authentication and disassociation are always unauthenticated and unencrypted. IEEE 802.11w Protected Management Frames allows APs to use the existing security mechanisms (encryption and authentication methods defined in IEEE 802.11i WPA/WPA2) to protect management frames. This helps prevent wireless DoS attacks. Select the check box to enable management frame protection (MFP) to add security to 802.11 management frames. Select Optional if you do not require the wireless clients to support MFP. Management frames will be encrypted if the clients support MFP. Select Required and wireless clients must support MFP in order to join the APs wireless network. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 481 Chapter 29 Object 29.3.2.4 MAC Filter List This screen allows you to create and manage security configurations that can be used by your SSIDs. To access this screen click Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List. Note: You can have a maximum of 32 MAC filtering profiles on the USG. Figure 324 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 195 Configuration > Object > AP Profile > SSID > MAC Filter List LABEL Add Edit Remove Object Reference Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected MAC filtering profile (for DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new MAC filtering profile. Click this to edit the selected MAC filtering profile. Click this to remove the selected MAC filtering profile.
#
Profile Name Filter Action example, SSID profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile. This field indicates the name assigned to the MAC filtering profile. This field indicates this profiles filter action (if any). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 482 Chapter 29 Object 29.3.2.4.1 Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile This screen allows you to create a new MAC filtering profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select a MAC filter profile from the list and click the Edit button. Figure 325 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 196 SSID > MAC Filter List > Add/Edit MAC Filter Profile LABEL Profile Name DESCRIPTION Enter up to 31 alphanumeric characters for the profile name. This name is only visible in the Web Configurator and is only for management purposes. Spaces and underscores are allowed. Select allow to permit the wireless client with the MAC addresses in this profile to connect to the network through the associated SSID; select deny to block the wireless clients with the specified MAC addresses. Click this to add a MAC address to the profiles list. Click this to edit the selected MAC address in the profiles list. Click this to remove the selected MAC address from the profiles list. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific profile. This field specifies a MAC address associated with this profile. This field displays a description for the MAC address associated with this profile. You can click the description to make it editable. Enter up to 60 characters, spaces and underscores allowed. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. Filter Action Add Edit Remove
#
MAC Address Description OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 483 Chapter 29 Object 29.4 MON Profile 29.4.1 Overview This screen allows you to set up monitor mode configurations that allow your connected APs to scan for other wireless devices in the vicinity. 29.4.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter The MON Profile screen (Section 29.4.2 on page 484) creates preset monitor mode configurations that can be used by the APs. 29.4.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Active Scan An active scan is performed when an 802.11-compatible wireless monitoring device is explicitly triggered to scan a specified channel or number of channels for other wireless devices broadcasting on the 802.11 frequencies by sending probe request frames. Passive Scan A passive scan is performed when an 802.11-compatible monitoring device is set to periodically listen to a specified channel or number of channels for other wireless devices broadcasting on the 802.11 frequencies. 29.4.2 MON Profile This screen allows you to create monitor mode configurations that can be used by the APs. To access this screen, login to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > MON Profile. Figure 326 Configuration > Object > MON Profile USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 484 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 197 Configuration > Object > MON Profile LABEL Add Edit Remove Activate Inactivate Object Reference Click this to view which other objects are linked to the selected monitor mode profile (for DESCRIPTION Click this to add a new monitor mode profile. Click this to edit the selected monitor mode profile. Click this to remove the selected monitor mode profile. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate.
#
Status Profile Name Apply Reset example, an AP management profile). This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific user. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor profile. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 29.4.2.1 Add/Edit MON Profile This screen allows you to create a new monitor mode profile or edit an existing one. To access this screen, click the Add button or select and existing monitor mode profile and click the Edit button. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 485 Chapter 29 Object Figure 327 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 198 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile LABEL Activate Profile Name Channel dwell time DESCRIPTION Select this to activate this monitor mode profile. This field indicates the name assigned to the monitor mode profile. Enter the interval (in milliseconds) before the AP switches to another channel for monitoring. Select auto to have the AP switch to the next sequential channel once the Channel dwell time expires. Scan Channel Mode Country Code Select manual to set specific channels through which to cycle sequentially when the Channel dwell time expires. Selecting this options makes the Scan Channel List options available. Select the country where the USG is located/installed. The available channels vary depending on the country you selected. Be sure to select the correct/same country for both radios on an AP and all connected APs, in order to prevent roaming failure and interference to other systems. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 486 Chapter 29 Object Table 198 Configuration > Object > MON Profile > Add/Edit MON Profile (continued) LABEL Set Scan Channel List (2.4 GHz) DESCRIPTION Move a channel from the Available channels column to the Channels selected column to have the APs using this profile scan that channel when Scan Channel Mode is set to manual. Set Scan Channel List (5 GHz) These channels are limited to the 2 GHz range (802.11 b/g/n). Move a channel from the Available channels column to the Channels selected column to have the APs using this profile scan that channel when Scan Channel Mode is set to manual. OK Cancel These channels are limited to the 5 GHz range (802.11 a/n). Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.5 Address Overview Address objects can represent a single IP address or a range of IP addresses. Address groups are composed of address objects and other address groups. The Address screen (Section 29.5.2 on page 487) provides a summary of all addresses in the USG. Use the Address Add/Edit screen to create a new address or edit an existing one. Use the Address Group summary screen (Section 29.5.2.2 on page 489) and the Address Group Add/Edit screen, to maintain address groups in the USG. 29.5.1 What You Need To Know Address objects and address groups are used in dynamic routes, security policies, content filtering, and VPN connection policies. For example, addresses are used to specify where content restrictions apply in content filtering. Please see the respective sections for more information about how address objects and address groups are used in each one. Address groups are composed of address objects and address groups. The sequence of members in the address group is not important. 29.5.2 Address Summary Screen The address screens are used to create, maintain, and remove addresses. There are the types of address objects. HOST - a host address is defined by an IP Address. RANGE - a range address is defined by a Starting IP Address and an Ending IP Address. SUBNET - a network address is defined by a Network IP address and Netmask subnet mask. The Address screen provides a summary of all addresses in the USG. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Address > Address. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 487 Chapter 29 Object Figure 328 Configuration > Object > Address > Address The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 29.5.2.1 on page 488 for more information as well. DESCRIPTION Table 199 Configuration > Object > Address > Address LABEL IPv4 Address Configuration Add Edit Remove Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. This field displays the configured name of each address object. This field displays the type of each address object. INTERFACE means the object uses the settings of one of the USGs interfaces. This field displays the IPv4 addresses represented by each address object. If the objects settings are based on one of the USGs interfaces, the name of the interface displays first followed by the objects current address settings. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. Object References
#
Name Type IPv4 Address Reference 29.5.2.1 IPv4 Address Add/Edit Screen The Configuration > IPv4 Address Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new address or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Address screen (see Section 29.5.2 on page 487), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the IPv4 Address Configuration section. Figure 329 IPv4 Address Configuration > Add/Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 488 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 200 IPv4 Address Configuration > Add/Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Type the name used to refer to the address. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select the type of address you want to create. Choices are: HOST, RANGE, SUBNET, INTERFACE IP, INTERFACE SUBNET, and INTERFACE GATEWAY. Address Type IP Address Starting IP Address Ending IP Address Network Netmask Interface OK Cancel Note: The USG automatically updates address objects that are based on an interfaces IP address, subnet, or gateway if the interfaces IP address settings change. For example, if you change 1s IP address, the USG automatically updates the corresponding interface-based, LAN subnet address object. This field is only available if the Address Type is HOST. This field cannot be blank. Enter the IP address that this address object represents. This field is only available if the Address Type is RANGE. This field cannot be blank. Enter the beginning of the range of IP addresses that this address object represents. This field is only available if the Address Type is RANGE. This field cannot be blank. Enter the end of the range of IP address that this address object represents. This field is only available if the Address Type is SUBNET, in which case this field cannot be blank. Enter the IP address of the network that this address object represents. This field is only available if the Address Type is SUBNET, in which case this field cannot be blank. Enter the subnet mask of the network that this address object represents. Use dotted decimal format. If you selected INTERFACE IP, INTERFACE SUBNET, or INTERFACE GATEWAY as the Address Type, use this field to select the interface of the network that this address object represents. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.5.2.2 Address Group Summary Screen The Address Group screen provides a summary of all address groups. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Address > Address Group. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. Figure 330 Configuration > Object > Address > Address Group USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 489 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 29.5.2.3 on page 490 for more information as well. Table 201 Configuration > Object > Address > Address Group LABEL DESCRIPTION IPv4 Address Group Configuration Add Edit Remove Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address group. This field displays the name of each address group. This field displays the description of each address group, if any. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. Object References
#
Name Description Reference IPv6 Address Group Configuration Add Edit Remove Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address group. This field displays the name of each address group. This field displays the description of each address group, if any. Object References
#
Name Description 29.5.2.3 Address Group Add/Edit Screen The Address Group Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new address group or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Address Group screen (see Section 29.5.2.2 on page 489), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the IPv4 Address Group Configuration or IPv6 Address Group Configuration section. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 490 Chapter 29 Object Figure 331 IPv4/IPv6 Address Group Configuration > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 202 IPv4/IPv6 Address Group Configuration > Add LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Enter a name for the address group. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. This field displays the description of each address group, if any. You can use up to 60 characters, punctuation marks, and spaces. The Member list displays the names of the address and address group objects that have been added to the address group. The order of members is not important. Description Member List Select items from the Available list that you want to be members and move them to the Member list. You can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries and use the arrow button to move them. OK Cancel Move any members you do not want included to the Available list. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.6 Service Overview Use service objects to define TCP applications, UDP applications, and ICMP messages. You can also create service groups to refer to multiple service objects in other features. Use the Service screens (Section 29.6.2 on page 492) to view and configure the USGs list of services and their definitions. Use the Service Group screens (Section 29.6.2 on page 492) to view and configure the USGs list of service groups. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 491 Chapter 29 Object 29.6.1 What You Need to Know IP Protocols IP protocols are based on the eight-bit protocol field in the IP header. This field represents the next-
level protocol that is sent in this packet. This section discusses three of the most common IP protocols. Computers use Transmission Control Protocol (TCP, IP protocol 6) and User Datagram Protocol
(UDP, IP protocol 17) to exchange data with each other. TCP guarantees reliable delivery but is slower and more complex. Some uses are FTP, HTTP, SMTP, and TELNET. UDP is simpler and faster but is less reliable. Some uses are DHCP, DNS, RIP, and SNMP. TCP creates connections between computers to exchange data. Once the connection is established, the computers exchange data. If data arrives out of sequence or is missing, TCP puts it in sequence or waits for the data to be re-transmitted. Then, the connection is terminated. In contrast, computers use UDP to send short messages to each other. There is no guarantee that the messages arrive in sequence or that the messages arrive at all. Both TCP and UDP use ports to identify the source and destination. Each port is a 16-bit number. Some port numbers have been standardized and are used by low-level system processes; many others have no particular meaning. Unlike TCP and UDP, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP, IP protocol 1) is mainly used to send error messages or to investigate problems. For example, ICMP is used to send the response if a computer cannot be reached. Another use is ping. ICMP does not guarantee delivery, but networks often treat ICMP messages differently, sometimes looking at the message itself to decide where to send it. Service Objects and Service Groups Use service objects to define IP protocols. TCP applications UDP applications ICMP messages user-defined services (for other types of IP protocols) These objects are used in policy routes, and security policies. Use service groups when you want to create the same rule for several services, instead of creating separate rules for each service. Service groups may consist of services and other service groups. The sequence of members in the service group is not important. 29.6.2 The Service Summary Screen The Service summary screen provides a summary of all services and their definitions. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove services. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 492 Chapter 29 Object To access this screen, log in to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > Service
> Service. Click a columns heading cell to sort the table entries by that columns criteria. Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order. Figure 332 Configuration > Object > Service > Service The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 203 Configuration > Object > Service > Service LABEL Add Edit Remove DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific service. This field displays the name of each service. This field displays a description of each service. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. Object References
#
Name Content Reference 29.6.2.1 The Service Add/Edit Screen The Service Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new service or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Service screen (see Section 29.6.2 on page 492), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. Figure 333 Configuration > Object > Service > Service > Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 493 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 204 Configuration > Object > Service > Service > Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Type the name used to refer to the service. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Select the protocol the service uses. Choices are: TCP, UDP, ICMP, ICMPv6, and User Defined. This field appears if the IP Protocol is TCP or UDP. Specify the port number(s) used by this service. If you fill in one of these fields, the service uses that port. If you fill in both fields, the service uses the range of ports. This field appears if the IP Protocol is ICMP or ICMPv6. Select the ICMP message used by this service. This field displays the message text, not the message number. This field appears if the IP Protocol is User Defined. Enter the number of the next-level protocol (IP protocol). Allowed values are 1 - 255. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. IP Protocol Starting Port Ending Port ICMP Type IP Protocol Number OK Cancel 29.6.3 The Service Group Summary Screen The Service Group summary screen provides a summary of all service groups. In addition, this screen allows you to add, edit, and remove service groups. To access this screen, log in to the Web Configurator, and click Configuration > Object > Service
> Service Group. Figure 334 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 494 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 29.6.3.1 on page 495 for more information as well. Table 205 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group LABEL Add Edit Remove DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific service group. This field displays the Server Group supported type, which is according to your configurations in the Service Group Add/Edit screen. There are 3 types of families:
: Supports IPv4 only
: Supports IPv6 only This field displays the name of each service group.
: Supports both IPv4 and IPv6 By default, the USG uses services starting with Default_Allow_ in the security policies to allow certain services to connect to the USG. This field displays the description of each service group, if any. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. Object References
#
Family Name Description Reference 29.6.3.1 The Service Group Add/Edit Screen The Service Group Add/Edit screen allows you to create a new service group or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Service Group screen (see Section 29.6.3 on page 494), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon. Figure 335 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group > Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 495 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 206 Configuration > Object > Service > Service Group > Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Enter the name of the service group. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Enter a description of the service group, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. The Member list displays the names of the service and service group objects that have been added to the service group. The order of members is not important. Description Member List Select items from the Available list that you want to be members and move them to the Member list. You can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries and use the arrow button to move them. OK Cancel Move any members you do not want included to the Available list. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.7 Schedule Overview Use schedules to set up one-time and recurring schedules for policy routes, security policies, and content filtering. The USG supports one-time and recurring schedules. One-time schedules are effective only once, while recurring schedules usually repeat. Both types of schedules are based on the current date and time in the USG. Note: Schedules are based on the USGs current date and time. Use the Schedule summary screen (Section 29.7.2 on page 497) to see a list of all schedules in the USG. Use the One-Time Schedule Add/Edit screen (Section 29.7.2.1 on page 498) to create or edit a one-time schedule. Use the Recurring Schedule Add/Edit screen (Section 29.7.2.2 on page 499) to create or edit a recurring schedule. Use the Schedule Group screen (Section 29.7.3 on page 500) to merge individual schedule objects as one object. 29.7.1 What You Need to Know One-time Schedules One-time schedules begin on a specific start date and time and end on a specific stop date and time. One-time schedules are useful for long holidays and vacation periods. Recurring Schedules Recurring schedules begin at a specific start time and end at a specific stop time on selected days of the week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday). Recurring USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 496 Chapter 29 Object schedules always begin and end in the same day. Recurring schedules are useful for defining the workday and off-work hours. 29.7.2 The Schedule Summary Screen The Schedule summary screen provides a summary of all schedules in the USG. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Schedule. Figure 336 Configuration > Object > Schedule The following table describes the labels in this screen. See Section 29.7.2.1 on page 498 and Section 29.7.2.2 on page 499 for more information as well. Table 207 Configuration > Object > Schedule LABEL One Time DESCRIPTION Add Edit Remove Object References
#
Name Start Day /
Time Stop Day /
Time Reference Recurring Add Edit Remove Object References
#
Name Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific schedule. This field displays the name of the schedule, which is used to refer to the schedule. This field displays the date and time at which the schedule begins. This field displays the date and time at which the schedule ends. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific schedule. This field displays the name of the schedule, which is used to refer to the schedule. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 497 Chapter 29 Object Table 207 Configuration > Object > Schedule (continued) LABEL Start Time Stop Time Reference DESCRIPTION This field displays the time at which the schedule begins. This field displays the time at which the schedule ends. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. 29.7.2.1 The One-Time Schedule Add/Edit Screen The One-Time Schedule Add/Edit screen allows you to define a one-time schedule or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Schedule screen (see Section 29.7.2 on page 497), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the One Time section. Figure 337 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (One Time) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 208 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (One Time) LABEL Configuration DESCRIPTION Name Date Time Type the name used to refer to the one-time schedule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. StartDate Specify the year, month, and day when the schedule begins. Year - 1900 - 2999 Month - 1 - 12 Day - 1 - 31 (it is not possible to specify illegal dates, such as February 31.) Specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 Specify the year, month, and day when the schedule ends. Year - 1900 - 2999 Month - 1 - 12 Day - 1 - 31 (it is not possible to specify illegal dates, such as February 31.) Specify the hour and minute when the schedule ends. StartTime StopDate StopTime Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 498 Chapter 29 Object Table 208 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (One Time) (continued) LABEL OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.7.2.2 The Recurring Schedule Add/Edit Screen The Recurring Schedule Add/Edit screen allows you to define a recurring schedule or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Schedule screen (see Section 29.7.2 on page 497), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the Recurring section. Figure 338 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (Recurring) The Year, Month, and Day columns are not used in recurring schedules and are disabled in this screen. The following table describes the remaining labels in this screen. Table 209 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Edit (Recurring) LABEL Configuration DESCRIPTION Name Date Time Type the name used to refer to the recurring schedule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. StartTime Specify the hour and minute when the schedule begins each day. Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 Specify the hour and minute when the schedule ends each day. StopTime Hour - 0 - 23 Minute - 0 - 59 Weekly Week Days OK Cancel Select each day of the week the recurring schedule is effective. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 499 Chapter 29 Object 29.7.3 The Schedule Group Screen The Schedule Group summary screen provides a summary of all groups of schedules in the USG. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > Schedule >Group. Figure 339 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Schedule Group The following table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 210 Configuration > Object > Schedule > Schedule Group LABEL Configuration DESCRIPTION Add Edit Remove Object Reference
#
Name Description Members Reference Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific schedule. This field displays the name of the schedule group, which is used to refer to the schedule. This field displays the decription of the schedule group. This field lists the members in the schedule group. Each member is separated by a comma. This displays the number of times an object reference is used in a profile. 29.7.3.1 The Schedule Group Add/Edit Screen The Schedule Group Add/Edit screen allows you to define a schedule group or edit an existing one. To access this screen, go to the Schedule screen (see ), and click either the Add icon or an Edit icon in the Schedule Group section. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 500 Chapter 29 Object Figure 340 Configuration > Schedule > Schedule Group > Add The following table describes the fields in the above screen. Table 211 Configuration > Schedule > Schedule Group > Add LABEL Group Members DESCRIPTION Name Description Member List OK Cancel Type the name used to refer to the recurring schedule. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. Enter a description of the service group, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. The Member list displays the names of the service and service group objects that have been added to the service group. The order of members is not important. Select items from the Available list that you want to be members and move them to the Member list. You can double-click a single entry to move it or use the [Shift] or [Ctrl] key to select multiple entries and use the arrow button to move them. Move any members you do not want included to the Available list. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving your changes. 29.8 AAA Server Overview You can use a AAA (Authentication, Authorization, Accounting) server to provide access control to your network. The AAA server can be a Active Directory, LDAP, or RADIUS server. Use the AAA Server screens to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers. You use USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 501 Chapter 29 Object AAA server objects in configuring ext-group-user user objects and authentication method objects
(see Chapter 29 on page 510). 29.8.1 Directory Service (AD/LDAP) LDAP/AD allows a client (the USG) to connect to a server to retrieve information from a directory. A network example is shown next. Figure 341 Example: Directory Service Client and Server The following describes the user authentication procedure via an LDAP/AD server. 1 2 A user logs in with a user name and password pair. The USG tries to bind (or log in) to the LDAP/AD server. 3 When the binding process is successful, the USG checks the user information in the directory against the user name and password pair. 4 If it matches, the user is allowed access. Otherwise, access is blocked. 29.8.2 RADIUS Server RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device. In essence, RADIUS authentication allows you to validate a large number of users from a central location. Figure 342 RADIUS Server Network Example 29.8.3 ASAS ASAS (Authenex Strong Authentication System) is a RADIUS server that works with the One-Time Password (OTP) feature. Purchase a USG OTP package in order to use this feature. The package USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 502 Chapter 29 Object contains server software and physical OTP tokens (PIN generators). Do the following to use OTP. See the documentation included on the ASAS CD for details. 1 2 3 4 5 Install the ASAS server software on a computer. Create user accounts on the USG and in the ASAS server. Import each tokens database file (located on the included CD) into the server. Assign users to OTP tokens (on the ASAS server). Configure the ASAS as a RADIUS server in the USGs Configuration > Object > AAA Server screens. 6 Give the OTP tokens to (local or remote) users. Use the Configuration > Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) screens
(Section 29.8.5 on page 504) to configure Active Directory or LDAP server objects. Use the Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS screen (Section 29.8.2 on page 502) to configure the default external RADIUS server to use for user authentication. 29.8.4 What You Need To Know AAA Servers Supported by the USG The following lists the types of authentication server the USG supports. Local user database The USG uses the built-in local user database to authenticate administrative users logging into the USGs Web Configurator or network access users logging into the network through the USG. You can also use the local user database to authenticate VPN users. Directory Service (LDAP/AD) LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)/AD (Active Directory) is a directory service that is both a directory and a protocol for controlling access to a network. The directory consists of a database specialized for fast information retrieval and filtering activities. You create and store user profile and login information on the external server. RADIUS RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external or built-in RADIUS server. RADIUS authentication allows you to validate a large number of users from a central location. Directory Structure The directory entries are arranged in a hierarchical order much like a tree structure. Normally, the directory structure reflects the geographical or organizational boundaries. The following figure shows a basic directory structure branching from countries to organizations to organizational units to individuals. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 503 Chapter 29 Object Figure 343 Basic Directory Structure Root US Japan Sprint UPS NEC Sales RD3 QA CSO Sales RD Countries (c) Organizations Organization Units Unique Common Name
(cn) Distinguished Name (DN) A DN uniquely identifies an entry in a directory. A DN consists of attribute-value pairs separated by commas. The leftmost attribute is the Relative Distinguished Name (RDN). This provides a unique name for entries that have the same parent DN (cn=domain1.com, ou=Sales, o=MyCompany in the following examples). cn=domain1.com, ou = Sales, o=MyCompany, c=US cn=domain1.com, ou = Sales, o=MyCompany, c=JP Base DN A base DN specifies a directory. A base DN usually contains information such as the name of an organization, a domain name and/or country. For example, o=MyCompany, c=UK where o means organization and c means country. Bind DN A bind DN is used to authenticate with an LDAP/AD server. For example a bind DN of cn=zywallAdmin allows the USG to log into the LDAP/AD server using the user name of zywallAdmin. The bind DN is used in conjunction with a bind password. When a bind DN is not specified, the USG will try to log in as an anonymous user. If the bind password is incorrect, the login will fail. 29.8.5 Active Directory or LDAP Server Summary Use the Active Directory or LDAP screen to manage the list of AD or LDAP servers the USG can use in authenticating users. Click Configuration > Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) to display the Active Directory (or LDAP) screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 504 Chapter 29 Object Figure 344 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 212 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific AD or LDAP server. This field displays the name of the Active Directory. This is the address of the AD or LDAP server. This specifies a directory. For example, o=ZyXEL, c=US. Remove Object References
#
Name Server Address Base DN 29.8.5.1 Adding an Active Directory or LDAP Server Click Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) to display the Active Directory (or LDAP) screen. Click the Add icon or an Edit icon to display the following screen. Use this screen to create a new AD or LDAP entry or edit an existing one. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 505 Chapter 29 Object Figure 345 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) > Add USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 506 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 213 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) > Add LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 63 alphanumerical characters) for identification purposes. Enter the description of each server, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Enter the address of the AD or LDAP server. If the AD or LDAP server has a backup server, enter its address here. Description Server Address Backup Server Address Port Base DN Use SSL Search time limit Case-sensitive User Names Bind DN Password Specify the port number on the AD or LDAP server to which the USG sends authentication requests. Enter a number between 1 and 65535. This port number should be the same on all AD or LDAP server(s) in this group. Specify the directory (up to 127 alphanumerical characters). For example, o=ZyXEL, c=US. This is only for LDAP. Select Use SSL to establish a secure connection to the AD or LDAP server(s). Specify the timeout period (between 1 and 300 seconds) before the USG disconnects from the AD or LDAP server. In this case, user authentication fails. Search timeout occurs when either the user information is not in the AD or LDAP server(s) or the AD or LDAP server(s) is down. Select this if the server checks the case of the usernames. Specify the bind DN for logging into the AD or LDAP server. Enter up to 127 alphanumerical characters. For example, cn=zywallAdmin specifies zywallAdmin as the user name. If required, enter the password (up to 15 alphanumerical characters) for the USG to bind
(or log in) to the AD or LDAP server. Retype to Confirm Retype your new password for confirmation. Login Name Attribute Alternative Login Name Attribute Group Membership Attribute Enter the type of identifier the users are to use to log in. For example name or e-mail address. If there is a second type of identifier that the users can use to log in, enter it here. For example name or e-mail address. An AD or LDAP server defines attributes for its accounts. Enter the name of the attribute that the USG is to check to determine to which group a user belongs. The value for this attribute is called a group identifier; it determines to which group a user belongs. You can add ext-group-user user objects to identify groups based on these group identifier values. For example you could have an attribute named memberOf with values like sales, RD, and management. Then you could also create a ext-group-user user object for each group. One with sales as the group identifier, another for RD and a third for management. Select the Enable checkbox to enable domain authentication for MSChap. This is only for Active Directory. Enter the user name for the user who has rights to add a machine to the domain. Domain Authentication for MSChap User Name User Password This is only for Active Directory. Enter the password for the associated user name. This is only for Active Directory. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 507 Chapter 29 Object Table 213 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > Active Directory (or LDAP) > Add (continued) LABEL Retype to Confirm Retype your new password for confirmation. DESCRIPTION Realm NetBIOS Name Configuration Validation OK Cancel This is only for Active Directory. Enter the realm FQDN. This is only for Active Directory. Type the NetBIOS name. This field is optional. NetBIOS packets are TCP or UDP packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN which allows local computers to find computers on the remote network and vice versa. Use a user account from the server specified above to test if the configuration is correct. Enter the accounts user name in the Username field and click Test. Click OK to save the changes. Click Cancel to discard the changes. 29.8.6 RADIUS Server Summary Use the RADIUS screen to manage the list of RADIUS servers the USG can use in authenticating users. Click Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS to display the RADIUS screen. Figure 346 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 214 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field displays the index number. This is the name of the RADIUS server entry. This is the address of the AD or LDAP server. Remove Object References
#
Name Server Address USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 508 Chapter 29 Object 29.8.6.1 Adding a RADIUS Server Click Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS to display the RADIUS screen. Click the Add icon or an Edit icon to display the following screen. Use this screen to create a new AD or LDAP entry or edit an existing one. Figure 347 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 215 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS > Add LABEL Name Description DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name (up to 63 alphanumerical characters) for identification purposes. Enter the description of each server, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Enter the address of the RADIUS server. Specify the port number on the RADIUS server to which the USG sends authentication requests. Enter a number between 1 and 65535. If the RADIUS server has a backup server, enter its address here. Server Address Authentication Port Backup Server Address Backup Authentication Port Specify the port number on the RADIUS server to which the USG sends authentication requests. Enter a number between 1 and 65535. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 509 Chapter 29 Object Table 215 Configuration > Object > AAA Server > RADIUS > Add (continued) LABEL Timeout DESCRIPTION Specify the timeout period (between 1 and 300 seconds) before the USG disconnects from the RADIUS server. In this case, user authentication fails. NAS IP Address Case-sensitive User Names Key Group Membership Attribute OK Cancel Search timeout occurs when either the user information is not in the RADIUS server or the RADIUS server is down. Type the IP address of the NAS (Network Access Server). Select this if you want configure your username as case-sensitive. Enter a password (up to 15 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the USG. The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external authentication server and the USG. A RADIUS server defines attributes for its accounts. Select the name and number of the attribute that the USG is to check to determine to which group a user belongs. If it does not display, select user-defined and specify the attributes number. This attributes value is called a group identifier; it determines to which group a user belongs. You can add ext-group-user user objects to identify groups based on these group identifier values. For example you could have an attribute named memberOf with values like sales, RD, and management. Then you could also create a ext-group-user user object for each group. One with sales as the group identifier, another for RD and a third for management. Click OK to save the changes. Click Cancel to discard the changes. 29.9 Auth. Method Overview Authentication method objects set how the USG authenticates wireless, HTTP/HTTPS clients, and peer IPSec routers (extended authentication) clients. Configure authentication method objects to have the USG use the local user database, and/or the authentication servers and authentication server groups specified by AAA server objects. By default, user accounts created and stored on the USG are authenticated locally. Use the Configuration > Object > Auth. Method screens (Section 29.9.3 on page 511) to create and manage authentication method objects. 29.9.1 Before You Begin Configure AAA server objects before you configure authentication method objects. 29.9.2 Example: Selecting a VPN Authentication Method After you set up an authentication method object in the Auth. Method screens, you can use it in the VPN Gateway screen to authenticate VPN users for establishing a VPN connection. Refer to the chapter on VPN for more information. Follow the steps below to specify the authentication method for a VPN connection. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 510 Chapter 29 Object 1 2 3 4 Access the Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Gateway > Edit screen. Click Show Advance Setting and select Enable Extended Authentication. Select Server Mode and select an authentication method object from the drop-down list box. Click OK to save the settings. Figure 348 Example: Using Authentication Method in VPN 29.9.3 Authentication Method Objects Click Configuration > Object > Auth. Method to display the screen as shown. Note: You can create up to 16 authentication method objects. Figure 349 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 216 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method LABEL Add Edit DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field displays the index number. This field displays a descriptive name for identification purposes. This field displays the authentication method(s) for this entry. Remove Object References
#
Method Name Method List USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 511 Chapter 29 Object 29.9.3.1 Creating an Authentication Method Object Follow the steps below to create an authentication method object. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Click Configuration > Object > Auth. Method. Click Add. Specify a descriptive name for identification purposes in the Name field. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. For example, My_Device. Click Add to insert an authentication method in the table. Select a server object from the Method List drop-down list box. You can add up to four server objects to the table. The ordering of the Method List column is important. The USG authenticates the users using the databases (in the local user database or the external authentication server) in the order they appear in this screen. If two accounts with the same username exist on two authentication servers you specify, the USG does not continue the search on the second authentication server when you enter the username and password that doesnt match the one on the first authentication server. Note: You can NOT select two server objects of the same type. Click OK to save the settings or click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the previous screen. Figure 350 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 217 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method > Add LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Specify a descriptive name for identification purposes. Add Edit You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. For example, My_Device. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify the entrys settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 512 Chapter 29 Object Table 217 Configuration > Object > Auth. Method > Add (continued) LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. To change a methods position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. The ordering of your methods is important as USG authenticates the users using the authentication methods in the order they appear in this screen. This field displays the index number. Select a server object from the drop-down list box. You can create a server object in the AAA Server screen. The USG authenticates the users using the databases (in the local user database or the external authentication server) in the order they appear in this screen. If two accounts with the same username exist on two authentication servers you specify, the USG does not continue the search on the second authentication server when you enter the username and password that doesnt match the one on the first authentication server. Click OK to save the changes. Click Cancel to discard the changes. Move
#
Method List OK Cancel 29.10 Certificate Overview The USG can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. Use the My Certificates screens (see Section 29.10.3 on page 516 to Section 29.10.3.3 on page 522) to generate and export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the CA-
signed certificates. Use the Trusted Certificates screens (see Section 29.10.4 on page 523 to Section 29.10.4.2 on page 527) to save CA certificates and trusted remote host certificates to the USG. The USG trusts any valid certificate that you have imported as a trusted certificate. It also trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the certificates that you have imported as a trusted certificate. 29.10.1 What You Need to Know When using public-key cryptology for authentication, each host has two keys. One key is public and can be made openly available. The other key is private and must be kept secure. These keys work like a handwritten signature (in fact, certificates are often referred to as digital signatures). Only you can write your signature exactly as it should look. When people know what your signature looks like, they can verify whether something was signed by you, or by someone else. In the same way, your private key writes your digital signature and your public key allows people to verify whether data was signed by you, or by someone else. This process works as follows. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 513 Chapter 29 Object 1 2 3 4 5 Tim wants to send a message to Jenny. He needs her to be sure that it comes from him, and that the message content has not been altered by anyone else along the way. Tim generates a public key pair (one public key and one private key). Tim keeps the private key and makes the public key openly available. This means that anyone who receives a message seeming to come from Tim can read it and verify whether it is really from him or not. Tim uses his private key to sign the message and sends it to Jenny. Jenny receives the message and uses Tims public key to verify it. Jenny knows that the message is from Tim, and that although other people may have been able to read the message, no-one can have altered it (because they cannot re-sign the message with Tims private key). Additionally, Jenny uses her own private key to sign a message and Tim uses Jennys public key to verify the message. The USG uses certificates based on public-key cryptology to authenticate users attempting to establish a connection, not to encrypt the data that you send after establishing a connection. The method used to secure the data that you send through an established connection depends on the type of connection. For example, a VPN tunnel might use the triple DES encryption algorithm. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authoritys public key to verify the certificates. A certification path is the hierarchy of certification authority certificates that validate a certificate. The USG does not trust a certificate if any certificate on its path has expired or been revoked. Certification authorities maintain directory servers with databases of valid and revoked certificates. A directory of certificates that have been revoked before the scheduled expiration is called a CRL
(Certificate Revocation List). The USG can check a peers certificate against a directory servers list of revoked certificates. The framework of servers, software, procedures and policies that handles keys is called PKI (public-key infrastructure). Advantages of Certificates Certificates offer the following benefits. The USG only has to store the certificates of the certification authorities that you decide to trust, no matter how many devices you need to authenticate. Key distribution is simple and very secure since you can freely distribute public keys and you never need to transmit private keys. Self-signed Certificates You can have the USG act as a certification authority and sign its own certificates. Factory Default Certificate The USG generates its own unique self-signed certificate when you first turn it on. This certificate is referred to in the GUI as the factory default certificate. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 514 Chapter 29 Object Certificate File Formats Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates. PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not included. The USG currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate. PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates. The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The files password is not connected to your certificates public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the USG. Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default. 29.10.2 Verifying a Certificate Before you import a trusted certificate into the USG, you should verify that you have the correct certificate. You can do this using the certificates fingerprint. A certificates fingerprint is a message digest calculated using the MD5 or SHA1 algorithm. The following procedure describes how to check a certificates fingerprint to verify that you have the actual certificate. 1 Browse to where you have the certificate saved on your computer. 2 Make sure that the certificate has a .cer or .crt file name extension. Figure 351 Remote Host Certificates 3 Double-click the certificates icon to open the Certificate window. Click the Details tab and scroll down to the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 515 Chapter 29 Object Figure 352 Certificate Details 4 Use a secure method to verify that the certificate owner has the same information in the Thumbprint Algorithm and Thumbprint fields. The secure method may very based on your situation. Possible examples would be over the telephone or through an HTTPS connection. 29.10.3 The My Certificates Screen Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates to open the My Certificates screen. This is the USGs summary list of certificates and certification requests. Figure 353 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 516 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 218 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates LABEL PKI Storage Space in Use DESCRIPTION This bar displays the percentage of the USGs PKI storage space that is currently in use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates. Click this to go to the screen where you can have the USG generate a certificate or a certification request. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. The USG keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. Add Edit Remove Object References You cannot delete certificates that any of the USGs features are configured to use. Select
#
Name Type Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Import Refresh an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays what kind of certificate this is. REQ represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the My Certificate Import screen to import the certificate and replace the request. SELF represents a self-signed certificate. CERT represents a certificate issued by a certification authority. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. Click Import to open a screen where you can save a certificate to the USG. Click Refresh to display the current validity status of the certificates. 29.10.3.1 The My Certificates Add Screen Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Add icon to open the My Certificates Add screen. Use this screen to have the USG create a self-signed certificate, enroll a certificate with a certification authority or generate a certification request. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 517 Chapter 29 Object Figure 354 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 219 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add LABEL Name DESCRIPTION Type a name to identify this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and
;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=- characters. Use these fields to record information that identifies the owner of the certificate. You do not have to fill in every field, although you must specify a Host IP Address, Host IPv6 Address, Host Domain Name, or E-Mail. The certification authority may add fields (such as a serial number) to the subject information when it issues a certificate. It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. Subject Information Select a radio button to identify the certificates owner by IP address, domain name or e-mail address. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-
mail address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string. A domain name can be up to 255 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and periods. An e-mail address can be up to 63 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen, the @ symbol, periods and the underscore. Identify the organizational unit or department to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Organizational Unit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 518 Town (City) State, (Province) Country Key Type Key Length Client Authentication IKE Intermediate Create a self-signed certificate Create a certification request and save it locally for later manual enrollment Create a certification request and enroll for a certificate immediately online OK Cancel Chapter 29 Object Table 219 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Add (continued) LABEL Organization DESCRIPTION Identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Identify the town or city where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Identify the nation where the certificate owner is located. You can use up to 31 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, the hyphen and the underscore. Select RSA to use the Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm. Select DSA to use the Digital Signature Algorithm public-key algorithm. Select a number from the drop-down list box to determine how many bits the key should use (512 to 2048). The longer the key, the more secure it is. A longer key also uses more PKI storage space. Extended Key Usage Server Authentication Select this to have USG generate and store a request for server authentication certificate. Select this to have USG generate and store a request for client authentication certificate. Select this to have USG generate and store a request for IKE Intermediate authentication certificate. Select this to have the USG generate the certificate and act as the Certification Authority (CA) itself. This way you do not need to apply to a certification authority for certificates. Select this to have the USG generate and store a request for a certificate. Use the My Certificate Details screen to view the certification request and copy it to send to the certification authority. Copy the certification request from the My Certificate Details screen (see Section 29.10.3.2 on page 520) and then send it to the certification authority. Select this to have the USG generate a request for a certificate and apply to a certification authority for a certificate. You must have the certification authoritys certificate already imported in the Trusted Certificates screen. When you select this option, you must select the certification authoritys enrollment protocol and the certification authoritys certificate from the drop-down list boxes and enter the certification authoritys server address. You also need to fill in the Reference Number and Key if the certification authority requires them. Click OK to begin certificate or certification request generation. Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. If you configured the My Certificate Create screen to have the USG enroll a certificate and the certificate enrollment is not successful, you see a screen with a Return button that takes you back to the My Certificate Create screen. Click Return and check your information in the My Certificate Create screen. Make sure that the certification authority information is correct and that your Internet connection is working properly if you want the USG to enroll a certificate online. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 519 Chapter 29 Object 29.10.3.2 The My Certificates Edit Screen Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates and then the Edit icon to open the My Certificate Edit screen. You can use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificates name. Figure 355 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 520 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 220 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit LABEL Name DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=- characters. This field displays for a certificate, not a certification request. Certification Path Refresh Certificate Information Type Version Serial Number Subject Issuer Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the certificate (and the certificate itself). If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certification authority, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the certificate itself). If the certificate is a self-signed certificate, the certificate itself is the only one in the list. The USG does not trust the certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked. Click Refresh to display the certification path. These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificates owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates. This field displays the X.509 version number. This field displays the certificates identification number given by the certification authority or generated by the USG. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O), State (ST), and Country (C). This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same as the Subject Name field. none displays for a certification request. Valid To Valid From Key Algorithm Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. The USG uses rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Some certification authorities may use rsa-pkcs1-md5 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm). This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. none displays for a certification request. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. none displays for a certification request. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificates key pair (the USG uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example). This field displays the certificate owners IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-mail address (EMAIL). This field displays for what functions the certificates key can be used. For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text. This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authoritys certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificates path. This field does not display for a certification request. Subject Alternative Name Key Usage Basic Constraint USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 521 Chapter 29 Object Table 220 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Edit (continued) LABEL MD5 Fingerprint DESCRIPTION This is the certificates message digest that the USG calculated using the MD5 algorithm. This is the certificates message digest that the USG calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form. SHA1 Fingerprint Certificate in PEM
(Base-64) Encoded Format Export Certificate Only Password Export Certificate with Private Key OK Cancel You can copy and paste a certification request into a certification authoritys web page, an e-mail that you send to the certification authority or a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later manual enrollment. You can copy and paste a certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste a certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Use this button to save a copy of the certificate without its private key. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. If you want to export the certificate with its private key, create a password and type it here. Make sure you keep this password in a safe place. You will need to use it if you import the certificate to another device. Use this button to save a copy of the certificate with its private key. Type the certificates password and click this button. Click Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. You can only change the name. Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. 29.10.3.3 The My Certificates Import Screen Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import to open the My Certificate Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the USG. Note: You can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the USG. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including the certificates public and private keys. The certificate you import replaces the corresponding request in the My Certificates screen. You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 522 Chapter 29 Object Figure 356 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 221 Configuration > Object > Certificate > My Certificates > Import LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Browse Password OK Cancel You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the USG. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. This field only applies when you import a binary PKCS#12 format file. Type the files password that was created when the PKCS #12 file was exported. Click OK to save the certificate on the USG. Click Cancel to quit and return to the My Certificates screen. 29.10.4 The Trusted Certificates Screen Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates to open the Trusted Certificates screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates that you have set the USG to accept as trusted. The USG also accepts any valid certificate signed by a certificate on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certificates. Figure 357 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 523 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 222 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates LABEL PKI Storage Space in Use DESCRIPTION This bar displays the percentage of the USGs PKI storage space that is currently in use. When the storage space is almost full, you should consider deleting expired or unnecessary certificates before adding more certificates. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. The USG keeps all of your certificates unless you specifically delete them. Uploading a new firmware or default configuration file does not delete your certificates. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Subsequent certificates move up by one when you take this action. You cannot delete certificates that any of the USGs features are configured to use. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field displays the certificate index number. The certificates are listed in alphabetical order. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject field. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expired! message if the certificate has expired. Click Import to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the USG. Click this button to display the current validity status of the certificates. Edit Remove Object References
#
Name Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Import Refresh 29.10.4.1 The Trusted Certificates Edit Screen Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates and then a certificates Edit icon to open the Trusted Certificates Edit screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certificate, change the certificates name and set whether or not you want the USG to check a certification authoritys list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 524 Chapter 29 Object Figure 358 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 525 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 223 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit LABEL Name Certification Path Refresh Enable X.509v3 CRL Distribution Points and OCSP checking OCSP Server URL ID Password LDAP Server Address Port ID Password Certificate Information Type Version Serial Number Subject DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. You can change the name. You can use up to 31 alphanumeric and ;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=- characters. Click the Refresh button to have this read-only text box display the end entitys certificate and a list of certification authority certificates that shows the hierarchy of certification authorities that validate the end entitys certificate. If the issuing certification authority is one that you have imported as a trusted certificate, it may be the only certification authority in the list (along with the end entitys own certificate). The USG does not trust the end entitys certificate and displays Not trusted in this field if any certificate on the path has expired or been revoked. Click Refresh to display the certification path. Select this check box to turn on/off certificate revocation. When it is turned on, the USG validates a certificate by getting Certificate Revocation List (CRL) through HTTP or LDAP (can be configured after selecting the LDAP Server check box) and online responder (can be configured after selecting the OCSP Server check box). Select this check box if the directory server uses OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol). Type the protocol, IP address and path name of the OCSP server. The USG may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the OCSP server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server (usually a certification authority). Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the OCSP server (usually a certification authority). Select this check box if the directory server uses LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). LDAP is a protocol over TCP that specifies how clients access directories of certificates and lists of revoked certificates. Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) of the directory server. Use this field to specify the LDAP server port number. You must use the same server port number that the directory server uses. 389 is the default server port number for LDAP. The USG may need to authenticate itself in order to assess the CRL directory server. Type the login name (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the server
(usually a certification authority). Type the password (up to 31 ASCII characters) from the entity maintaining the CRL directory server (usually a certification authority). These read-only fields display detailed information about the certificate. This field displays general information about the certificate. CA-signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Self-signed means that the certificates owner signed the certificate (not a certification authority). X.509 means that this certificate was created and signed according to the ITU-T X.509 recommendation that defines the formats for public-key certificates. This field displays the X.509 version number. This field displays the certificates identification number given by the certification authority. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU), Organization (O) and Country (C). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 526 Chapter 29 Object Table 223 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Edit (continued) LABEL Issuer DESCRIPTION This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as Common Name, Organizational Unit, Organization and Country. With self-signed certificates, this is the same information as in the Subject Name field. Signature Algorithm This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to sign the certificate. Some Valid From Valid To Key Algorithm Subject Alternative Name Key Usage Basic Constraint MD5 Fingerprint SHA1 Fingerprint Certificate certification authorities use rsa-pkcs1-sha1 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the SHA1 hash algorithm). Other certification authorities may use rsa-
pkcs1-md5 (RSA public-private key encryption algorithm and the MD5 hash algorithm). This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. This field displays the type of algorithm that was used to generate the certificates key pair (the USG uses RSA encryption) and the length of the key set in bits (1024 bits for example). This field displays the certificates owners IP address (IP), domain name (DNS) or e-
mail address (EMAIL). This field displays for what functions the certificates key can be used. For example, DigitalSignature means that the key can be used to sign certificates and KeyEncipherment means that the key can be used to encrypt text. This field displays general information about the certificate. For example, Subject Type=CA means that this is a certification authoritys certificate and Path Length Constraint=1 means that there can only be one certification authority in the certificates path. This is the certificates message digest that the USG calculated using the MD5 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate. This is the certificates message digest that the USG calculated using the SHA1 algorithm. You can use this value to verify with the certification authority (over the phone for example) that this is actually their certificate. This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. You can only change the name. Click Cancel to quit and return to the Trusted Certificates screen. Export Certificate OK Cancel 29.10.4.2 The Trusted Certificates Import Screen Click Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import to open the Trusted Certificates Import screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save a trusted certificate to the USG. Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 527 Chapter 29 Object Figure 359 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 224 Configuration > Object > Certificate > Trusted Certificates > Import LABEL File Path DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Browse OK Cancel You cannot import a certificate with the same name as a certificate that is already in the USG. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. Click OK to save the certificate on the USG. Click Cancel to quit and return to the previous screen. 29.10.5 Certificates Technical Reference OCSP OCSP (Online Certificate Status Protocol) allows an application or device to check whether a certificate is valid. With OCSP the USG checks the status of individual certificates instead of downloading a Certificate Revocation List (CRL). OCSP has two main advantages over a CRL. The first is real-time status information. The second is a reduction in network traffic since the USG only gets information on the certificates that it needs to verify, not a huge list. When the USG requests certificate status information, the OCSP server returns a expired, current or unknown response. 29.11 ISP Account Overview Use ISP accounts to manage Internet Service Provider (ISP) account information for PPPoE/PPTP interfaces. An ISP account is a profile of settings for Internet access using PPPoE or PPTP. Use the Object > ISP Account screens (Section 29.11.1 on page 528) to create and manage ISP accounts in the USG. 29.11.1 ISP Account Summary This screen provides a summary of ISP accounts in the USG. To access this screen, click Configuration > Object > ISP Account. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 528 Chapter 29 Object Figure 360 Configuration > Object > ISP Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. See the ISP Account Edit section below for more information as well. Table 225 Configuration > Object > ISP Account LABEL Add Edit Remove DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the profile name of the ISP account. This name is used to identify the ISP account. This field displays the protocol used by the ISP account. This field displays the authentication type used by the ISP account. Object References
#
Profile Name Protocol Authentication Type User Name This field displays the user name of the ISP account. 29.11.1.1 ISP Account Edit The ISP Account Edit screen lets you add information about new accounts and edit information about existing accounts. To open this window, open the ISP Account screen. (See Section 29.11.1 on page 528.) Then, click on an Add icon or Edit icon to open the ISP Account Edit screen below. Figure 361 Configuration > Object > ISP Account > Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 529 Chapter 29 Object The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 226 Configuration > Object > ISP Account > Edit LABEL Profile Name DESCRIPTION This field is read-only if you are editing an existing account. Type in the profile name of the ISP account. The profile name is used to refer to the ISP account. You may use 1-31 alphanumeric characters, underscores(_), or dashes (-), but the first character cannot be a number. This value is case-sensitive. This field is read-only if you are editing an existing account. Select the protocol used by the ISP account. Options are:
Protocol pppoe - This ISP account uses the PPPoE protocol. Authentication Type pptp - This ISP account uses the PPTP protocol. Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:
CHAP/PAP - Your USG accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. Chap - Your USG accepts CHAP only. PAP - Your USG accepts PAP only. MSCHAP - Your USG accepts MSCHAP only. Encryption Method MSCHAP-V2 - Your USG accepts MSCHAP-V2 only. This field is available if this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol. Use the drop-down list box to select the type of Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE). Options are:
nomppe - This ISP account does not use MPPE. mppe-40 - This ISP account uses 40-bit MPPE. mppe-128 - This ISP account uses 128-bit MMPE. Type the user name given to you by your ISP. Type the password associated with the user name above. The password can only consist of alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-9). This field can be blank. Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. If this ISP account uses the PPPoE protocol, this field is not displayed. If this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol, type the IP address of the PPTP server. This field is available if this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol. Type your identification name for the PPTP server. This field can be blank. If this ISP account uses the PPPoE protocol, type the PPPoE service name to access. PPPoE uses the specified service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server. This field can be blank. If this ISP account uses the PPTP protocol, this field is not displayed. Select On button to turn on stac compression, and select Off to turn off stac compression. Stac compression is a data compression technique capable of compressing data by a factor of about four. This value specifies the number of seconds that must elapse without outbound traffic before the USG automatically disconnects from the PPPoE/PPTP server. This value must be an integer between 0 and 360. If this value is zero, this timeout is disabled. Click OK to save your changes back to the USG. If there are no errors, the program returns to the ISP Account screen. If there are errors, a message box explains the error, and the program stays in the ISP Account Edit screen. Click Cancel to return to the ISP Account screen without creating the profile (if it is new) or saving any changes to the profile (if it already exists). User Name Password Retype to Confirm Server IP Connection ID Service Name Compression Idle Timeout OK Cancel USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 530 Chapter 29 Object 29.12 SSL Application Overview You use SSL application objects in SSL VPN. Configure an SSL application object to specify the type of application and the address of the local computer, server, or web site SSL users are to be able to access. You can apply one or more SSL application objects in the VPN > SSL VPN screen for a user account/user group. Use the SSL Application screen (Section 29.12.2 on page 533) to view the USGs configured SSL application objects. Use the SSL Application Edit screen to create or edit web-based application objects to allow remote users to access an application via standard web browsers (Section 29.12.2.1 on page 533). You can also use the SSL Application Edit screen to specify the name of a folder on a Linux or Windows file server which remote users can access using a standard web browser (Section 29.12.2.1 on page 533). 29.12.1 What You Need to Know Application Types You can configure the following SSL application on the USG. Web-based A web-based application allows remote users to access an intranet site using standard web browsers. Remote User Screen Links Available SSL application names are displayed as links in remote user screens. Depending on the application type, remote users can simply click the links or follow the steps in the pop-up dialog box to access. Remote Desktop Connections Use SSL VPN to allow remote users to manage LAN computers. Depending on the functions supported by the remote desktop software, they can install or remove software, run programs, change settings, and open, copy, create, and delete files. This is useful for troubleshooting, support, administration, and remote access to files and programs. The LAN computer to be managed must have VNC (Virtual Network Computing) or RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) server software installed. The remote users computer does not use VNC or RDP client software. The USG works with the following remote desktop connection software:
RDP Windows Remote Desktop (supported in Internet Explorer) VNC RealVNC TightVNC USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 531 Chapter 29 Object UltraVNC For example, user A uses an SSL VPN connection to log into the USG. Then he manages LAN computer B which has RealVNC server software installed. Figure 362 SSL-protected Remote Management SSL https://
A B Weblinks You can configure weblink SSL applications to allow remote users to access web sites. 29.12.1.1 Example: Specifying a Web Site for Access This example shows you how to create a web-based application for an internal web site. The address of the web site is http://info with web page encryption. 1 2 Click Configuration > Object > SSL Application in the navigation panel. Click the Add button and select Web Application in the Type field. In the Server Type field, select Web Server. Enter a descriptive name in the Display Name field. For example, CompanyIntranet. In the URLAddress field, enter http://my-info. Select Web Page Encryption to prevent users from saving the web content. Click OK to save the settings. The configuration screen should look similar to the following figure. Figure 363 Example: SSL Application: Specifying a Web Site for Access USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 532 Chapter 29 Object 29.12.2 The SSL Application Screen The main SSL Application screen displays a list of the configured SSL application objects. Click Configuration > Object > SSL Application in the navigation panel. Figure 364 Configuration > Object > SSL Application The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 227 Configuration > Object > SSL Application LABEL Add Edit Remove DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Select an entry and click Object References to open a screen that shows which settings use the entry. This field displays the index number. This field displays the name of the object. This field displays the IP address/URL of the application server or the location of a file share. This field shows whether the object is a file-sharing, web-server, Outlook Web Access, Virtual Network Computing, or Remote Desktop Protocol SSL application. Object References
#
Name Address Type 29.12.2.1 Creating/Editing an SSL Application Object You can create a web-based application that allows remote users to access an application via standard web browsers. You can also create a file sharing application that specify the name of a folder on a file server (Linux or Windows) which remote users can access. Remote users can access files using a standard web browser and files are displayed as links on the screen. To configure an SSL application, click the Add or Edit button in the SSL Application screen and select Web Application or File Sharing in the Type field. The screen differs depending on what object type you choose. Note: If you are creating a file sharing SSL application, you must also configure the shared folder on the file server for remote access. Refer to the document that comes with your file server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 533 Chapter 29 Object Figure 365 Configuration > Object > SSL Application > Add/Edit: Web Application Figure 366 Configuration > Object > SSL Application > Add/Edit: File Sharing The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Use this to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Table 228 Configuration > Object > SSL Application > Add/Edit: Web Application/File Sharing LABEL Create new Object Object Type Web Application Select Web Application or File Sharing from the drop-down list box. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 534 Chapter 29 Object Table 228 Configuration > Object > SSL Application > Add/Edit: Web Application/File Sharing LABEL Server Type DESCRIPTION This field only appears when you choose Web Application as the object type. Specify the type of service for this SSL application. Select Web Server to allow access to the specified web site hosted on the local network. Select OWA (Outlook Web Access) to allow users to access e-mails, contacts, calenders via Microsoft Outlook-like interface using supported web browsers. The USG supports one OWA object. Select VNC to allow users to manage LAN computers that have Virtual Network Computing remote desktop server software installed. Select RDP to allow users to manage LAN computers that have Remote Desktop Protocol remote desktop server software installed. Select Weblink to create a link to a web site that you expect the SSL VPN users to commonly use. Enter a descriptive name to identify this object. You can enter up to 31 characters (0-9, a-z, A-Z, - and _). Spaces are not allowed. This field only appears when you choose Web Application as the object type. This field displays if the Server Type is set to Web Server, OWA, or Weblink. Enter the Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) or IP address of the application server. Note: You must enter the http:// or https:// prefix. Remote users are restricted to access only files in this directory. For example, if you enter
\remote\ in this field, remote users can only access files in the remote directory. If a link contains a file that is not within this domain, then remote users cannot access it. This field only appears when you choose Web Application or File Sharing as the object type. This field displays if the Server Type is set to Web Server, OWA or Weblink. Note: If your Internet Explorer or other browser screen doesnt show a preview, it may be due to your web browser security settings. You need to add the USGs IP address in the trusted sites of your web browser. For example, in Internet Explorer, click Tools > Internet Options > Security > Trusted Sites > Sites and type the USGs IP address, then click Add. For other web browsers, please check the browser help. Name URL Preview Entry Point Click Preview to access the URL you specified in a new web browser screen. This field only appears when you choose Web Application as the object type. This field displays if the Server Type is set to Web Server or OWA. This field is optional. You only need to configure this field if you need to specify the name of the directory or file on the local server as the home page or home directory on the user screen. This field only appears when you choose Web Application as the object type. Select this option to prevent users from saving the web content. Web Page Encryption USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 535 Chapter 29 Object Table 228 Configuration > Object > SSL Application > Add/Edit: Web Application/File Sharing LABEL Shared Path DESCRIPTION This field only appears when you choose File Sharing as the object type. Specify the IP address, domain name or NetBIOS name (computer name) of the file server and the name of the share to which you want to allow user access. Enter the path in one of the following formats.
\\<IP address>\<share name>
\\<domain name>\<share name>
\\<computer name>\<share name>
OK Cancel For example, if you enter \\my-server\Tmp, this allows remote users to access all files and/or folders in the \Tmp share on the my-server computer. Click OK to save the changes and return to the main SSL Application Configuration screen. Click Cancel to discard the changes and return to the main SSL Application Configuration screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 536
1 2 | Users Manual Part 5 | Users Manual | 3.56 MiB |
CHAPTER 30 System 30.1 Overview Use the system screens to configure general USG settings. 30.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the System > Host Name screen (see Section 30.2 on page 538) to configure a unique name for the USG in your network. Use the System > USB Storage screen (see Section 30.3 on page 538) to configure the settings for the connected USB devices. Use the System > Date/Time screen (see Section 30.4 on page 539) to configure the date and time for the USG. Use the System > Console Speed screen (see Section 30.5 on page 543) to configure the console port speed when you connect to the USG via the console port using a terminal emulation program. Use the System > DNS screen (see Section 30.6 on page 544) to configure the DNS (Domain Name System) server used for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Use the System > WWW screens (see Section 30.7 on page 553) to configure settings for HTTP or HTTPS access to the USG and how the login and access user screens look. Use the System > SSH screen (see Section 30.8 on page 569) to configure SSH (Secure SHell) used to securely access the USGs command line interface. You can specify which zones allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come. Use the System > TELNET screen (see Section 30.9 on page 573) to configure Telnet to access the USGs command line interface. Specify which zones allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. Use the System > FTP screen (see Section 30.10 on page 575) to specify from which zones FTP can be used to access the USG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come. You can upload and download the USGs firmware and configuration files using FTP. Your USG can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the USG through the network. Use the System > SNMP screen (see Section 30.11 on page 576) to configure SNMP settings, including from which zones SNMP can be used to access the USG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come. Use the Auth. Server screen (Section 30.12 on page 580) to configure the USG to operate as a RADIUS server. Use the CloudCNM screen (Section 30.13 on page 582) to enable and configure management of the USG by a Central Network Management system. Use the System > Language screen (see Section 30.14 on page 585) to set a language for the USGs Web Configurator screens. Use the System > IPv6 screen (see Section 30.15 on page 585) to enable or disable IPv6 support on the USG. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 537 Chapter 30 System Use the System > ZON screen (see Section 30.16 on page 586) to enable or disable the ZyXEL One Network (ZON) utility that uses ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP) for discovering and configuring ZDP-aware ZyXEL devices in the same network as the computer on which ZON is installed. Note: See each section for related background information and term definitions. 30.2 Host Name A host name is the unique name by which a device is known on a network. Click Configuration >
System > Host Name to open the Host Name screen. Figure 367 Configuration > System > Host Name The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 229 Configuration > System > Host Name LABEL System Name DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name to identify your USG device. This name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes (-) underscores (_) and periods (.) are accepted. Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. This name is propagated to DHCP clients connected to interfaces with the DHCP server enabled. This name can be up to 254 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes - are accepted. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Domain Name Apply Reset 30.3 USB Storage The USG can use a connected USB device to store the system log and other diagnostic information. Use this screen to turn on this feature and set a disk full warning limit. Note: Only connect one USB device. It must allow writing (it cannot be read-only) and use the FAT16, FAT32, EXT2, or EXT3 file system. Click Configuration > System > USB Storage to open the screen as shown next. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 538 Chapter 30 System Figure 368 Configuration > System > USB Storage The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 230 Configuration > System > USB Storage LABEL Activate USB storage service Disk full warning when remaining space is less than Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Select this if you want to use the connected USB device(s). Set a number and select a unit (MB or %) to have the USG send a warning message when the remaining USB storage space is less than the value you set here. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 30.4 Date and Time For effective scheduling and logging, the USG system time must be accurate. The USGs Real Time Chip (RTC) keeps track of the time and date. There is also a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server. To change your USGs time based on your local time zone and date, click Configuration > System
> Date/Time. The screen displays as shown. You can manually set the USGs time and date or have the USG get the date and time from a time server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 539 Chapter 30 System Figure 369 Configuration > System > Date and Time The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 231 Configuration > System > Date and Time LABEL Current Time and Date Current Time Current Date Time and Date Setup Manual This field displays the present time of your USG. This field displays the present date of your USG. New Time (hh-mm-
ss) New Date
(yyyy-mm-dd) Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, time zone and daylight saving at the same time, the time zone and daylight saving will affect the new time and date you entered. When you enter the time settings manually, the USG uses the new setting once you click Apply. This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 540 Chapter 30 System Table 231 Configuration > System > Date and Time (continued) LABEL Get from Time Server DESCRIPTION Select this radio button to have the USG get the time and date from the time server you specify below. The USG requests time and date settings from the time server under the following circumstances. When the USG starts up. When you click Apply or Synchronize Now in this screen. 24-hour intervals after starting up. Enter the IP address or URL of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Click this button to have the USG get the time and date from a time server (see the Time Server Address field). This also saves your changes (except the daylight saving settings). Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The at field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the at field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the at field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Specify how much the clock changes when daylight saving begins and ends. Enter a number from 1 to 5.5 (by 0.5 increments). For example, if you set this field to 3.5, a log occurred at 6 P.M. in local official time will appear as if it had occurred at 10:30 P.M. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Time Server Address Sync. Now Time Zone Setup Time Zone Enable Daylight Saving Start Date End Date Offset Apply Reset USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 541 Chapter 30 System 30.4.1 Pre-defined NTP Time Servers List When you turn on the USG for the first time, the date and time start at 2003-01-01 00:00:00. The USG then attempts to synchronize with one of the following pre-defined list of Network Time Protocol (NTP) time servers. The USG continues to use the following pre-defined list of NTP time servers if you do not specify a time server or it cannot synchronize with the time server you specified. Table 232 Default Time Servers 0.pool.ntp.org 1.pool.ntp.org 2.pool.ntp.org When the USG uses the pre-defined list of NTP time servers, it randomly selects one server and tries to synchronize with it. If the synchronization fails, then the USG goes through the rest of the list in order from the first one tried until either it is successful or all the pre-defined NTP time servers have been tried. 30.4.2 Time Server Synchronization Click the Synchronize Now button to get the time and date from the time server you specified in the Time Server Address field. When the Please Wait... screen appears, you may have to wait up to one minute. Figure 370 Synchronization in Process The Current Time and Current Date fields will display the appropriate settings if the synchronization is successful. If the synchronization was not successful, a log displays in the View Log screen. Try re-configuring the Date/Time screen. To manually set the USG date and time. 1 2 3 4 Click System > Date/Time. Select Manual under Time and Date Setup. Enter the USGs time in the New Time field. Enter the USGs date in the New Date field. 5 Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list. 6 As an option you can select the Enable Daylight Saving check box to adjust the USG clock for daylight savings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 542 Chapter 30 System 7 Click Apply. To get the USG date and time from a time server Click System > Date/Time. Select Get from Time Server under Time and Date Setup. 1 2 3 Under Time Zone Setup, select your Time Zone from the list. 4 As an option you can select the Enable Daylight Saving check box to adjust the USG clock for daylight savings. 5 Under Time and Date Setup, enter a Time Server Address (Table 232 on page 542). 6 Click Apply. 30.5 Console Port Speed This section shows you how to set the console port speed when you connect to the USG via the console port using a terminal emulation program. Click Configuration > System > Console Speed to open the Console Speed screen. Figure 371 Configuration > System > Console Speed The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 233 Configuration > System > Console Speed LABEL Console Port Speed Use the drop-down list box to change the speed of the console port. Your USG supports DESCRIPTION 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 bps (default) for the console port. Apply Reset The Console Port Speed applies to a console port connection using terminal emulation software and NOT the Console in the USG Web Configurator Status screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 543 Chapter 30 System 30.6 DNS Overview DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it. 30.6.1 DNS Server Address Assignment The USG can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields. If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the USGs WAN IP address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP. You can manually enter the IP addresses of other DNS servers. 30.6.2 Configuring the DNS Screen Click Configuration > System > DNS to change your USGs DNS settings. Use the DNS screen to configure the USG to use a DNS server to resolve domain names for USG system features like VPN, DDNS and the time server. You can also configure the USG to accept or discard DNS queries. Use the Network > Interface screens to configure the DNS server information that the USG sends to the specified DHCP client devices. A name query begins at a client computer and is passed to a resolver, a DNS client service, for resolution. The USG can be a DNS client service. The USG can resolve a DNS query locally using cached Resource Records (RR) obtained from a previous query (and kept for a period of time). If the USG does not have the requested information, it can forward the request to DNS servers. This is known as recursion. The USG can ask a DNS server to use recursion to resolve its DNS client requests. If recursion on the USG or a DNS server is disabled, they cannot forward DNS requests for resolution. A Domain Name Server (DNS) amplification attack is a kind of Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) attack that uses publicly accessible open DNS servers to flood a victim with DNS response traffic. An open DNS server is a DNS server which is willing to resolve recursive DNS queries from anyone on the Internet. In a DNS amplification attack, an attacker sends a DNS name lookup request to an open DNS server with the source address spoofed as the victims address. When the DNS server sends the DNS record response, it is sent to the victim. Attackers can request as much information as possible to maximize the amplification effect. Configure the Security Option Control section in the Configuration > System > DNS screen
(click Show Advanced Settings to display it) if you suspect the USG is being used (either by hackers or by a corrupted open DNS server) in a DNS amplification attack. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 544 Chapter 30 System Figure 372 Configuration > System > DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 234 Configuration > System > DNS LABEL Address/PTR Record DESCRIPTION This record specifies the mapping of a Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to an IP address. An FQDN consists of a host and domain name. For example, www.zyxel.com.tw is a fully qualified domain name, where www is the host, zyxel is the third-level domain, com is the second-level domain, and tw is the top level domain. Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. This is the index number of the address/PTR record. This is a hosts fully qualified domain name. Add Edit Remove
#
FQDN USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 545 Chapter 30 System Table 234 Configuration > System > DNS (continued) LABEL IP Address CNAME Record Add Edit Remove
#
Alias Name FQDN Domain Zone Forwarder Add Edit Remove Move
#
Domain Zone Type DNS Server Query Via MX Record (for My FQDN) Add Edit DESCRIPTION This is the IP address of a host. This record specifies an alias for a FQDN. Use this record to bind all subdomains with the same IP address as the FQDN without having to update each one individually, which increases chance for errors. See CNAME Record (Section 30.6.6 on page 548) for more details. Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. This is the index number of the domain zone forwarder record. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in sequence. A hyphen (-) displays for the default domain zone forwarder record. The default record is not configurable. The USG uses this default record if the domain zone that needs to be resolved does not match any of the other domain zone forwarder records. Enter an Alias name. Use *. as prefix for a wildcard domain name. For example,
*.example.com. Enter the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). This specifies a DNS servers IP address. The USG can query the DNS server to resolve domain zones for features like VPN, DDNS and the time server. When the USG needs to resolve a domain zone, it checks it against the domain zone forwarder entries in the order that they appear in this list. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This is the index number of the domain zone forwarder record. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in sequence. A hyphen (-) displays for the default domain zone forwarder record. The default record is not configurable. The USG uses this default record if the domain zone that needs to be resolved does not match any of the other domain zone forwarder records. A domain zone is a fully qualified domain name without the host. For example, zyxel.com.tw is the domain zone for the www.zyxel.com.tw fully qualified domain name. A * means all domain zones. This displays whether the DNS server IP address is assigned by the ISP dynamically through a specified interface or configured manually (User-Defined). This is the IP address of a DNS server. This field displays N/A if you have the USG get a DNS server IP address from the ISP dynamically but the specified interface is not active. This is the interface through which the USG sends DNS queries to the entrys DNS server. If the USG connects through a VPN tunnel, tunnel displays. A MX (Mail eXchange) record identifies a mail server that handles the mail for a particular domain. Click this to create a new entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 546 Chapter 30 System Table 234 Configuration > System > DNS (continued) LABEL Remove
#
Domain Name IP/FQDN Security Option Control Edit Priority Name Address Additional Info from Cache Query Recursion Service Control Add Edit Remove Move
#
Zone Address Action DESCRIPTION To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. This is the index number of the MX record. This is the domain name where the mail is destined for. This is the IP address or Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of a mail server that handles the mail for the domain specified in the field above. Click Show Advanced Settings to display this part of the screen. There are two control policies: Default and Customize. Click either control policy and then click this button to change allow or deny actions for Query Recursion and Additional Info from Cache. The Customize control policy is checked first and if an address object match is not found, the Default control policy is checked. You may change the name of the Customize control policy. These are the object addresses used in the control policy. RFC1918 refers to private IP address ranges. It can be modified in Object > Address. This displays if the USG is allowed or denied to cache Resource Records (RR) obtained from previous DNS queries. This displays if the USG is allowed or denied to forward DNS client requests to DNS servers for resolution. This specifies from which computers and zones you can send DNS queries to the USG. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This the index number of the service control rule. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in sequence. The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the USGs (non-configurable) default policy. The USG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the USG will not have to use the default policy. This is the zone on the USG the user is allowed or denied to access. This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to send DNS queries. This displays whether the USG accepts DNS queries from the computer with the IP address specified above through the specified zone (Accept) or discards them (Deny). 30.6.3 Address Record An address record contains the mapping of a Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to an IP address. An FQDN consists of a host and domain name. For example, www.zyxel.com is a fully qualified domain name, where www is the host, zyxel is the second-level domain, and com is the top level domain. mail.myZyXEL.com.tw is also a FQDN, where mail is the host, myZyXEL is the third-level domain, com is the second-level domain, and tw is the top level domain. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 547 Chapter 30 System The USG allows you to configure address records about the USG itself or another device. This way you can keep a record of DNS names and addresses that people on your network may use frequently. If the USG receives a DNS query for an FQDN for which the USG has an address record, the USG can send the IP address in a DNS response without having to query a DNS name server. 30.6.4 PTR Record A PTR (pointer) record is also called a reverse record or a reverse lookup record. It is a mapping of an IP address to a domain name. 30.6.5 Adding an Address/PTR Record Click the Add icon in the Address/PTR Record table to add an address/PTR record. Figure 373 Configuration > System > DNS > Address/PTR Record Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 235 Configuration > System > DNS > Address/PTR Record Edit LABEL FQDN DESCRIPTION Type a Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of a server. An FQDN starts with a host name and continues all the way up to the top-level domain name. For example, www.zyxel.com.tw is a fully qualified domain name, where www is the host, zyxel is the third-level domain, com is the second-level domain, and tw is the top level domain. Underscores are not allowed. IP Address OK Cancel Use "*." as a prefix in the FQDN for a wildcard domain name (for example,
*.example.com). Enter the IP address of the host in dotted decimal notation. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 30.6.6 CNAME Record A Canonical Name Record or CNAME record is a type of resource record in the Domain Name System (DNS) that specifies that the domain name is an alias of another, canonical domain name. This allows users to set up a record for a domain name which translates to an IP address, in other words, the domain name is an alias of another. This record also binds all the subdomains to the same IP address without having to create a record for each, so when the IP address is changed, all subdomains IP address is updated as well, with one edit to the record. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 548 Chapter 30 System For example, the domain name zyxel.com is hooked up to a record named A which translates it to 11.22.33.44. You also have several subdomains, like mail.zyxel.com, ftp.zyxel.com and you want this subdomain to point to your main domain zyxel.com. Edit the IP Address in record A and all subdomains will follow automatically. This eliminates chances for errors and increases efficiency in DNS management. 30.6.7 Adding a CNAME Record Click the Add icon in the CNAME Record table to add a record. Use *. as a prefix for a wildcard domain name. For example *.zyxel.com. Figure 374 Configuration > System > DNS > CNAME Record > Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 236 Configuration > System > DNS > CNAME Record > Add LABEL Alias name DESCRIPTION Enter an Alias Name. Use "*." as a prefix in the Alias name for a wildcard domain name (for example, *.example.com). Type a Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of a server. An FQDN starts with a host name and continues all the way up to the top-level domain name. For example, www.zyxel.com.tw is a fully qualified domain name, where www is the host, zyxel is the third-level domain, com is the second-level domain, and tw is the top level domain. Underscores are not allowed. Use "*." as a prefix in the FQDN for a wildcard domain name (for example,
*.example.com). Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. FQDN OK Cancel 30.6.8 Domain Zone Forwarder A domain zone forwarder contains a DNS servers IP address. The USG can query the DNS server to resolve domain zones for features like VPN, DDNS and the time server. A domain zone is a fully qualified domain name without the host. For example, zyxel.com.tw is the domain zone for the www.zyxel.com.tw fully qualified domain name. 30.6.9 Adding a Domain Zone Forwarder Click the Add icon in the Domain Zone Forwarder table to add a domain zone forwarder record. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 549 Chapter 30 System Figure 375 Configuration > System > DNS > Domain Zone Forwarder Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 237 Configuration > System > DNS > Domain Zone Forwarder Add LABEL Domain Zone DESCRIPTION A domain zone is a fully qualified domain name without the host. For example, zyxel.com.tw is the domain zone for the www.zyxel.com.tw fully qualified domain name. For example, whenever the USG receives needs to resolve a zyxel.com.tw domain name, it can send a query to the recorded name server IP address. Enter * if all domain zones are served by the specified DNS server(s). Select DNS Server(s) from ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information. You also need to select an interface through which the ISP provides the DNS server IP address(es). The interface should be activated and set to be a DHCP client. The fields below display the (read-only) DNS server IP address(es) that the ISP assigns. N/A displays for any DNS server IP address fields for which the ISP does not assign an IP address. Select Public DNS Server if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. The USG must be able to connect to the DNS server without using a VPN tunnel. The DNS server could be on the Internet or one of the USGs local networks. You cannot use 0.0.0.0. Use the Query via field to select the interface through which the USG sends DNS queries to a DNS server. Select Private DNS Server if you have the IP address of a DNS server to which the USG connects through a VPN tunnel. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. You cannot use 0.0.0.0. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving DNS Server OK Cancel 30.6.10 MX Record A MX (Mail eXchange) record indicates which host is responsible for the mail for a particular domain, that is, controls where mail is sent for that domain. If you do not configure proper MX records for your domain or other domain, external e-mail from other mail servers will not be able to be delivered to your mail server and vice versa. Each host or domain can have only one MX record, that is, one domain is mapping to one host. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 550 Chapter 30 System 30.6.11 Adding a MX Record Click the Add icon in the MX Record table to add a MX record. Figure 376 Configuration > System > DNS > MX Record Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 238 Configuration > System > DNS > MX Record Add LABEL Domain Name IP Address/FQDN Enter the IP address or Fully-Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) of a mail server that DESCRIPTION Enter the domain name where the mail is destined for. OK Cancel handles the mail for the domain specified in the field above. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 30.6.12 Security Option Control Configure the Security Option Control section in the Configuration > System > DNS screen
(click Show Advanced Settings to display it) if you suspect the USG is being used by hackers in a DNS amplification attack. One possible strategy would be to deny Query Recursion and Additional Info from Cache in the default policy and allow Query Recursion and Additional Info from Cache only from trusted DNS servers identified by address objects and added as members in the customized policy. 30.6.13 Editing a Security Option Control Click a control policy and then click Edit to change allow or deny actions for Query Recursion and Additional Info from Cache. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 551 Chapter 30 System Figure 377 Configuration > System > DNS > Security Option Control Edit (Customize) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 239 Configuration > System > DNS > Security Option Control Edit (Customize) LABEL Name DESCRIPTION You may change the name for the customized security option control policy. The customized security option control policy is checked first and if an address object match is not found, the Default control policy is checked Choose if the USG is allowed or denied to forward DNS client requests to DNS servers for resolution. This can apply to specific open DNS servers using the address objects in a customized rule. Choose if the USG is allowed or denied to cache Resource Records (RR) obtained from previous DNS queries. Specifiying address objects is not available in the default policy as all addresses are included. This box displays address objects created in Object > Address. Select one (or more), and click the > arrow to have it (them) join the Member list of address objects that will apply to this rule. For example, you could specifiy an open DNS server suspect of sending compromised resource records by adding an address object for that server to the member list. This box displays address objects that will apply to this rule. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving Query Recursion Additional Info from Cache Address List Available Member OK Cancel 30.6.14 Adding a DNS Service Control Rule Click the Add icon in the Service Control table to add a service control rule. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 552 Chapter 30 System Figure 378 Configuration > System > DNS > Service Control Rule Add The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 240 Configuration > System > DNS > Service Control Rule Add LABEL Create new Object Address Object DESCRIPTION Use this to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Select ALL to allow or deny any computer to send DNS queries to the USG. Select a predefined address object to just allow or deny the computer with the IP address that you specified to send DNS queries to the USG. Select ALL to allow or prevent DNS queries through any zones. Select a predefined zone on which a DNS query to the USG is allowed or denied. Select Accept to have the USG allow the DNS queries from the specified computer. Select Deny to have the USG reject the DNS queries from the specified computer. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving Zone Action OK Cancel 30.7 WWW Overview The following figure shows secure and insecure management of the USG coming in from the WAN. HTTPS and SSH access are secure. HTTP and Telnet access are not secure. Note: To allow the USG to be accessed from a specified computer using a service, make sure you do not have a service control rule or to-USG security policy rule to block that traffic. To stop a service from accessing the USG, clear Enable in the corresponding service screen. 30.7.1 Service Access Limitations A service cannot be used to access the USG when:
You have disabled that service in the corresponding screen. The allowed IP address (address object) in the Service Control table does not match the client IP address (the USG disallows the session). 1 2 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 553 Chapter 30 System 3 4 The IP address (address object) in the Service Control table is not in the allowed zone or the action is set to Deny. There is a security policy rule that blocks it. 30.7.2 System Timeout There is a lease timeout for administrators. The USG automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. Each user is also forced to log in the USG for authentication again when the reauthentication time expires. You can change the timeout settings in the User/Group screens. 30.7.3 HTTPS You can set the USG to use HTTP or HTTPS (HTTPS adds security) for Web Configurator sessions. Specify which zones allow Web Configurator access and from which IP address the access can come. HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an application-level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if data has been changed). It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys. HTTPS on the USG is used so that you can securely access the USG using the Web Configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the HTTPS server (the USG) must always authenticate itself to the HTTPS client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the USG), whereas the HTTPS client only should authenticate itself when the HTTPS server requires it to do so (select Authenticate Client Certificates in the WWW screen). Authenticate Client Certificates is optional and if selected means the HTTPS client must send the USG a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the USG. Please refer to the following figure. 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the USGs web server. 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the USGs web server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 554 Chapter 30 System Figure 379 HTTP/HTTPS Implementation Note: If you disable HTTP in the WWW screen, then the USG blocks all HTTP connection attempts. 30.7.4 Configuring WWW Service Control Click Configuration > System > WWW to open the WWW screen. Use this screen to specify from which zones you can access the USG using HTTP or HTTPS. You can also specify which IP addresses the access can come from. Note: Admin Service Control deals with management access (to the Web Configurator). User Service Control deals with user access to the USG (logging into SSL VPN for example). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 555 Chapter 30 System Figure 380 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 241 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control LABEL HTTPS Enable DESCRIPTION Server Port Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the USG Web Configurator using secure HTTPs connections. The HTTPS server listens on port 443 by default. If you change the HTTPS server port to a different number on the USG, for example 8443, then you must notify people who need to access the USG Web Configurator to use https://USG IP Address:8443 as the URL. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 556 Chapter 30 System Table 241 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control (continued) LABEL Authenticate Client Certificates Server Certificate Redirect HTTP to HTTPS Admin/User Service Control Add Edit Remove Move
#
Zone Address Action HTTP Enable Server Port Admin/User Service Control Add DESCRIPTION Select Authenticate Client Certificates (optional) to require the SSL client to authenticate itself to the USG by sending the USG a certificate. To do that the SSL client must have a CA-signed certificate from a CA that has been imported as a trusted CA on the USG (see Section 30.7.7.5 on page 564 on importing certificates for details). Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the USG) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. To allow only secure Web Configurator access, select this to redirect all HTTP connection requests to the HTTPS server. Admin Service Control specifies from which zones an administrator can use HTTPS to manage the USG (using the Web Configurator). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the administrators can manage the USG. User Service Control specifies from which zones a user can use HTTPS to log into the USG (to log into SSL VPN for example). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the users can access the USG. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This is the index number of the service control rule. The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the USGs (non-configurable) default policy. The USG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the USG will not have to use the default policy. This is the zone on the USG the user is allowed or denied to access. This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access. This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the USG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny). Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the USG Web Configurator using HTTP connections. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service to access the USG. Admin Service Control specifies from which zones an administrator can use HTTP to manage the USG (using the Web Configurator). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the administrators can manage the USG. User Service Control specifies from which zones a user can use HTTP to log into the USG (to log into SSL VPN for example). You can also specify the IP addresses from which the users can access the USG. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 557 Chapter 30 System Table 241 Configuration > System > WWW > Service Control (continued) LABEL Edit Remove Move
#
Zone Address Action DESCRIPTION Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This is the index number of the service control rule. The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the USGs (non-configurable) default policy. The USG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the USG will not have to use the default policy. This is the zone on the USG the user is allowed or denied to access. This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access. This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the USG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny). Authentication Client Authentication Method Apply Reset Select a method the HTTPS or HTTP server uses to authenticate a client. You must have configured the authentication methods in the Auth. method screen. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 30.7.5 Service Control Rules Click Add or Edit in the Service Control table in a WWW, SSH, Telnet, FTP or SNMP screen to add a service control rule. Figure 381 Configuration > System > Service Control Rule > Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 242 Configuration > System > Service Control Rule > Edit LABEL Create new Object Address Object DESCRIPTION Use this to configure any new settings objects that you need to use in this screen. Select ALL to allow or deny any computer to communicate with the USG using this service. Select a predefined address object to just allow or deny the computer with the IP address that you specified to access the USG using this service. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 558 Chapter 30 System Table 242 Configuration > System > Service Control Rule > Edit LABEL Zone DESCRIPTION Select ALL to allow or prevent any USG zones from being accessed using this service. Action OK Cancel Select a predefined USG zone on which a incoming service is allowed or denied. Select Accept to allow the user to access the USG from the specified computers. Select Deny to block the users access to the USG from the specified computers. Click OK to save your customized settings and exit this screen. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving 30.7.6 Customizing the WWW Login Page Click Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page to open the Login Page screen. Use this screen to customize the Web Configurator login screen. You can also customize the page that displays after an access user logs into the Web Configurator to access network services like the Internet. Figure 382 Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 559 Chapter 30 System The following figures identify the parts you can customize in the login and access pages. Figure 383 Login Page Customization Logo Title Figure 384 Access Page Customization Logo Title Message
(color of all text) Background Note Message
(last line of text) Message
(color of all text) Note Message
(last line of text) Window Background You can specify colors in one of the following ways:
Click Color to display a screen of web-safe colors from which to choose. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 560 Chapter 30 System Enter the name of the desired color. Enter a pound sign (#) followed by the six-digit hexadecimal number that represents the desired color. For example, use #000000 for black. Enter rgb followed by red, green, and blue values in parenthesis and separate by commas. For example, use rgb(0,0,0) for black. Your desired color should display in the preview screen on the right after you click in another field, click Apply, or press [ENTER]. If your desired color does not display, your browser may not support it. Try selecting another color. The following table describes the labels in the screen. Table 243 Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page LABEL Select Type DESCRIPTION Select whether the Web Configurator uses the default login screen or one that you customize in the rest of this screen. You can upload a graphic logo to be displayed on the upper left corner of the Web Configurator login screen and access page. Logo File Customized Login Page Title Title Color Message Color Note Message Background Specify the location and file name of the logo graphic or click Browse to locate it. Note: Use a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less. Click Upload to transfer the specified graphic file from your computer to the USG. Use this section to set how the Web Configurator login screen looks. Enter the title for the top of the screen. Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed. Specify the color of the screens title text. Specify the color of the screens text. Enter a note to display at the bottom of the screen. Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed. Set how the screen background looks. To use a graphic, select Picture and upload a graphic. Specify the location and file name of the logo graphic or click Browse to locate it. The pictures size cannot be over 438 x 337 pixels. Note: Use a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less. Customized Access Page Title Message Color Note Message To use a color, select Color and specify the color. Use this section to customize the page that displays after an access user logs into the Web Configurator to access network services like the Internet. Enter the title for the top of the screen. Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed. Specify the color of the screens text. Enter a note to display below the title. Use up to 64 printable ASCII characters. Spaces are allowed. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 561 Chapter 30 System Table 243 Configuration > System > WWW > Login Page LABEL Background DESCRIPTION Set how the windows background looks. To use a graphic, select Picture and upload a graphic. Specify the location and file name of the logo graphic or click Browse to locate it. The pictures size cannot be over 438 x 337 pixels. Note: Use a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less. Apply Reset To use a color, select Color and specify the color. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 30.7.7 HTTPS Example If you havent changed the default HTTPS port on the USG, then in your browser enter https://
USG IP Address/ as the web site address where USG IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the USG you wish to access. 30.7.7.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the USG HTTPS server, you will see the error message shown in the following screen. Figure 385 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer) Select Continue to this website to proceed to the Web Configurator login screen. Otherwise, select Click here to close this webpage to block the access. 30.7.7.2 Mozilla Firefox Warning Messages When you attempt to access the USG HTTPS server, a The Connection is Untrusted screen appears as shown in the following screen. Click Technical Details if you want to verify more information about the certificate from the USG. Select I Understand the Risks and then click Add Exception to add the USG to the security exception list. Click Confirm Security Exception. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 562 Chapter 30 System Figure 386 Security Certificate 1 (Firefox) Figure 387 Security Certificate 2 (Firefox) 30.7.7.3 Avoiding Browser Warning Messages Here are the main reasons your browser displays warnings about the USGs HTTPS server certificate and what you can do to avoid seeing the warnings:
The issuing certificate authority of the USGs HTTPS server certificate is not one of the browsers trusted certificate authorities. The issuing certificate authority of the USG's factory default certificate is the USG itself since the certificate is a self-signed certificate. For the browser to trust a self-signed certificate, import the self-signed certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate. To have the browser trust the certificates issued by a certificate authority, import the certificate authoritys certificate into your operating system as a trusted certificate. 30.7.7.4 Login Screen After you accept the certificate, the USG login screen appears. The lock displayed in the bottom of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 563 Chapter 30 System Figure 388 Login Screen (Internet Explorer) 30.7.7.5 Enrolling and Importing SSL Client Certificates The SSL client needs a certificate if Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the USG. You must have imported at least one trusted CA to the USG in order for the Authenticate Client Certificates to be active (see the Certificates chapter for details). Apply for a certificate from a Certification Authority (CA) that is trusted by the USG (see the USGs Trusted CA Web Configurator screen). Figure 389 USG Trusted CA Screen The CA sends you a package containing the CAs trusted certificate(s), your personal certificate(s) and a password to install the personal certificate(s). 30.7.7.5.1 Installing the CAs Certificate 1 Double click the CAs trusted certificate to produce a screen similar to the one shown next. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 564 Chapter 30 System Figure 390 CA Certificate Example 2 Click Install Certificate and follow the wizard as shown earlier in this appendix. 30.7.7.5.2 Installing Your Personal Certificate(s) You need a password in advance. The CA may issue the password or you may have to specify it during the enrollment. Double-click the personal certificate given to you by the CA to produce a screen similar to the one shown next 1 Click Next to begin the wizard. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 565 Chapter 30 System Figure 391 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 1 2 The file name and path of the certificate you double-clicked should automatically appear in the File name text box. Click Browse if you wish to import a different certificate. Figure 392 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 2 3 Enter the password given to you by the CA. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 566 Chapter 30 System Figure 393 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 3 4 Have the wizard determine where the certificate should be saved on your computer or select Place all certificates in the following store and choose a different location. Figure 394 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 4 5 Click Finish to complete the wizard and begin the import process. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 567 Chapter 30 System Figure 395 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 5 6 You should see the following screen when the certificate is correctly installed on your computer. Figure 396 Personal Certificate Import Wizard 6 30.7.7.6 Using a Certificate When Accessing the USG Example Use the following procedure to access the USG via HTTPS. 1 Enter https://USG IP Address/ in your browsers web address field. Figure 397 Access the USG Via HTTPS 2 When Authenticate Client Certificates is selected on the USG, the following screen asks you to select a personal certificate to send to the USG. This screen displays even if you only have a single certificate as in the example. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 568 Chapter 30 System Figure 398 SSL Client Authentication 3 You next see the Web Configurator login screen. Figure 399 Secure Web Configurator Login Screen 30.8 SSH You can use SSH (Secure SHell) to securely access the USGs command line interface. Specify which zones allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come. SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. In the following figure, computer A on the Internet uses SSH to securely connect to the WAN port of the USG for a management session. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 569 Chapter 30 System Figure 400 SSH Communication Over the WAN Example 30.8.1 How SSH Works The following figure is an example of how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts using SSH v1. Figure 401 How SSH v1 Works Example 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server. The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer. 2 3 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use. Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name and password) to the server to log in to the server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 570 Chapter 30 System 30.8.2 SSH Implementation on the USG Your USG supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA authentication and four encryption methods
(AES, 3DES, Archfour, and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the USG for management using port 22 (by default). 30.8.3 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is used to connect to the USG over SSH. 30.8.4 Configuring SSH Click Configuration > System > SSH to change your USGs Secure Shell settings. Use this screen to specify from which zones SSH can be used to manage the USG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come. Figure 402 Configuration > System > SSH The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 244 Configuration > System > SSH LABEL Enable DESCRIPTION Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the USG CLI using this service. Select the check box to have the USG use both SSH version 1 and version 2 protocols. If you clear the check box, the USG uses only SSH version 2 protocol. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the USG for SSH connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. This specifies from which computers you can access which USG zones. Version 1 Server Port Server Certificate Service Control USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 571 Chapter 30 System Table 244 Configuration > System > SSH (continued) LABEL Add DESCRIPTION Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 242 on page 558 for details on the screen that opens. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This the index number of the service control rule. This is the zone on the USG the user is allowed or denied to access. This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access. This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the USG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny). Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Edit Remove Move
#
Zone Address Action Apply Reset 30.8.5 Secure Telnet Using SSH Examples This section shows two examples using a command interface and a graphical interface SSH client program to remotely access the USG. The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program users guide. 30.8.5.1 Example 1: Microsoft Windows This section describes how to access the USG using the Secure Shell Client program. 1 2 3 Launch the SSH client and specify the connection information (IP address, port number) for the USG. Configure the SSH client to accept connection using SSH version 1. A window displays prompting you to store the host key in you computer. Click Yes to continue. Figure 403 SSH Example 1: Store Host Key Enter the password to log in to the USG. The CLI screen displays next. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 572 Chapter 30 System 30.8.5.2 Example 2: Linux This section describes how to access the USG using the OpenSSH client program that comes with most Linux distributions. 1 Test whether the SSH service is available on the USG. Enter telnet 192.168.1.1 22 at a terminal prompt and press [ENTER]. The computer attempts to connect to port 22 on the USG (using the default IP address of 192.168.1.1). A message displays indicating the SSH protocol version supported by the USG. Figure 404 SSH Example 2: Test
$ telnet 192.168.1.1 22 Trying 192.168.1.1... Connected to 192.168.1.1. Escape character is '^]'. SSH-1.5-1.0.0 2 Enter ssh 1 192.168.1.1. This command forces your computer to connect to the USG using SSH version 1. If this is the first time you are connecting to the USG using SSH, a message displays prompting you to save the host information of the USG. Type yes and press [ENTER]. Then enter the password to log in to the USG. Figure 405 SSH Example 2: Log in
$ ssh 1 192.168.1.1 The authenticity of host '192.168.1.1 (192.168.1.1)' can't be established. RSA1 key fingerprint is 21:6c:07:25:7e:f4:75:80:ec:af:bd:d4:3d:80:53:d1. Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.1' (RSA1) to the list of known hosts. Administrator@192.168.1.1's password:
3 The CLI screen displays next. 30.9 Telnet You can use Telnet to access the USGs command line interface. Specify which zones allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. 30.9.1 Configuring Telnet Click Configuration > System > TELNET to configure your USG for remote Telnet access. Use this screen to specify from which zones Telnet can be used to manage the USG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 573 Chapter 30 System Figure 406 Configuration > System > TELNET The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 245 Configuration > System > TELNET LABEL Enable Server Port Service Control Add Edit Remove Move
#
Zone Address Action Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the USG CLI using this service. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. This specifies from which computers you can access which USG zones. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 242 on page 558 for details on the screen that opens. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This the index number of the service control rule. The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the USGs (non-configurable) default policy. The USG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the USG will not have to use the default policy. This is the zone on the USG the user is allowed or denied to access. This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access. This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the USG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny). Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 574 Chapter 30 System 30.10 FTP You can upload and download the USGs firmware and configuration files using FTP. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. 30.10.1 Configuring FTP To change your USGs FTP settings, click Configuration > System > FTP tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to specify from which zones FTP can be used to access the USG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come. Figure 407 Configuration > System > FTP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 246 Configuration > System > FTP LABEL Enable TLS required Server Port Server Certificate Service Control Add Edit Remove DESCRIPTION Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the USG using this service. Select the check box to use FTP over TLS (Transport Layer Security) to encrypt communication. This implements TLS as a security mechanism to secure FTP clients and/or servers. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the USG for FTP connections. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. This specifies from which computers you can access which USG zones. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 242 on page 558 for details on the screen that opens. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 575 Chapter 30 System Table 246 Configuration > System > FTP (continued) LABEL Move DESCRIPTION To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This the index number of the service control rule. The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the USGs (non-configurable) default policy. The USG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the USG will not have to use the default policy. This is the zone on the USG the user is allowed or denied to access. This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access. This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the USG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny). Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings.
#
Zone Address Action Apply Reset 30.11 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your USG supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the USG through the network. The USG supports SNMP version one
(SNMPv1), version two (SNMPv2c) and version 3 (SNMPv3). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. Figure 408 SNMP Management Model USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 576 Chapter 30 System An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the USG). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
Get - Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent. GetNext - Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations. Set - Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent. Trap - Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events. 30.11.1 SNMPv3 and Security SNMPv3 enhances security for SNMP management using authentication and encryption. SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions. Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers. Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages. When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted, only the intended recipients can read them. 30.11.2 Supported MIBs The USG supports MIB II that is defined in RFC-1213 and RFC-1215. The USG also supports private MIBs (zywall.mib and zyxel-zywall-ZLD-Common.mib) to collect information about CPU and memory usage and VPN total throughput. The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistical data and monitor status and performance. You can download the USGs MIBs from www.zyxel.com. 30.11.3 SNMP Traps The USG will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one of the following events occurs. Table 247 SNMP Traps OBJECT LABEL Cold Start OBJECT ID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 linkDown 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 DESCRIPTION This trap is sent when the USG is turned on or an agent restarts. This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 577 Chapter 30 System Table 247 SNMP Traps (continued) OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 linkUp authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 vpnTunnelDisconnected 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.6.22.2.3 vpnTunnelName 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.6.22.2.2.1.1 vpnIKEName 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.6.22.2.2.1.2 vpnTunnelSPI 1.3.6.1.4.1.890.1.6.22.2.2.1.3 DESCRIPTION This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up. This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non-authenticated hosts. This trap is sent when an IPSec VPN tunnel is disconnected. This trap is sent along with the vpnTunnelDisconnected trap. This trap carries the disconnected tunnels IPSec SA name. This trap is sent along with the vpnTunnelDisconnected trap. This trap carries the disconnected tunnels IKE SA name. This trap is sent along with the vpnTunnelDisconnected trap. This trap carries the security parameter index (SPI) of the disconnected VPN tunnel. 30.11.4 Configuring SNMP To change your USGs SNMP settings, click Configuration > System > SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure your SNMP settings, including from which zones SNMP can be used to access the USG. You can also specify from which IP addresses the access can come. Figure 409 Configuration > System > SNMP USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 578 Chapter 30 System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 248 Configuration > System > SNMP LABEL Enable DESCRIPTION Select the check box to allow or disallow the computer with the IP address that matches the IP address(es) in the Service Control table to access the USG using this service. You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management. Server Port Trap Community Destination SNMPv2c Get Community Set Community SNMPv3 Add Edit Remove
#
User Authenticati on Privacy Type the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager. The default is public and allows all requests. Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to. Select the SNMP version for the USG. The SNMP version on the USG must match the version on the SNMP manager. Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is private and allows all requests. Select the SNMP version for the USG. The SNMP version on the USG must match the version on the SNMP manager. SNMPv3 (RFCs 3413 to 3415) provides secure access by authenticating and encrypting data packets over the network. The USG uses your login password as the SNMPv3 authentication and encryption passphrase. Note: Your login password must consist of at least 8 printable characters for SNMPv3. An error message will display if your login password has fewer characters. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. This is the index number of the entry. This displays the name of the user object to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap. This displays the authentication algorithm used for this entry. MD5 (Message Digest 5) and SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data. SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. This displays the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user. Methods available are:
DES - Data Encryption Standard is a widely used (but breakable) method of data encryption. It applies a 56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data. AES - Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key. AES applies a 128-bit key to 128-bit blocks of data. Privlege This displays the access rights to MIBs. Service Control Add Edit Remove Read-Write - The associated user can create and edit the MIBs on the USG, except the user account. Read-Only - The associated user can only collect information from the USG MIBs. This specifies from which computers you can access which USG zones. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Refer to Table 242 on page 558 for details on the screen that opens. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 579 Chapter 30 System Table 248 Configuration > System > SNMP (continued) LABEL Move DESCRIPTION To change an entrys position in the numbered list, select the method and click Move to display a field to type a number for where you want to put it and press [ENTER] to move the rule to the number that you typed. This the index number of the service control rule.
#
Zone Address Action Apply Reset The entry with a hyphen (-) instead of a number is the USGs (non-configurable) default policy. The USG applies this to traffic that does not match any other configured rule. It is not an editable rule. To apply other behavior, configure a rule that traffic will match so the USG will not have to use the default policy. This is the zone on the USG the user is allowed or denied to access. This is the object name of the IP address(es) with which the computer is allowed or denied to access. This displays whether the computer with the IP address specified above can access the USG zone(s) configured in the Zone field (Accept) or not (Deny). Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 30.12 Authentication Server You can set the USG to work as a RADIUS server to exchange messages with a RADIUS client, such as an AP for user authentication and authorization. Click Configuration > System > Auth. Server tab. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to enable the authentication server feature of the USG and specify the RADIUS clients IP address. Figure 410 Configuration > System > Auth. Server USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 580 DESCRIPTION Select the check box to have the USG act as a RADIUS server. Chapter 30 System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 249 Configuration > System > Auth. Server LABEL Enable Authentication Server Authentication Server Certificate Authentication Method Trusted Client Add Select the certificate whose corresponding private key is to be used to identify the USG to the RADIUS client. You must have certificates already configured in the My Certificates screen. Select an authentication method if you have created any in the Configuration > Object >
Auth. Method screen. Use this section to configure trusted clients in the USG RADIUS server database. Click this to create a new entry. Select an entry and click Add to create a new entry after the selected entry. Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to be able to modify the entrys settings. To remove an entry, select it and click Remove. The USG confirms you want to remove it before doing so. Note that subsequent entries move up by one when you take this action. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This is the index number of the entry. This icon is lit when the entry is active and dimmed when the entry is inactive. This field indicates the name assigned to the profile. This is the IP address of the RADIUS client that is allowed to exchange messages with the USG. This is the subnet mask of the RADIUS client. This is the description of the RADIUS client. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Edit Remove Activate Inactivate
#
Status Profile Name IP Address Mask Description Apply Reset 30.12.1 Add/Edit Trusted RADIUS Client Click Configuration > System > Auth. Server to display the Auth. Server screen. Click the Add icon or an Edit icon to display the following screen. Use this screen to create a new entry or edit an existing one. Figure 411 Configuration > System > Auth. Server > Add/Edit USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 581 Chapter 30 System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 250 Configuration > System > Auth. Server > Add/Edit LABEL Activate Profile Name IP Address DESCRIPTION Select this check box to make this profile active. Enter a descriptive name (up to 31 alphanumerical characters) for identification purposes. Enter the IP address of the RADIUS client that is allowed to exchange messages with the USG. Enter the subnet mask of the RADIUS client. Enter a password (up to 64 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the USG and the RADIUS client. The key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external authentication server and the USG. Enter the description of each server, if any. You can use up to 60 printable ASCII characters. Click OK to save the changes. Click Cancel to discard the changes. Netmask Secret Description OK Cancel 30.13 CloudCNM Screen CloudCNM is a cloud-based network management system that allows management and monitoring of ZyWALL/USG/UAG security gateways with firmware that supports the TR-069 protocol. In the following figure, SP is the management service provider, while A and B are sites with devices being managed by SP. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 582 Chapter 30 System Figure 412 CloudCNM Example Network Topology CloudCNM features include:
Batch import of managed devices at one time using one CSV file See an overview of all managed devices and system information in one place Monitor and manage devices Install firmware to multiple devices of the same model at one time Backup and restore device configuration View the location of managed devices on a map Receive notification for events and alarms, such as when a device goes down Graphically monitor individual devices and see related statistics Directly access a device for remote configuration Create four types of administrators with different privileges Perform Site-to-Site, Hub & Spoke, Fully-meshed and Remote Access VPN provisioning. To allow CloudCNM management of your USG:
You must have a CloudCNM license with CNM ID number or a CloudCNM URL identifying the server. The USG must be able to communicate with the CloudCNM server. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 583 Chapter 30 System You must configure Configuration > System > CloudCNM to allow the USG to find the CloudCNM server. Figure 413 Configuration > System > CloudCNM The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Click this button to display a greater or lesser number of configuration fields. Table 251 Configuration > System > CloudCNM LABEL Show Advanced Settings / Hide Advanced Settings Enable Auto Select this to allow management of the USG by CloudCNM. Select this if your CloudCNM server can access MyZyXEL.com and you have a CNM ID from the CloudCNM license. Enter the CNM ID exactly as on the CloudCNM license. MyZyXEL.com associates the CNM ID with the CNM URL which identifies the server on which CloudCNM is installed. Therefore you dont need to enter the CNM URL when you select Auto. Select this if your CloudCNM server cannot access MyZyXEL.com. If your USG server cannot access MyZyXEL.com, then select Custom and enter the IPv4 IP address of the CloudCNM server followed by the port number (default 7547 for HTTPS or 7549 for HTPP) in CNM URL. For example, if you installed CloudCNM on a server with IP address 1.1.1.1, then enter 1.1.1.1:7547 or 1.1.1.1:7549 as the CNM URL. Choose the CNM URL protocol: HTTP or HTTPS. If you enter 1.1.1.1:7547 as the CNM URL, you must choose HTTPS as the Transfer Protocol, and then the whole CNM URL is https://1.1.1.1:7547. If you enter 1.1.1.1:7549 as the CNM URL, you must choose HTTP as the Transfer Protocol, and then the whole CNM URL is http:/
/1.1.1.1:7549. Enable this to have the USG inform the CloudCNM server of its presence at regular intervals. Type how often the USG should inform CloudCNM server of its presence. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. CNM ID CNM URL Custom CNM URL Transfer Protocol Periodic Inform Interval Apply Reset Note: See the CloudCNM User Guide for more information on CloudCNM. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 584 Chapter 30 System 30.14 Language Screen Click Configuration > System > Language to open the following screen. Use this screen to select a display language for the USGs Web Configurator screens. Figure 414 Configuration > System > Language The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 252 Configuration > System > Language LABEL Language Setting DESCRIPTION Select a display language for the USGs Web Configurator screens. You also need to open a new browser session to display the screens in the new language. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Apply Reset 30.15 IPv6 Screen Click Configuration > System > IPv6 to open the following screen. Use this screen to enable IPv6 support for the USGs Web Configurator screens. Figure 415 Configuration > System > IPv6 The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 253 Configuration > System > IPv6 LABEL Enable IPv6 DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG support IPv6 and make IPv6 settings be available on the screens that the functions support, such as the Configuration > Network >
Interface > Ethernet, VLAN, and Bridge screens. The USG discards all IPv6 packets if you clear this check box. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Apply Reset USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 585 Chapter 30 System 30.16 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) Utility The ZyXEL One Network (ZON) utility uses the ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP) for discovering and configuring ZDP-aware ZyXEL devices in the same broadcast domain as the computer on which ZON is installed. The ZON Utility issues requests via ZDP and in response to the query, the ZyXEL device responds with basic information including IP address, firmware version, location, system and model name. The information is then displayed in the ZON Utility screen and you can perform tasks like basic configuration of the devices and batch firmware upgrade in it. You can download the ZON Utility at www.zyxel.com and install it on a computer. The following figure shows the ZON Utility screen. Figure 416 ZON Utility Screen In the ZON Utility, select a device and then use the icons to perform actions. The following table describes the icons numbered from left to right in the ZON Utility screen. Table 254 ZON Utility Icons ICON 1 IP configuration 2 Renew IP 3 Reboot Device 4 Flash Locator LED 5 Web GUI 6 Firmware Upgrade 7 Change Admin Password 8 ZAC 9 Discovery 10 Save Configuration 11 Settings DESCRIPTION Change the selected devices IP address. This is not supported by the USG at the time of writing. Update a DHCP-assigned dynamic IP address. This is not supported by the USG at the time of writing. Use this icon to restart the selected device(s). This may be useful when troubleshooting or upgrading new firmware. Use this icon to locate the selected device by causing its Locator LED to blink. This is not available on the USG at the time of writing. Use this to access the selected device web configurator from your browser. You will need a username and password to log in. Use this icon to upgrade new firmware to selected device(s) of the same model. Make sure you have downloaded the firmware from the ZyXEL website to your computer and unzipped it in advance. Use this icon to change the admin password of the selected device. You must know the current admin password before changing to a new one. Use this icon to run the ZyXEL AP Configurator of the selected AP. This is not supported by the USG at the time of writing. You should use this icon first to display all connected devices in the same network as your computer. Use this icon to save configuration changes to permanent memory on a selected device. This is not needed by the USG at the time of writing. Use this icon to select a network adaptor for the computer on which the ZON utility is installed, and the utility language. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 586 Chapter 30 System The following table describes the fields in the ZON Utility main screen. Table 255 ZON Utility Fields LABEL Type Model Firmware Version MAC Address IP Address System Name Location Status DESCRIPTION This field displays an icon of the kind of device discovered. This field displays the model name of the discovered device. This field displays the firmware version of the discovered device. This field displays the MAC address of the discovered device. This field displays the IP address of an internal interface on the discovered device that first received an ZDP discovery request from the ZON utility. This field displays the system name of the discovered device. This field displays where the discovered device is. This field displays whether changes to the discovered device have been done successfully. As the USG does not support IP Configuration, Renew IP address and Flash Locator LED, this field displays Update failed, Not support Renew IP address and Not support Flash Locator LED respectively. 30.16.1 ZyXEL One Network (ZON) System Screen Enable ZDP (ZON) and Smart Connect (Ethernet Neighbor) in the System > ZON screen. See Monitor > System Status > Ethernet Neighbor for information on using Smart Connect
(Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)) for discovering and configuring LLDP-aware devices in the same broadcast domain as the USG that youre logged into using the web configurator. The following figure shows the System > ZON screen. Figure 417 Configuration > System > ZON The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 256 Configuration > System > ZON LABEL ZDP DESCRIPTION ZyXEL Discovery Protocol (ZDP) is the protocol that the ZyXEL One Network (ZON) utility uses for discovering and configuring ZDP-aware ZyXEL devices in the same broadcast domain as the computer on which ZON is installed. Select to activate ZDP discovery on the USG. Smart Connect uses Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) for discovering and configuring LLDP-aware devices in the same broadcast domain as the USG that youre logged into using the web configurator. Select to activate LLDP discovery on the USG. See also Monitor > System Status >
Ethernet Discovery. Enable Smart Connect Enable USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 587 Chapter 30 System Table 256 Configuration > System > ZON LABEL Apply Reset DESCRIPTION Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 588 CHAPTER 31 Log and Report 31.1 Overview Use these screens to configure daily reporting and log settings. 31.1.1 What You Can Do In this Chapter Use the Email Daily Report screen (Section 31.2 on page 589) to configure where and how to send daily reports and what reports to send. Use the Log Setting screens (Section 31.3 on page 591) to specify settings for recording log messages and alerts, e-mailing them, storing them on a connected USB storage device, and sending them to remote syslog servers. 31.2 Email Daily Report Use the Email Daily Report screen to start or stop data collection and view various statistics about traffic passing through your USG. Note: Data collection may decrease the USGs traffic throughput rate. Click Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report to display the following screen. Configure this screen to have the USG e-mail you system statistics every day. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 589 Chapter 31 Log and Report Figure 418 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 590 Chapter 31 Log and Report The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select this to send reports by e-mail every day. Table 257 Configuration > Log & Report > Email Daily Report LABEL Enable Email Daily Report Mail Server Mail Server Port TLS Security Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server. Enter the same port number here as is on the mail server for mail traffic. Select Transport Layer Security (TLS) if you want encrypted communications between the mail server and the USG. If you choose TLS Security, you may also select this to have the USG authenticate the mail server in the TLS handshake. Type the subject line for outgoing e-mail from the USG. Select Append system name to add the USGs system name to the subject. Select Append date time to add the USGs system date and time to the subject. Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in replies. Type the e-mail address (or addresses) to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server. This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. Type the password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. Authenticate Server Mail Subject Append system name Append date time Mail From Mail To SMTP Authentication User Name Password Retype to Confirm Send Report Now Click this button to have the USG send the daily e-mail report immediately. Time for sending report Report Items Select the time of day (hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation. Select the information to include in the report. Types of information include System Resource Usage, Wireless Report, Threat Report, and Interface Traffic Statistics. Reset All Counters Apply Reset Select Reset counters after sending report successfully if you only want to see statistics for a 24 hour period. Click this to discard all report data and start all of the counters over at zero. Click Apply to save your changes back to the USG. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 31.3 Log Setting Screens The Log Setting screens control log messages and alerts. A log message stores the information for viewing or regular e-mailing later, and an alert is e-mailed immediately. Usually, alerts are used for events that require more serious attention, such as system errors and attacks. The USG provides a system log and supports e-mail profiles and remote syslog servers. View the system log in the MONITOR > Log screen. Use the e-mail profiles to mail log messages to the USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 591 Chapter 31 Log and Report specific destinations. You can also have the USG store system logs on a connected USB storage device. The other four logs are stored on specified syslog servers. The Log Setting screens control what information the USG saves in each log. You can also specify which log messages to e-mail for the system log, and where and how often to e-mail them. These screens also set for which events to generate alerts and where to email the alerts. The first Log Setting screen provides a settings summary. Use the Edit screens to configure settings such as log categories, e-mail addresses, and server names for any log. Use the Log Category Settings screen to edit what information is included in the system log, USB storage, e-
mail profiles, and remote servers. 31.3.1 Log Settings To access this screen, click Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings. Figure 419 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 258 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings LABEL Edit Activate Inactivate
#
Name DESCRIPTION Double-click an entry or select it and click Edit to open a screen where you can modify it. To turn on an entry, select it and click Activate. To turn off an entry, select it and click Inactivate. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific log. This field displays the type of log setting entry (system log, logs stored on a USB storage device connected to the USG, or one of the remote servers). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 592 Chapter 31 Log and Report Table 258 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Settings (continued) LABEL Log Format DESCRIPTION This field displays the format of the log. Internal - system log; you can view the log on the View Log tab. VRPT/Syslog - ZyXELs Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format. CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format. This field is a summary of the settings for each log. Please see Section 31.3.2 on page 593 for more information. Click this button to open the Log Category Settings Edit screen. Click this button to save your changes (activate and deactivate logs) and make them take effect. Summary Log Category Settings Apply 31.3.2 Edit System Log Settings The Log Settings Edit screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the system log (which includes the e-mail profiles). Go to the Log Settings screen (see Section 31.3.1 on page 592), and click the system log Edit icon. Figure 420 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (System Log) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 593 Chapter 31 Log and Report Figure 421 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (System Log) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 594 Chapter 31 Log and Report The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 259 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (System Log) LABEL E-Mail Server 1/2 DESCRIPTION Active Mail Server Mail Subject Send From Send Log To Send Alerts To Sending Log Day for Sending Log Time for Sending Log SMTP Authentication User Name Password Retype to Confirm Active Log and Alert System Log E-mail Server 1 Select this to send log messages and alerts according to the information in this section. You specify what kinds of log messages are included in log information and what kinds of log messages are included in alerts in the Active Log and Alert section. Type the name or IP address of the outgoing SMTP server. Type the subject line for the outgoing e-mail. Type the e-mail address from which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. This address is used in replies. Type the e-mail address to which the outgoing e-mail is delivered. Type the e-mail address to which alerts are delivered. Select how often log information is e-mailed. Choices are: When Full, Hourly and When Full, Daily and When Full, and Weekly and When Full. This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly. Select the day of the week the log is e-mailed. This field is available if the log is e-mailed weekly or daily. Select the time of day
(hours and minutes) when the log is e-mailed. Use 24-hour notation. Select this check box if it is necessary to provide a user name and password to the SMTP server. This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the user name to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. This box is effective when you select the SMTP Authentication check box. Type the password to provide to the SMTP server when the log is e-mailed. Type the password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly. Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the USG will e-mail logs to them. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories. The USG does not e-mail debugging information, even if this setting is selected. Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 1 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 1. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 595 Chapter 31 Log and Report Table 259 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (System Log) (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 2 for all log categories. E-mail Server 2
#
Log Category System log E-mail Server 1 E-mail Server 2 Log Consolidation Active Log Consolidation Interval OK Cancel Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 2. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software. Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category; the USG does not e-mail debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected. Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-
mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The USG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log. Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The USG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log. Select this to activate log consolidation. Log consolidation aggregates multiple log messages that arrive within the specified Log Consolidation Interval. In the View Log tab, the text [count=x], where x is the number of original log messages, is appended at the end of the Message field, when multiple log messages were aggregated. Type how often, in seconds, to consolidate log information. If the same log message appears multiple times, it is aggregated into one log message with the text
[count=x], where x is the number of original log messages, appended at the end of the Message field. Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes. 31.3.3 Edit Log on USB Storage Setting The Edit Log on USB Storage Setting screen controls the detailed settings for saving logs to a connected USB storage device. Go to the Log Setting Summary screen (see Section 31.3.1 on page 592), and click the USB storage Edit icon. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 596 Chapter 31 Log and Report Figure 422 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (USB Storage) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 597 Chapter 31 Log and Report The following table describes the labels in this screen. Select this to have the USG save a copy of its system logs to a connected USB storage device. Use the Active Log section to specify what kinds of messages to include. DESCRIPTION Table 260 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (USB Storage) LABEL USB Storage Duplicate logs to USB storage (if ready) Log Keep duration Enable log keep duration Active Log Select this and enter the number of days you want the USG to store a log in Keep duration before deleting it forever from the USG. Selection Use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays each category of messages. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software. Select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below). Choices are:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
#
Log Category Selection OK Cancel 31.3.4 Edit Remote Server Log Settings The Log Settings Edit screen controls the detailed settings for each log in the remote server
(syslog). Go to the Log Settings Summary screen (see Section 31.3.1 on page 592), and click a remote server Edit icon. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 598 Chapter 31 Log and Report Figure 423 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (Remote Server) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 599 Chapter 31 Log and Report The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 261 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Edit (Remote Server) LABEL Log Settings for Remote Server DESCRIPTION Active Log Format Select this check box to send log information according to the information in this section. You specify what kinds of messages are included in log information in the Active Log section. This field displays the format of the log information. It is read-only. VRPT/Syslog - ZyXELs Vantage Report, syslog-compatible format. CEF/Syslog - Common Event Format, syslog-compatible format. Type the server name or the IP address of the syslog server to which to send log information. Select a log facility. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Please see the documentation for your syslog program for more information. Server Address Log Facility Active Log Selection Use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software. Select what information you want to log from each Log Category (except All Logs; see below). Choices are:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes.
#
Log Category Selection OK Cancel 31.3.5 Log Category Settings Screen The Log Category Settings screen allows you to view and to edit what information is included in the system log, USB storage, e-mail profiles, and remote servers at the same time. It does not let you change other log settings (for example, where and how often log information is e-mailed or remote server names). To access this screen, go to the Log Settings screen (see Section 31.3.1 on page 592), and click the Log Category Settings button. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 600 Chapter 31 Log and Report Figure 424 Log Category Settings AC This screen provides a different view and a different way of indicating which messages are included in each log and each alert. Please see Section 31.3.2 on page 593, where this process is discussed.
(The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software.) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 262 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Log Category Settings LABEL System Log DESCRIPTION Use the System Log drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. USB Storage disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category for the system log or e-mail any logs to e-mail server 1 or 2. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories for the system log. If e-mail server 1 or 2 also has normal logs enabled, the USG will e-mail logs to them. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories. The USG does not e-mail debugging information, even if this setting is selected. Use the USB Storage drop-down list to change the log settings for saving logs to a connected USB storage device. disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information for any category to a connected USB storage device. enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts for all categories and save them to a connected USB storage device. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all categories and save them to a connected USB storage device. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 601 Chapter 31 Log and Report Table 262 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Log Category Settings (continued) LABEL E-mail Server 1 Use the E-Mail Server 1 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail DESCRIPTION server 1 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 1 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 1. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 1. E-mail Server 2 Use the E-Mail Server 2 drop-down list to change the settings for e-mailing logs to e-mail server 2 for all log categories. Using the System Log drop-down list to disable all logs overrides your e-mail server 2 settings. enable normal logs (green check mark) - e-mail log messages for all categories to e-mail server 2. enable alert logs (red exclamation point) - e-mail alerts for all categories to e-mail server 2. For each remote server, use the Selection drop-down list to change the log settings for all of the log categories. Remote Server 1~4 disable all logs (red X) - do not send the remote server logs for any log category. enable normal logs (green check mark) - send the remote server log messages and alerts for all log categories. enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - send the remote server log messages, alerts, and debugging information for all log categories. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. This field displays each category of messages. It is the same value used in the Display and Category fields in the View Log tab. The Default category includes debugging messages generated by open source software. Select which events you want to log by Log Category. There are three choices:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - create log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - create log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category; the USG does not e-mail debugging information, however, even if this setting is selected. Select which event log categories to save to a connected USB storage device. There are three choices:
disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - save log messages and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - save log messages, alerts, and debugging information from this category. Select whether each category of events should be included in the log messages when it is e-
mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 1. The USG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log.
#
Log Category System Log USB Storage E-mail Server 1 E-mail USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 602 Chapter 31 Log and Report Table 262 Configuration > Log & Report > Log Setting > Log Category Settings (continued) LABEL E-mail Server 2 E-mail DESCRIPTION Select whether each category of events should be included in log messages when it is e-
mailed (green check mark) and/or in alerts (red exclamation point) for the e-mail settings specified in E-Mail Server 2. The USG does not e-mail debugging information, even if it is recorded in the System log. For each remote server, select what information you want to log from each Log Category
(except All Logs; see below). Choices are:
Remote Server 1~4 OK Cancel disable all logs (red X) - do not log any information from this category enable normal logs (green check mark) - log regular information and alerts from this category enable normal logs and debug logs (yellow check mark) - log regular information, alerts, and debugging information from this category Click this to save your changes and return to the previous screen. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving your changes. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 603 CHAPTER 32 File Manager 32.1 Overview Configuration files define the USGs settings. Shell scripts are files of commands that you can store on the USG and run when you need them. You can apply a configuration file or run a shell script without the USG restarting. You can store multiple configuration files and shell script files on the USG. You can edit configuration files or shell scripts in a text editor and upload them to the USG. Configuration files use a .conf extension and shell scripts use a .zysh extension. 32.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Configuration File screen (see Section 32.2 on page 606) to store and name configuration files. You can also download configuration files from the USG to your computer and upload configuration files from your computer to the USG. Use the Firmware Package screen (see Section 32.3 on page 610) to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the USG. Use the Shell Script screen (see Section 32.4 on page 612) to store, name, download, upload and run shell script files. 32.1.2 What you Need to Know Configuration Files and Shell Scripts When you apply a configuration file, the USG uses the factory default settings for any features that the configuration file does not include. When you run a shell script, the USG only applies the commands that it contains. Other settings do not change. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 604 Chapter 32 File Manager These files have the same syntax, which is also identical to the way you run CLI commands manually. An example is shown below. Figure 425 Configuration File / Shell Script: Example
# enter configuration mode configure terminal
# change administrator password username admin password 4321 user-type admin
# configure ge3 interface ge3 ip address 172.23.37.240 255.255.255.0 ip gateway 172.23.37.254 metric 1 exit
# create address objects for remote management / to-ZyWALL firewall rules
# use the address group in case we want to open up remote management later address-object TW_SUBNET 172.23.37.0/24 object-group address TW_TEAM address-object TW_SUBNET exit
# enable Telnet access (not enabled by default, unlike other services) ip telnet server
# open WAN-to-ZyWALL firewall for TW_TEAM for remote management firewall WAN ZyWALL insert 4 sourceip TW_TEAM service TELNET action allow exit write While configuration files and shell scripts have the same syntax, the USG applies configuration files differently than it runs shell scripts. This is explained below. Table 263 Configuration Files and Shell Scripts in the USG Configuration Files (.conf) Resets to default configuration. Goes into CLI Configuration mode. Runs the commands in the configuration file. Shell Scripts (.zysh) Goes into CLI Privilege mode. Runs the commands in the shell script. You have to run the example in Figure 425 on page 605 as a shell script because the first command is run in Privilege mode. If you remove the first command, you have to run the example as a configuration file because the rest of the commands are executed in Configuration mode. Comments in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts In a configuration file or shell script, use # or ! as the first character of a command line to have the USG treat the line as a comment. Your configuration files or shell scripts can use exit or a command line consisting of a single ! to have the USG exit sub command mode. Note: exit or !' must follow sub commands if it is to make the USG exit sub command mode. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 605 Chapter 32 File Manager Line 3 in the following example exits sub command mode. interface ge1 ip address dhcp
!
Lines 1 and 3 in the following example are comments and line 4 exits sub command mode.
!
interface ge1
# this interface is a DHCP client
!
Lines 1 and 2 are comments. Line 5 exits sub command mode.
! this is from Joe
# on 2008/04/05 interface ge1 ip address dhcp
!
Errors in Configuration Files or Shell Scripts When you apply a configuration file or run a shell script, the USG processes the file line-by-line. The USG checks the first line and applies the line if no errors are detected. Then it continues with the next line. If the USG finds an error, it stops applying the configuration file or shell script and generates a log. You can change the way a configuration file or shell script is applied. Include setenv stop-on-
error off in the configuration file or shell script. The USG ignores any errors in the configuration file or shell script and applies all of the valid commands. The USG still generates a log for any errors. 32.2 The Configuration File Screen Click Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File to open the Configuration File screen. Use the Configuration File screen to store, run, and name configuration files. You can also download configuration files from the USG to your computer and upload configuration files from your computer to the USG. Once your USG is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making further configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 606 Chapter 32 File Manager Configuration File Flow at Restart If there is not a startup-config.conf when you restart the USG (whether through a management interface or by physically turning the power off and back on), the USG uses the system-default.conf configuration file with the USGs default settings. If there is a startup-config.conf, the USG checks it for errors and applies it. If there are no errors, the USG uses it and copies it to the lastgood.conf configuration file as a back up file. If there is an error, the USG generates a log and copies the startup-config.conf configuration file to the startup-config-bad.conf configuration file and tries the existing lastgood.conf configuration file. If there isnt a lastgood.conf configuration file or it also has an error, the USG applies the system-default.conf configuration file. You can change the way the startup-config.conf file is applied. Include the setenv-startup stop-on-error off command. The USG ignores any errors in the startup-config.conf file and applies all of the valid commands. The USG still generates a log for any errors. Figure 426 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File Do not turn off the USG while configuration file upload is in progress. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 607 Chapter 32 File Manager The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 264 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File LABEL Rename DESCRIPTION Use this button to change the label of a configuration file on the USG. You can only rename manually saved configuration files. You cannot rename the lastgood.conf, system-
default.conf and startup-config.conf files. You cannot rename a configuration file to the name of another configuration file in the USG. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen. Figure 427 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File > Rename Remove Download Copy Specify the new name for the configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-
Z0-9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Remove to delete it from the USG. You can only delete manually saved configuration files. You cannot delete the system-
default.conf, startup-config.conf and lastgood.conf files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the configuration file. Click OK to delete the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the configuration file. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer. Use this button to save a duplicate of a configuration file on the USG. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen. Figure 428 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File > Copy Specify a name for the duplicate configuration file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-
zA-Z0-9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 608 Chapter 32 File Manager Table 264 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued) LABEL Apply DESCRIPTION Use this button to have the USG use a specific configuration file. Click a configuration files row to select it and click Apply to have the USG use that configuration file. The USG does not have to restart in order to use a different configuration file, although you will need to wait for a few minutes while the system reconfigures. The following screen gives you options for what the USG is to do if it encounters an error in the configuration file. Figure 429 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File > Apply Immediately stop applying the configuration file - this is not recommended because it would leave the rest of the configuration blank. If the interfaces were not configured before the first error, the console port may be the only way to access the device. Immediately stop applying the configuration file and roll back to the previous configuration - this gets the USG started with a fully valid configuration file as quickly as possible. Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file and generates error logs for all of the configuration files errors. This lets the USG apply most of your configuration and you can refer to the logs for what to fix. Ignore errors and finish applying the configuration file and then roll back to the previous configuration - this applies the valid parts of the configuration file, generates error logs for all of the configuration files errors, and starts the USG with a fully valid configuration file. Click OK to have the USG start applying the configuration file or click Cancel to close the screen This column displays the number for each configuration file entry. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with a specific address. The total number of configuration files that you can save depends on the sizes of the configuration files and the available flash storage space.
#
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 609 Chapter 32 File Manager Table 264 Maintenance > File Manager > Configuration File (continued) LABEL File Name DESCRIPTION This column displays the label that identifies a configuration file. You cannot delete the following configuration files or change their file names. The system-default.conf file contains the USGs default settings. Select this file and click Apply to reset all of the USG settings to the factory defaults. This configuration file is included when you upload a firmware package. The startup-config.conf file is the configuration file that the USG is currently using. If you make and save changes during your management session, the changes are applied to this configuration file. The USG applies configuration changes made in the Web Configurator to the configuration file when you click Apply or OK. It applies configuration changes made via commands when you use the write command. The lastgood.conf is the most recently used (valid) configuration file that was saved when the device last restarted. If you upload and apply a configuration file with an error, you can apply lastgood.conf to return to a valid configuration. This column displays the size (in KB) of a configuration file. This column displays the date and time that the individual configuration files were last changed or saved. The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your USG You cannot upload a configuration file named system-default.conf or lastgood.conf. If you upload startup-config.conf, it will replace the current configuration and immediately apply the new settings. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .conf file you want to upload. The configuration file must use a
.conf filename extension. You will receive an error message if you try to upload a fie of a different format. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Size Last Modified Upload Configuration File File Path Browse... Upload 32.3 The Firmware Package Screen Click Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package to open the Firmware Package screen. Use the Firmware Package screen to check your current firmware version and upload firmware to the USG. You can upload firmware to be the Running firmware or Standby firmware. Note: The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it. Find the firmware package at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a .bin extension, for example, zywall.bin. The firmware update can take up to five minutes. Do not turn off or reset the USG while the firmware update is in progress!
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 610 Chapter 32 File Manager Figure 430 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 265 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package LABEL Firmware Status Reboot Now DESCRIPTION Click the Reboot Now button to restart the USG. If you applied changes in the Web configurator, these were saved automatically and do not change when you reboot. If you made changes in the CLI, however, you have to use the write command to save the configuration before you reboot. Otherwise, the changes are lost when you reboot. If you want the Standby firmware to be the Running firmware, then select the Standby firmware row and click Reboot Now. Wait a few minutes until the login screen appears. If the login screen does not appear, clear your browser cache and refresh the screen or type the IP address of the USG in your Web browser again. You can also use the CLI command reboot to restart the USG. This displays the system space (partition) index number where the firmwarm is located. The firmware can be either Standby or Running; only one firmware can be running at any one time. This indicates whether the firmware is Running, or not running but already uploaded to the USG and is on Standby. It displays N/A if there is no firmware uploaded to that system space. This is the model name of the device which the firmware is running on. This is the firmware version and the date created. This is the date that the version of the firmware was created. Click the To upload image file in system space pull-down menu and select 1 or 2. The default is the Standby system space, so if you want to upload new firmware to be the Running firmware, then select the correct system space. If you upload firmware to the Running system space, the USG will reboot automatically. If you upload firmware to the Standby system space, you have the option to Reboot now or Dont Reboot. If you select Reboot now, then the firmware upload to Standby system space will become the Running firmware after you click Upload and the upload process completes.
#
Status Model Version Released Date Upload File To upload image file in system space Boot Options Reboot now USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 611 Chapter 32 File Manager Table 265 Maintenance > File Manager > Firmware Package (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION If you choose Dont Reboot, then the firmware upload to Standby system space will be the Standby firmware after you click Upload and the upload process completes. Dont Reboot File Path Browse... Upload If you want the Standby firmware to be the Running firmware, then select the Standby firmware row in Firmware Status and click Reboot Now. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take a few minutes. After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen, wait a few minutes before logging into the USG again. Figure 431 Firmware Upload In Process Note: The USG automatically reboots after a successful upload. The USG automatically restarts causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 432 Network After five minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Dashboard screen. If the upload was not successful, the following message appears in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. Figure 433 Firmware Upload Error 32.4 The Shell Script Screen Use shell script files to have the USG use commands that you specify. Use a text editor to create the shell script files. They must use a .zysh filename extension. Click Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script to open the Shell Script screen. Use the Shell Script screen to store, name, download, upload and run shell script files. You can store multiple shell script files on the USG at the same time. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 612 Chapter 32 File Manager Note: You should include write commands in your scripts. If you do not use the write command, the changes will be lost when the USG restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script. Figure 434 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script Each field is described in the following table. Table 266 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script LABEL Rename DESCRIPTION Use this button to change the label of a shell script file on the USG. You cannot rename a shell script to the name of another shell script in the USG. Click a shell scripts row to select it and click Rename to open the Rename File screen. Figure 435 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script > Rename Specify the new name for the shell script file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-
9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. Click a shell script files row to select it and click Remove to delete the shell script file from the USG. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete the shell script file. Click OK to delete the shell script file or click Cancel to close the screen without deleting the shell script file. Click a shell script files row to select it and click Download to save the configuration to your computer. Remove Download USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 613 Chapter 32 File Manager Table 266 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script (continued) LABEL Copy DESCRIPTION Use this button to save a duplicate of a shell script file on the USG. Click a shell script files row to select it and click Copy to open the Copy File screen. Figure 436 Maintenance > File Manager > Shell Script > Copy Specify a name for the duplicate file. Use up to 25 characters (including a-zA-Z0-
9;~!@#$%^&()_+[]{},.=-). Click OK to save the duplicate or click Cancel to close the screen without saving a duplicate of the configuration file. Use this button to have the USG use a specific shell script file. Click a shell script files row to select it and click Apply to have the USG use that shell script file. You may need to wait awhile for the USG to finish applying the commands. This column displays the number for each shell script file entry. This column displays the label that identifies a shell script file. This column displays the size (in KB) of a shell script file. This column displays the date and time that the individual shell script files were last changed or saved. The bottom part of the screen allows you to upload a new or previously saved shell script file from your computer to your USG. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse ... to find it. Click Browse... to find the .zysh file you want to upload. Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to several minutes. Apply
#
File Name Size Last Modified Upload Shell Script File Path Browse... Upload USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 614 CHAPTER 33 Diagnostics 33.1 Overview Use the diagnostics screens for troubleshooting. 33.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Diagnostics screen (see Section 33.2 on page 615) to generate a file containing the USGs configuration and diagnostic information if you need to provide it to customer support during troubleshooting.
Use the Packet Capture screens (see Section 33.3 on page 617) to capture packets going through the USG. The Core Dump screens (Section 33.4 on page 620) save a processs core dump to an attached USB storage device if the process terminates abnormally (crashes) so you can send the file to customer support for troubleshooting. The System Log screens (Section 33.5 on page 622) download files of system logs from a connected USB storage device to your computer. Use the Network Tool screen (see Section 33.6 on page 622) to ping an IP address or trace the route packets take to a host. Use the Wireless Frame Capture screens (see Section 33.7 on page 623) to capture network traffic going through the AP interfaces connected to your USG. 33.2 The Diagnostic Screen The Diagnostic screen provides an easy way for you to generate a file containing the USGs configuration and diagnostic information. You may need to send this file to customer support for troubleshooting. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics to open the Diagnostic screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 615 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Figure 437 Maintenance > Diagnostics The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 267 Maintenance > Diagnostics LABEL Filename Last modified Size Copy the diagnostic file to USB storage (if ready) Apply Collect Now DESCRIPTION This is the name of the most recently created diagnostic file. This is the date and time that the last diagnostic file was created. The format is yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss. This is the size of the most recently created diagnostic file. Select this to have the USG create an extra copy of the diagnostic file to a connected USB storage device. Click Apply to save your changes. Click this to have the USG create a new diagnostic file. Wait while information is collected. Download Click this to save the most recent diagnostic file to a computer. 33.2.1 The Diagnostics Files Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Files to open the diagnostic files screen. This screen lists the files of diagnostic information the USG has collected and stored on the USG or a connected USB storage device. You may need to send these files to customer support for troubleshooting. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 616 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Figure 438 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Files The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 268 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Files LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION Select files and click Remove to delete them from the USG. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete. Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer. This column displays the number for each file entry. The total number of files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available storage space. This column displays the label that identifies the file. This column displays the size (in bytes) of a file. File Name Size Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved. Download
#
33.3 The Packet Capture Screen Use this screen to capture network traffic going through the USGs interfaces. Studying these packet captures may help you identify network problems. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics >
Packet Capture to open the packet capture screen. Note: New capture files overwrite existing files of the same name. Change the File Suffix fields setting to avoid this. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 617 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Figure 439 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 269 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture LABEL Interfaces DESCRIPTION Enabled interfaces (except for virtual interfaces) appear under Available Interfaces. Select interfaces for which to capture packets and click the right arrow button to move them to the Capture Interfaces list. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl]
key to select multiple objects. Filter IP Version Protocol Type Host IP Host Port Misc setting Continuously capture and overwrite old ones Select the version of IP for which to capture packets. Select any to capture packets for all IP versions. Select the protocol of traffic for which to capture packets. Select any to capture packets for all types of traffic. Select a host IP address object for which to capture packets. Select any to capture packets for all hosts. Select User Defined to be able to enter an IP address. This field is configurable when you set the IP Type to any, tcp, or udp. Specify the port number of traffic to capture. Select this to have the USG keep capturing traffic and overwriting old packet capture entries when the available storage space runs out. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 618 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Table 269 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture (continued) LABEL Save data to onboard storage only DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG only store packet capture entries on the USG. The available storage size is displayed as well. Save data to USB storage Note: The USG reserves some onboard storage space as a buffer. Select this to have the USG store packet capture entries only on a USB storage device connected to the USG if the USG allows this. Status:
Unused - the connected USB storage device was manually unmounted by using the Remove Now button or for some reason the USG cannot mount it. none - no USB storage device is connected. service deactivated - USB storage feature is disabled (in Configuration >
Object > USB Storage), so the USG cannot use a connected USB device to store system logs and other diagnostic information. available - you can have the USG use the USB storage device. The available storage capacity also displays. Note: The USG reserves some USB storage space as a buffer. When saving packet captures only to the USGs onboard storage, specify a maximum limit in megabytes for the total combined size of all the capture files on the USG. When saving packet captures to a connected USB storage device, specify a maximum limit in megabytes for each capture file. Note: If you have existing capture files and have not selected the Continuously capture and overwrite old ones option, you may need to set this size larger or delete existing capture files. The valid range depends on the available onboard/USB storage size. The USG stops the capture and generates the capture file when either the file reaches this size or the time period specified in the Duration field expires. Specify a maximum size limit in megabytes for individual packet capture files. After a packet capture file reaches this size, the USG starts another packet capture file. Click this button to have the USG capture packets according to the settings configured in this screen. You can configure the USG while a packet capture is in progress although you cannot modify the packet capture settings. The USGs throughput or performance may be affected while a packet capture is in progress. After the USG finishes the capture it saves a separate capture file for each selected interface. The total number of packet capture files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space. Once the flash storage space is full, adding more packet captures will fail. Click this button to stop a currently running packet capture and generate a separate capture file for each selected interface. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Captured Packet Files Split threshold Capture Stop Reset USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 619 Chapter 33 Diagnostics 33.3.1 The Packet Capture Files Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture > Files to open the packet capture files screen. This screen lists the files of packet captures stored on the USG or a connected USB storage device. You can download the files to your computer where you can study them using a packet analyzer (also known as a network or protocol analyzer) such as Wireshark. Figure 440 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture > Files The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 270 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Packet Capture > Files LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION Select files and click Remove to delete them from the USG or the connected USB storage device. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete. Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer. This column displays the number for each packet capture file entry. The total number of packet capture files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space. This column displays the label that identifies the file. The file name format is interface name-file suffix.cap. This column displays the size (in bytes) of a configuration file. This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved. Download
#
File Name Size Last Modified 33.4 The Core Dump Screen Use the Core Dump screen to have the USG save a processs core dump to an attached USB storage device if the process terminates abnormally (crashes). You may need to send this file to customer support for troubleshooting. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump to open the following screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 620 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Figure 441 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 271 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump LABEL Save core dump to USB storage (if ready) DESCRIPTION Select this to have the USG save a processs core dump to an attached USB storage device if the process terminates abnormally (crashes). If you clear this option the USG only saves Click Apply to save the changes. Click Reset to return the screen to its last-saved settings. Apply Reset 33.4.1 The Core Dump Files Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump > Files to open the core dump files screen. This screen lists the core dump files stored on the USG or a connected USB storage device. You may need to send these files to customer support for troubleshooting. Figure 442 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump > Files The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 272 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump > Files LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION Select files and click Remove to delete them from the USG. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete. Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer. This column displays the number for each core dump file entry. The total number of core dump files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space. Download
#
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 621 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Table 272 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Core Dump > Files (continued) LABEL File Name Size Last Modified DESCRIPTION This column displays the label that identifies the file. This column displays the size (in bytes) of a file. This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved. 33.5 The System Log Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > System Log to open the system log files screen. This screen lists the files of system logs stored on a connected USB storage device. The files are in comma separated value (csv) format. You can download them to your computer and open them in a tool like Microsofts Excel. Figure 443 Maintenance > Diagnostics > System Log The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 273 Maintenance > Diagnostics > System Log LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION Select files and click Remove to delete them from the USG. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl]
key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete. Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer. This column displays the number for each file entry. The total number of files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available storage space. This column displays the label that identifies the file. This column displays the size (in bytes) of a file. This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved. Download
#
File Name Size Last Modified 33.6 The Network Tool Screen Use this screen to ping or traceroute an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Network Tool to display this screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 622 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Figure 444 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Network Tool The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 274 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Network Tool LABEL Network Tool DESCRIPTION Select PING IPv4 to ping the IP address that you entered. Domain Name or IP Address Test Stop Reset Select TRACEROUTE IPv4 to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer. Type the IPv4 address of a computer that you want to perform ping or traceroute in order to test a connection. Click this button to start to ping or run a traceroute. Click this button to terminate the current ping operation or traceroute. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 33.7 The Wireless Frame Capture Screen Use this screen to capture wireless network traffic going through the AP interfaces connected to your USG. Studying these frame captures may help you identify network problems. Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture to display this screen. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 623 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Note: New capture files overwrite existing files of the same name. Change the File Prefix fields setting to avoid this. Figure 445 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture > Capture The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 275 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture > Capture LABEL MON Mode APs DESCRIPTION Configure AP to MON Mode Available MON Mode APs Click this to go the Configuration > Wireless > AP Management screen, where you can set one or more APs to monitor mode. This column displays which APs on your wireless network are currently configured for monitor mode. Capture MON Mode APs Misc Setting File Size Use the arrow buttons to move APs off this list and onto the Captured MON Mode APs list. This column displays the monitor-mode configured APs selected to for wireless frame capture. Specify a maximum size limit in kilobytes for the total combined size of all the capture files on the USG, including any existing capture files and any new capture files you generate. Note: If you have existing capture files you may need to set this size larger or delete existing capture files. The valid range is 1 to 50000. The USG stops the capture and generates the capture file when either the file reaches this size. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 624 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Table 275 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture > Capture (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Specify text to add to the front of the file name in order to help you identify frame capture files. File Prefix Capture Stop Reset You can modify the prefix to also create new frame capture files each time you perform a frame capture operation. Doing this does no overwrite existing frame capture files. The file format is: [file prefix].cap. For example, monitor.cap. Click this button to have the USG capture frames according to the settings configured in this screen. You can configure the USG while a frame capture is in progress although you cannot modify the frame capture settings. The USGs throughput or performance may be affected while a frame capture is in progress. After the USG finishes the capture it saves a combined capture file for all APs. The total number of frame capture files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space. Once the flash storage space is full, adding more frame captures will fail. Click this button to stop a currently running frame capture and generate a combined capture file for all APs. Click this button to return the screen to its last-saved settings. 33.7.1 The Wireless Frame Capture Files Screen Click Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture > Files to open this screen. This screen lists the files of wireless frame captures the USG has performed. You can download the files to your computer where you can study them using a packet analyzer (also known as a network or protocol analyzer) such as Wireshark. Figure 446 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture > Files The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 276 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture > Files LABEL Remove DESCRIPTION Select files and click Remove to delete them from the USG. Use the [Shift] and/or [Ctrl] key to select multiple files. A pop-up window asks you to confirm that you want to delete. Click a file to select it and click Download to save it to your computer. This column displays the number for each packet capture file entry. The total number of packet capture files that you can save depends on the file sizes and the available flash storage space. Download
#
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 625 Chapter 33 Diagnostics Table 276 Maintenance > Diagnostics > Wireless Frame Capture > Files (continued) LABEL File Name DESCRIPTION This column displays the label that identifies the file. The file name format is interface name-
file suffix.cap. This column displays the size (in bytes) of a configuration file. Size Last Modified This column displays the date and time that the individual files were saved. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 626 CHAPTER 34 Packet Flow Explore 34.1 Overview Use this to get a clear picture on how the USG determines where to forward a packet and how to change the source IP address of the packet according to your current settings. This function provides you a summary of all your routing and SNAT settings and helps troubleshoot any related problems. 34.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Routing Status screen (see Section 34.2 on page 627) to view the overall routing flow and each routing functions settings. Use the SNAT Status screen (see Section 34.3 on page 632) to view the overall source IP address conversion (SNAT) flow and each SNAT functions settings. 34.2 The Routing Status Screen The Routing Status screen allows you to view the current routing flow and quickly link to specific routing settings. Click a function box in the Routing Flow section, the related routes (activated) will display in the Routing Table section. To access this screen, click Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore. The order of the routing flow may vary depending on whether you:
Select use policy route to override direct route in the CONFIGURATION > Network >
Routing > Policy Route screen. Use policy routes to control 1-1 NAT by using the policy control-virtual-server-rules activate command. Select use policy routes to control dynamic IPSec rules in the CONFIGURATION > VPN >
IPSec VPN > VPN Connection screen. Note: Once a packet matches the criteria of a routing rule, the USG takes the corresponding action and does not perform any further flow checking. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 627 Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore Figure 447 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Direct Route) Figure 448 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Dynamic VPN Figure 449 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Policy Route) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 628 Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore Figure 450 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (1-1 SNAT) Figure 451 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (SiteToSite VPN) Figure 452 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Dynamic VPN) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 629 Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore Figure 453 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Static-Dynamic Route) Figure 454 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Default WAN Trunk) Figure 455 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (Main Route) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 630 Interface Metric Flags Persist Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 277 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status LABEL Routing Flow DESCRIPTION This section shows you the flow of how the USG determines where to route a packet. Click a function box to display the related settings in the Routing Table section. This section shows the corresponding settings according to the function box you click in the Routing Flow section. Routing Table The following fields are available if you click Direct Route, Static-Dynamic Route, or Main Route in the Routing Flow section.
#
Destination Gateway This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the destination IP address of a route. This is the IP address of the next-hop gateway or the interface through which the traffic is routed. This is the name of an interface associated with the route. This is the routes priority among the displayed routes. This indicates additional information for the route. The possible flags are:
A - this route is currently activated S - this is a static route C - this is a direct connected route O - this is a dynamic route learned through OSPF R - this is a dynamic route learned through RIP G - the route is to a gateway (router) in the same network. B - this is a route which discards packets. L - this is a recursive route. This is the remaining time of a dynamically learned route. The USG removes the route after this time period is counted down to zero.
! - this is a route which forces a route lookup to fail. Incoming Source Destination Service DSCP Code The following fields are available if you click Policy Route in the Routing Flow section. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
#
PR #
This is the number of an activated policy route. If you have configured a schedule for the route, this screen only displays the route at the scheduled time. This is the interface on which the packets are received. This is the source IP address(es) from which the packets are sent. This is the destination IP address(es) to which the packets are transmitted. This is the name of the service object. any means all services. This is the DSCP value of incoming packets to which this policy route applies. See Section 10.2 on page 228 for more information. This is the type of the next hop to which packets are directed. This is the main route if the next hop type is Auto. This is the interface name and gateway IP address if the next hop type is Interface /
GW. This is the tunnel name if the next hop type is VPN Tunnel. This is the trunk name if the next hop type is Trunk. Next Hop Type Next Hop Info The following fields are available if you click 1-1 SNAT in the Routing Flow section.
#
NAT Rule Source Destination This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the name of an activated 1:1 or Many 1:1 NAT rule in the NAT table. This is the original source IP address(es). any means any IP address. This is the original destination IP address(es). any means any IP address. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 631 Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore Table 277 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > Routing Status (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the name of an interface which transmits packets out of the USG. Outgoing Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway in the same network of the outgoing interface. The following fields are available if you click Dynamic VPN or SiteToSite VPN in the Routing Flow section.
#
Source Destination VPN Tunnel The following fields are available if you click Default WAN Trunk in the Routing Flow section.
#
Source This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the IP address(es) of the local VPN network. This is the IP address(es) for the remote VPN network. This is the name of the VPN tunnel. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the source IP address(es) from which the packets are sent. any means any IP address. This is the destination IP address(es) to which the packets are transmitted. any means any IP address. This is the name of the WAN trunk through which the matched packets are transmitted. Destination Trunk 34.3 The SNAT Status Screen The SNAT Status screen allows you to view and quickly link to specific source NAT (SNAT) settings. Click a function box in the SNAT Flow section, the related SNAT rules (activated) will display in the SNAT Table section. To access this screen, click Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status. The order of the SNAT flow may vary depending on whether you:
select use default SNAT in the CONFIGURATION > Network > Interface > Trunk screen. use policy routes to control 1-1 NAT by using the policy control-virtual-server-rules activate command. Note: Once a packet matches the criteria of an SNAT rule, the USG takes the corresponding action and does not perform any further flow checking. Figure 456 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (Policy Route SNAT) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 632 Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore Figure 457 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (1-1 SNAT) Figure 458 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (Loopback SNAT) Figure 459 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (Default SNAT) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 278 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status LABEL SNAT Flow DESCRIPTION This section shows you the flow of how the USG changes the source IP address for a packet according to the rules you have configured in the USG. Click a function box to display the related settings in the SNAT Table section. The table fields in this section vary depending on the function box you select in the SNAT Flow section. SNAT Table The following fields are available if you click Policy Route SNAT in the SNAT Flow section. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
#
This is the number of an activated policy route which uses SNAT. PR #
This is the outgoing interface that the route uses to transmit packets. Outgoing SNAT This is the source IP address(es) that the SNAT rule uses finally. The following fields are available if you click 1-1 SNAT in the SNAT Flow section. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 633 Chapter 34 Packet Flow Explore DESCRIPTION This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This is the name of an activated NAT rule which uses SNAT. This is the original source IP address(es). This is the original destination IP address(es). This is the outgoing interface that the SNAT rule uses to transmit packets. This is the source IP address(es) that the SNAT rule uses finally. Table 278 Maintenance > Packet Flow Explore > SNAT Status (continued) LABEL
#
NAT Rule Source Destination Outgoing SNAT The following fields are available if you click Loopback SNAT in the SNAT Flow section. This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry.
#
This is the name of an activated NAT rule which uses SNAT and enables NAT loopback. NAT Rule This is the original source IP address(es). any means any IP address. Source Destination This is the original destination IP address(es). any means any IP address. This indicates which source IP address the SNAT rule uses finally. For example, Outgoing SNAT Interface IP means that the USG uses the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address for the matched packets it sends out through this rule. The following fields are available if you click Default SNAT in the SNAT Flow section.
#
Incoming Outgoing SNAT This field is a sequential value, and it is not associated with any entry. This indicates internal interface(s) on which the packets are received. This indicates external interface(s) from which the packets are transmitted. This indicates which source IP address the SNAT rule uses finally. For example, Outgoing Interface IP means that the USG uses the IP address of the outgoing interface as the source IP address for the matched packets it sends out through this rule. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 634 CHAPTER 35 Shutdown 35.1 Overview Use this to shutdown the device in preparation for disconnecting the power. Always use the Maintenance > Shutdown > Shutdown screen or the shutdown command before you turn off the USG or remove the power. Not doing so can cause the firmware to become corrupt. 35.1.1 What You Need To Know Shutdown writes all cached data to the local storage and stops the system processes. 35.2 The Shutdown Screen To access this screen, click Maintenance > Shutdown. Figure 460 Maintenance > Shutdown Click the Shutdown button to shut down the USG. Wait for the device to shut down before you manually turn off or remove the power. It does not turn off the power. You can also use the CLI command shutdown to shutdown the USG. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 635 CHAPTER 36 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. You can also refer to the logs (see Chapter 6 on page 100). For the order in which the USG applies its features and checks, see Chapter 34 on page 627. None of the LEDs turn on. Make sure that you have the power cord connected to the USG and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure you have the USG turned on. Check all cable connections. If the LEDs still do not turn on, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should contact your local vendor. Cannot access the USG from the LAN. Check the cable connection between the USG and your computer or switch. Ping the USG from a LAN computer. Make sure your computers Ethernet card is installed and functioning properly. Also make sure that its IP address is in the same subnet as the USGs. In the computer, click Start, (All) Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ping" followed by the USGs LAN IP address (192.168.1.1 is the default) and then press [ENTER]. The USG should reply. If youve forgotten the USGs password, use the RESET button. Press the button in for about 5 seconds (or until the PWR LED starts to blink), then release it. It returns the USG to the factory defaults (password is 1234, LAN IP address 192.168.1.1 etc.; see your Users Guide for details). If youve forgotten the USGs IP address, you can use the commands through the console port to check it. Connect your computer to the CONSOLE port using a console cable. Your computer should have a terminal emulation communications program (such as HyperTerminal) set to VT100 terminal emulation, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no flow control and 115200 bps port speed. I cannot access the Internet. Check the USGs connection to the Ethernet jack with Internet access. Make sure the Internet gateway device (such as a DSL modem) is working properly. Check the WAN interface's status in the Dashboard. Use the installation setup wizard again and make sure that you enter the correct settings. Use the same case as provided by your ISP. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 636 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting The content filter category service is not working. Make sure your USG has the content filter category service registered and that the license is not expired. Purchase a new license if the license is expired. Make sure your USG is connected to the Internet. I configured security settings but the USG is not applying them for certain interfaces. Many security settings are usually applied to zones. Make sure you assign the interfaces to the appropriate zones. When you create an interface, there is no security applied on it until you assign it to a zone. The USG is not applying the custom policy route I configured. The USG checks the policy routes in the order that they are listed. So make sure that your custom policy route comes before any other routes that the traffic would also match. The USG is not applying the custom security policy I configured. The USG checks the security policies in the order that they are listed. So make sure that your custom security policy comes before any other rules that the traffic would also match. I cannot enter the interface name I want. The format of interface names other than the Ethernet interface names is very strict. Each name consists of 2-4 letters (interface type), followed by a number (x, limited by the maximum number of each type of interface). For example, VLAN interfaces are vlan0, vlan1, vlan2, ...; and so on. The names of virtual interfaces are derived from the interfaces on which they are created. For example, virtual interfaces created on Ethernet interface wan1 are called wan1:1, wan1:2, and so on. Virtual interfaces created on VLAN interface vlan2 are called vlan2:1, vlan2:2, and so on. You cannot specify the number after the colon(:) in the Web Configurator; it is a sequential number. You can specify the number after the colon if you use the CLI to set up a virtual interface. I cannot set up a PPP interface, virtual Ethernet interface or virtual VLAN interface on an Ethernet interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 637 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting You cannot set up a PPP interface, virtual Ethernet interface or virtual VLAN interface if the underlying interface is a member of a bridge. You also cannot add an Ethernet interface or VLAN interface to a bridge if the member interface has a virtual interface or PPP interface on top of it. My rules and settings that apply to a particular interface no longer work. The interfaces IP address may have changed. To avoid this create an IP address object based on the interface. This way the USG automatically updates every rule or setting that uses the object whenever the interfaces IP address settings change. For example, if you change LAN1s IP address, the USG automatically updates the corresponding interface-based, LAN1 subnet address object. I cannot set up a PPP interface. You have to set up an ISP account before you create a PPPoE or PPTP interface. The data rates through my cellular connection are no-where near the rates I expected. The actual cellular data rate you obtain varies depending on the cellular device you use, the signal strength to the service providers base station, and so on. I created a cellular interface but cannot connect through it. Make sure you have a compatible mobile broadband device installed or connected. See www.zyxel.com for details. Make sure you have the cellular interface enabled. Make sure the cellular interface has the correct user name, password, and PIN code configured with the correct casing. If the USG has multiple WAN interfaces, make sure their IP addresses are on different subnets. Hackers have accessed my WEP-encrypted wireless LAN. WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. WPA2 or WPA2-
PSK is recommended. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 638 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting The wireless security is not following the re-authentication timer setting I specified. If a RADIUS server authenticates wireless stations, the re-authentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. Change the RADIUS servers configuration if you need to use a different re-
authentication timer setting. I cannot configure a particular VLAN interface on top of an Ethernet interface even though I have it configured it on top of another Ethernet interface. Each VLAN interface is created on top of only one Ethernet interface. The USG is not applying an interfaces configured ingress bandwidth limit. At the time of writing, the USG does not support ingress bandwidth management. The USG routes and applies SNAT for traffic from some interfaces but not from others. The USG automatically uses SNAT for traffic it routes from internal interfaces to external interfaces. For example LAN to WAN traffic. You must manually configure a policy route to add routing and SNAT settings for an interface with the Interface Type set to General. You can also configure a policy route to override the default routing and SNAT behavior for an interface with the Interface Type set to Internal or External. I cannot get Dynamic DNS to work. You must have a public WAN IP address to use Dynamic DNS. Make sure you recorded your DDNS accounts user name, password, and domain name and have entered them properly in the USG. You may need to configure the DDNS entrys IP Address setting to Auto if the interface has a dynamic IP address or there are one or more NAT routers between the USG and the DDNS server. The USG may not determine the proper IP address if there is an HTTP proxy server between the USG and the DDNS server. I cannot create a second HTTP redirect rule for an incoming interface. You can configure up to one HTTP redirect rule for each (incoming) interface. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 639 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting The USG keeps resetting the connection. If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the USGs LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the USG. This is called an asymmetrical or triangle route. This causes the USG to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. You can set the USGs security policy to permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (so it does not reset the connection) although this is not recommended since allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the USG. A better solution is to use virtual interfaces to put the USG and the backup gateway on separate subnets. See Asymmetrical Routes on page 320 and the chapter about interfaces for more information. I cannot set up an IPSec VPN tunnel to another device. If the IPSec tunnel does not build properly, the problem is likely a configuration error at one of the IPSec routers. Log into both ZyXEL IPSec routers and check the settings in each field methodically and slowly. Make sure both the USG and remote IPSec router have the same security settings for the VPN tunnel. It may help to display the settings for both routers side-by-side. Here are some general suggestions. See also Chapter 21 on page 332. The system log can often help to identify a configuration problem. If you enable NAT traversal, the remote IPSec device must also have NAT traversal enabled. The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same authentication method to establish the IKE SA. Both routers must use the same negotiation mode. Both routers must use the same encryption algorithm, authentication algorithm, and DH key group. When using pre-shared keys, the USG and the remote IPSec router must use the same pre-
shared key. The USGs local and peer ID type and content must match the remote IPSec routers peer and local ID type and content, respectively. The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same active protocol. The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same encapsulation. The USG and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI. If the sites are/were previously connected using a leased line or ISDN router, physically disconnect these devices from the network before testing your new VPN connection. The old route may have been learnt by RIP and would take priority over the new VPN connection. To test whether or not a tunnel is working, ping from a computer at one site to a computer at the other. Before doing so, ensure that both computers have Internet access (via the IPSec routers). It is also helpful to have a way to look at the packets that are being sent and received by the USG and remote IPSec router (for example, by using a packet sniffer). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 640 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting Check the configuration for the following USG features. The USG does not put IPSec SAs in the routing table. You must create a policy route for each VPN tunnel. See Chapter 10 on page 226. Make sure the To-USG security policies allow IPSec VPN traffic to the USG. IKE uses UDP port 500, AH uses IP protocol 51, and ESP uses IP protocol 50. The USG supports UDP port 500 and UDP port 4500 for NAT traversal. If you enable this, make sure the To-USG security policies allow UDP port 4500 too. Make sure regular security policies allow traffic between the VPN tunnel and the rest of the network. Regular security policies check packets the USG sends before the USG encrypts them and check packets the USG receives after the USG decrypts them. This depends on the zone to which you assign the VPN tunnel and the zone from which and to which traffic may be routed. If you set up a VPN tunnel across the Internet, make sure your ISP supports AH or ESP
(whichever you are using). If you have the USG and remote IPSec router use certificates to authenticate each other, You must set up the certificates for the USG and remote IPSec router first and make sure they trust each others certificates. If the USGs certificate is self-signed, import it into the remote IPsec router. If it is signed by a CA, make sure the remote IPsec router trusts that CA. The USG uses one of its Trusted Certificates to authenticate the remote IPSec routers certificate. The trusted certificate can be the remote IPSec routers self-signed certificate or that of a trusted CA that signed the remote IPSec routers certificate. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode. The VPN connection is up but VPN traffic cannot be transmitted through the VPN tunnel. If you have the Configuration > VPN > IPSec VPN > VPN Connection screens Use Policy Route to control dynamic IPSec rules option enabled, check the routing policies to see if they are sending traffic elsewhere instead of through the VPN tunnels. I uploaded a logo to show in the SSL VPN user screens but it does not display properly. The logo graphic must be GIF, JPG, or PNG format. The graphic should use a resolution of 103 x 29 pixels to avoid distortion when displayed. The USG automatically resizes a graphic of a different resolution to 103 x 29 pixels. The file size must be 100 kilobytes or less. Transparent background is recommended. I logged into the SSL VPN but cannot see some of the resource links. Available resource links vary depending on the SSL application objects configuration. I changed the LAN IP address and can no longer access the Internet. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 641 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting The USG automatically updates address objects based on an interfaces IP address, subnet, or gateway if the interfaces IP address settings change. However, you need to manually edit any address objects for your LAN that are not based on the interface. I cannot get the RADIUS server to authenticate the USGs default admin account. The default admin account is always authenticated locally, regardless of the authentication method setting. The USG fails to authentication the ext-user user accounts I configured. An external server such as AD, LDAP or RADIUS must authenticate the ext-user accounts. If the USG tries to use the local database to authenticate an ext-user, the authentication attempt will always fail. (This is related to AAA servers and authentication methods, which are discussed in other chapters in this guide.) I cannot add the admin users to a user group with access users. You cannot put access users and admin users in the same user group. I cannot add the default admin account to a user group. You cannot put the default admin account into any user group. The schedule I configured is not being applied at the configured times. Make sure the USGs current date and time are correct. I cannot get a certificate to import into the USG. 1 2 3 For My Certificates, you can import a certificate that matches a corresponding certification request that was generated by the USG. You can also import a certificate in PKCS#12 format, including the certificates public and private keys. You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. Any certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 642 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting Binary X.509: This is an ITU-T recommendation that defines the formats for X.509 certificates. PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#7: This is a standard that defines the general syntax for data (including digital signatures) that may be encrypted. A PKCS #7 file is used to transfer a public key certificate. The private key is not included. The USG currently allows the importation of a PKS#7 file that contains a single certificate. PEM (Base-64) encoded PKCS#7: This Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format uses lowercase letters, uppercase letters and numerals to convert a binary PKCS#7 certificate into a printable form. Binary PKCS#12: This is a format for transferring public key and private key certificates.The private key in a PKCS #12 file is within a password-encrypted envelope. The files password is not connected to your certificates public or private passwords. Exporting a PKCS #12 file creates this and you must provide it to decrypt the contents when you import the file into the USG. Note: Be careful not to convert a binary file to text during the transfer process. It is easy for this to occur since many programs use text files by default. I cannot access the USG from a computer connected to the Internet. Check the service control rules and to-USG security policies. I uploaded a logo to display on the upper left corner of the Web Configurator login screen and access page but it does not display properly. Make sure the logo file is a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less. I uploaded a logo to use as the screen or window background but it does not display properly. Make sure the logo file is a GIF, JPG, or PNG of 100 kilobytes or less. The USGs traffic throughput rate decreased after I started collecting traffic statistics. Data collection may decrease the USGs traffic throughput rate. I can only see newer logs. Older logs are missing. When a log reaches the maximum number of log messages, new log messages automatically overwrite existing log messages, starting with the oldest existing log message first. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 643 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting The commands in my configuration file or shell script are not working properly. In a configuration file or shell script, use # or ! as the first character of a command line to have the USG treat the line as a comment. Your configuration files or shell scripts can use exit or a command line consisting of a single !
to have the USG exit sub command mode. Include write commands in your scripts. Otherwise the changes will be lost when the USG restarts. You could use multiple write commands in a long script. Note: exit or !' must follow sub commands if it is to make the USG exit sub command mode. See Chapter 32 on page 604 for more on configuration files and shell scripts. I cannot get the firmware uploaded using the commands. The Web Configurator is the recommended method for uploading firmware. You only need to use the command line interface if you need to recover the firmware. See the CLI Reference Guide for how to determine if you need to recover the firmware and how to recover it. My packet capture captured less than I wanted or failed. The packet capture screens File Size sets a maximum size limit for the total combined size of all the capture files on the USG, including any existing capture files and any new capture files you generate. If you have existing capture files you may need to set this size larger or delete existing capture files. The USG stops the capture and generates the capture file when either the capture files reach the File Size or the time period specified in the Duration field expires. My earlier packet capture files are missing. New capture files overwrite existing files of the same name. Change the File Suffix fields setting to avoid this. 36.1 Resetting the USG If you cannot access the USG by any method, try restarting it by turning the power off and then on again. If you still cannot access the USG by any method or you forget the administrator USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 644 Chapter 36 Troubleshooting password(s), you can reset the USG to its factory-default settings. Any configuration files or shell scripts that you saved on the USG should still be available afterwards. Use the following procedure to reset the USG to its factory-default settings. This overwrites the settings in the startup-config.conf file with the settings in the system-default.conf file. Note: This procedure removes the current configuration. 1 Make sure the SYS LED is on and not blinking. 2 3 Press the RESET button and hold it until the SYS LED begins to blink. (This usually takes about five seconds.) Release the RESET button, and wait for the USG to restart. You should be able to access the USG using the default settings. 36.2 Getting More Troubleshooting Help Search for support information for your model at www.zyxel.com for more troubleshooting suggestions. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 645 APPENDIX A Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office. Required Information Product model and serial number. Warranty Information. Date that you received your device. Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide) Taiwan ZyXEL Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com Asia China ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp. ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp. ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp. http://www.zyxel.cn India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd http://www.zyxel.in USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 646 Appendix A Customer Support Kazakhstan ZyXEL Kazakhstan http://www.zyxel.kz Korea ZyXEL Korea Corp. http://www.zyxel.kr Malaysia ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd. http://www.zyxel.com.my Pakistan ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.pk Philippines ZyXEL Philippines http://www.zyxel.com.ph Singapore ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd. http://www.zyxel.com.sg Taiwan ZyXEL Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/
Thailand ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd http://www.zyxel.co.th Vietnam ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi Europe Austria ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH http://www.zyxel.de USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 647 Appendix A Customer Support Belarus ZyXEL BY http://www.zyxel.by Belgium ZyXEL Communications B.V. http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
http://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/
Bulgaria ZyXEL http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech Republic ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o http://www.zyxel.cz Denmark ZyXEL Communications A/S http://www.zyxel.dk Estonia ZyXEL Estonia http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland ZyXEL Communications http://www.zyxel.fi France ZyXEL France http://www.zyxel.fr Germany ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH http://www.zyxel.de Hungary ZyXEL Hungary & SEE http://www.zyxel.hu USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 648 Appendix A Customer Support Italy ZyXEL Communications Italy http://www.zyxel.it/
Latvia ZyXEL Latvia http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml Lithuania ZyXEL Lithuania http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml Netherlands ZyXEL Benelux http://www.zyxel.nl Norway ZyXEL Communications http://www.zyxel.no Poland ZyXEL Communications Poland http://www.zyxel.pl Romania ZyXEL Romania http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro Russia ZyXEL Russia http://www.zyxel.ru Slovakia ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka http://www.zyxel.sk Spain ZyXEL Communications ES Ltd http://www.zyxel.es USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 649 Appendix A Customer Support Sweden ZyXEL Communications http://www.zyxel.se Switzerland Studerus AG http://www.zyxel.ch/
Turkey ZyXEL Turkey A.S. http://www.zyxel.com.tr UK ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd. http://www.zyxel.co.uk Ukraine ZyXEL Ukraine http://www.ua.zyxel.com Latin America Argentina ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Brazil ZyXEL Communications Brasil Ltda. https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/
Ecuador ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Middle East Israel ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://il.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 650 Appendix A Customer Support Middle East ZyXEL Communication Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/me/en/
North America USA ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters http://www.zyxel.com/us/en/
Oceania Africa Australia ZyXEL Communications Corporation http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
South Africa Nology (Pty) Ltd. http://www.zyxel.co.za USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 651 APPENDIX B Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2015 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Regulatory Notice and Statement (Class B) UNITED STATES of AMERICA The following information applies if you use the product within USA area. FCC EMC Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
device. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the devices Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receivers Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must be at least 20 cm from the user and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. CANADA The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area Industry Canada ICES statement ICAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 652 Appendix B Legal Information Industry Canada RSS-GEN & RSS-247 statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This radio transmitter (2468C-USG20WVPN) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Antenna Information TYPE Omini-directional dipole MANUFACTURER WHA YU GAIN 3dBi CONNECTOR Reverse SMA plug If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz , the following attention must be paid, The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-
channel mobile satellite systems. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate;
and The worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in Section 6.2.2(3) of RSS 247 shall be clearly indicated. If the product with 5G wireless function operating in 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz , the following attention must be paid. For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-
5725 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limit Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement. Le prsent metteur radio (2468C-USG20WVPN) de modle s'il fait partie du matriel de catgorieI) a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impdance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. Informations Antenne TYPE Omini-directional dipole FABRICANT WHA YU GAIN 3dBi CONNECTEUR Reverse SMA plug Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en5150-5250 MHz and 5725-5850 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes Les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
Pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande de 5 725 5 850 MHz) doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. spcifie pour l'exploitation point point et lexploitation non point point, selon le cas;
Les pires angles dinclinaison ncessaires pour rester conforme lexigence de la p.i.r.e. applicable au masque dlvation, et nonce la section 6.2.2 3) du CNR-247, doivent tre clairement indiqus. Lorsque la fonction sans fil 5G fonctionnant en 5250-5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz est active pour ce produit , il est ncessaire de porter une attention particulire aux choses suivantes Pour les dispositifs munis dantennes amovibles, le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes de 5 250 5 350 MHz et de 5 470 5 725 MHz doit tre conforme la limite de la p.i.r.e. Industry Canada radiation exposure statement This device complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations:
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. EUROPEAN UNION USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 653 Appendix B Legal Information The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Compliance information for 2.4GHz and/or 5GHz wireless products relevant to the EU and other Countries following the EU Directive 1999/
5/EC (R&TTE)
(Bulgarian) ZyXEL , 1999/5/C. Espaol
(Spanish) etina
(Czech) Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ZyXEL tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Dansk (Danish) Undertegnede ZyXEL erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch
(German) Eesti keel
(Estonian)
(Greek) English Franais
(French) Hrvatski
(Croatian) slenska
(Icelandic) Italiano
(Italian) Hiermit erklrt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. ZyXEL 1999/5/C. Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Par la prsente ZyXEL dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL ovime izjavljuje da je radijska oprema tipa u skladu s Direktivom 1999/5/EC. Hr me lsir, ZyXEL v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Latvieu valoda
(Latvian) Ar o ZyXEL deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi kalba
(Lithuanian) iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Magyar
(Hungarian) Alulrott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EK irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Malti (Maltese) Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Nederlands
(Dutch) Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Polski (Polish) Niniejszym ZyXEL owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Portugus
(Portuguese) ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Romn
(Romanian) Slovenina
(Slovak) Slovenina
(Slovene) Suomi
(Finnish) Svenska
(Swedish) Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EC. Norsk
(Norwegian) Erklrer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF. This device is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5350 MHz frequency range. National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:
USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 654 Appendix B Legal Information Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de lUE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposs la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, except pour les pays mentionns ci-dessous:
Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttiva 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschrnkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der Richtlinie 1999/5/CE folgen) mit Aunahme der folgenden aufgefhrten Staaten:
In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2.4GHz and 5GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries in which additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2.4GHz and 5GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs:. Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Denmark In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Italy This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://
www.esd.lv for more details. 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk informcijas: http://
www.esd.lv. Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 655 Appendix B Legal Information List of national codes COUNTRY Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Safety Warnings ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE AT BE BG HR CY CZ DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia Slovenia Spain Switzerland Sweden Turkey United Kingdom LI LT LU MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SK SI ES CH SE TR GB Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do not expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do not store things on the device. Do not install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do not open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Do not remove the plug and connect it to a power outlet by itself; always attach the plug to the power adaptor first before connecting it to a power outlet. Do not allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it from the device and the power source, repairing the power adapter or cord is prohibited. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product. Do not obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device, For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;
For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be easily accessible. Environment Statement ErP (Energy-related Products) ZyXEL products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures, power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:
Network standby power consumption < 12W, and/or Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W. Wireless setting, please refer to "Wireless" chapter for more detail. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 656 Appendix B Legal Information European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information The symbol below means that according to local regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate collection of your product and/or its battery will help save natural resources and ensure that the environment is sustainable development. Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gem den rtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmll entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natrliche Ressourcen zu sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schtzen. El smbolo de abajo indica que segn las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batera debern depositarse como basura separada de la domstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida til, llvelo a un punto limpio. Cuando llegue el momento de desechar el producto, la recogida por separado ste y/o su batera ayudar a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y medioambiental. Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les rglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent tre limins sparment des ordures mnagres. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la collecte spare de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera conomiser les ressources naturelles et protger l'environnement et la sant humaine. Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente e la salute umana. Symbolen innebr att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat frn hushllsavfallet. Nr den hr produkten nr slutet av sin livslngd ska du ta den till en tervinningsstation. Vid tiden fr kasseringen bidrar du till en bttre milj och mnsklig hlsa genom att gra dig av med den p ett tervinningsstlle. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 657 Appendix B Legal Information Environmental Product Declaration USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 658 Appendix B Legal Information
Viewing Certifications Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this products documentation and certifications. Specifications Product Rating: Refer to the USG label. Power Adapter: 12V DC, 2.0A, LPS, 40oC (degrees Centigrade). Device Operating / Storage Environment: Refer to the USG package. This product is intended to be supplied by a Listed Direct Plug-In Power Unit marked Class 2, Listed Power Adapter or DC power source marked L.P.S. (or Limited Power Source), rated 12Vdc, 2A minimum, Tma = 40 degree C, and the altitude of operation = 2000m. If need further assistance with purchasing the power source, please contact ZyXEL for further information. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 659 Appendix B Legal Information Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Open Source Licenses This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it. USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 660 APPENDIX C Product Features Please refer to the product datasheet for the latest product features. Table 279 Product Features MODEL NAME USG20-VPN USG20W-VPN 4.16 4.16 Version
# of MAC Interface VLAN Virtual (alias) PPP (system default) PPP (user create) Bridge Tunnel (GRE/IPv6 Transition) Routing Static route Policy route Sessions (Forwarding, NAT/firewall) Reserved Sessions For Managed Devices ARP Table Size NAT Max. Virtual Server Number Firewall (Security policy) Max Firewall ACL Rule Number = Secure Policy Number
(Marketing spec, Lab test * 10%) Max Session Limit per Host Rules User Profile Max. Local User Max. Admin User Max. User Group. Max User In One User Group Max Concurrent User Objects 6 8 4 2 2 2 4 64 100 20000 500 16384 128 500 1000 64 5 16 64 64 7 8 4 2 2 2 4 64 100 20000 500 16384 128 500 1000 64 5 16 64 64 Address Object
(Marketing spec, Lab amount = VPN rule #) 100 100 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 661 Appendix C Product Features Table 279 Product Features MODEL NAME USG20-VPN USG20W-VPN Address Group Max. Address Object In One Group Service Object Service Group Max. Service Object In One Group Schedule Object Schedule Group Max. Schedule Object In One Group ISP Account Max. LDAP Server Object #
Max. LDAP Server for Each LDAP Group Max. RADIUS Server Object #
Max. RADIUS Server for Each RADIUS Group Max. AD Server Object #
Max. AD Server for Each AD Group Max. Zone Number (System Default) Max. Zone Number (User Define) Max. Trunk Number (System Default) Max. Trunk Number (User Define) Max Radio Profile Max SSID Profile Max Security Profile Max Macfilter Profile Max MAC Entry Per Macfilter Profile VPN Max. VPN Tunnels Number Max. VPN Concentrator Number Max. VPN Configuration Provision Rule Number Certificate Certificate Buffer Size Built-in service A record NS record (DNS Domain Zone Forward) MX record Max Service Control Entries Max. DHCP Network Pool 25 64 200 50 64 32 16 24 25 64 200 50 64 32 16 24 16(PPP+3G) 16(PPP+3G) 2 2 2 2 4 2 8 8 1 4 16 32 32 32 512 10 2 10 2 2 2 2 4 2 8 8 1 4 16 32 32 32 512 10 2 10 128k 128k 32 8 4 32 8 4 16 per service 16 per service vlan+brg+ethernet vlan+brg+ethernet USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 662 Appendix C Product Features Table 279 Product Features MODEL NAME USG20-VPN USG20W-VPN Max. DHCP Host Pool(Static DHCP) Max. DHCP Extended Options Max DDNS Profiles DHCP Relay USB Storage Device Number Centralized Log Log Entries Debug Log Entries Admin E-mail Address Syslog Server Content Filtering Max. Number of Content Filter Policy Max. Number of Filtering Profiles Forbidden Domain Entry Number Trusted Domain Entry Number Keyword Blocking Number Common Forbidden Domain Entry Number Common Trusted Domain Entry Number Anti-Spam (Available in ZLD 2.10 and later versions) Maximum AS Rule Number (Profile) Maximum White List Rule Support Maximum Black List Rule Support Maximum DNSBL Domain Support Max. Statistics Number Max. Statistics Ranking MyZyXEL.com SKU update interval (day) SSL VPN (Available in ZLD 2.00 and later versions) Default SSL VPN Connections Maximum SSL VPN Connections Max. SSL VPN Network List SSL VPN Max Policy AP controller Default # of Control AP Max. # of Control AP 64 10 5 64 10 5 2 per interface 2 per interface 1 512 1024 2 4 16 16 1 512 1024 2 4 16 16 256 per profile 256 per profile 256 per profile 256 per profile 128 per profile 128 per profile 1024 1024 16 128 128 5 500 10 1024 1024 16 128 128 5 500 10 2 ~ 6 hrs 2 ~ 6 hrs 5 15 8 16 NA NA 5 15 8 16 NA NA USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 663 Appendix C Product Features Table 279 Product Features MODEL NAME USG20-VPN USG20W-VPN Others Device HA VRRP Group Max OSPF Areas n/a 32 n/a 32 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 664 Index Index multiple logins 463 see also users 455 Web Configurator 465 access users, see also force user authentication policies account user 454 accounting server 501 Active Directory, see AD active protocol 363 AH 363 and encapsulation 363 ESP 363 active sessions 90, 108 ActiveX 429 AD 502, 504, 505, 507 directory structure 503 Distinguished Name, see DN password 507 port 507, 509 search time limit 507 SSL 507 address groups 487 and content filtering 415, 416 and FTP 576 and security policy 302 and SNMP 580 and SSH 572 and Telnet 574 and WWW 558 address objects 487 and content filtering 415, 416 and FTP 576 and NAT 234, 258 and policy routes 233 and security policy 302 and SNMP 580 and SSH 572 and Telnet 574 and VPN connections 337 and WWW 558 HOST 487 RANGE 487 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 665 Symbols Numbers 3322 Dynamic DNS 249 3DES 358 6in4 tunneling 183 6to4 tunneling 183 A AAA Base DN 504 Bind DN 504, 507 directory structure 503 Distinguished Name, see DN DN 504, 505, 507 password 507 port 507, 509 search time limit 507 SSL 507 AAA server 501 AD 503 and users 455 directory service 502 LDAP 502, 503 local user database 503 RADIUS 502, 503, 508 RADIUS group 509 see also RADIUS access 22 Access Point Name, see APN access users 455, 456 custom page 559 forcing login 298 idle timeout 463 logging in 298 SUBNET 487 types of 487 address record 547 admin user troubleshooting 642 admin users 455 multiple logins 463 see also users 455 Advanced Encryption Standard, see AES AES 358 AF 237 AH 341, 363 and transport mode 364 alerts 595, 596, 598, 600, 601, 602 anti-spam 438 ALG 266, 271 and NAT 266, 268 and policy routes 268, 271 and security policy 266, 268 and trunks 271 FTP 266 H.323 266, 267, 272 peer-to-peer calls 268 RTP 272 see also VoIP pass through 266 SIP 266, 267 anti-spam 434, 438, 441 action for spam mails 439 alerts 438 and registration 437 black list 434, 438, 441 concurrent e-mail sessions 128, 436 DNSBL 435, 439, 446 e-mail header buffer 435 e-mail headers 435 excess e-mail sessions 436 general settings 436 identifying legitimate e-mail 434 identifying spam 434 log options 438 mail scan 439 mail sessions threshold 436 POP2 435 POP3 435 registration status 437 regular expressions 444 SMTP 435 status 129 Index white list 434, 438, 443, 444 APN 178 Application Layer Gateway, see ALG application patrol and HTTP redirect 263 ASAS (Authenex Strong Authentication System) 502 asymmetrical routes 320 allowing through the security policy 323 vs virtual interfaces 320 attacks Denial of Service (DoS) 340 Authenex Strong Authentication System
(ASAS) 502 authentication in IPSec 342 LDAP/AD 503 server 501 authentication algorithms 247, 358, 359 and active protocol 358 and routing protocols 247 MD5 247, 359 SHA1 359 text 247 Authentication Header, see AH authentication method objects 510 and users 455 and WWW 558 create 512 example 510 authentication policy exceptional services 300 Authentication server RADIUS client 581 authentication server 580 authentication type 53, 530 Authentication, Authorization, Accounting servers, see AAA server authorization server 501 auxiliary interfaces 141 B backing up configuration files 606 bandwidth USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 666 egress 179, 188 ingress 179, 188 bandwidth limit troubleshooting 639 bandwidth management maximize bandwidth usage 237, 404 Base DN 504 Batch import 583 Bind DN 504, 507 black list 438, 441 anti-spam 434 bookmarks 383 bridge interfaces 141, 202 and virtual interfaces of members 203 basic characteristics 142 effect on routing table 202 member interfaces 202 virtual 213 bridges 201 C CA and certificates 514 CA (Certificate Authority), see certificates Calling Station ID 480 capturing packets 617 card SIM 179 CEF (Common Event Format) 593, 600 cellular 173 APN 178 interfaces 141 signal quality 114 SIM card 179 status 115 system 114 troubleshooting 638 certificate troubleshooting 642 Certificate Authority (CA) see certificates Certificate Revocation List (CRL) 514 vs OCSP 528 certificates 513 advantages of 514 Index and CA 514 and FTP 575 and HTTPS 554 and IKE SA 362 and SSH 571 and VPN gateways 337 and WWW 557 certification path 514, 521, 526 expired 514 factory-default 514 file formats 515 fingerprints 522, 527 importing 517 in IPSec 349 not used for encryption 514 revoked 514 self-signed 514, 519 serial number 521, 526 storage space 517, 524 thumbprint algorithms 515 thumbprints 515 used for authentication 514 verifying fingerprints 515 certification requests 519 certifications 656 viewing 659 Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol
(CHAP) 530 CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol) 530 CHAP/PAP 530 CLI 21, 27 button 27 messages 27 popup window 27 Reference Guide 1 client 391 cloud-based network management system 582 commands 21 sent by Web Configurator 27 Common Event Format (CEF) 593, 600 compression (stac) 530 computer names 161, 199, 211, 217, 398 concurrent e-mail sessions 128, 436 configuration information 615, 620 web-based SSL application example 532 configuration file USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 667 Index troubleshooting 644 configuration files 604 at restart 607 backing up 606 downloading 608, 625 downloading with FTP 575 editing 604 how applied 605 lastgood.conf 607, 610 managing 606 startup-config.conf 610 startup-config-bad.conf 607 syntax 605 system-default.conf 610 uploading 610 uploading with FTP 575 use without restart 604 connection troubleshooting 640 connection monitor (in SSL) 123 connectivity check 160, 172, 179, 188, 198, 212, 342 console port speed 543 contact information 646, 661 content filter troubleshooting 637 content filtering 415, 416 and address groups 415, 416 and address objects 415, 416 and registration 418, 421 and schedules 415, 416 and user groups 415 and users 415 by category 415, 416, 422 by keyword (in URL) 416, 430 by URL 416, 429, 431, 432 by web feature 416, 429 cache 433 categories 422 category service 421 default policy 416 external web filtering service 421, 433 filter list 416 managed web pages 422 policies 415, 416 registration status 134, 418, 421 statistics 125 testing 423 uncategorized pages 422 unsafe web pages 421 URL for blocked access 418 cookies 22, 429 copyright 652 CPU usage 90 current date/time 85, 539 and schedules 496 daylight savings 541 setting manually 542 time server 543 current user list 123 custom access user page 559 login page 559 customer support 646, 661 D Data Encryption Standard, see DES date 539 daylight savings 541 DCS 136 DDNS 249 backup mail exchanger 254 mail exchanger 254 service providers 249 troubleshooting 639 Dead Peer Detection, see DPD default security policy behavior 319 Default_L2TP_VPN_GW 396 Denial of Service (Dos) attacks 340 DES 358 device access troubleshooting 636 DHCP 216, 538 and DNS servers 217 and domain name 538 and interfaces 216 pool 217 static DHCP 217 DHCP Unique IDentifier 145 DHCPv6 536 DHCP Unique IDentifier 145 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 668 Index diagnostics 615, 620 Diffie-Hellman key group 359 DiffServ 237 Digital Signature Algorithm public-key algorithm, see DSA direct routes 229 directory 502 directory service 502 file structure 503 disclaimer 652 Distinguished Name (DN) 504, 505, 507 DN 504, 505, 507 DNS 544 address records 547 domain name forwarders 549 domain name to IP address 547 IP address to domain name 548 L2TP VPN 398 Mail eXchange (MX) records 550 pointer (PTR) records 548 DNS Blacklist see DNSBL 435 DNS inbound LB 291 DNS servers 54, 544, 549 and interfaces 217 DNSBL 435, 439, 446 see also anti-spam 435 documentation related 1 domain name 538 Domain Name System, see DNS DPD 351 DSA 519 DSCP 230, 233, 406, 631 DUID 145 Dynamic Channel Selection 136 Dynamic Domain Name System, see DDNS Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP. dynamic peers in IPSec 340 DynDNS 249 DynDNS see also DDNS 249 Dynu 249 E egress bandwidth 179, 188 e-mail 434 daily statistics report 589 header buffer 435 headers 435 Encapsulating Security Payload, see ESP encapsulation and active protocol 363 IPSec 341 transport mode 363 tunnel mode 363 VPN 363 encryption IPSec 342 RSA 521 encryption algorithms 358 3DES 358 AES 358 and active protocol 358 DES 358 encryption method 530 enforcing policies in IPSec 341 ESP 341, 363 and transport mode 364 Ethernet interfaces 141 and OSPF 148 and RIP 148 and routing protocols 147 basic characteristics 142 virtual 213 exceptional services 300 extended authentication and VPN gateways 337 IKE SA 362 Extended Service Set IDentification 469 ext-user troubleshooting 642 F file extensions configuration files 604 shell scripts 604 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 669 file manager 604 file sharing SSL application create 533 Firefox 22 firmware and restart 610 current version 85, 611 getting updated 610 uploading 610, 612 uploading with FTP 575 firmware upload troubleshooting 644 flash usage 90 forcing login 298 FQDN 547 FTP 575 additional signaling port 271 ALG 266 and address groups 576 and address objects 576 and certificates 575 and zones 576 signaling port 271 with Transport Layer Security (TLS) 575 full tunnel mode 367, 371 Fully-Qualified Domain Name, see FQDN G Generic Routing Encapsulation, see GRE. global SSL setting 372 user portal logo 373 GRE 218 GSM 179 Guide CLI Reference 1 Quick Start 1 H H.323 272 additional signaling port 270 ALG 266, 272 and RTP 272 Index and security policy 267 signaling port 270 HSDPA 179 HTTP over SSL, see HTTPS redirect to HTTPS 557 vs HTTPS 554 HTTP redirect 262 and application patrol 263 and interfaces 265 and policy routes 263 and security policy 263 packet flow 263 troubleshooting 639 HTTPS 554 and certificates 554 authenticating clients 554 avoiding warning messages 563 example 562 vs HTTP 554 with Internet Explorer 562 with Netscape Navigator 562 hub-and-spoke VPN, see VPN concentrator HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, see HTTPS I ICMP 492 identifying legitimate e-mail 434 spam 434 IEEE 802.1q VLAN IEEE 802.1q. See VLAN. IEEE 802.1x 469 IKE SA aggressive mode 357, 361 and certificates 362 and RADIUS 362 and to-ZyWALL security policy 641 authentication algorithms 358, 359 content 360 Dead Peer Detection (DPD) 351 Diffie-Hellman key group 359 encryption algorithms 358 extended authentication 362 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 670 ID type 360 IP address, remote IPSec router 358 IP address, ZyXEL device 358 local identity 360 main mode 357, 361 NAT traversal 362 negotiation mode 357 password 362 peer identity 360 pre-shared key 360 proposal 358 see also VPN user name 362 IMAP 435 inbound LB algorithm least connection 293 least load 293 weighted round robin 293 inbound load balancing 291 time to live 294 incoming bandwidth 179, 188 ingress bandwidth 179, 188 interface status 104 troubleshooting 637 interfaces 140 and DNS servers 217 and HTTP redirect 265 and layer-3 virtualization 141 and NAT 258 and physical ports 141 and policy routes 233 and static routes 236 and VPN gateways 337 and zones 141 as DHCP relays 216 as DHCP servers 216, 538 auxiliary, see also auxiliary interfaces. backup, see trunks bandwidth management 216, 224, 225 bridge, see also bridge interfaces. cellular 141 DHCP clients 215 Ethernet, see also Ethernet interfaces. gateway 216 general characteristics 141 IP address 215 metric 216 MTU 216 Index overlapping IP address and subnet mask 215 port groups, see also port groups. PPPoE/PPTP, see also PPPoE/PPTP interfaces. prerequisites 142 relationships between 142 static DHCP 217 subnet mask 215 trunks, see also trunks. Tunnel, see also Tunnel interfaces. types 141 virtual, see also virtual interfaces. VLAN, see also VLAN interfaces. WLAN, see also WLAN interfaces. Internet access troubleshooting 636, 641 Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP Internet Explorer 22 Internet Message Access Protocol, see IMAP 435 Internet Protocol Security, see IPSec Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 IP policy routing, see policy routes IP pool 371 IP protocols 492 and service objects 492 ICMP, see ICMP TCP, see TCP UDP, see UDP IP static routes, see static routes IP/MAC binding 282 exempt list 285 monitor 111 static DHCP 284 IPSec 318, 332 active protocol 341 AH 341 and certificates 337 authentication 342 basic troubleshooting 640 certificates 349 connections 337 connectivity check 342 Default_L2TP_VPN_GW 396 encapsulation 341 encryption 342 ESP 341 established in two phases 335 L2TP VPN 395 local network 332 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 671 local policy 341 NetBIOS 340 peer 332 Perfect Forward Secrecy 342 PFS 342 phase 2 settings 341 policy enforcement 341 remote access 340 remote IPSec router 332 remote network 332 remote policy 341 replay detection 340 SA life time 341 SA monitor 122 SA see also IPSec SA 363 see also VPN site-to-site with dynamic peer 340 static site-to-site 340 transport encapsulation 341 tunnel encapsulation 341 VPN gateway 337 IPSec SA active protocol 363 and security policy 641 and to-ZyWALL security policy 641 authentication algorithms 358, 359 destination NAT for inbound traffic 366 encapsulation 363 encryption algorithms 358 local policy 363 NAT for inbound traffic 364 NAT for outbound traffic 364 Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) 364 proposal 364 remote policy 363 search by name 122 search by policy 122 Security Parameter Index (SPI) (manual keys) 364 see also IPSec see also VPN source NAT for inbound traffic 365 source NAT for outbound traffic 365 status 122 transport mode 363 tunnel mode 363 when IKE SA is disconnected 363 IPSec VPN troubleshooting 640 Index IPv6 143 link-local address 144 prefix 143 prefix delegation 144 prefix length 143 stateless autoconfiguration 144 IPv6 tunnelings 6in4 tunneling 183 6to4 tunneling 183 IPv6-in-IPv4 tunneling 183 ISP account CHAP 530 CHAP/PAP 530 MPPE 530 MSCHAP 530 MSCHAP-V2 530 PAP 530 ISP accounts 528 and PPPoE/PPTP interfaces 167, 528 authentication type 530 encryption method 530 stac compression 530 J Java 429 permissions 22 JavaScripts 22 K key pairs 513 L L2TP VPN 395 Default_L2TP_VPN_GW 396 DNS 398 IPSec configuration 395 policy routes 396 session monitor 124 WINS 398 lastgood.conf 607, 610 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 672 Index Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol Virtual Private Network, see L2TP VPN 395 layer-2 isolation 287 example 287 IP 288 LDAP 502 and users 455 Base DN 504 Bind DN 504, 507 directory 502 directory structure 503 Distinguished Name, see DN DN 504, 505, 507 password 507 port 507, 509 search time limit 507 SSL 507 user attributes 468 least connection algorithm 293 least load algorithm 293 least load first load balancing 219 LED troubleshooting 636 legitimate e-mail 434 licensing 133 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, see LDAP Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP ) 116 LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) 116 load balancing 218 algorithms 219, 223, 225 DNS inbound 291 least load first 219 round robin 220 see also trunks 218 session-oriented 219 spillover 220 weighted round robin 220 local user database 503 log troubleshooting 643 log messages categories 596, 598, 600, 601, 602 debugging 130 regular 130 types of 130 log options 438 login custom page 559 SSL user 379 logo troubleshooting 643 logo in SSL 373 logout SSL user 384 Web Configurator 25 logs and security policy 326 e-mail profiles 591 e-mailing log messages 595 formats 593 log consolidation 596 settings 591 syslog servers 591 system 591 types of 591 M MAC address 466 and VLAN 189 Ethernet interface 156 range 85 MAC authentication 480 Calling Station ID 480 case 480 delimiter 480 mac role 466 mail sessions threshold 436 managed web pages 422 management access troubleshooting 643 Management Information Base (MIB) 577 managing the device using SNMP. See SNMP. MD5 359 memory usage 90 Message Digest 5, see MD5 messages CLI 27 metrics, see reports Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol
(MSCHAP) 530 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 673 Index Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2 (MSCHAP-V2) 530 Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE) 530 mobile broadband see also cellular 173 model name 85 Monitor 583 monitor 123 SA 122 mounting rack 20, 46 wall 46 MPPE (Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption) 530 MSCHAP (Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol) 530 MSCHAP-V2 (Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2) 530 MTU 179, 188 multicast 474 multicast rate 474 My Certificates, see also certificates 516 myZyXEL.com 133 accounts, creating 133 N NAT 237, 255 ALG, see ALG and address objects 234 and address objects (HOST) 258 and ALG 266, 268 and interfaces 258 and policy routes 227, 234 and security policy 321 and to-ZyWALL security policy 259 and VoIP pass through 268 and VPN 361 loopback 260 port forwarding, see NAT port translation, see NAT traversal 362 NAT Port Mapping Protocol 273 NAT Traversal 273 NAT-PMP 273 NBNS 161, 199, 211, 217, 371 NetBIOS Broadcast over IPSec 340 Name Server, see NBNS. NetBIOS Name Server, see NBNS NetMeeting 272 see also H.323 Netscape Navigator 22 network access mode 19 full tunnel 367 Network Address Translation, see NAT network list, see SSL 372 Network Time Protocol (NTP) 542 No-IP 249 NSSA 240 O objects 368 AAA server 501 addresses and address groups 487 authentication method 510 certificates 513 schedules 496 services and service groups 491 SSL application 531 users, user groups 454 One-Time Password (OTP) 502 Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) 528 vs CRL 528 Open Shortest Path First, see OSPF OSPF 240 and Ethernet interfaces 148 and RIP 241 and static routes 241 and to-ZyWALL security policy 240 area 0 241 areas, see OSPF areas authentication method 148 autonomous system (AS) 240 backbone 241 configuration steps 243 direction 148 link cost 148 priority 149 redistribute 241 redistribute type (cost) 244 routers, see OSPF routers virtual links 242 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 674 Index Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol, see PPTP policy enforcement in IPSec 341 policy route troubleshooting 637 policy routes 227 vs RIP 238, 240 OSPF areas 240 and Ethernet interfaces 148 backbone 240 Not So Stubby Area (NSSA) 240 stub areas 240 types of 240 OSPF routers 241 area border (ABR) 241 autonomous system boundary (ASBR) 241 backbone (BR) 241 backup designated (BDR) 242 designated (DR) 242 internal (IR) 241 link state advertisements priority 242 types of 241 other documentation 1 OTP (One-Time Password) 502 outgoing bandwidth 179, 188 P packet statistics 101, 102 packet capture 617 files 616, 620, 621, 622 troubleshooting 644 packet captures downloading files 617, 620, 621, 622 PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) 530 Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) 530 Peanut Hull 249 Peer-to-peer (P2P) calls 268 Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) 342 Diffie-Hellman key group 364 Personal Identification Number code, see PIN code PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy) 342, 364 physical ports packet statistics 101, 102 PIN code 179 PIN generator 502 pointer record 548 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, see PPPoE. actions 228 and address objects 233 and ALG 268, 271 and HTTP redirect 263 and interfaces 233 and NAT 227 and schedules 233, 405, 409 and service objects 492 and trunks 219, 233 and user groups 232, 405, 409 and users 232, 405, 409 and VoIP pass through 268 and VPN connections 233, 641 benefits 227 BWM 229 criteria 228 L2TP VPN 396 overriding direct routes 229 POP POP2 435 POP3 435 pop-up windows 22 port forwarding, see NAT port groups 141, 146 port roles 145 and Ethernet interfaces 145 and physical ports 145 port translation, see NAT Post Office Protocol, see POP 435 power off 635 PPP 217 troubleshooting 638 PPP interfaces subnet mask 215 PPPoE 217 and RADIUS 217 TCP port 1723 218 PPPoE/PPTP interfaces 141, 166 and ISP accounts 167, 528 basic characteristics 142 gateway 167 subnet mask 167 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 675 Index PPTP 217 and GRE 218 as VPN 218 prefix delegation 144 problems 636 proxy servers 262 web, see web proxy servers PTR record 548 Public-Key Infrastructure (PKI) 514 public-private key pairs 513 Q QoS 227, 401 Quick Start Guide 1 R rack-mounting 20, 46 RADIUS 502, 503 advantages 502 and IKE SA 362 and PPPoE 217 and users 455 user attributes 468 RADIUS server 580 troubleshooting 642 RDP 531 Real-time Transport Protocol, see RTP RealVNC 531 Reference Guide, CLI 1 registration 133 and anti-spam 437 and content filtering 418, 421 related documentation 1 Relative Distinguished Name (RDN) 504, 505, 507 remote access IPSec 340 Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, see RADIUS remote desktop connections 531 Remote Desktop Protocol see RDP remote management FTP, see FTP see also service control 553 Telnet 573 to-Device security policy 319 WWW, see WWW remote network 332 remote user screen links 531 replay detection 340 reports collecting data 106 content filtering 125 daily 589 daily e-mail 589 specifications 107 traffic statistics 105 reset 644 RESET button 644 RFC 1058 (RIP) 238 1389 (RIP) 238 1587 (OSPF areas) 240 1631 (NAT) 237 1889 (RTP) 272 2131 (DHCP) 216 2132 (DHCP) 216 2328 (OSPF) 240 2402 (AH) 341, 363 2406 (ESP) 341, 363 2516 (PPPoE) 217 2637 (PPTP) 217 2890 (GRE) 218 3261 (SIP) 272 RIP 238 and Ethernet interfaces 148 and OSPF 238 and static routes 238 and to-ZyWALL security policyl 238 authentication 238 direction 148 redistribute 238 RIP-2 broadcasting methods 148 versions 148 vs OSPF 238 Rivest, Shamir and Adleman public-key algorithm
(RSA) 519 round robin 220 routing troubleshooting 639 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 676 Routing Information Protocol, see RIP routing protocols 238 and authentication algorithms 247 and Ethernet interfaces 147 RSA 519, 521, 527 RSSI threshold 474 RTP 272 see also ALG 272 S schedule troubleshooting 642 schedules 496 and content filtering 415, 416 and current date/time 496 and policy routes 233, 405, 409 and security policy 302, 325, 405, 409 one-time 496 recurring 496 types of 496 screen resolution 22 SecuExtender 391 Secure Hash Algorithm, see SHA1 Secure Socket Layer, see SSL security associations, see IPSec security policy 318 actions 326 and address groups 302 and address objects 302 and ALG 266, 268 and H.323 (ALG) 267 and HTTP redirect 263 and IPSec VPN 641 and logs 326 and NAT 321 and schedules 302, 325, 405, 409 and service groups 325 and service objects 492 and services 325 and SIP (ALG) 267 and user groups 325, 329 and users 325, 329 and VoIP pass through 268 and zones 318, 324 asymmetrical routes 320, 323 Index global rules 319 priority 323 rule criteria 319 see also to-Device security policy 318 session limits 320, 326 triangle routes 320, 323 troubleshooting 637 security settings troubleshooting 637 serial number 85 service control 553 and to-ZyWALL security policy 553 and users 554 limitations 553 timeouts 554 service groups 492 and security policy 325 service objects 491 and IP protocols 492 and policy routes 492 and security policy 492 Service Set 469 service subscription status 134 services 491 and security policy 325 Session Initiation Protocol, see SIP session limits 320, 326 session monitor (L2TP VPN) 124 sessions 108 sessions usage 90 SHA1 359 shell script troubleshooting 644 shell scripts 604 and users 468 downloading 613 editing 612 how applied 605 managing 612 syntax 605 uploading 614 shutdown 635 signal quality 114 SIM card 179 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, see SMTP 435 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 677 Index Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT, see STUN SIP 267, 272 ALG 266 and RTP 272 and security policy 267 media inactivity timeout 270 signaling inactivity timeout 270 signaling port 270 SMTP 435 SNAT 237 troubleshooting 639 SNMP 21, 576, 577 agents 577 and address groups 580 and address objects 580 and zones 580 Get 577 GetNext 577 Manager 577 managers 577 MIB 577 network components 577 Set 577 Trap 577 traps 577 version 3 and security 577 versions 576 Source Network Address Translation, see SNAT spam 317, 434 spillover (for load balancing) 220 SSH 569 and address groups 572 and address objects 572 and certificates 571 and zones 572 client requirements 571 encryption methods 571 for secure Telnet 572 how connection is established 570 versions 571 with Linux 573 with Microsoft Windows 572 SSL 367, 371, 554 access policy 367 and AAA 507 and AD 507 and LDAP 507 certificates 379 client 391 client virtual desktop logo 373 computer names 371 connection monitor 123 full tunnel mode 371 global setting 372 IP pool 371 network list 372 remote user login 379 remote user logout 384 SecuExtender 391 see also SSL VPN 367 troubleshooting 641 user application screens 384 user file sharing 385 user screen bookmarks 383 user screens 378, 382 user screens access methods 378 user screens certificates 379 user screens login 379 user screens logout 384 user screens required information 379 user screens system requirements 378 WINS 371 SSL application object 531 file sharing application 533 remote user screen links 531 summary 533 types 531 web-based 531, 533 web-based example 532 SSL policy add 369 edit 369 objects used 368 SSL VPN 367 access policy 367 full tunnel mode 367 network access mode 19 remote desktop connections 531 see also SSL 367 troubleshooting 641 weblink 532 stac compression 530 startup-config.conf 610 if errors 607 missing at restart 607 present at restart 607 startup-config-bad.conf 607 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 678 static DHCP 284 static routes 227 and interfaces 236 and OSPF 241 and RIP 238 metric 236 station 136 statistics content filtering 125 daily e-mail report 589 traffic 105 status 82 stub area 240 STUN 267 and ALG 267 subscription services SSL VPN 133 SSL VPN, see also SSL VPN status 134 supported browsers 22 SWM 229 syslog 593, 600 syslog servers, see also logs system log, see logs system name 85, 538 system reports, see reports system uptime 85 system-default.conf 610 T TCP 492 connections 492 port numbers 492 Telnet 573 and address groups 574 and address objects 574 and zones 574 with SSH 572 throughput rate troubleshooting 643 TightVNC 531 time 539 time servers (default) 542 Index to-Device security policy and remote management 319 global rules 319 see also security policy 318 token 502 to-ZyWALL security policy and NAT 259 and NAT traversal (VPN) 641 and OSPF 240 and RIP 238 and service control 553 and VPN 641 TR-069 protocol 582 traffic statistics 105 Transmission Control Protocol, see TCP transport encapsulation 341 Transport Layer Security (TLS) 575 triangle routes 320 allowing through the security policy 323 vs virtual interfaces 320 Triple Data Encryption Standard, see 3DES troubleshooting 615, 620, 636 admin user 642 bandwidth limit 639 cellular 638 certificate 642 configuration file 644 connection resets 640 content filter 637 DDNS 639 device access 636 ext-user 642 firmware upload 644 HTTP redirect 639 interface 637 Internet access 636, 641 IPSec VPN 640 LEDs 636 logo 643 logs 643 management access 643 packet capture 644 policy route 637 PPP 638 RADIUS server 642 routing 639 schedules 642 security policy 637 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 679 security settings 637 shell scripts 644 SNAT 639 SSL 641 SSL VPN 641 throughput rate 643 VLAN 639 VPN 641 WLAN 638 trunks 141, 218 and ALG 271 and policy routes 219, 233 member interface mode 223, 225 member interfaces 223, 225 see also load balancing 218 Trusted Certificates, see also certificates 523 tunnel encapsulation 341 Tunnel interfaces 141 U UDP 492 messages 492 port numbers 492 UltraVNC 531 Universal Plug and Play 273 Application 273 security issues 274 unsafe web pages 421 unsolicited commercial e-mail 317, 434 upgrading firmware 610 uploading configuration files 610 firmware 610 shell scripts 612 UPnP 273 usage CPU 90 flash 90 memory 90 onboard flash 90 sessions 90 user accounts for WLAN 456 user authentication 455 Index external 455 local user database 503 user awareness 456 User Datagram Protocol, see UDP user group objects 454 user groups 454, 456 and content filtering 415 and policy routes 232, 405, 409 and security policy 325, 329 user name rules 457 user objects 454 user portal links 531 logo 373 see SSL user screens 378, 382 user sessions, see sessions user SSL screens 378, 382 access methods 378 bookmarks 383 certificates 379 login 379 logout 384 required information 379 system requirements 378 users 454, 455 access, see also access users admin (type) 455 admin, see also admin users and AAA servers 455 and authentication method objects 455 and content filtering 415 and LDAP 455 and policy routes 232, 405, 409 and RADIUS 455 and security policy 325, 329 and service control 554 and shell scripts 468 attributes for Ext-User 456 attributes for LDAP 468 attributes for RADIUS 468 attributes in AAA servers 468 currently logged in 86 default lease time 463, 465 default reauthentication time 463, 465 default type for Ext-User 456 ext-group-user (type) 455 Ext-User (type) 455 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 680 ext-user (type) 455 groups, see user groups Guest (type) 455 lease time 459 limited-admin (type) 455 lockout 464 reauthentication time 459 types of 455 user (type) 455 user names 457 V Vantage Report (VRPT) 593, 600 virtual interfaces 141, 213 basic characteristics 142 not DHCP clients 215 types of 213 vs asymmetrical routes 320 vs triangle routes 320 Virtual Local Area Network, see VLAN. Virtual Local Area Network. See VLAN. Virtual Network Computing see VNC Virtual Private Network, see VPN VLAN 182, 188 advantages 189 and MAC address 189 ID 189 troubleshooting 639 VLAN interfaces 141, 190 and Ethernet interfaces 190, 639 basic characteristics 142 virtual 213 VoIP pass through 272 and NAT 268 and policy routes 268 and security policy 268 see also ALG 266 VPN 332 active protocol 363 and NAT 361 basic troubleshooting 640 hub-and-spoke, see VPN concentrator IKE SA, see IKE SA IPSec 318, 332 Index IPSec SA proposal 358 security associations (SA) 335 see also IKE SA see also IPSec 318, 332 see also IPSec SA status 86 troubleshooting 641 VPN concentrator 353 advantages 353 and IPSec SA policy enforcement 355 disadvantages 353 VPN connections and address objects 337 and policy routes 233, 641 VPN gateways and certificates 337 and extended authentication 337 and interfaces 337 and to-ZyWALL security policy 641 VRPT (Vantage Report) 593, 600 W wall-mounting 46 warranty 659 note 660 Web Configurator 21 access 22 access users 465 requirements 22 supported browsers 22 web features ActiveX 429 cookies 429 Java 429 web proxy servers 429 web proxy servers 263, 429 see also HTTP redirect web-based SSL application 531 configuration example 532 create 533 weblink 532 weighted round robin (for load balancing) 220 weighted round robin algorithm 293 WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) 469 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 681 Index white list (anti-spam) 434, 438, 443, 444 Wi-Fi Protected Access 469 Windows Internet Naming Service, see WINS Windows Internet Naming Service, see WINS. Windows Remote Desktop 531 WINS 161, 199, 211, 217, 371 in L2TP VPN 398 WINS server 161, 398 wireless client 136 Wizard Setup 36, 49 WLAN troubleshooting 638 user accounts 456 WLAN interfaces 141 WPA 469 WPA2 469 WWW 555 and address groups 558 and address objects 558 and authentication method objects 558 and certificates 557 and zones 559 see also HTTP, HTTPS 555 Z ZON Utility 586 zones 452 and FTP 576 and interfaces 452 and security policy 318, 324 and SNMP 580 and SSH 572 and Telnet 574 and VPN 452 and WWW 559 extra-zone traffic 453 inter-zone traffic 453 intra-zone traffic 452 types of traffic 452 USG20(W)-VPN Series Users Guide 682
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2016-02-23 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
2 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2016-02-23
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0021059092
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
No.2, Industry East Road IX, Science Park
|
||||
1 2 |
Hsinchu, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
I88
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
USG20W-VPN
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
E**** B******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Section Manager
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
886 3********
|
||||
1 2 |
E******@zyxel.com.tw
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | VPN Firewall | ||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Power listed is maximum combined conducted output power. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures as evaluated in this filing. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This is a MIMO device and has 20, 40 and 80MHz bandwidth modes. | ||||
1 2 | Power listed is maximum combined conducted output power. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not transmit simultaneously with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures and as evaluated in this filing. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This is a MIMO device and has 20 and 40MHz bandwidth modes. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
K**** L****
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+886-******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+886-********
|
||||
1 2 |
k******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.7 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.616 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.9720000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC